IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 V 
 
 // 
 
 O 
 
 % 
 
 *>,> ^ 
 
 
 :^^° i^ 
 
 
 :/. 
 
 
 /a 
 
 1.0 !ri^ IIM 
 
 I.I 
 
 11.25 
 
 I 
 
 t 1^ 
 
 M 
 
 2.0 
 
 1.8 
 
 M. IIIIII.6 
 
 v^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 '0 
 
 C*m. ' o^. 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 Hiotographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY. 14580 
 
 (716) 873-4503 
 
 m 
 
 V 
 
 iV 
 
 < 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ 
 
 <(S 
 
 
 O^ 
 
 <# 
 
 
 n.^ 
 
 <i> 
 
 i 
 
CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHfVI/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
 i 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original cGpy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 L'Instttut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il iui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la m^thode normale de filmage 
 sont indiquds ci-dessous. 
 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 
 n 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 Covers damaged/ 
 Couverture endommagee 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaur6e et/ou pellicul6e 
 
 Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 n 
 
 D 
 
 
 
 Coloured pages/ 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommag6es 
 
 Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 Pages restaurdes et/ou pellicul6es 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 Pages d^color^es, tachet6es ou piqu^es 
 
 D 
 
 Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cartes g^ographiques en couleur 
 
 / 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages d^tachees 
 
 □ 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Relie avec d'autres documents 
 
 ^ 
 
 G 
 D 
 
 Showthrough/ 
 Transparence 
 
 Quality of print varies/ 
 Quality in^gale de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplerr antary material/ 
 Comprend du materiel supplementaire 
 
 D 
 
 n 
 
 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 La reliure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distortion le long de la marge intdrieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout6es 
 lors dune restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, lorsque cela §tait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas 6t6 filmdes. 
 
 D 
 D 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont 6t^ filmdes d nouveau de facon d 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 □ 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires suppl6mentaires: 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est film^ au taux de reduction indiqu6 ci-dessous. 
 
 IPX MX 18X 22X 
 
 I I I I I I I I I I I y| I 
 
 26X 
 
 30X 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
ails 
 
 du 
 
 difier 
 
 jne 
 
 lage 
 
 The copy filmad hers has been reproduced thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 Library Division 
 
 Provincial Archives of British Columbia 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 L'exemplaire filmi fut reproduit grAce A la 
 gAnArosit* de: 
 
 Library Divisvon 
 
 Provincial Archives of British Columbia 
 
 Les images suivantes ont AtA reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition at 
 de la nettetA de l'exemplaire filmA. et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illr strated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol — ^ (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprimAe sont filmAs en commen9ant 
 par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
 derniAre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second 
 plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont filmAs en commenpant par la 
 premiere page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la dernidre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la 
 dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbole -^^ signifie "A SUIVRE". le 
 symbole V signifie "FIN". 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 filmAs A des taux de reduction diffArents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre 
 reproduit en un seul clich6, il est filmA A partir 
 de Tangle supArieur gauche, de gauche A droite. 
 ot de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images nAcessaire. Las diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la mAthode. 
 
 'rata 
 o 
 
 lelure, 
 
 □ 
 
 32X 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
i 
 
 m 
 
 
 ■ > 
 
 h 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 s 
 
 H 
 
 i 
 
 It 
 fi 
 
 ii 
 
 if ' 
 
 
25rUt6b M^^odation for tf)c libvanccmcnt 
 
 of Science 
 
 LEEDS MEETING, 1890 
 
 SIXTH EEPOET 
 
 I 
 
 ON THIO 
 
 NOKTH-WESTERxN TRIBES OF CANADA 
 
 WITH A MAP 
 
 I 
 
 : i 
 ■. i 
 
 ! ■ 
 
 (!5Rite8 of the ^ssotiution 
 BURLINGTON HOUSE, LONDON, W 
 
 i 
 
 Price naif -a -Crown 
 
 ^*i| 
 
? 
 
 p j 
 
 Sri TtCTi'MH 
 

 
 !!r 
 
 r'- r 
 
% .1 
 
 1 ' 
 
 liT'.' 
 
 Ml 
 
 MM I 
 
 LINGUISTIC MAP OF BRITISH COLUMBIA. 
 
 tiOTE,— 'J'/ie Tinnek are according to Dr. G. M. Dawson. Broad coloured lines denote 
 limits of branches of one linguistic stocky thin coloured lines limits of more 
 closely related dialects. 
 
 
 
i^rifiol) Bsoociafiott for i^c J^^uanccmcnf 
 
 » 
 
 of Science 
 
 LEEDS MEETING, 1890 
 
 SIXTH EEPOET 
 
 ON TJiE 
 
 , , ,|, 
 
 NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA 
 
 WITH A MAP 
 
 r^ 
 
 #fG«s of t^e gssotiation 
 BURLINGTON HOUSE, LONDON, W. 
 
 .■■); 
 
 ': W ■ , 
 
:il ;i 
 
 til 
 
 :t 
 
1 
 
 1^ 
 
 \ 
 
 i 
 
 Sixth Ilf'port of the CoiinnHtcc, cnnfitsf'nif/ of Dr. K. I'. Tvi-oH, 
 
 Mr. \V. IjLoxam, Sir Daniki, NVii,S(»n, Dr. (i. M. Dawson, (Jeneral 
 
 Sir H. \ 4KI' HOY, a) L(l Mr. U. (1. IfALiiirHTON, (ipiiointed to in- 
 
 rcdu/ata the jihi/filcal c/mt'itclers, lini(/ii<ii/t'M, and uidn.Hti'ial 
 
 and social coiulition of the Xorth-Wi'sff^i-ti Triljes of the 
 
 Duiiiiuioii of Canaila. 
 
 [MA P.J 
 
 'I'liK Committee have been Jil)le once more to secure the services of Dr. 
 Hoas, who has drawn np the l)ulk of the report on the tribes of British 
 ('ohiinbia. 'JMiis is acconipiuiiecl by a linj^iiislic map, and preceded by 
 I'eiiKirks on Ibitish Cohnnbiun ethn()!f)i^y by Mr. l[oratio Ihde. Tiie 
 tijrant made to the Committee was supplemented by o^M) dollars from the 
 Canadian Govoriiment, and the Committee suj^jj^est that each member of 
 the Dominion Pai'Hament shouhl be supplied with one; copy of the report. 
 The Committee ask for reappointment, and for a grant of 2U0/. 
 
 RemnrJis on the Ethuoloi/y of British Colninbid : Jntrodacturii lo the Srcoiid 
 General Ri'pnrt (f Dr. Franz Boas <>)i tlie f ml inns of that I'mvince, Bij 
 
 HOK'ATIO HaLK. 
 
 A reference to the map annexed to this report will show at a glance 
 those striking characteristics of British Columbian ethnograpliy which 
 were described in ray remarks prefixed to tlie report of 188'J.' These 
 peculiarities are the great number of linguistic stocks, or families of 
 languages, wbich are found in this comparatively small territory, and 
 the singular maimer in which they are distributed, especially the sur- 
 prising variety of stocks clustered along the coast, as contrasted with 
 the ' wide sweep' (to use the apt words of Dr. G. M. Dawson) ' of the 
 languages of the interior.' To this may be added the great number of 
 dialects into which some of these stocks are divided. The whole of the 
 interior east of the coast ranges, with a portion of the coast itself, is 
 occupied by tribes belonging to three families -the Tinneh, the Salish 
 (or Selish), and the Kootenay (or Kutonaqa). What is especially 
 notable, moreovn*, is the fact that, according to the best evidence wo 
 possess, all the tribes of these three stocks are intruders, having penetrated 
 into this region from the country east of the Rocky Mountains. In the 
 third report of this Committee (1887) are given the grounds for conclud- 
 ing that the Kootenays fm-merly resided east of these mountains, and 
 were driven across them by the Blackfoot tribes. In the fourth report 
 
 ' It should be mentioned that this map has, on my suggestion, been framed on 
 tho plan of my ' Ethnographic Mi)p of Oregon,' tliough necessarily on a smaller scale 
 (see vol. vii. of the United States L'.i'j)lorinf/ -Exjiedition under ^\'il/,•es : ' Ethnograpliy 
 and Philology,' p. 107). The two maps are, in fact, couipleiuents of each other. 
 Those who desire to study this subject thoroughly, however, shouhl refer to the valu- 
 able maps of Mr. W. H. Dall and of Drs. Tolmie and Dawson, the former appended 
 to the Report of Dr. George Gibbs tc the Smithsonian Institution on the ' Tribes of 
 Western Washington and North-Western Oregon,' in vol. i. of PoirelVs Contributhms 
 til Xorth American Kill noloi/y (1877), and the latter attached to their ('omparotin 
 Vocotmlaricii of tlie Indian TrilKS of Jiritish Colnmtna, published by the Camidian 
 ("dvernment (1884) These miips are on a much larger scale and sufpply many 
 important details, 
 
 1 H a , 
 
 \ I*! 
 
 \m 
 
RF-rORT— 1890. 
 
 m 
 
 M 
 
 n>'\ 
 
 f 
 
 (IH'^H) tlio oonnpctif.ti botwoon the Tinnoh tribes cast ntul west of tlio 
 nioimtaiiiH is cxplaim'd ; aiul in tho SniitliHoriian report of Dp. (ii!)l)s on 
 tlic West VV^isliiii<^ton tiibcs, tliat accoiiiplislu'd cfliiioloLrist lia.s ^ivcn bin 
 riMHoiis lor boltlin^f tliat the Sali.sli formerly i-csided east of t lio iMoiintiiiiis, 
 and liavo made their way thonco to tlio Pacific!, drivinf:^ before thorn or 
 absorbing tlio original inhabitants,' To this intrnsion and conrinest are 
 doubtless duo the many Salisb dialeots, or rather ' dialoct-liingnages,' 
 dilForirig widely in vocabnlary and grammar, whii^h have been evolved 
 (like tho Uomanio laiiguagcH of kSouthern Europe or tie modern Aryan 
 languages of llindustaii) in the process of this eon(|ueM and absorption. 
 
 A remarkable evidence is found in tho case of the Bilhoola (MiKinh') 
 tribe and language, 'i'his tribe, belonging to tho Salisb family, is wholly 
 isolated from t?\e other septs of that family, being completely suiTonnded 
 by Kwakiutl tribes and Tinneb, into whose territory it has apparently 
 pushed its way. As a result its speech has undergone so great a chantro 
 that by sotne inqiiirr'rs it was at first 8np[)osod to be a totally distinet 
 language. A still moro striking instance of a mixed language, though 
 rot belonging to the Salisb family, is furnished by what is now termed 
 the Kwakiutl-Nootka stock. Until Dr. Roas last year visited the Nootka 
 ])i'opl(> and carefully analysed their language, it had been sup]iosed by all 
 investigators, himself included, to be a sejiarato stock, radically distinct 
 from all others. The analysis now furnishes clear evidence of a coiMiee- 
 tion between this idiom and the moro widespread Kwakiutl. Tho 
 connection, however, is so distant, and tho dilierenceH in vocabulary and 
 grammar are so important, that we are naturally led to suspect here also 
 a compiest and an intermixlnre. The Nootka tribes wlio inhabit a 
 portion of the west coast of Vancouver Island, and who were so named 
 from a harbour on that coast, have been more lately styled by good 
 authorities the 'Aht nation' from the syllable a/it or dth, meaning 
 ' rx'oplo ' or ' tiibe,' willi which all their tribal names ' rminate — 
 Nitinaht, Toquaht, Hoyaht, Seshaht, Kayoquabt, &c. Tl.jir spc^ech, 
 though in certain points resembling the Kwakiutl, has yet, to a large 
 ext(;nt, its own grammar and vocabulary. It seems probable that we 
 see in it the case of an originally distinct stock, which at some early 
 period has been overpowered and partially alwiorbed by another stock 
 (the Kwakiutl), and yet has subsequently pursued its own special course 
 of development. The comparison of the two langmiges, as now presented 
 by Ur Boas, offers, th(>refore, a particularly interesting subject of study. 
 
 All the laniruages of British Columliia of every stock have a peculiar 
 phonology. Their proiiur.ciation is singularly harsh and indistinct. 
 The contrast in this respect between these languages and those immedi- 
 ately south of them is very remarkable and indeed surprising. As the 
 point is one of much interest, I may venture to quote tho remarks on 
 this subject with which (in my work before cited) the account of the 
 * Languages of North- Western America ' is prefaced : — 
 
 * The languages of tho tribes west of the Rocky Mountains may be 
 divided into two classes, which difi'er very strikingly in their vocal 
 elements and pronunciation. These classes may bo denominated the 
 northern and southern, the latter being found chiefly south of the 
 Colnmbia, and the former, with one or two exceptions, on the north 
 of that river. To the northern belong the Tahkali-Umqua (or Tinneh), 
 
 Sec |);(L''e 221 nf the rcp'trt rdVireil to in the piecedinj: note. 
 
 . 
 
ON THE NORTIT-WESTETIN TRinES OF CANADA. 
 
 8 
 
 tlio Salisl), thcCliinook, and tho lakon lani^iiiiLfos, with all on tlio north, 
 west coast of which wc liavo any knowl('(I;^'i>, 'JMio .sdiithorn division 
 coinprc'licnds tilt' Salinptiii, the Slioshoni, the Kiilaituya, Shasto, liUtuaiiii, 
 and all tlui Caiitornian idioms so Car as wi> aio aO(]uaintL'd with llii'in. 
 Those of tho northern class arc roniaikablo for their extraordinary 
 harshness, whi(!h in souh' is so j^reat as almost to surpass belief. The 
 (/liinooks, Chikailish, and Killainnks appear actmilly to labour 'a H[)eak- 
 iiif^; an illusion which proceeds no doubt from tho effect prodiici'd on tho 
 ear of tho listonor by the harsh elements with which their laiii^iia^es 
 abound, as well as tlio generally rough and dissonant styh? of pronuncia- 
 tion. The X, '^^ hi those tongues a somewhat deeper guttural than tho 
 Spanish jula. Tho q is an extraordinary sound, resembling tho hawking 
 noise produced by an effort to expel phlegm ftom the tliroiit. T\l is 
 a combination utt(>red by forcing out the breath at the side of tiu; moiilh 
 between tho tongue and the palate. These languages are all indistinet nn 
 well as harsh. The same element in tho Chinook and other tongues is 
 licard at one time as a v, at another as a l>, and again as an in, tin' latter 
 being probably the most accurate representation. Similarly the ,. .Mid d 
 aro in several dialects undistinguishable, and we were constantly in iloubt 
 whether certain short vowels should be wiitten or omitted. 
 
 'Tho southern languages are, on the r)tlier hand, no less d : ingui .lied 
 for softness and harmony. The gutturals are found in two or fhrr<!, 
 into which they seem . Uave been introduced by communication with 
 tho northern tribes. The i-est want this class of letters, an I ha'', in their 
 place tho labial/, the litpiid r, and tho nasal ii (i.g), all of which aro 
 unknown to the former. Diflicult combinations of consonants lin-ely 
 occur, and tho many vowels make the pronunciation clear and sonorous. 
 There is, however, a good deal of variety in this respect, some of tlio 
 languages, as the Lntuami, Sliaste, and Palaihuik, being smooth and 
 agreeable to the ear, while the Shoshoni ami Kula[)nya, though soft, ,iie 
 nasal and indistinct.' ' 
 
 At tho time when this description was written, I had formed no 
 opinion as to the origin of these contrasted i)honologies. I am now 
 inclined to believe that tho difference is due mainly to climatic infhiences. 
 The harsh utterance extends from Alaska southward to the Columbia 
 River, where it suddenly ceases, and gives place to softer sounds. This 
 is exactly the point at which the coast ceases to bo lined by that nctvvork 
 of islands, straits, and friths, whose waters, abounding in tish, ailbrd tlio 
 main soni'co of subsistence to tho tribes of the northern region. The 
 climate, except for a brief summer, is that of an almost perjietual April 
 or October. This part of the coast is ono of the rainiest regions of tho 
 earth, and the fishermen in their canoes aro almost constantly expo.sed to 
 the chilling moisture. Their pronniiciation is that of a people whoso 
 vocal organs have for many generatiorw been allected by continual coughs 
 and catarrhs, thickening the mucous nicmbrane and ob'ttructing the air. 
 passages. A strong confirmation of this view in found in Tierra del 
 
 I I 
 
 • Kthnography and Philuloffi/, p. riX^. Tlie orthoofraphy hero onr)]>lnvo(l is snmc- 
 wfiat (lifl'crent from that of Dr. I'nas, who, l)y my advice, has iivoidcd (in? use of 
 Greek or other foroij^n cliaracters, oniployitip; only Kiiglisli lutter.s witii \ariuus (ha- 
 critical mark.'*. Tliis alpliahot somewliat disgni.scs to tin; eye tlio oxtrcmo didiiMiltie.s 
 of the protmnciatioii. 'J'hc ^x'- I'"" exampU>, i.s written liy him simply /(, t)Ut tlio / is 
 (lofinod as an ' explosive /." It is tin- combination so fioinaMi in the Mexitan (or 
 Nahuatl) tongue. 
 
 la 
 

 1, 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 i1 
 
 4 REroRT— 1890. 
 
 Fuoaco, where apparently a climate and motle of life almost exactly 
 similar have produced the same etlrct on the ]K>ople and their lanfjua^e. 
 Anyone who will compare my ab )ve-(|U()ted descri,.'li()n with the well- 
 known and amusing account given i)y Darwin of the speech of the 
 Fuegiana will he struck by the resembliuice. He writes, in his ' Voy:»Lre 
 of th(! " Beagle "' : ' TIk; language of these people, according to our notions, 
 scarcely deserves to be called articulate. Captain Cook has compared it 
 to a man clearing his throat; but (certainly no European ever cleared his 
 throat; with so many hoarse, guttural, and clicking sounds.* Yet the 
 Fuegian language has been found to be, in its grammar and vocabulary 
 (like the languages of our north-west coast), highly organified, and 
 abounding in miimtt,>ly expressive words and forms.' 
 
 Soutli of the Columbia River the coast becomes nearlv bai'c of islands. 
 Harliours are few. The })urely fishing tribes are no longer found. The 
 njilder cbmate of California, resembling that of Southern Italy, begins to 
 prevail, and the soft Italian p muncintion ])t>rvades all the languau'es, 
 except those of a few Tinneh sej)ts which have wandered into this I'eginu 
 from the far north, and still retain something of the harshness of tlieir 
 original utterance. 
 
 Not merely in their modes of speech, but also in more important 
 points, do the northern coast tribes show a certain general resemblance, 
 ■which, in spiic of radical diff'erences of language, and doubtless of origin, 
 seems to weld them together into one community, ])ossessing what may 
 fairly be styled a civilisation of their own, comparable on a small scale to 
 that of the nations of Eastern Asia. Dr. Boas is the first investigator 
 whose researches have extended over this whole region. Other 
 writers have given ns excellent monographs on separate tribes. The 
 work of Mr. Sproat on the Nootka, and those of I)r. Dawson on the 
 Haida and Kwakiutl may be particularly mentioned. But a general 
 desciiption was needed to bring out at once the differences and the 
 resemblances of the various stocks, and to show the extent to which 
 similar surroundings and long-continued intercommunication had availed 
 to create a common polity among them. 
 
 Two institutions which are, to a greater or less extent, common to all 
 tl'ic coast tribes, and which seem particularly to characterise them and to 
 distinguish them from other communities, may here be specially noted. 
 Both appear to have originated in the Kwakiutl nation, and to have 
 spread thence northward and southward. These institutiotis are the 
 ])olitie;il secret societies and the custom of ' potlateh.' Secret societies 
 exist atnong other Indian trib;^s, and probably among all races of the 
 globe, civilised or barbarous. But there are perhaps no other communi- 
 ties iti which the whole ])oliti('al system has come to be bound up with 
 such societies. As Dr. J^)as informs us, there are in all the tribes three 
 distinct ranks — the chiefs, the middle class, and the common people — or, 
 as they might perhaps be more aptly styled, nobles, burgesses, and 
 rabble. The nobles form a caste. Their rank is hereditary; and no ono 
 Tvho was not born in it can in any way attain it. The nol)les have dis- 
 tinction and respect, l)ut little power. The government belongs mainly 
 to the *burg(>sses,' who constitute the bulk of the nation. They owe their 
 position entirely to the secret societies. Any person who is not a memlier 
 of a secret society belongs to the rablile, takes no part in the public 
 
 ' See Fr. Mi'illcr, Gnindrhx rou Sprnchivi)f<nig('hiifi, vol. iv. j). 1;(>7: iuid M.ix 
 jMiiller's Srlrnci' «f 'riioiii/ht, p. I.")7. 
 
 Ji 
 
 > 
 
 'i ', 
 
ON THE XOUTH-WEtJlEUN TUUlEsi OF CANADA. 
 
 ^ 
 
 C(iniu!ils, niul is witliout consiileration or influL'nco. The greator the 
 luiiiihoi of secret socioties to which any man belongs, the higher is his 
 standing in the community. As there are several of these societies in 
 every trib', it i.s evident tliat no pci-son whose character would make him 
 a desirable member of one of thcta is likely to remain oatside of the 
 burgess class. The lowest class, or rabble, is therefore a veritable 
 residuum, composed of feeble-minded or worthless individuals, with, of 
 course — in those tribes which practise shive- holding — slaves and their 
 descendants. C<rotes(jue as this systeni seems at first thought, further 
 consitleration shows it to bo by no means ill-contrived for keeping the 
 government of the tribe permanently in the worthiest hands, and bringing 
 men of the fii'st merit into the most intluential positions. 
 
 Connected with this system is that of the ' pitlatch,' or gift-festival, 
 a custom which has been greatly misunderstood by strangers, who have 
 regarded it as a mere pai-ade of wasteful and ostentatious })i'ofusion. It is 
 in reality something totally dill'erent. The putlatch is a method most 
 ingeniously devised for displaying merit, acquiring influence, and at the 
 same time laying up a provision for the future. Among these Indians, as 
 among all communities in which genuine civilisation has made some pro- 
 gi'css, the qualities most highly esteemed in a citizen are thrift, forethought, 
 and liberality. The thrift is evinced by the collection of the property 
 which is distributed at the gift-feast ; the liberality is, of course, shown 
 in its distribution ; and the forethought is displayed in selecting as tho 
 special objects of tliis liberality those who are most likely to be able to 
 return it. IJy a well-understood rule, which among these punctilious 
 natives had all the force of a law of honour, every recipient of a gift at a 
 potlatch was bound to return its value, at some future day, twofold. And 
 in this repayment his relatives were expected to aid him ; they were 
 deemed, in lact, his sureties. Thus a thrifty and aspiring burgess who, 
 at one of tliese gift-feasts, had emptied all his chests of their accumulated 
 stores, and had left himself and his family apparently destitute, could 
 comfortably reflect, as he saw his visitors depart in their well-laden 
 canoes, that he had not only greatly increased his reputation, but had at 
 the same time invested all his means at high interest, on excellent 
 security, and was now in fact one of the wealthiest, as well as most 
 esteemed, members of the community. 
 
 We now jierccive why the well-meant act of the local legislature, 
 nholishingtbe cnstom of potlatch, aroused such strenuous opposition aniDiig 
 the tribes in which this custom specially pivvailed. We may imagine tho 
 consternation which would be caused in England if the decree of a 
 superior power should require that all benetit societies and loan companies 
 sliuuld be su[)p!'essed, and that all deposits slundd rein-iin the pioperty of 
 those who held them in trust. Th'j potlatch and its aciioiupanimenf s 
 doubtless had their ill effects, but tlu; system clearly possessed its useful 
 side, and it might pei'lia])s have been better left to gradually decline and 
 disapj)ear with the rise and diffusion of a, different system of economy. 
 
 The nature of the civilisation and industry Vvhich accomjianied it may 
 lie shown by a brief extract from the report of Dr. Cieorge Gibbs, already 
 referred to. In 1658 he visited a village of the MnWiihs, a Nootka tribe, 
 near Cape Flattery. It cc.^sisted of two blocks of four or five houses 
 each. These houses were constructed of hewn planks, secured to a strong 
 framework of p.)sts and rafters. The largest was no less than 75 feet 
 long by lU in width, and probably 15 feet high in front. In chests of 
 
 I :- 
 
 ■■M 
 
6 
 
 REl'OUT — 1890. 
 
 ; 
 
 
 if i 
 
 1' 
 
 f,, 
 
 f 
 
 ?ili 
 
 argc 817,0 and very neatly made, and on slielves overlicad, wore stowed 
 tlio family chattels and stores, a vast and miscellaneous assortment. 
 'Mr. Goklsborough,' lie adds, ' who visited the village in 1850, informed 
 me tl at the houses gone'-ally were on an even larger scale at that time ; 
 that the chief's house was no less tlian 100 feet in length, and that 
 about twenty women were busily engaged in it, making bark mats and 
 dog-hfiir blankets.' 
 
 It is evident that these people differ in character and habits as widely 
 from the Indians oC the interior as tlie Chinese and Japanese dilTer from 
 the Tartar nomads. The coast tribes of British Columbia arc communi- 
 ties of fishermen, mcclianics, and traders, with a well-defined political 
 nnd commercial system. They were to all appearance esj)ecially suited 
 for acco])ting the indnstrial methods of modern Europe; and it becomes a 
 subject of hiterest to intpaire into the probabilities of the future in this 
 respect. 
 
 In this inquiry the element of the radical difference of stocks comes 
 very distinctly into view. We find that, despite the superficial resem- 
 blance in polity and usages which has been noted among these tribes, 
 their moral and intellectual traits, like their languages, remain widely 
 dissimilar. These differences become strikingly apparent in reviewing 
 tile recent information given respecting the condition and progress of 
 the British Columbian tribes in the valuable annual reports of the Cana- 
 dian Department of Indian Affairs. 
 
 Thus the Kwakiutl people — known in these documents by the griev- 
 ously disordered name of ' Kwaw-kewlth ' — are dcsci'ibed in a late report 
 (1887) as 'the least advanced and most averse to civilisation of any in 
 the province.' ' The missionaries of several Churches,' we are further 
 told, ' have endeavoured to carry on mission work among them, bat each 
 was obliged to abandon them as hopeless, until, several years ago, the 
 Rev. Mr. Hall, of the Church of England, was stationed there, and, in 
 spite of all the obstacles and discouragements encountered by him, re- 
 mained, and has apparently won the confidence of some of these poor, 
 ignorant creatures.' In the following year the local agent reports some 
 improvement, but adds that ' the school is not so well attended as could 
 be desired. The children are not averse to learning, but their parents 
 Bee in education the downfall of all their most cherished customs.' In 
 1889 he finds among them some signs of progress in the mechanic arts, 
 and a willingness to give up some of their superstitions. ' Only to the 
 potlatch,' he adds significantly, 'do they cling with great pertinacity.' 
 
 To understand these facts it should be known that the Kwakiutl, by 
 virtue of their force of character, their stubborn conservatism, and what 
 may be called, in reference to their peculiar ci'eed and rites, a strong 
 religious sentiment, held a high nosition, and exercised a prevailing 
 intlnence among the neighbouring tribes. The changes introduced by 
 civilis.\tion have naturally been repugnant to them. They cling to their 
 ancient customs and laws ; and when these are set aside, the sense of 
 moral restraint is lost, and the Spartan-like pei'sistency which made 
 them respected degenei'ates into a sullen recklessness, combined with an 
 obstinate hostility to all foreign influences. 
 
 A remarkable contrast appears in the character and conduct of their 
 northern neighbours, the Tsiinshians. These are the people among whom 
 ^Ir. Duncau had such distinguished success in founding his mission of 
 Metlakahtla. According to the brief description given in II. H. Ban- 
 
 ^ 
 
 n ' i 
 
J 
 
 ed 
 lit. 
 
 «; 
 
 lilt 
 
 i.d 
 
 f 
 
 I 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESIERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 7 
 
 croft's ' History of British Columbia,' this mission, which was commenced 
 in 1858, had in 188G ' developed into a town containing some 1,500 so- 
 called civilised natives, with neat two-story houses and regular streets. 
 The principal industry was the weaving of shawls. There were also a 
 salmon canneiy, with a capacity of 10,0OO cases a year; a sash and door 
 factory ; and a sawmill and a brickyard. The church, built entirely 
 by the natives, and the materials for which, with the exception of the 
 windows, were of home production, hud a seiiting capainty of nearly a 
 thousand, and was one of the largest in British Columbia.' 
 
 The unfortunate events which resulted in the withdrawal of Mr. 
 Duncan and five hundred of his people from the province need not bo 
 referred to here, further than by stating that they led to the appointment 
 of a commission, composed of two members, representing respectively the 
 Dominion and tiie Provincial Governments, to inquire into the condition 
 of ad'airs in this quarter. The comra'ssioners visited the various stations 
 on the Tsirashian coast in the autamn of 1887, and presented a very 
 able and interesting report, which is published in the volume of that 
 year. Their descriptions fully confirm all that has been said concerning 
 the great and indeed astonishing advances which have been made by 
 these natives in all the ways of civilisation. Of the village of Kincolith, 
 comprising a population of about two hundred, they say : — 
 
 ' The houses are mostly on tlie plan of those at Metlakahtla, one and 
 a half stories high, with a room for reception and ordirary use, built in 
 on the space between each two houses. Some of the houses are single- 
 story, and several " bay windows " could be seen. There are street- 
 lamps and sidewalks, aiid the little village bears every indication of 
 prosperity. The place was tidy and orderly, and the Indians evidently 
 thriving and well-to-do.' 
 
 The larger town of Port Simpson, with a population estimated at 
 about a thousand, is thus described : 'The Indian village, spread over a 
 considerable area, with several streets and numerous houses, presented 
 quite an imposing appearance. The houses are substantially built, and 
 are varied in fashion by the taste of the natives. A long line of houses 
 fronts upt)n an esplana te, commanding a fine sea-view, and another on 
 Village Island faces the harbour. The cemetery on the extremity of this 
 island is largely in modern style, and contains many costly monuments. 
 The island is connected with tlie rest of the town by a ' long bridge.' 
 There are a handsome church — said to rank next in size to the one at 
 Metlakahtla, which is the largest in the province — a commodious school- 
 house, and a well-conducted orphanage, fill bearing testimony to the 
 energy of those in chai'ge of the mission. There are a fire-brigade house 
 and a temperance hall; street-lamjis are used; and a brass band was 
 heard at practice in the evening. On the commissioners' arrival a salute 
 was fired and a considerable display of bunting was made.' 
 
 The report of these impartial and liberal-minded commissioTiers shows 
 that these Indians held themselves to be completely on a level with the 
 white settlers, and that they felt a natuial unwillingness to be confined to 
 a ' reserve,' and to be placed under an ' Indian agent.' Their entiiuents, 
 manly and self-respecting, were precisely such as might have been ex- 
 pressed by a colony of Norwegians or Japanese, but with the added 
 claim to consideration that the claimants regarded themselves as the 
 rightful owners of the land, on which their people had resided from time 
 immemorial. 
 
 M I 
 
8 
 
 REroRT — 1890. 
 
 \ 
 
 
 'If 
 
 '■'':i 
 
 "'II' 
 
 •| J 
 
 The widespread bands of tlio groat Salish people show many varieties 
 of chiiractcr, as might bo expected in the septs of what is evidently it 
 mixed race. The majority, however, are industrious, and readily adapt 
 themselves to the new conditions of their present life. As fairly typical, 
 the account which is given in the latest report (for 1889) of the 
 Tl-kamcheen or Lytton band may be selected. This is the principal 
 baTid of the ' Ntlakyapamucj tribe,' whoso location will be found on the 
 map near the junction of the Eraser and Thompson Rivers. The 
 resourcefulness and versatile industry by which the members of this 
 band manage to thrive under very adverse circumstances are well 
 described by the local agent, Mr. J. W. Mackay : ' Although these 
 Indians,' lie observes, ' have had a large acreage allotted to them, but a 
 very smuU ])ortion of it can be cultivated, owing to the entire lack of 
 water. These Indians are great traders and carriers. They draw the 
 agi'icultural ])r()du('ts which they require from the neighbouring reserves 
 at Spapiam, N.liumeen, Strynne, and N.kuaikin. They help the Indiana 
 of these reserves to sow and harvest their crops, and take payment for 
 their services in kind. Tliey mine for gold, carry goods for traders from 
 Lytton to LilJooet, and work for the Canadian Pacific Railway Company. 
 They own a large number of horses, which they pasture on the lands 
 allotted to them. They have a few head of horned cattle, and they 
 cultivate the few available j)lota of land belonging to their reserves. 
 They are in good circumstances. They pay considerable attention to the 
 offices of religion.' 
 
 The Cowichin tribe (on the map '■ Kduitcin '), on the south-east corner 
 of Vancouver Island — another sept of this stock — are described as 
 making fair progress, but as more unsettled in their habits. The recent 
 statutory interference with some of their customs had produced a re- 
 markable effect. Under the peculiar stimulus of their own system they 
 had accumulated in 1888 'personal property' to the large amount of 
 407,000 dollars. In the followMng year that value had suddenly sunk to 
 80,000 dollars. This startling change is briefly explained by the Indian 
 Superintendent for the Province : ' The decrease in the value of personal 
 property as compared with last year,' he states, ' is asci ib d by Mr. Agent 
 Lomas to the tact that most of the natives have not collected property 
 for potlatching pui'poses.' Thus it appears that a law of compulsory 
 repudiation, enacted with the most benevolent motives, had in a single 
 year rtduced the personal wealth of one small tribe from over 400,000 
 dollars tea fifth of that ameunt. This must be deemed a lesson in politi- 
 cal economy as striking as (coming from such a quarter) it is unexpected. 
 
 One of the smallest and, at the .-ame time, most interesting of the 
 tribes of this province are the Kootenays (Kutonaqa on the map). 
 They number only about five hundred souls, and inhabit a spacious valley 
 in the extreme east of the province, enclosed between the Rocky Moun- 
 tains and the Selkirk Range. Their language is distinct from all other 
 known idioms. In their customs they do not differ widely from the other 
 interior tril)es. Their chief distinction is in their moral character. lu 
 regard to this distinction all authorities agree. The Catholic missionaries, 
 when they first came among them, were charmed with them. The Rev. 
 P. J. De Smet, in his little volume of ' Indian Sketches,' writes thus 
 enthusiastically concerning them : ' The beau-ideal of the Indian cha- 
 ructer. uncontaniinated by contact with the whites, is found among them. 
 What is most pleasing to the stranger is to see their simplicity, united 
 
 I 
 
ssm 
 
 ] 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 9 
 
 with sweetness and innocence, keep step witli the most perfect dignity 
 and modesty of deimrtraont. The gross vices which dishonour the red 
 man on the frontiers are utterly unknown among them. They are honest 
 to scrupulosity. The Hudson Bay Company, during the forty years that 
 it has been trading in furs with them, has never been able to pei'ccivo 
 that the smallest object had been stolen from them. The agent of tho 
 company takes his furs down to Colvillo every spring and docs not 
 return before autumn. During his absence the store is confided to tho 
 care of an Indian, who trades in the name of the company, and on tho 
 return of the agent renders him a most exact account of his trust. Tho 
 store often remains without anyone to watch it, tho door unlocked and 
 unbolted, and the goods are never stolen. The Indians go in and out, 
 help themselves to what they want, and always scrupulously leave in 
 place of whatever article they take its exact value.' 
 
 This was written in 1861, but describes the Kootenays as the author 
 found them on his first visit to them in 1845, wlien they were still 
 heathen. In 1888 the report of the local agent, ^Ir. Alichael Phillips, 
 brief and business-like in its terms, entirely confirms this description : 
 'The general conduct of the Upper Kootenay Indians,' he writes, 'has 
 been good. Not a single charge has been laid against any one of thcTu 
 for any olYence during the last twelve months, nor has any case of 
 suspected dishonesty or misconduct been brought to my notice. From 
 conversations I have had with Major Steele, I should judge that they 
 are in point of moral conduct far superior to the Indians of the North- 
 West.' By the latter expression the writer evidently refers to tho 
 Indians of what are known as i:he 'North- West Territories' of Canada, 
 east of the Rocky Mountains. 
 
 Finally, in the same year (1888) the Chief Superintendent of Indian 
 Affairs for the Dominion adds his emphatic and decisive testimony to tho 
 good qualities of the Kootenays in a single line : ' They are a strictly 
 moral, honest, and religious people.' ' 
 
 Much more might be added, if the space at our command would allow, 
 to show the great and very interesting dilTerences which prevail among 
 the tribes of British Columbia. The farther our investigations aro 
 carried, tho more numerous and important the subjects of inquiry become. 
 The experience of another year confirms the opinion expressed by me in 
 the last report of the committee, that no other field of ethnoU^gical 
 research is to be found in North America which equals this province in 
 interest and value. In'^'^'^d it may be qucslioned whether anywhere on 
 the globe there can bo luund witiiin so limited a compass so great a 
 variety of languages, of physical types, of psychical characteristics, of 
 social systems, of mythologies, and indeed of all the subjects of study 
 embraced under the general head of anthropology. And, finally, tho 
 facts given in tho present and former reports show how rapidly tho 
 opportunities for preserving a record of these primitive conditions aro 
 passing away. 
 
 These rapid changes, in themselves for the most part highly bene- 
 ficial, ai'c due, in a largo measure, to the action of tho Canadian and 
 Provincial Governments. As something has been said on this point, it 
 is but just to add that a careful examination of the official reports, as 
 
 ' It slionld 1)0 inentioiK'd that tlioc statompiits rofor siiccially to llin ' rppcr 
 Kootenaxs.' Of the 'Lower Kooti'iia vs,' who are partly witliin the I'liited States' 
 territory, and who appear to be oi mixed origin, the accounts are less favourable. 
 
 r \ 
 
 ; I 
 
fii 
 
 \ i 
 
 :il 
 
 'i i i 
 
 
 10 
 
 REroiiT— 1890. 
 
 well as of sill the other evidence at hand, loaves a highly favoumhlc 
 impression as regard to the j'oliey and methods which have been pursued 
 by the Canadian legislatures and executive authorities in dealing with 
 these tribes. If any mislakes have been committed, they have been duo 
 chiefly to (lefective information. The evidence presented by tliese repoits 
 is that of a careful and kindly guardianship, more considerate and liberal, 
 perhaps, than any barbarous tribes, in the like situation, have ever before 
 expei'ieuccd. 
 
 Second General liejmrt on the Indians of British Culumbia. 
 Jly Dr. Franz Boas. 
 
 I N T I{ D U C T R Y N T E. 
 
 In the repoit of the results of ray reconnaissance in 1888 I have given 
 a summary of the most important facts relating to the ethnology of 
 British Columbia so far as known. According to instructions of the 
 editor of the.se reports, Mr. Horatio Hale, on my last journey, in the 
 summer of 1880, I paid special attention to the study of the Nootka and 
 the Salish tribes. Certain results of my investigations among the Nootka 
 made it necessary to collect some additional facts on the Kwakiutl. 
 Therefore the following report will he devoted to a description of the 
 Nootka, Salish, and Kwakiutl. The Salish stock inhabits a considerable 
 part of the interior of British Columbia and the southern part of the 
 coast. In describing the ethnology of this people the former group mast 
 be separated from the latter which participates in the peculiar culture 
 of the coast tribes of British Columbia. As the Salish are subdivided 
 into a very great number of tribes speaking different dialects, I have 
 thought it advisable to study one tribe of each group. Among the coast 
 tribes I selected the Lku'hgKn, among those of the interior the Shushwap. 
 The first part of the report contains a description of the tribes or groups 
 of tribes mentioned : the Lku'ngKn, Nootka, Kwakiutl, and Shushwap. 
 In my first report a sketch was given of four linguistic stocks of this 
 region : the Tlingit, Haida, Tsimsbian, and Kutonaqa. In the second 
 part of the present report the review is completed, a sketch of the 
 Kwakiutl, Nootka, and Salish languages being given. As the last is 
 subdivided into a great number of dialects, it was necessary to select 
 only the most salient points of the various dialects. This seemed the 
 more advisable, as the Kalispelm dialect is well known tlu'ough 
 Mengarini's grammar and Giorda's dictionary. The measurements of 
 crania were made in the anthropological laboratory of Clark University, 
 Worcester, ^lass., which is well fitted with the necessary instruments. 
 The described specimens were collected in part by Mr. W. J. Sutton, of 
 Cowitchin, B.C., in part by myself daring the years 1886 to 1888. I 
 have to express my thanks to Dr. N. L. Britton, of Columbia College, 
 New York, for determining a number of plants for me. I am indebted 
 to the kindness of Dr. George M. Dawson for photographs of specimens 
 in the museum of the Geological Survey of Canada in Ottawa, from 
 which a niimber of sketches were made. 
 
 The following alphabet has been used in the report : — 
 The vowels have their continental sounds, namely: a, ns in f.dher ; 
 e, like a in mate ; i, as in machine ; o, as in no/e ; 7t, as in rule. 
 
 In addition the following are used: «, o, as in German; d=aio in 
 laiv; £=e hi Jluicer (Lepsius's <;). 
 
 J 
 
 US 
 
 <IL 
 
ON THE NORTH- WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 11 
 
 i ' 
 
 Among the consonants the following additional letters have been 
 nscd : (/", a very guttural ij, similar to (/r ; k', a very guttural /;, similar 
 to At j (/, the German ch in Inch; ll, the German ch in irh ; q, be- 
 tween 7 and H ; r=sh in shore; r, as tli in Ihin ; tl, an explosive /; 
 (//, a palatal /, pi'onounced with the back of the tongue (dorso-apieal). 
 
 I. THE LKU'NGEN. 
 
 The Lku'ngEn are generally known by the name of Songish. Tliey 
 inhabit tlie south-eastern part of Vancouver Island, They belong to tlie 
 Coast Salish, a group of trioes of the Salish stock (see Fimrth Jie[)()rt of 
 Committee, p. 0). They are called Lkfi'men by the Snanai'muQ. Their 
 language is called the Lknnge'nEn. The same language, with very sliglit 
 dialectic peculiarities, is spoken by the ysa'nitc (Sanitch) of Saniteh 
 I'eninaula and on the mainland, south of Eraser River ; the Sa'ok of 
 Sooke Inlet and the Tla'lam on the south side of Juan de Euea Straits. 
 The name of ' Songish ' is derived from that of one of their septs, the 
 Stsa'figKs, who live south-west of Victoria. 
 
 HOUSE.S AND BoATa. 
 
 The Lku'iigEu use the long houses of the Coast Salish. In British 
 t*olumbia this type of house is used on the west coast of Vancouver 
 Island, on the east coast, south of Comox, and on the coast of the 
 mainland. In the upper part of the Eraser Iliver delta subtemnean 
 houses of the same type as those used in the interior of the province are 
 used. The framework of the house consists of heavy carved uprights 
 which carry heavy cross-beams. The uprights are generally rectangular 
 (u, figs. 1, 2). The cross-beams, c, are notched, so as to fit on the top of 
 
 1 ' 
 
 >:!' 
 
 Fig. 1.— rian of Lku'figEn House. 
 
 .«■- 
 
 .©^ 
 
 @LP 
 
 '0' 
 
 ^!9' 
 
 W 
 
 1 1 
 1 1 
 1 1 
 
 - - 1.-4- 
 
 1 1 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 
 L,J i.-L 
 
 1 ' 1 1 
 
 1 1 
 
 \c\ 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 \c\ \c\ 
 
 1 • 
 
 • -- 1 — «-- 
 . - .f -- + _ 
 1 1 
 
 1 1 
 1 1 
 ' 1 
 
 .^■A. .• • 
 
 ... ..J.... 
 
 • 1 ' 1 
 i ^ ^.-♦ - 
 
 t^-i- + -..-. 
 
 ! : ' 
 
 %Pvr» 
 
 I • 
 
 ■ L- : : 
 
 R 
 
 -t;i-.T 
 
 "©/» 
 
 ~Wp 
 
 _©_ 
 
 "W/T 
 
 ^P 
 
 'i »P 
 
 yUP 
 
 <a ^p 
 
 the uprights. The uprights which are nearest the sea are a little higher 
 than those on the opposite side. The higher one of the long sides of the 
 
 • 1 
 
 1 
 
--T 
 
 12 
 
 UEPOUT — 1S!)0. 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 .,1 : 
 
 t: : 
 
 'V^ ! 
 
 ■it ' 
 
 «, 
 
 Si-' '^ 
 
 *■- f 
 
 
 house fiiccs tlio sciu A scrii'S of rafters, u, are laid over ilic cross-beams, c. 
 Close to ilie ni)i'i<^lits a miniber of poles are ereeted which are to hohl tl e 
 wall. Tliey staiu' in {)airs, <h(> distaiiee between the two poles of eiieli 
 pair corresponding to the tliiektiess of the wall. The top of the onfer 
 poles is ornanienicd as sliown in tig. 2, i'. Heavy planks are placed 
 
 '/ui. '2. Scctiun kL' l,ku'n'M;ii Iiuii.se. 
 
 bo 
 
 K" 
 
 
 between these poles, the higlier always overlapping the lower so as to 
 keep out the rain. Tliey ai'e held in ])lace by ropes of cedar-branches 
 which pass through holes in these boanls and are tied around fc'ie poles, L. 
 The uppermost boai'd on the house- front serves as a moulding, hiding 
 from view and closing the space between the I'afters nnd the front of the 
 liouse. The door is either at the side or, in very large houses, there are 
 several on the side of the house facing the sea. The roof consists of 
 planks a described in the Fourth Report of the Committee, p. 22. The 
 uprights of the Lku'ngKn house are carved and painted as shown in fig. S. 
 In some instances their surface is plain, but animals are carved on it, tho 
 whole being cut out of one piece. Such posts do not belong to the 
 Lku'ngim proper, but were introduced into one family after intermarriage 
 with the Cowitchin. The posts shown in fig. 4 belong to a house in 
 Victoria, and tho same figures are found in a house at Kna'mitcan 
 (Quamichin), where tho mother of the house owner belongs. They 
 represent minks. The human figures represent the spirits whom the 
 owner .saw when tjleaning himself in the woods before becoming a member 
 of tJio secret society Tcyiyi'vvan (see p. 2G). It is worth remaiking that 
 the faces of these figures are always kept covered, as the owner does not 
 like to be constantly reminded of these his superhuman friends and 
 helpers. Only during festivals he uncovers them. All along the walls 
 inside the house runs a platform of simple construction. Posts about 
 one foot high. A, are driven into the ground at convenit'nt intervals. 
 They are covered with cross-bars which carry the boards forming the 
 platform. In some parts of the hou.se shelves hang down from the x-afters 
 about seven or eight feet above the tloor. Each compartment of the 
 house, I.e., the space between two pairs of uprights, is occupied by one 
 family. Ii; winter the walls and the dividing lines between two compart- 
 ments are hung with mats made of buUrushes. The fire is near one of 
 the front corners of the compartment, where the house is highest. The 
 
 <: 
 
 of 
 ro 
 
 \ 
 
Hi 
 
 i 
 
 ON THE N0RTII-WE8TRIIN TRIBES OK CANADA. 
 
 13 
 
 boards of the roof are pnslu'd aside to lot the smoko escape. ITonsoliold 
 goods are kept on the platform ; here are also the beds. The bed consists 
 
 Fl(i. 3.— Ui)viglit of LkuTigKii lluiiso. 
 
 Fu;. 4. — Upri^'lit (if Lku'figEii 
 
 
 of a number of mats made of biiUrnshcs, the upper ends of which arc 
 rolled np and serve as a pillow. 
 
 At the present time the Lku'figKn u -c only two kinds of boats : the 
 
 I 
 
 * ■ 
 
 i 
 
 1 ! 
 
14 
 
 REronT — 1890. 
 
 
 1 ' 
 
 0:: 
 
 smiill fi.sliing-boat snr.'qnnfl and the Chinook boat d'lqF.-^. The lattoi*, 
 Iiowover, is not an oM stylo LkaTi'^Kn boat, l)ut belont,'S to tho Nootka. 
 Tlie xni:'i/KiiH is a lonj^, narrow boat with sliintinfj; stern, similar in slmpo 
 to a small Kwakiutl boat; its poouliarity is tho bow as shown in tig. ,">. 
 
 Fir;. 5. 
 
 Fkj. (). 
 
 The Cowit(!hin boat has a stern similar to that of the Kwakintl boat, ficj. (5. 
 It is called by the LkuTiijfKti all' nwd'ttall , i.e., boat with a s(inare l)ow. 
 Tho Kwakiutl boat is called piVlrtlF.ntl or fcii.'ii'/tu. Besides the tunall 
 
 Fit!. 
 
 Lku n'MOii Fisliins Canoe. 
 
 boat, tho Lka'figKn used the large fishing-boat called sti-:'lli:iii or //V-?'/, 
 and the war-boat kulne'lll. I have had models made of these boats ; the 
 former is shown in tig. 7, a lateral view of the latter iu tig. 8. The 
 
 Fiu. 8.— Lku'rii,'Kn War Canoe 
 
 square stern is peculiar to the Lku'iii^En fishing-boat. It seems that it 
 was not made of one piece with the boat, but consisted of a board inserted 
 into a groove, the joints being made water-tight by moans of pitch. 
 
 Manufactures and Food. 
 
 I do not intend to give a detailed report on these subjects, but confine 
 myself to describing such manufactures and such methods of preparing 
 food as I bad occasion to observe. Blankets are woven of mountain-goat 
 wool, dog-hair, and duck-down mixed with dog-hair. The downs are 
 peeled, the quill being removed, after which the downs are mixed with 
 dog-hair. A variety of dogs with long white hair was raised for this 
 purpose ; it has been extinct for some time. The hair which is to be spun 
 is first pi'epared with pipe-clay {sVd'uoh').^ A ball, about the size of a 
 
 ' Dr. George M. Dawson obtained a specimen of this material from Indians in 
 IJin-rard Inlet in 1875. It proved to be diatomaccous earth, not true pipc-(!lay. Tiie 
 material used by the Lkn'flgKn is found somewhere north-e.'ist of Victoria, the exact 
 spot being unknown to me. 
 
 i': 
 
T 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 1;3 
 
 8* 
 
 tlio 
 Tho 
 
 fist, of til is clny is burnt in a firo mado of willow wood ; thns it beoonios 
 a fino, white powder, which is mixed with the wool or hair. Tho mix- 
 ture is spread ovi-r a mat, spriidvled with water, jvnd for several houi-s 
 tiiorou^hly beaten witli a sal)re-iike instrument until it is white and ih-y ; 
 thus the grease is removed from tho hair. Then it is spun with the hand 
 on the bare thigh. Tho thread is worked into a basket; thus two baskets 
 full of thread are made. Then the two ohreads are rolled up together 
 on a stick and a large ball is made, whi'jh can be nnrollod from tho inner 
 end. Tiie latter is next fastened to the :.lia(t of the spindle. The spindle 
 has a shaft about three feet long, a heavy disc of whale's bone about a foot 
 in diameter being fastened to its centre. When in use, tho upper end of 
 tho sh ift rests between the thumb and first finger of tho left, while its 
 lower end stands on tho ground. Tt is turned with the right hand by 
 striking tho lower surface of the disc. Thus the two threads are twisted 
 one around tho other, and the double thread is rolled on the shaft of tho 
 spindle until tho whole ball has been sjinn. These threads are used for 
 a variety of purposes ; for making blankets, for fringes, for making straps. 
 Tho blanket is woven on a very simple loom. The cloth- and yarn-bars 
 rest in tvs'O vertical posts, which have each slits for these bars. The ends 
 of the bars turn in these slits. Tlie bars are adjustable, wedges l)eing 
 inserted into the slits so as to regulate their distance. The warp is hung 
 over the bars, passing over a thin stick which hangs in the middle be- 
 tween tho bai's. Tlie woft is plaited in between the w.iip, beginning 
 under tho stick Unfortunately, I am unable to describe tho exact 
 method of weaving. Tho weft is pressed tight with the fingers. Tho 
 blankets have a selvage, which consists of a long thread with loops, that 
 form a fringe when the blanket is finished. Some blankets of this style 
 are made with black zigzag stripes. 
 
 Nettles servo for making ro{)es and nets. They ai'o cleaned between 
 a pair of shells, then split with a bone needle, dried, and finally peeled. 
 Tlie fibres are then spun on the thigh. Another fibrous plant called 
 ctal'miih\ which is found on Fraser River, is traded for and used for making 
 nets. Red paint is not made by the Lku'ngEn, but traded from the tribes 
 on tlie mainland. Neither do they make cedar-bark mats, tho manu- 
 facture of which is confined to the Kwakiutl and Nootka. 
 
 Burnt pipe-clay is used for cleaning blankets. The clay is spread 
 over the blanket, sprinkled with water, and then thoroughly beaten. 
 
 Clams are prepared in the following way. They are opened by being 
 spread over red-hot stones and covered with a mat ; then they aro 
 taken out of the shell, strung on poles, and roasted. After being roasted 
 they are covered with a mat and softened by being trampled upon. Next 
 they are taken from the sticks on which they were roasted and strung on 
 cedar-bark strips. In this shape they are dried and stored for winter use 
 in boxes. They are eaten raw or with olachen oil. 
 
 Salal berries are boiled and then dried on leaves ; the boiled berries 
 ai'e given the shape of square cakes. When eaten they are mashed in 
 water. 
 
 The root of Pteris aquiliva is roasted, pounded, and the outer part is 
 eaten. 
 
 Haws are eaten with salmon roe. 
 
 On boat journeys the roots of Pteris aquUina and a species of onions 
 called kthVol, servo for food. 
 
16 
 
 RErORT — 1800. 
 
 Salmon Fihhinq. 
 
 Evory pfcns Ima its owi fishing-ground. Tho chief of the gens will 
 invite a number ol faniihes to lielp him catcli salmon, and in return ho 
 feeds them during tlu> fishing scsason. Shortly before tho (isliiiig season 
 opens they eoHeet bark, dry it, and make nets out of it. At tho same timo 
 strong ropes of cedar-twigs are made with a noose at one end. They 
 are fastened to heavy stones, whieli are to servo ns aneliors for the fishing- 
 boats. Two such anchors are prepared and finally thrown into tho water 
 at tho fishing-ground. Tiie upper end of the rope is fastened to a buoy. 
 VViien tlie men go out fishing a fishin<;-l)oat (//'A?'/, see fig. 7) is fiistened 
 to eacli anchor and a net stretclied between tho two boats. When tbo 
 net is full, one boat slackens the rope by which it is tied to the buoy and 
 iipproachcs the othci", tlu^ net being hauled in at tlie same time. Tho 
 fishing village is arranged in the following way (fig. 9). The centre in 
 
 Fio. [).— Fishing Village. 
 
 \ \\ 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 r J 
 
 ■p 
 
 \ I '■% 
 
 TTJJ 
 
 , 
 
 /''i 
 
 Jj 
 
 "1 r""' 
 
 J 
 
 1. Iloiiso of owner of fisliinp (lis ■\ct, 2. Hoii.scs of fishermen (shape and 
 number not known). 3. Squh \\U\. 4. Ditches for roasting .salmon. 
 
 formed by tho scaffold for drying sah m {squlad'ntq). It consists of 
 two pairs of nprights carrying a eross-b( 'a each, which support the long 
 heavy beams on which tho salmon are d .ed. These are cut off close to 
 the supports nearest the sea, while at tl other end their length is dif- 
 ferent, according to the size of the treesi which were used in the construc- 
 tion. The house of the owner of the fishing-ground stands behind the 
 scaffold. On both sides of the latter there are a number of huts. Tho 
 crew of one boat lives on one side, that of the other on the other side. Tho 
 owner appoints a chief fisherman {hiti'd'liln), who receives in payment tho 
 catch of two days and a few blankets. His hat is trimmed with fringes 
 of mountain-goat wool. He divides the fishermen into two crews. On 
 
ON THE N0RTII-WR8TEUN TIIIBK>< OK ( ANADA. 
 
 17 
 
 will 
 1 bo 
 
 IROIl 
 
 iiiio 
 'hey 
 
 (I tor 
 
 loyr, 
 
 lied 
 
 tlio 
 
 niid 
 
 ho 
 
 is 
 
 tlio liny when the first salmon bavu been cuu^bt, tbo cbiUlrcn must stnnd 
 on the beacb waitinj^ for the boats to rotnrii. TJK^y inust stretch their 
 arms forward on wbioli tbo fisb aro boaped, tlio bead always boinj^ kept in 
 the direction in wbicb tbo fisb are swinuniu^, ns cIbu tboy would coaso 
 running. Tbo cbildron carry tlu^ni up to tbo grassy place at tbo sides (;f 
 tbe sqi(Jaii'atti and deposit tbem there, the beads always being kept in 
 llu! sumo direction. Four flat stotu's aro placed around the sabnon, and 
 the owner burns oji each J't-iii-tdniiinu hu'iii'drinriii, Nutt., red paint ii*id 
 buUrusboB as an offering to the salmoi!. Then tlio men and women who 
 have painted tbeir faces red, clean and open tbo salmon. Kach boat's 
 crew dig a ditch, about tbreo foot wide and as long as the sijidau'iUi/, in 
 Front of tboir boasos. Long poles aro laid along tlio sides of the ditcb 
 and abort sticks are laid across in a zigzag lino. On tliese tbo .salmon 
 aro roasted. The kuu'il'liiu divides tbo salmon among tbe boats' crews. 
 Wlion they are dom> tbe children go to the ditcb and cacli receives a 
 salmon, wbicb he or she hutut finish. For four days tbe salmon are roasted 
 over tbis ditcb. Everyone is given his share by tbe l-unWIiiii, but bo 
 must not touch it. Tbo bones of tbo .salmon that the children have oaten 
 must not touch the ground and are kept on dishes. On the fourth day 
 an old woman collects tbem in a huge basket, which she carries on her 
 back, and they are thrown into the sea. She acts as though she were 
 lame. On the fifth day all the men turn over the roasted salmon that 
 had fallen to their share on the previous days to the hui'u'liin. When 
 they come back from fishing the wo aen expect them on the beach carrying 
 baskets. The salmon are thrown into these, and from this moment no 
 notice is taken of the direction in which they lie. They are thrown 
 down under the scaffold and the kunWllhi, divides tbem into two parts, 
 one for each crew. Then the women clean and split the fish and tie them 
 together by twos with strings of carex. The men jiaint their faces and 
 dress in their best blankets. They take long poles and stand in one row 
 at the lower end of the scaffold, one at each beam on which the salmon 
 are to be hung. A pair of salmon is hung on the point of each pole, and 
 now the men push four times upward, every time a little higher, blowing 
 at the same time upward before they hang up the salmon . 
 
 ^«t 
 
 J 
 
 Social Organisation and Government, 
 
 The Lku'figEn are divided into the following gentes, each of which 
 owns a certain coast-strip and certain river-courses on which they have the 
 exclusive right of fishing, hunting, and picking berries. The following 
 is a list of the gentes and the territory each occupies : — 
 
 I'. Lsff '^ } Codboro' Bay. 
 3. Sk'iiige'nes, Discovery Island. 
 
 4. Sitca'netl, Oak Bay. 
 
 G.' Tdk Waic } ^*°^^^" ^^y- 
 
 7. Qlthv'sEn 1 j^j^j^^jj^ 3 
 
 8. Quqoa q j •' 
 
 9. Squi'iiqufi, Victoria. 
 10 Qsa'psEm, Esqulmalt ( = Sq9E- 
 
 raa'letl. 
 
 11. Stsa'iiges 1 From Esquimalt 
 
 12. Kek-a'yek'En J to Beecher Bay. 
 
 Each gens has names of its own. There are three classes of people, 
 the nobility, called sthte'tlk'atl (collective of stU'tlTcatl, nobleman) ; the 
 middle class, called tld'm^al ; and the common people, called tVai'tcitl. 
 Each of these classes has also names of its own, so that a common man 
 
 8 h6 
 
 . I:.; 
 
 itfhi 
 
18 
 
 RErORT — 1890. 
 
 ,. <t^ 
 
 M 
 
 
 cannot use a middle-class name, a middle-class man cannot use a noble- 
 man's name. Here arc a few examples : — 
 Stsanges nobility names : 
 
 ^rales : Qtcl'tlem, Euqii'im, Tilsk'ii'inEm. 
 females; i^api^oa'p, Ts'idc'tiuya. 
 Tcilfau'ate common men : Ctca'satl, Ham. 
 
 I was unable to ascertain tbe derivation of any of these names. 
 
 Common people may rise to the rank of the middle class by giving feasts, 
 but middle-class people can never become noblemen. Wealth gives per- 
 sonal distinction only, not inheritable i-ank. The children of middle- 
 class people ai'e born common people. In order to raise their rank their 
 parents or uncles give a feast, and distribute a certain amount of property in 
 their behalf. By this means they become middle-class people, and are given 
 ii middle-class name. There is a complete scale of names, each being higher 
 in rank than the other. By giving a number of festivals the child's rank 
 call be raised higher and higher, until it obtains a high position among the 
 middle class. In the same way the children of noblemen are given names 
 of chiefs of higher and higher rank. The nobility have the privilege of 
 dancing with masks. 
 
 The Lku'ngEn gentes have no crests, particularly not the Sqoa'eqoe, 
 which belongs to a number of tribes of the Coast Salish; the (j-atl»j'ltq, 
 Snanai'muQ, K'ofi'ntlem, and probably several others. In one house in 
 V^ictoria the mink (fig. 4) is found carved on the upright. It does not 
 belong, however, to the Lku'ngEn, but the owner's wife, who belongs to a 
 Cowitchin family, gave it to her husband when they were married. The 
 couple have an only daughter, who will inherit this crest. 
 
 The chief of the tribe (siii'm) belongs, of course, to the nobility. 
 When giving a great ' potlatch ' to his own and neighbouring tribes, which 
 is his privilege, he stands on a scaffold which is erected in front of his 
 house and lets his daughter or son dance by his side before di.stributing 
 tlie property. The elevation of the scaffold may be seen in fig. 2. In 
 case of war, chiefs are forbidden to fight in the fi'ont ranks, but are care- 
 fully protected, as their death would be considered a severe loss to the 
 tribe. 
 
 After the death of the chief the chieftaincy devolves upon his eldest 
 Bon. If he has none his younger brother and his descendants succeed 
 him. A daughter or a son-in-law cannot succeed him. The new chief 
 takes the name of the deceased, and when doing so has to give a great 
 festi.al. 
 
 In war a war-chief is elected from among the wari'iors. War expeditions 
 are confined to nightly assaults upon villages. Open battles are avoided. 
 An expedition on which many men are lost, even if successful in its 
 object, is considered a gi'eat misfortune to the tribe. Fires are burnt on 
 mountains to notify distant villages or individuals that some impoi'tant 
 event has taken place. 
 
 Slaves were held by all classes. They were either captives or pnr. 
 chased from neighbouring tribes. 
 
 If a man has offended a foreign trih , all members of his own tribo are 
 liable to be seized upon, being held i*esponsible for all actions of any one 
 member. Therefore it is considered condemnable to offend a member of 
 a foreign tribe, and when, for instance, a man has stolon something from 
 a foreign tribe, and is found ontby his own people, the chief will compel him 
 
 
 t 
 
u noblc- 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OK CANADA. 
 
 19 
 
 to return the stolen property. A man who is offended has the right to 
 take revenge at once. If he uoes not do so the perpetrator has the right 
 to pay off his offence. 
 
 It may be mentioned here that sometimes men assume women's dress 
 and occupations, and vK'e t.\'? /•*'('. Such individuals are called sVo'mEtcK. 
 This custom is found all along the Xoi'th Pacific coast. 
 
 ■ \- * 
 
 ng fea.sf s, 
 fives per- 
 middle- 
 ink their 
 •operty in 
 are given 
 ig higher 
 Id's rank 
 nong the 
 3n names 
 vilege of 
 
 joa'eqoe, 
 >tlo'ltq, 
 louse in 
 ioes not 
 ngs to a 
 d. The 
 
 nobility. 
 s, which 
 t of his 
 ributing 
 .2. In 
 .re care- 
 3 to the 
 
 s eldest 
 succeed 
 w chief 
 a great 
 
 editions 
 voided. 
 1 in its 
 irnt on 
 Dortant 
 
 ir 
 
 pur. 
 
 ibo are 
 ny one 
 iber of 
 ? from 
 el him 
 
 i 
 
 y 
 
 t 
 
 Gamrlixi; and Pastimes. 
 
 1. SmetaW. — A game at dice is played with four beaver-teeth, two 
 being marked on one of their flat sides with two rows of small circles. 
 Thcv are called ' women ' (sid'nae smetaW). The two others are marked 
 on cue of the flat sides with cross-lines. They are called ' men ' 
 (suwe'k'a smetalc'). One of them is tied with a small string in the 
 middle. It is called iiilraJc't-'sen. The game is played by two persons. 
 According to the value of the stakes, thirty or forty sticks are placed 
 between the players. One begins to throw. When all the marked faces 
 are either up or down he wins two sticks. If the faces of tho two ' men * 
 are up, of the two ' women ' down, or vice versa, he w.'ns one stick. When 
 the face of the iHk'ak''e'sen is up, all others down, or vice versa, he wins 
 four sticks. Whoever wins a stick goes on playing. When one of the 
 players has obtained all the sticks he has won the stake. 
 
 2. SlEhd'lEm,orivtiqk'^ats, is flayed with one white and nine black discs* 
 The former is called the ' man.' Two players take part in the game. They 
 sit opposite each other, and each has a mat before him, the end nearest 
 the partner being raised a little. The player covers the discs with cedar- 
 bark and shakes them in the hollow of his hands, which are laid one on 
 the other. Then he takes five into each hand and keeps them wrapped 
 in cedar-bark, moving them backward and forward from right to left. 
 Now the opponent guesses in which hand the white disc is. Each player 
 has five sticks lying in one row by his side. If the guesser guesses right 
 ho rolls a stick over to his opponent, who is the next to gness. If the 
 guesser guesses wrong, he gets a stick from the pl..yer who shook the 
 discs, and who continues to shake. The game is at an end when one man 
 has got all the sticks. He has lost. Sometimes one tribe will challenge 
 another to a game o( slEhli'lEm. In this case it ia called lEhiihma'latl, or 
 waqk-atsH'Iatl. 
 
 3. K'k'oicVls. — A game at ball ; the ball, which is made of maple 
 knots, is ualled smuk. It is pitched with crooked sticks and driven from 
 one party to the other. 
 
 4. uawaud'latc'is. — The game of cat's cradle. A great vai'iety of figures 
 are made. Only one person is require.! ro make these figures. Some- 
 times the teeth must help in making them. 
 
 This is only a partial list, containing only those games of which I ob- 
 tained descriptions. Besides these, throwing and catching of hoops is a 
 favourite game. In gambling, the well-known sticks of the northern 
 tribes are often used, or a piece of bone is hidden in the hands of a mem- 
 ber of one party, while the other must guess where it is. 
 
 It is considered indecent for women to look on when the men gamble. 
 Only when two tribes play against each other are they allowed to be 
 present. They sing during the game, waving their arms up and down 
 rhythmically. Men and women of the winningparty paint their fares red. 
 
 2a 
 
 i| 
 
Frc. 10.— [-ku'n,i2i:ii ("radio. 
 
 20 repout— 1890. 
 
 Customs rkfrkrino to Birth, ^Iarrtaok, amp Death, 
 
 DuiMnry tlio period of pregnancy, women take off bracelets, anklets, 
 and necklace. This cusrom, which is also fonnd among the Nootka, prob- 
 ably means that tliorc must be no stricture around the body which might 
 hinder birth. They must also bathe regularly in the sea. VVhen the 
 time of delivery a[)proachcs, the ])arents engage an old man to cut the 
 cedar-branch from which the cradle is to he suspended, and live old 
 women to soften the cedar-bark to be used for bedding the babe in the 
 ci'adle. They are paid for their services. There are no professional raid- 
 wives, but sometimes the si'nua (see p. 28) is called to accelerate birth. 
 The navel-string is cut with a broken shell by an old woman. The child, 
 as soon as it is born, is smeared with bear grease and dogfish oil, particu- 
 larly the navel and any sore parts of the skin. On the first day the child 
 does not get any food. As soon as it is burn the mother rubs it from the 
 month towards the ears, so as to press the cheekbones somewhat upward. 
 The outer corners of the eyes are pulled outward that they may not be- 
 come I'OMud, which is considered ill-looking. The calves of the leg are 
 
 pressed backward and upwai'd, the knees 
 are tied together to prevent the feet from 
 turning inward. The forehead is pressed 
 down. They have a saying referring to 
 childi'en who have not been subjected to 
 this treatment, and, therefore, according to 
 Indian taste, ill-looking : ton oivuna ti'uis 
 Ji.<!Etctc('('ai\ that means, ' as if no mother had 
 made you look nice.' It is doubtful whether 
 this treatment, except the flattening of the 
 head, which is continued through a long 
 period, has any effect upon the shape of the 
 face. I do not believe that it has, at least not 
 upon bones, as the effect would be that of 
 ])roducing chamteconchic orbits, while, in 
 fact, they are very high. If there is any 
 change of form of the face, a question to 
 which I shall refer later on, it is more prob- 
 ably due to the deformation of the cranium. 
 The child is first strapped on to a cradle 
 made of bullrushes. The latter comprise 
 live bundles of rashes, each about an inch 
 or an inch and a half in diameter. The 
 outer one, fig. 10 (1), is given the shape of 
 a horse-shoe ; the others, which have only 
 about half the length of the foi'mer, are 
 placed inside the horse-shoe, parallel to its 
 sides, so that they fill the intervening space 
 and form a flat surface (2). These bundles 
 are kept in place by two sticks (3), one 
 being pushed through them near the curve, 
 the other near the end. The curved part is to be the head end of the 
 cradle, Both sides of the outer bundle are set with loops made of a thin 
 
 7 
 
 IS 
 
 ba 
 
 or 
 
 bai 
 
 ol' 
 
 Br< 
 
 an 
 
 ioi 
 
 Ibi 
 
 lla 
 
 sal 
 
 i-ope, which serve for fasttniing the baby to the cradle. A larger loop (4) 
 
ON THE NORTH-WE.STEItN TUIBES OK CANADA. 
 
 21 
 
 are 
 
 .1 
 
 is attached to the curve. This frame is covered with a layer of fine cedar- 
 bark. This layer i.s made of fibres of double the length of the cradle-board 
 or frame. They are combed and carefully stretched out. Then a roll of 
 bark about two inches wide by one inch high is laid on the middle part 
 of the layer, and the fibres are doubled up so as to cover thi- roll. The fibres 
 are plaited together with a thread of mountain-goat wool close to the roll, 
 and thus keep it in plnoc. A fringe of wool is fastened to the roll which 
 forms the pillow of the infant (-5). On top of the infant's head a cushion 
 for pressing down the foi-ehead is fastened {('■>). It consists of a series of 
 flat rolls of cedar-bark, covered with a layer of fibres of cedar-bark in iho 
 
 I same way as the pillow. Each roll is held in place by a plaiting of moun- 
 
 tain-goat wool thread. The upper end of the cushion is also set with a 
 fringe of this material. Between the cushion and tlic lu-ad a thick veil 
 
 I of cedar-bark is placed. This is made by drawing bundles of long fibres 
 
 of cedar- bark thrc)Ugh a cord of mountain-goat wool tluvad. The fringes 
 lie over the head and occiput of the infant joining the pillow. The cord 
 from which the veil hansfs down lies across the forehead. The cushion is 
 placed on top of this veil, so that its fringes hang down at the occiput of 
 the child, while the plain edge hes near the forehead. A string is uttaclied 
 to the centre of the cord of the veil, and pulled backward over the cusliioii 
 to the loop fastened to the curve of the cradle-board, to which it is 
 fastened. Under the compressing cushion at both sides of the face rolls 
 of cedar-bark are placed and pressed against the head, their upper end 
 being also ornamented with fringe of mountain-goat avooI tliread. Then 
 a cord is tied over the cushion and pulled downward to the third oi- fourth 
 loop on the sides of the cradle. Thus a strong pressure is brought to 
 act upon the region of the coronal suture. A cord of mountain-goat 
 wool passes from side to side over"the cradle and holds the infant. The 
 face is covered with a hood-like mat to keep otT the flics. When the 
 child is about a month old it is placed in a wooden cradle. This is shaped 
 like a trough. An inch or two above the bottom a kind of mattress is 
 fastened, which consists of longitudinal strips of cedar-wood tied to two 
 cross-pieces. The latter are tied to the sides of the cradle. In the hot- 
 tom of the lirough there is a hole for the refuse to run off. .\t the foot 
 end there is a small board, ascending at an angle of about ',V^^, on which 
 the child's feet rest, so that they are higher up than the head. The child 
 is lastened in this cradle in the same way as on the first. The cradle is 
 suspended from a cedar-branch, which is fastened to the wall or set uj) 
 still attached to its trunk. It is worked by means of a rope attached <o 
 the point of the branch. For some time after birth the husband must 
 keep at some di.stance (or out of sight ?) from his wife, and must balhc 
 and clean himself in the woods, tliat the child may become strong. 
 IJoth parents are forbidden to cat fresh salmon. When the woman first 
 rises from her bed after the child has been l)orn, she and her husbaiul 
 must go into the woods and live there for some time. They make a eauip 
 in which they remain. Early in the morning one (doubtful which) goes 
 eastward, the other westward, and bathe and clean themselves with cedar- 
 branches. They stay in the woods about a month. As soon iis the child 
 is able to walk, the cradle and the branch from which it was sus[H'n(ied 
 are deposited at certain places above high water, One of these points 
 
 k used to be where the Hospital of Victoria now stands. Its name is 
 
 P'ATatsEs (=the cradles) ; another, the point Qiiqo'leq, the third point 
 
 L east of Beacon Hill. 
 
 J 
 
 i 
 
I 
 
 i 
 
 22 
 
 UEl'ORT — 1890. 
 
 Twins, immediately after birth, possess supernatural powers. They 
 are at once taken to the woods and washed in a pond in order to become 
 ordinary men. If the twins are girls, it is an indication that a plentiful 
 supply of fish will come. If they are boys, they will Ix) good warriors. 
 
 It seems that the women arc held responsible for the behaviour of 
 their children, for if a child cries the husband may beat his wife. 
 
 While children, and when reaching maturity, they must go frequently 
 into the woods and bathe and clean themselves, in order to become strong 
 and healthy. Girls, even before reaching maturity, must not oat parts of 
 fish near the head, but only tails and adjoining parts, in order to secure 
 good luck in their manned life. On reaching maturity they have to ob- 
 serve numerous regulations. They must eat only dried fish ; they may 
 eat fresh clams. Gooseberries and crab-apples are forbidden, as it is 
 believed that they would injure their teeth. When a girl has left thi; 
 house she must return in such a direction that the sun is at her back 
 when she starts to return, and then walk in the direction the sun is 
 moving. At Victoria the girl, when I'eaching the age of puberty, must 
 take some salmon to a number of large stones not far from the Finlayson 
 Point Battery (see p. 26). This is supposed to make her liberal. She 
 will also visit the hill Pidle'wan, not very far from Cloverdale, on the 
 summit of which is a small pond. She will dip her hand into the water 
 and slowly raise the hollow hand. If she finds some grass, &c., in it she 
 will expect to become rich and a chief's wife, else she will become a poor 
 man's wife. (The name Putle'wan refers to this custom, being derived 
 from tld'pid, to feel around.) Young m. n and women must not live luxu- 
 riously ; then they will become rich in later life. They must not cat 
 while the sun is low, as they believe it to be detrimental to health. Old 
 people may eat at any time. 
 
 Menstruatirg women must not come near sick pei'sons, as they would 
 make them weak (t'lrel). 
 
 The lobes of the ear and iho helix arc perforated while the child is 
 After the operation they have to abstain from fresh fish. Arms 
 
 young. 
 
 Fia. 11.— Tattooing. 
 
 
 and chins of women are tattooed when they reach maturity. T have seen 
 three diverging lines running from the lip downward on the chins of a 
 few old women. Fig. 11 shows designs on the arms and bauds of two 
 
 Ji 
 
 1 
 
 \V( 
 Ul 
 
 so 
 
 pi 
 
 ■i!.! 
 
qucutly 
 
 ihild is 
 Anns 
 
 ii 
 
 ON THE NOKTH-WESTLIlN TUIllE!!: OF CANADA. 
 
 2.'^ 
 
 women of about fifty-five and seventy years oFage. The tattooing is done 
 by women, cbarcoal of bullrushes being introduced under the skin by 
 means of a needle that is held horizontally. 
 
 When a man, particularly a chief's son, wants to many, two old 
 people are sent to the girl's parents to ask for the Lrirl. They arc failed 
 hnlu'ikan. At first the girl's parents refuse. Then the Iri'lii'i'knii arc 
 sent back with a large supply of food which they present to the girl's 
 parent'j. They accept it, but do not eat it. They give it to the dugs. The 
 messengers however, persevere, until the parents give their consent. 
 Then the 3'oung man goes to the girl's house in the evening and sits down 
 near a post, where he remains for four days. When he becomes tired he 
 leaves the house for a short time, but returns to his former place after a 
 icAv minutes. During these days he does not eat, but di-inks a Httle water 
 only. He remains at the post and does not come near the fire. Finally 
 the girl's parents send two old people to lead him to the firo, where a mat 
 is spread for him ; but he must not yet sit near the girl. Her parents 
 prepare a good meal, but he eats very little only, carrying the full dishes 
 to his mother. On the next day he returns home, and his family give 
 ]uany and valuable presents to the girl's father, which are cariied there 
 by young men. They do not go near the fire, but sit down on a place 
 that is offered to common people only, in the middle of the house, or at 
 the foot of a post. The girl's father has the presents piled up in ono 
 corner of the hou.se and pays the messengers. Then the bride is led to 
 the young man. Her father delivers a speech, and gives her presents of 
 the same value as those received from the young man's fathei'. The mes- 
 sengers take the bride to the young man's house. The parents of both 
 husband and wife continue to send presents to each other, and to tliu 
 couple for a long time. The latter are particularly supplied with food by 
 both parents. 
 
 After death the face and the head of the body are painted red, and the 
 female relations of the deceased wail for him. The body is at once taken 
 out of the house through an opening in the wall from which the boards 
 have been removed. Tt is believed that his ghost would kill everyone if 
 the body were to stay in the hou.se. A man who does not belong to the 
 gens of the deceased (?) is engaged and paid for arranging <he burial. 
 He is called mi-li'dir'ngatl. Rich peo})le and chiefs are buried in canoes 
 which are placed under trees ; poor people are wrapped in mats or mouu- 
 tuin-goat avooI blankets (the knees being drawn up to the chin) and [)laced 
 on branches of trees. The body, after being wrapped up, is fre([uently put 
 into a box. It seems that in olden times the body was doubled up and 
 then covered with heavy stones. Such cairns are found all over the 
 south-eastern part of Vancouver Islnnd. The implements of the deceased 
 are deposited close to the body, else his ghost would come and get them. 
 Sometimes even his house is broken down. Two or three days after burial 
 food is burnt near the grave. At times food is set aside for the deceased 
 l)y his friends. After burial the whole tribe go down to the sea, wa.sh 
 their heads, bathe, and cut their hair. The nearer related a person is to 
 the deceased the shorter he cuts his hair. Those who do not belong to the 
 deceased's family merely clip the ends of their luur. The hair that has 
 been cut off is burnt or buried. At a chief's death one or two of liis slaves 
 n.sed to be killed and buried with him. Widow and widower, after tho 
 death of wife or hu.sband, are forbidden to (;ut- their hair, as they would 
 gain too great power over the souls and the welfare of others. 'Ihvy 
 
 m 
 
 i .;. 
 
 ?■■• 
 
 i I 
 
24 
 
 nKPORT — 1890. 
 
 im 
 
 ''.:-i 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 must remair. alone at tlieir tire for a long time, and arc forbidden to 
 mingle with other people. When they eat nobody must see them. They 
 jnust keep their faces covered for ten days. They fast for two days after 
 burial and are not allowed to speak. After two days they may speak a 
 littl(\ but before acklressiug anyoiu' they must go into thj woods and 
 clean themselves in ponds and with cedar-branches. If the) wish to harm 
 an enemy they call his name when taking their first meal after the fast 
 and bite very hard in eating. It is believed that this will kill him. They 
 nmst not go near the water, or eat fresh salmon, as the latter might bo 
 driven away. They must not eat warm food, else their teeth would fall 
 out. The names of deceased persons must not be mentioned. Leviratc is 
 ^iractised. The brother or cousin of a man marries his widow, and a 
 widower marries either his wife's sister or cousin after her death. 
 
 Medicink, Omens, and Belilks. 
 
 Most of the medicines used by the Lku'ngEn have no real relation to 
 the disease for which they are used, but an imaginary one only. In many 
 cases this connection is founded on a certain analogy between a property 
 of the medicine and the desired result. This will become clear after 
 reading the following list. 1 am indebted to Dr. N. L. Britton for the 
 determination of the various plants. 
 
 Sedum spdthulifoUitvi, Hoolc. —The plant is chewed by women iu the 
 ninth month of [)regnancy evey morning to facilitate birth. 
 
 Pteris aquilhia. — Leaves (fii-lcii'n) arc chewed by children. They pro- 
 duce a considerable flow of saliva, which children use for washing their 
 hands before eating fresh salmon. They must not use water for this 
 purpose. The root (sk'u'ijnq) is eaten (sec p. 15). 
 
 JBerheris aqtiifoliuiii {-^li'va'tcasUltc). — The stem is pounded and boiled. 
 The aecoction is drunk as a remedy against skin diseases, particularly 
 against syphilis, and to strengthen the body. The fruits (sk'od'tcas) are 
 eaten raw or boiled. 
 
 Ahies (jrand'is, LindL (skumr'Lk's). — The branches are warmed and 
 applied to the stomach and sides as a remedy against pains of the stomach 
 or sides. 
 
 AsjjidiuDi manitnm, Kaulfiist^ (sqa'lEm). — Spores removed and dried. 
 They form a fine powder, which is put on sores and boils to dry up the 
 flowing pus. 
 
 Si/iiq)hon'rarpt(,~! raiy-mosus, iLichd'. — Fruits rubbed on sores, and applied 
 to the neck (under the chin) as a remedy against sore throat. 
 
 Achillea MiUefolium(tVk-oc'tlh-). — Soaked in water, pounded and used 
 as a poultice on head against headaches. 
 
 Iiaiiu\c Sill ici/ol ins, Wi-iiinuiiDi. — Roots boiled and applied to swellings 
 in form of a poultice. 
 
 Claij '< -a Sihirirn {^<io>i'injili:n). Applied to head as a remedy against 
 headache 
 
 Alnn.^ , ra, Jjomjard {skod'ngalHc), — Fruits burnt to powder, which 
 \>> spread over burns. The cambium {qa'mqam) is scratched from the trco 
 and eaten. 
 
 Rnhus Xiitl,-a n us, Moc. (sk'ulii iiqii' flic) , — The green bcrries(sk'ulri'lEiiu(i) 
 are chewed and spread over swellings. 
 
 Thuja ijiijindea, Nntf. — The inner layer of the bark is pulverised, laid 
 ou swellings, and thou ignited. It burns slowly and serves the purpose 
 
 I 
 
^ 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 2.-, 
 
 I 
 
 /I 
 
 of cauterisation. The bark of a tree named Ir'tleme'ltc is used for tbo 
 Bame purpose. 
 
 Rheumntism. — The skin is scratched with sliarp shells and then 
 rubbed •with either fs^Efgcifltc or h'ti'nitlp. I do not know what plants 
 tliese ai*e. 
 
 Cnrex sp. — Eaten to bi'ing about abortion, oi" when the menses arc 
 irregular. As the edges of the leaves are sharp it is supposed that they 
 will cut and thus kill the embryo, and that they will cut the inside of the 
 woman, thus producing the menses. 
 
 Pujmlus trirhnrnrji'i, S. and Or. (plc'vlctltc). — Fruits pulverised and 
 mixed with fish oil, used as hair oil to make the hair grow. The fruits 
 are found high tip on the tree- a long way up, therefore they will make 
 the hair long. 
 
 Wcisps* lu'st. — Decoction of wasps' nest or of Hies drunk by barren 
 women to make them bear children, as both bring Forth many young. 
 
 Wasps are burnt and the faces of warriors arc rubl)od with the ashes, 
 before they go on a war expedition, to make them brave. Wasps aro 
 warlike insects, and therefore will make the warrior brave like themselves. 
 
 Osmorrhi;:a nuda, Torr. — Roots chewed by girls in spring as a love- 
 charm. The girl first bathes, then chews the roof and rubs the saliva (m 
 her left arms upwards towards the heart, at the same time naming the man 
 whose love she wishes to win. Then she rubs the saliva witli the left Ijand 
 up the right arm towards the heai-t, speaking her own name. She ends 
 the latter motion in such a way that the hand remains above the placo 
 where she put the young man's name. Thus her own name is placed 
 above his and she has conquered him. 
 
 Peiicedanum leiocarpum, Nutt. (h'Eqnic'n). — This plant is one of the 
 most powerful 'medicines.' It is burnt to drive away ghosts. The first 
 salmon of the season are roasted on it, and it is used in carrying them to 
 the house. It is chewed and the juice swallowed as a remedy against 
 cough. A poultice of JcEqme'n is spread on the head to cure headache. 
 
 To spit water on a sick person alleviates his pain. 
 
 Fractured bones are bandaged by means of the outer layer of cedar- 
 bark. In complicated fractures the splinters of bone are first removed, 
 then the limb is bandaged. 
 
 Rattlesnake poison is obtained by trade fi-om the tribes on the upper 
 I'^raser River and on Thompson River. A powder of human bones is 
 drunk as an antidote. 
 
 Omens. — Sneezing, ringing of the ear, 1 witching of muscles on right 
 side are good omens, on loft side bad omens. These also mean that j)eople 
 arc speaking good or ill of the per.son according as the sensation is felt on 
 the right or the left side. When one feels a weight on the breast or a 
 fluttering of the heart, or when one must sigh, it indicates tliat sumetliing 
 ill will happen to a relative or friend. When the lower eyelid twitches 
 it indicates that one will weep. When an owl ali<j:hts near a house and 
 
 moves but little, husband or wife will 
 
 UK'. 
 
 When a larjje owl cries near 
 
 the village, someone will die. To dream something ill of someone meau.'i 
 that he will have bad luck. 
 
 Au arrow or any other weapon which has wounded a man must 
 be hidden, and care must be taken that it is not brought near the fire 
 until the wound is healed. If a knife or an arrow which is still covered 
 with blood of a man is thrown into the fire the wounded man will become 
 very ill. 
 
 ■ i 
 
 n 
 
 I,: 
 
 !i 
 
26 
 
 REPORT— 1890. 
 
 W 
 
 I 
 
 
 Menstruatiug women must keep away fi-om sick persons, or else the 
 latter will become weak. 
 
 There are a number of large stones not far from * tlie Battery ' in 
 Victoria; when they arc moved it becomes wiudy. If a man desires a 
 «!ertaiu wind he moves one stone u vci-y little fiom its place, each stone 
 representing one wind. If he should move it too much the wind would 
 be very strong. 
 
 Certain herbs which secure good luck are fastened to the door of the 
 house. 
 
 Gamblers use tiiesamc method to secure good luck. All these charms 
 must be kept secret, and nobody must know what the charm of a man is, 
 else it would lose its power. 
 
 Dreams come true. If one dreams of some futui-e events that seem 
 highly desirable, they will not come to pass if one speaks about the dream. 
 
 Secket Societies. 
 
 The Lku ngEii have two secret societies : the Tcyiyl'wan and the 
 QEnqanl'ti;l (= dog-howlers). Any member of the tribe may join the 
 Tcyiyi'wau. For this purpose he goes into the woods and stays there for 
 some time, continually bathing in lakes and washing his body with cedar- 
 branches. The novice is called Qausa'lokutl. Finally ho dreams of the 
 dance which he is to perform and the song he is to sing. In his dream 
 his soul is led all over the world by the spirit who gives him his dance 
 and his song. Then he returns to the village. According to what he has 
 dreamt he belongs to one of five societies which constitute the Tcyiyl'wan: 
 (1) the Sk'e'iep, who dance with their elbows pressed to the body, the 
 arms extended forward and continually moving up and down ; (2) the 
 Nuqaoa'wek'a, who jump around in wild movements ; Qi) the Sk'a'k'oatl, 
 who dance in a slow movement ; (4) the Sk'oie'lec, whose dance is similar 
 to that of the Sk'e'iep ; and (5) the Tcilk'tE'nEii (derived from fcd'lok', 
 woods). The general name of the dances of the '. cyiyi'wan is Me'itla, 
 which word is borrowed fi'om the Kwakiutl. When the novice retuinis 
 from the woods he teaches his song to the members of the society to 
 which he is to belong for two days. Then the dance is performed, and 
 henceforth h j is a regular member of the secret society. 
 
 The QEnqani'tEl, the second secret society, are also called Tlokoa'la 
 andNo'ntliom, although the first name is the proper Lku'ngEu term. The 
 Ijku'figEn say that they obtained the secrets of this society from the 
 Nootka, and this is undoubtedly true. I pointed out in my last report 
 that the secret societies which we find on the North Pacific coast evidently 
 spread from the Kwakiutl people. The facts collected on the southern 
 end of Vancouver Island corroborate this opinion. The names Tlokoa'la 
 and No'ntlKm both belong to the Kwakiutl language, and are also used 
 by the Nootka to designate their winter dances (see p. 47). The secrets of 
 these societies spread from the Nootka to the Lku'figEn, Tla'lam, and the 
 tribes of Puget Sound. The Tc'a'tEtlp, a sept of the Sanitch tribe, also 
 have the N6'ntli;m ; while the Snanai'muQ, the Cowitchin, and the tribes 
 of Fraser River have not got it. The Comox and Pentlatch obtained it 
 through intermarriage with both the Kwakiutl and the Nootka. The 
 right to perform the No'ntlEm is jealously guarded by all tribes who 
 possess it, and many a war has been waged against tribes who illegiti- 
 mately performed the cex'emonies of the society. Its mystei'ies were kept 
 
 41 
 
ON THE NOUlH-WliSlERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 27 
 
 the 
 
 the 
 
 
 a profound Hecret, and, if a man dared to spoak about it he was torn to 
 pieces by the K'nk*k"'iVlEn, about whom I have to speak presently. Only 
 rich people can become members of tiie QEuqani'tKl, as heavy payments 
 are exacted ;tt the initiation. If the I'atlicr of the novice is not abh; to 
 pay them, his relatives must contribute to the amount re(|uirud. The 
 initiation and the fe^tivalsuf this .society take place in winter only. When 
 a young man is to be initiated his father Hrst invites the Qt;nqani'tt;l to 
 a feast which lasts tive days. J^uriug these days mask dances are per- 
 formed, which i.iiu^iu wliu are not iiiembers of the society arc also per- 
 mitted to witness. They occupy one side of the house in which the 
 festivities take place, while the (^Kn(|anl'ti;l occupy the other. The latter 
 wear head-ornaments of cedar-bark and have their hair strewn with down. 
 The faces of all those who take part in the festival ai-e blackened. At the 
 end of these days the father of the novice invites four men to bathe his 
 son in the sea. One of them must wash his body, one must wash his 
 head, and the two others hold him. In return they receive one or two 
 blankets each. During this ceremony the K'uk'k''e'li:n, who are described 
 aa ' wild men,' dance ai'ound the novice. They have ropes tied around 
 their waists, and are held by other members of the society by these ropes. 
 Then the QKiiijani'tKl lead the novice into the woods, where ho remains 
 for a long time, until he meets the spirit who initiates him. It seems that 
 during this time he is secretly led to the house in which the QEuqani'tEl 
 eontiii e to celebrate festivals at the expense of the novice's father, and 
 there he is taught the secrets of the society. During this time, until the 
 return of the novice from the woods, the house is tabooed. A watchman 
 is stationed at the entrance, who keeps out uninitiated persons. During 
 the absence of the novice his mother prepares cedar-bark ornaments and 
 weaves mountain-goat blankets for his use. One afternoon he returns, 
 and then his father gives a feast to let the people know that his child has 
 returned. The latter performs his first dance, in which he uses masks 
 and cedar-bark ornaments. This dance is called NuqnEii'mEu. On this 
 day the father must distribute a great number of blankets among the 
 QEuqani'tEl. The uninitiated are permitted to take part in the fetust, and 
 sit on one side of the house. The new member spends all his nights in 
 the woods, where he bathes. In spring the new member, if a man, is 
 thrown into the sea, and after that is free from all regulations attending 
 the initiation. One of the principal regulations regarding novices of the 
 QEnqani'tEl is that they must return from the woods in the direction in 
 which the sun is moving, starting so that the sun is at their backs. There- 
 fore they must sometimes go in roundabout ways. They must go back- 
 ward through doors which are stlJ'lidram against them (see below). 
 Frequently the si'oua is called to bespeak the door in tlicir behalf before 
 they pass through it. Before their dance the si'oua must also address the 
 earth, as it is supposed that else it might open and swallow up the dancer. 
 It is also stl'i'li':Irani. against the novice. The expression used is that the 
 earth would 'open its eyes' {k'li'inilaxEn), ihiit means, swallow the novice. 
 J 11 oi'der to avert this danger the si'oua must ' give name to the earth ' and 
 strew red paint and feathers over the place where the novice is to dance. 
 
 ?-V 
 
 RELKaON AND ShAMANISM, 
 
 All the tribes of the Coast Salish, from Comox to Puget Sound, 
 believe in the Great Transformer, who is called KumsnO'otl (=our elder 
 
 .< ■ 
 
M. 
 
 n •' 
 
 U' 
 
 2A 
 
 UEroRT— -1890. 
 
 ' < 
 
 brother) by ilic ^atlo'ltq of Coraox, (^d'ia ^)y the Sk'qo'mic and Qiils by 
 all other tribes. Tho Lku'ngKn pray to him, and expect that ho will 
 again descend from heaven at some future time and ap;aiu wander all over 
 the oartli, punishing tlii; bad. Their dances are said to be performed to 
 please him. Although it seems probable that there exists some connection 
 between Qiils and the sun, I have found no clear evidence showing this to be 
 the case. It is said that Qiils made the sun and the moon. The Snanai'rauQ, 
 who are closely related to the Lku'ngKn, and whose customs are very nmch 
 the same as those of tho liku'ngKn, worship the gun and pray to him. 
 Traces of sun-worship may be found among the Lkn'ngEn in the cnstom of 
 ytmng girls and boys avoiding to cat until the sun is liigh up in tho 
 sky, in the si'oua offering her prayers towards sunrise, and in tho regula- 
 tion that novices and menstruating girls must go homeward in a direction 
 following the course of the sun. 
 
 Animism underlies the religious ideas of the LkungEn, as well as 
 those of all other North American Indians. Animals are endowed with 
 superhuman powers, and inanimate objects are considei-ed animate. Trees 
 are considered transformed men. The creaking of the limbs is their 
 voice. Animals, as well as the spirits of inanimate objects, but ])r!nci- 
 pally the former, can become the genii of men, who thus acquire super- 
 natural powers. A peculiar conception is what is called stid'h-lrani. 
 This is as well the protective genius of a man, as a supernatural being 
 whose power is directed against a man. Therefore it seems to express 
 the relation of man to supernatural powers. Certain occupations or 
 actions are forbidden to mourners, parents of new-born childi'en, men- 
 struating women, shamans, novices of secret societies, and dancei-s 
 because certain objects are dla/lEk'am against them. The door and the 
 earth, as being stld'lEk'am, were mentioned in a foi'egoing paragraph. 
 In dreams the soul leaves the body and wanders all over the wox'ld. Tho 
 soul after deatb retains human shape and becomes a ghost. Shamans 
 are able to see ghosts. Their touch causes sickness. They make those 
 who have not regarded the regulations regarding food and work mad. 
 Their touch paralyses man. When one feels afraid, being alone in tho 
 woods or in the dark, it is a sign that a ghost is near. They know who 
 is going to die, and approach the villages early in the evening to take tho 
 soul of the dying person away. In order to drive the ghosts away the 
 people cry q, q ! beat the walls of the houses with sticks, and burn Pewe- 
 ilaimvi Idocarpum, Nutt., to drive them off. Some people believe indivi- 
 dually that the soul of a man may be bom again in his grandchild. 
 
 There are two classes of conjurers or shamans, the higher oi'der being 
 that of the i^dun'i'am, the lower that of the sl'nua. The si'oua is generally 
 a woman. It seems tliat her art is not acquired by intercourse with 
 spirits, but it is taught. The principal function of the si'oua is that of 
 appeasing hostile powers. It is believed that certain objects are hostile 
 to man, or to man in certain conditions ; for instance, to mourners, to 
 menstruating women, to shamans, dancers, and novices of secret societies. 
 These hostile powers may be appeased by the si'oua bespeaking them in 
 a sacred language. The words of this language are handed down from 
 one si'oua to the other, and heavy payments are exacted for instruction. 
 Thei'e is not one si'oua left among the Lku'ngEn, and ray endeavours to 
 leai'u any of the words of this language were consequently vain. The 
 same means are used for endowing men or parts of the body, weapons, &c. 
 with special power. This is called • to give a name to an object ' (for 
 
 ( 
 t 
 
 i 
 
 
 '" i 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTEHN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 29 
 
 
 instance, /.•*c77j?,'?, to give a name to the door, see p. 27), )t(7.<fi'/(/c///,?, or 
 Ic^cE'nEtEs, to give a name to a man). The si'oua gives a name to the hotly 
 (naii<ih''ku>^tf't!) to enable man to go easy, that means, to be able-bodied 
 and strong. She invokes good fortune by going down to the beach at, 
 the time of sunrise and at the time oi' sunset, and, looking eastward, slie 
 dips her hands into the water, sprinkles a few drops upward, and blows 
 II few putls of air eastward. She is able to cure such diseases as are not 
 duo to the absence of the soul from the body. Slie rubs the sick person 
 with cedar-bark, paints his face red, aud blows some puffs of air iipwai'd. 
 The sick one must fast all day, and at sunset she goes to the beach and 
 talks towards sunrise in the sacred language. She is applied to by 
 women who desii-e to bear children. They are given decoctions of wnsps' 
 nests and flics, as both lay many eggs. She also helps women to l)ring 
 about abortion. For this purpose she kneads the belly of the woman in 
 the second month of pregnancy. Her hands and the skin of the belly 
 are made more pliable by means of tallow and grease. She also lets tho 
 woman lift heavy loads and eat leaves of a species of Carex, which have 
 very sharp edges, that they may cut the embryo (see p. 25). For a love- 
 charm she rubs girls with cedar-bark, and in the same way she restores 
 the lost affection of a husband. When a man has been absent for a long 
 time on a hunting expedition, and his friends fear that some accident 
 may have befallen him, they call the si'oua, who stretches out her hands 
 to where he has gone. If, on doing so, she feels a pressure on her breast, 
 something has happened to the absent man ; if she does not feel anything 
 he is safe. All these practices of the si'oua are accompanied by incan- 
 tations in her peculiar langiiage and by dances and dancing songs. Tn 
 dancing she holds her arras on both sides of the body, the elbows not far 
 from the waist, the hands upright, the palms forward, approximately on 
 a level with the head. Her hands are trembling while she dances. I 
 collected one of these songs, sung by the Fiku'rigEn sloua, but the words 
 being in the Cowitchin language : — 
 
 La • ma • tla-ta QWe-ma ■ Ha-qan ho - ye • yu ■ 6 h5 -ye - ye • e. 
 
 The Lku'ngEn equivalent of these words is : K'n'nEttsF.Q qtEiigf.'k'Eu, i.e., 
 see her (the si'oua) noAV going along. 
 
 The sQunii'avi, the shaman, is more powerful than the si'oua. He is 
 able to see the soul and to catch it when it has left the body and its 
 owner is sick. A man becomes a sQnnii'am by intercourse with super- 
 natural powers. Only a youtli who has never touched a woman, or a 
 virgin, both being called tc'ij'ifs, can become s^ -.-.ans. After having had 
 sexual intercourse, men as well as women become t'k'c'el, i.e., weak, 
 incapable of gaining supernatui-al powers. The faculty cannot be regained 
 by subsequent fasting and abstinence. The novice goes into the woods, 
 where he bathes and cleans himself with cedar-branches (k^/atcd'set). 
 He sleeps in the woods until he dreams of his guardian spirit, who 
 bestows supernatural power upon him. This spirit is called the trk-\l'yin, 
 and corresponds to what is known as the famanowus in the Chinook 
 jargon, and ' medicine * east of the Rocky Mountains. Generally the 
 iVk'Wyin is an animal, for instance a bear, a wolf, or a mink. This 
 
so 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 ■ 'i 
 
 li 
 
 
 
 animal is henceforth, as it were, a relation of the shaman, and helps him 
 whenever he is in need of help. Ho is not allowed to speak about his 
 tl'k-'d'ijin, not even to say what shape it has. When he returns from the 
 woods the shaman is able to euro diseases, to see and to catch souls, &c. 
 The best tinu^ of th<( day for curing disease is at nightfall. A nnmbor of 
 ])eopl(' are invited to attend thc^ ceremonies. The patient is deposited 
 near the fire, tlie guests sit around him. Then they begin to sing and 
 beat time with sticks. The shaman (who uses no rattle) has a cup of 
 water standing next to him. Ho takes a mouthful, blows it into his 
 hands, and sprinkles it over the sick person. Then he applies his mouth 
 to the place where the disease is supposed to bo and sucks at it. As 
 soon as he has finished sucking, he produces a piece of deer-skin or the like, 
 as though he had extracted it from the body, and whioli is supposed to 
 have produced the sickness. If the soul of the sick person is supposed 
 to be absent from the body the shaman sends his trir'ii'yiii (not liis 
 soul) in search. The trirWyiii brings it, and then the shaman takes it 
 and puts it on the vertex of the patient, whence it returns into his 
 body. These performances are accompanied by a dance of the shaman. 
 Before the dance the si'oua mu.st ' give name to the earth,' which else 
 would swallow the shaman. When acting as a conjurer for sick persons 
 he must keep away from his wife, as else his powers might be interfered 
 with. He never treats members of his own family, but engages another 
 shaman for this purpose. It is believed that he cannot cure his own 
 relatives. Rich persons sometimes engage a shaman to look after their 
 welfare. 
 
 The shaman is able to harm a person as well as to cure him. Ho 
 causes sickness by throwing a piece of deer-skin, or a loop made of a 
 thong, on to his enemy. If someone has an enemy whom he wants 
 to harm he endeavours to obtain some of his saliva, perspiration, or 
 hair, the latter being the most powerful means, particularly when taken 
 from the nape or from the crown of the head. This he gives to the 
 shaman without saying to whom it belongs, and pays him for bewitching 
 it. I did not learn the method of treating these excretions of the enemy's 
 body, except that the performance takes place at nighttime. Then 
 the man to whom the saliva, perspiration, or hair belongs undergoes 
 cramps and fits. The sQuna'am, as well as the si'oua, may take the 
 soul of an enemy and shoot it with arrows or with a gun, and thus 
 kill their enemy. If a man is 'too proud and iusolinl ' the doctor 
 will harm him by simply looking at him. It is told of ore shaman that 
 he made p..ople sick by giving them chaiTed human bores to eat. 
 
 The third function of the shaman is to detect evil-doers, particularly 
 thieves, and enemies who made a person sick by employing a shaman. 
 They solve this task by the help of their tl'k'a'yin. When it is assumed 
 or proved that a man has caused the sickness of another the latter 
 or his relatives may kill the evil-doer. 
 
 II. THE NOOTKA. 
 
 Our knowledge of the Nootka is not so deficient as that of most other 
 tribes of British Columbia, as their customs have been described very 
 fully by G. M. Sproat in his book * Scenes and Studies of Savage Life ' 
 (London, 1868). The descriptions given in the book ai'e lively and 
 
 4 
 
ON THK NOnTII-WWTKnN TRIDrs OP CANADA. 
 
 31 
 
 trustworthy, so far as they are founded upon the author's own ohscrva- 
 tions; but unfortunately he lias not always referred to his informants, 
 so that it is impossible to distinguish what he has observed himself 
 from what he has learnt from hearsay. The linguistic part of his 
 book is taken almost bodily from an anonymous work by a Catholic 
 missionary, named Knip|)iiig, ' Some Account of the Tahkaht Langna^'o 
 as spoken by several tribes on the Western (!oast of Vancronver rsland ' 
 (London, I8G8), which latter book has remained almost unknown. 'I'lu! 
 power of observation exhibited in the descriptions of the author, how- 
 evei', is not to 'x' depreciated, f coTifino myself in my description to 
 recording the nt v facts that I have observed or learnt by inquiries 
 among the older Indians. 
 
 The Nootka consist of twenty-two tribes, the names of whicti are 
 derived from the names of the districts they inhabit. The tribes speak 
 closely allied dialects of the same language. North of Barclay Scnind 
 the changes of dialect are so gradual that it is impossible to draw any 
 distinct lines between them. It seems that the dialects of Cape Flattery 
 and of Nitinat Sound are also very closely affiliated. Thus it appears that 
 the tribes of the Nootka stock may be divided into three groups speaking 
 distinct dialects, but all intelligible to each other, The following is a list 
 of these twenty-two tribes : — 
 
 1. Tla'asath= outside people 
 
 2. Patcina'ath 
 
 3. Ni'tinath . 
 
 Cape Flattery. 
 San Juan Harbour 
 Nitinat Sound. 
 
 ffm 
 
 I 
 
 II. 4. HO'aiath .... 
 5. Hilutou'ktles'ath 
 G. Eku'lath=bushes on hill people 
 
 7. Hatca'ath .... 
 
 8. Ts'eca'ath .... 
 
 9. Tok'oa'ath .... 
 10. Hopetcisa th 
 
 III. 11. YuthVlath 
 
 I 
 
 Barclay Sound. 
 
 Northern entrance 
 Barclay Sound. 
 
 12. Tlao'kwiath . . : 
 
 13. K'eltsraa'athrr rhubarb people 
 
 14. A'hausath ....*- 
 
 15. Ma'noosath = houses on spit 
 
 people. ' 
 
 16. He'ckwiath 
 
 17. Mo'atcath .... 
 
 18. Mo'tclath .... 
 
 19. Nutca'tlath 
 
 20. E'hatisath .... 
 
 21. Kayo'kath . . . . \ 
 
 22. To'e'ktlisath=large cut in bay [North of Nootka Sound. 
 
 people. / 
 
 (Tlahosath). 
 
 Clayoquaht Sound. 
 
 Nootka Sound, 
 
 I have given the last name in parentheses, as 
 I did not hear anything about this tribe, which 
 
 even on special inquiry 
 is the last iu Sproat's 
 
mp 
 
 111: 
 
 32 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 list, but is not containec! in that of Knipping. The lilku'lath and 
 Hatcfi'ath are not contained in the former lists. The Rku'lath have 
 greatly decreased in nuraboi's and therefore joined the Ts't-ca'ath ; the 
 HactVath have become extinct. The tribes of Barclay Sound claim that 
 the Hopetcisfi'th did i ,u belong originally to the Nootka people, but that 
 they wore assimilated when the Ts'eca'ath migrated up Alberni Channel 
 and settl(>d in the uppci part of this region, whitih event is said to have 
 taken \)h\('e less than a rontnry ago. The Hopctcisa'th, who at that time 
 inhabited the head of Alijcrni Channel and Sproat Lake, are said to have 
 spoken the Nanaimo language. I have tried to find any traces of that 
 language in local names, but have been unsuccessful. It is trne that the 
 natives do not understand the meaning of most of the names of places ; 
 but, on the other hand, I have not found any that can be referred to the 
 Nanaimo language. A number of men of the age of about fifty years 
 afllrm that their grandfathers did not know the Nootka language, but 
 spoke Nanaimo, and that their fathers still knew a number of words of 
 the old language. It may be mentioned in this connection that the 
 vocabulary contains a few words borrowed from the Nanaimo. The 
 traditions and totems of the Hopetcisa'th bear out their claim that they 
 originally lived in the interior of the island, and did not visit the mouth 
 of Barclay Sound (see below). I have not succeeded in finding any 
 evidence of this change of language except the unanimous assertions of 
 the natives. 
 
 The single tribes ai'e subdivided into septs, which seem to correspond 
 very closely to the gentes of the Coast Salish, as described in the first 
 section of this report. I obtained lists of the septs of three tribes, the 
 Ts'eca'ath, the Hopetcisa'th, and the Tok'oa'ath. 
 
 1. Septs of the Ts'eca'ath. 
 
 1. Ts'eca'ath 
 
 2. NE'c'asath 
 
 3. NEtcimu'asath . 
 
 4. WaninEa'th 
 
 5. Ma'ktl'aiath . 
 0. Tla'sEnuesath . 
 
 7. Ha'meyisath 
 
 8. Ku'tssEmhaath . 
 
 9. Kuai'ath .... 
 
 . Crest : Wolf. 
 „ Whale. 
 „ Thunder- bird. 
 „ Snake. 
 „ Crab. 
 „ Aia'tlk'e. 
 „ Sea-otter. 
 „ Tc'ene'ath. 
 ,, Whale and man 
 
 II. Septs of the Hopetcisa'th. Crest : Bear, wolf. 
 
 1. Mo'hotl'ath. 
 
 2. Tl'i'kutath. 
 
 3. Tso'raos'ath. 
 
 III. Septs of the Tok'oa'ath. 
 
 
 1. Tok'oa'ath. 
 
 2. Maa'koath. 
 
 3. Wa'stsauEk. 
 
 4. To'tak-amayaath. 
 T). Tsa'ktsak'oath. 
 
 7. Tuckis'a'th. 
 
 8. Kohatsoatb. 
 
 9. Tc'e'oatc'aath. 
 
 10. MEtsto'asath. 
 
 11. Tco'maath. 
 
 C. Mu'ktciatb. 
 
 ! 
 
 The septs as given here are arranged according to rank, the highest 
 

 ■^■ir^ 
 
 ] 
 
 ON THE NOUTII-WESTKRN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 33 
 
 Fk;. ]-2. 
 
 — Upiiglit in house of the 
 T.s'ecri'ath irens. 
 
 in rank bein^ given first. Tlic wliolo tribe possesses its territory in 
 common. Tiiere seem to be no sabdivisions of territory belongings to 
 tlie varions septs. In some instances tlie tribal boundaries are marked 
 on the coast by some rock of singular shape. Thus a large rock resting 
 on two boulders at Vob Point, Barclay 
 Hound, marks a tribal boundary. It does 
 not seem that artificial monuments were 
 made for this purpose. Kacli sept has a 
 chief whose authority is !'cstricted to his 
 sept. Only the chief of the sept that is 
 highest in rank exercises some limited 
 authority over the whole tribe. What- 
 ever is found adrift on the sea, as canoes, 
 paddles, &c., in his territory must be de- 
 livered to him, and he has to give a pre- 
 sent for the same to the finder. Animals 
 fi'und adrift are excluded from this rule. 
 When a sept goes on a hunting expedition 
 the chief, if he has not a suflBcient number 
 of canoes, rents them from other septs 
 and pays the crews. The affairs of the 
 tribe are discussed and decided in a coun- 
 cil, in whi -li only the chiefs of the septs 
 take part. It is called Icl'mitl. They de- 
 cide all important affairs of the tribe, peace 
 and war, marriages of chiefs' daughters 
 and sons, &c. The council also appoint 
 theherald or orator of the ix-ihe(hi'k'.^<ik'n), 
 whose services are required In all festivals 
 given by the tril)al chief and in negotia- 
 tions with other tribes. The decisions of 
 the council are kept secret. Chiefs alone 
 are allowed to hunt whales and to act as 
 harpooners. This accounts for the obser- 
 vation of Sproat that the right of whaling 
 and the office of harpooner ai'e hereditary 
 (p. 116). Chiefs alone are allowed to give 
 ' potlatches.' Each sept has names that 
 belong exclusively to its members. The 
 chief and the chief's wife of each sept 
 have always a certain name. 1 give here the chief's names of the 
 Ts'eca ath tribe : — 
 
 Sopt 
 
 1. Ts'eca'ath 
 
 2. NK'c'asath . 
 I). NKtcimiVasath 
 4. Wanini:a'tli . 
 T). Ma'ktl'aiath . 
 C). Tla'sKiiuesath 
 7. lia'meyisath . 
 ^. Kn'tssKndiaatli 
 i>. Kuai ath 
 
 Cliiff 
 WihsusK'uEp 
 Ni/c'asath . 
 Ilitatlu'ksois 
 Ilaihaiyu'p . 
 Tlaayuih 
 T'a'psit 
 T'ra'tsr.is . 
 Ma'mak'ha'ni'k 
 Kuai'iith 
 
 3 
 
 chi.r.s wi(V' 
 
 Ts'eeia'aks. 
 NKc'a'saksup. 
 Ilo'pkusliiak .4. 
 Ilai'nakautl. 
 IJayiVportl. 
 Tc't-'itlK'tiii:k\ 
 Hiii'kwis. 
 llaia'ntl. 
 Kiiai aksup. 
 H 
 
 ^.fi 
 
 ~l\ 
 
^;* 
 
 34 
 
 iiEroRT — 1890. 
 
 The cliiof of the sept, on assuming liis position, must take tlie 
 ^appropriate name according to the se])t to which he may behing; l)nt in 
 course of time, wlien he gives a great ' pothitch,' he is allowed to 
 assume another name. As soon as the chiefs name has thus become 
 
 Flfi. 18. — Uiiri'jlit in limiso of (lio 'J'.s'rufratli pens. 
 
 |v '■. 
 
 1 
 
 m 
 
 rim 
 
 1 
 
 
 t. 
 
 free, another man of the same sept will talce it up. However, no one 
 wlio does not 1 elong to (ho chief's family is allowed to assume a chief's 
 name. 'Plitis it htippens that any member of the chief's family may, at 
 the time of thi> eliiel's demise, have the name of tlu) chief of the sept. 
 
 i 
 
ko the 
 
 l)nt in 
 
 ved to 
 
 jccomo 
 
 o ono 
 
 iliief's 
 
 ay, at 
 
 sept. 
 
 ON THE nortii-we8tf:rn iribes of can aha. 
 
 :\5 
 
 Ife is tlicn ennipolled to 2;ivo it nj) and take a new name on tlie 
 accession of the new cliief. 1 give here a few other names tluit a chief or 
 a member of a cliief's family may assume : 
 
 Ts'eeri'ath names: Xonetli'qsenEp. 
 
 NE'c'asath 
 
 11 
 
 Niiwe'ck. 
 
 
 Ni:tcimu'asath 
 
 M 
 
 Tiiise'sem. 
 
 
 WaninEa'th 
 
 )) 
 
 J If'inis ofv. 
 
 
 Ma'ktl'aiath 
 
 9? 
 
 JTaynaiie. Yahkoyap, 
 
 T'e'yukuit. 
 ^lamali'is (female). 
 
 Teihmatlne, 
 
 Kuai'ath 
 
 M 
 
 'I'liipr'i. 
 
 
 Fk;. It. — Piiiiitinc: on house of tlio N'K'iiTisatli eliict'. 
 
 Tt is stated that tli< '(.'s'eca'ath luid the privilege to hunt fur-seals. 
 Each sept has an .ii"'ma; ''o'- is crest, as shown in the list of septs of tho 
 Ts'eca'ath, to the names oi which that of their crest has ))een added. 
 The crests do not play by far so importatit a part as in the social 
 institutions of the Kwakiutl and of the other tribes living farther north. 
 Tlie crest is only used in the ' potlatches ' and in the secret society Tsa'yek', 
 as will be described later on. We find, however, paintings and carvings 
 on many houses which are ui the same way connected with the legends 
 of the sept, as v\ " -> de>!oribed in my former report when treating of the 
 Kwakiutl. Fi<.'-, ■ .: .shows one of the uprights in the house lu'longinc 
 to the chief of tav T '^''ca'ath. ft repi-esents the fabulous ancestor of this 
 sept, who is saiJ o h !ve dcsceuch.'d from heaven. Fig. 1:? shows 
 another support of tho main beam of the same house. It represents a 
 \n?n who is about to Imrl a, stone, a gaine which is always played at the 
 bej/inning of a ' potlatch.' The whale shown in lig. It is painted . n a 
 'i .V loards on the outside of a house belonging to a chief of the NKc'iisatli 
 ."•cp^. 
 
36 
 
 JEPOllT — 1890. 
 
 
 The Potlatch. 
 
 l| 
 
 i 
 i 
 
 ^'\ i 
 
 The custom of jriving Threat feasts, at which a large amount of pro- 
 perty is (listributoLl, is common to the Nootka and all their neighbours. 
 The principle underlying tha potlatch is that each man who has received 
 a present becomes, to do ible the amount lie received, the debtor of 
 the giver. Pot latches are celebrated at all important events. The 
 purchase-money of a wife belongs to this class also, as it is returned to the 
 purchaser after a certain lapse of time (see below). After the death 
 ot' a chief, his heir is not installed in his dignity until he has given a 
 great potlatch. If he is to be the chief of the whole tribe the neighbour- 
 ing tribes are invited to take part in the potlatch. The taking of a name 
 and that of a dance (see p. 4H) are also celebrated by a potlatch. This 
 custom is practically the same among all the tribes of the north-west 
 coast. When a chief has to give a gr. . i potlatch to a neighbouring 
 tribe, he announces his intention, and the v "esolve in council when 
 the festival is to be given. A messenger is Sc at to give notice of the 
 intention of the chief to hold a potlatch at the ugreed time. When all 
 preparations have been tinished, and the time lias come, another 
 messenger, called ia'fsetl, is sent out to invite the guests to come to the 
 festival. The guests come in their canoes, and when not far from the 
 village they halt and dress up at their nicest, smearing their faces with 
 tfillow and then painting with red colour. Then the canoes proceed to 
 the village in grand procession, their bows b"i:,g abreast. At this time 
 certain songs are snng, each tribe having its own song. When they are 
 seen to approach, the tribe who have invited them go down to the beach. 
 The chief's son or daughter is attired in the dress and mask of the crest 
 animal of the sept, and performs a dance in honour of the guests. The 
 ia'tf^etl next calls the name of the head chief of the visitors, and he comes 
 ashoi'o. Then the others are called according to rank. They are leJ 
 into the chief's house, after having received one or two blankets when 
 landing. On entering the house they are also given n. few blmkets. 
 The guests are feasted first by the chief and then by all other members 
 of the tribe who can afford it. Finally, after a number of feasts have 
 been given, the chief prepares for the potlatch, and under great cere- 
 monies and dances the blankets are distributed aiuong the guests, each 
 receiving according to his rank. At the potlatch certiiin songs are snng. 
 Each chief has a song of his own that is only sung at his feasts. Here is 
 the song of the Ts'eca'ath sept, sung when its chief gives a potlatch : — 
 
 Soln. 
 
 Gwrus. 
 
 i: 
 
 9'^ 
 
 -=*-^-iJ-iir-L-:5)r-:i)r^.-iJ-i_-='-iJ-i.-^ 
 
 Hri-wa-wi 
 
 na - yi hfi - wu-wi - nil - yi 
 
 ha • wa - \vi - na - yi 
 
 X a 
 
 eating *^>^^^^h>q^^^ 
 
 Ac' 
 
 ' Thi- 'natons \i«f'd in Invuinp tinio arc raised at ilie heavy parts of tlic bar: this 
 fU'CdiiDls I'ci' I he piculiar rhyilini given above. 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 37 
 
 na 
 
 na - tciktc 
 
 wiii 
 
 :^z::^=q: 
 
 :iq.. 
 
 p'a 
 
 tcltl 
 
 hfuitl 
 
 :v-g: 
 
 \V1 
 
 na 
 
 
 -P- 
 
 :3z::^: 
 p'a 
 
 iim 
 
 tcektc wiii 
 
 \) a 
 
 tcC'ktc wiii 
 
 ~-=^T±-\ 
 
 he 
 
 ho 
 
 I.e., Ha ! Boats arc coming. He will givo again blankets to the chief rf among the 
 
 coming boats. He will give blankets. 
 
 After the death of a chief this song is sung ; but after tliat the people 
 are forbidden to use it for one year, when the potlatcli is given in which 
 the succeeding chief assumes his dignity. Among the gifts bestowed at 
 a potlatch is the right to perform certain non-religious dances that are 
 only danced at such feasts. In such cases the original owner retains the 
 right to the dance, although he has gi mi the same right to a friend. In 
 this respect the customs of the Nootka di fer from those of the Kwakiutl, 
 among whom a man who gives away the right to perform a dance loses 
 the right to pei-form the same. I will give an instance showing the way 
 in which a certain dance may be passed from tribe to tribe. The 
 Kayo'kath have a tradition that at one time their chief when hunting met 
 a man who hac! descended from heaven beside a small lake on one of the 
 ishmds near Kayo'kath. The man had ten months, each of different shape, 
 which he showed in succession. He asked the chief whether he desired 
 to have always a plentiful supply of salmon. The latter replied that he 
 did not need any salmon, as his people used to gather an abundant supply 
 of mussels, which had red flesh as well as the salmon, and that conse- 
 quently he had no use for the latter. Then the stranger made the pond 
 dry up, and ever since that time there have been no salmon at Kayo'kath. 
 The chief, in memory of this encounter, danced in potlatches with the 
 mask representing the many-mouthed being. He dances behind a cur- 
 tain, only the upper part of his body being visible; now and then he will 
 stoop down, so as to become quite invisible, and then reappear with 
 another mouth. Here is his song : — ' 
 
 
 l=pz::: 
 
 'M 
 
 — hi 
 
 yii a 
 
 na 
 
 wai 
 
 hei 
 
 
 wai 
 w&i 
 
 tc'e 
 a 
 
 tci - mi - si 
 A - ta - ho 
 
 ma 
 
 ic 
 
 fee 
 a 
 
 ' I heard the song sung by a very poor singer. Tlie rhythms are probably correct, 
 the intervals very doubtful. 
 
w 
 
 
 I ^n 
 
 
 l'!i 
 l<^^l 
 
 38 
 
 RKl'OUT — 1890. 
 
 <e z:s=;i;^5-L-i'3=*-t=^-3= 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 :qr=i;^ 
 
 ik'' - su-iiiat iiiil - yv 
 yv ■ site lia - witl-iiu"' 
 
 IS 
 
 is 
 
 ya 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 nil 
 nfi 
 
 hG 
 he 
 
 hG 
 hG 
 
 ^^1: 
 
 hG- 
 hG- 
 
 
 „.»« 
 
 ■■ 1 i* 
 
 ; ; 
 
 1 
 
 ' J - 
 
 - J 
 
 EiE?E=:ks£EiEi 
 
 
 a 
 
 nu 
 na 
 
 wai 
 wai 
 
 hGi 
 hGi 
 
 hu. 
 hG. 
 
 Flii. 15. 
 
 I.e., Get ready, uU }uu tribes. He says my property will be rushed clown the river. 
 
 Tho cliit'f of tlio Kaju'kath gave this song to the Alian'sath at a pot- 
 latch, who, ill their tiini, gave it a.s a present (o the Ts'GMfi'atli cliief. It 
 BeeiMS that the Nootka do not use dancing-aprons as the KwakiutI (h). 
 In the potlatch dances men, women, andchihlren (hxnce the same dances. 
 It is stated that the Ahau'.-ath at one time made 
 different daneis for men, women, and children, but 
 tliis was an exceptioi al experiment. In former times 
 the privilege ot performing p. certain dance was rigidly 
 guarded, and many wars were rag<d against tribes 
 who ptrformed a danCL' to wiiich they had no liglit. 
 
 Some persons tattoo tl>eir crest on their bodies. 
 An old man of the Hopetci.sa'th tribe, for instance, 
 has a wolf tattooed on his belly and breast. The 
 hands of women and men are frequently tattooed. 
 I observed one man wlio had a line tattooed connect- 
 ing both eyebrows. The same person had the upper 
 half of his moustache pulled out. It is stated, how- 
 ever, that these practices havo been recently iiitro- 
 duced (fig. 15). 
 
 I may remark in this place that the cop[)er plati's 
 which [)lay so important a part in the customs of the 
 northern tribes are not used by the Nootka, 
 
 1 f' ! 
 
 Games. 
 
 The games of the Nootka are identical with those of the neighbouring 
 tribes. A favourite game is played with hoops, which are rolled over 
 tJie ground. Then a spear is thrown at them, which must pass through 
 the hoop (iiilti(iVtr). A guessing game is frequently played between two 
 jiarties, wlio sit in two rows opposite each other. One party hider, a 
 stone, the men passing it from hand to hand. The other party has to 
 guess wliere it is (/,'c/'(7sA7ir///.s). The following song, although belong- 
 ing orisrinally to ('ape Flattery, is used all along tho west coast of Vau- 
 couver Island in playing the game lelial : — 
 
he- 
 
 liu- 
 
 II 
 
 ON THE M)KT1I-WESTP]UN THinES OF CANADA. 
 
 A 
 
 39 
 
 pzt^rr>-ii 
 
 a - la ■ will - u a - a - la - wia - d a - la - wia • d a - la - wia - o. 
 Nuc - \vi - tn - ah a - a - la - wii'i - m a - la - wia - u a - la - wia - o. 
 
 =^rb-i 
 
 7.(3., I, N'aewitoah, have missed it. 
 Lidlahij. 
 
 --^•■>-^ -— ^"^"- -^ — -^ 
 
 -A-:g 
 
 . . jN 771 i , I . , H] -4 .-_j , I L 
 
 Tcatci 
 
 na - ha tea - tci 
 
 na - ha tea - tcik-stcik- 
 
 
 
 ma - lia ton - a - til - hu tcaiti) nn'itri tea - tei - la. 
 I.e., See the mink theie diving between the islands. 
 
 CnSTOMS REFERRING TO BlKTH, PuiiERTY, MaRRIAGR, AND DeATH. 
 
 The customs referiing to birth seem to be almost the same as tboso 
 of the Lku'ugEn. During the period of pregnancy the woman must not 
 wear bracelets and anklets. After the child is born the father must 
 clean himself by bathing in a pond. For four days he is forbidden to go 
 in a canoe. He and also the young mother are forbidden to j)artake of 
 fresh food. The former must speak in whispers only. The infant's 
 head is flattened in a cradle, which is very much like that of the Lku ngEn 
 in construction. The cradle is either made of Avood or plaited of strips 
 of cedar-bark. Immediately after birth the eyebrows of the bal)e are 
 pushed upward, its belly is pressed forward, and the calves of the leg 
 are squeezed from tiie ankles upwai-d. All these manipulations are 
 believed to improve the appearance of the child. It is believed that the 
 pressing of the eyebrows will give them the peculiar shape that may bo 
 seen in all carvings of the Indians of the North Pacitio coast. The 
 squeezing of the legs is intended to produce slim ankles. It is, however, 
 proba!)le that these manipnhitions have no la.sting etl'ect. 
 
 Numerous reguhitions refer to the birth of twins. The parents of 
 twins must build a small hut in the woods, far from the village. There 
 they have to stay two years. The father must continue to clean himself 
 by bathing in ponds for a whole year, and must keep his face painted 
 red. While bathing he sings certain songs that are only used on this 
 occasion. Both parents must keej) away from the people. They must 
 not eat, or even touch, fresh food, particularly salmon. Wooden images 
 and masks, representing birds and iish, are placed around the hut, and 
 others, repi^esenting fish near the river, on the bank of which the hut 
 stands. The object of these masks is to invite all birds and fish to come 
 and see the twins, and to be friendly to them. Tliey are in constant 
 danger of being carried away by spirits, and the masks and images—or 
 rather the animals which they represent — will aveit this danger. Tiie 
 twins are believed to be in some way related to salmon, although they 
 
40 
 
 UEl'ORT — 1890. 
 
 ■■ 
 
 :<^ 
 
 ■\ 
 
 
 ''; 
 
 '•■ f 
 
 ■; 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 1 
 
 r 
 
 I 
 
 ;i; 
 
 il 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 „;: S 
 
 
 :-|i ■ 
 
 ■ ■; 
 
 - 
 
 *l 
 
 :i 
 
 r i 
 
 
 
 
 are jiot considered identical with tlicm, as is tlu; case among the 
 Kwakiutl. The fatlier's song which lie .sings when cleanitig hinisclf is 
 an invitation for the salmon to come, and is sung in tlieir praise. On hear- 
 ing tliis song, and seeing the images and masks, the salmon are helieved 
 to come in great numbers to see the twins. Then fore the birth of twins 
 is believed to indicate a good salmon year. If the salmon should fail to 
 come in large numbers it is considered proof that the children will soon 
 die. Twins are I'orbidden to catch salmon, nor must they eat or handle 
 fresh salmon. They must not go sealing, as the s(>als would attack them. 
 They have the power to make good and bad weather. They produce 
 rain by painting theii- faces with black colour and then washing them, 
 or by meiely sliaking their heads. 
 
 I obtained a comparatively full account of customs practised at the 
 time when the girl reaches puberty (see Sproat, p. 91). She is ])laced 
 on the platform of the house, o{)posite the door, and the whole ti-ibe are 
 invited to take part in the ceremonies. A number of men and women 
 are engaged to sing and danco on this occasion, and are paid for their 
 
 Fiu. HI. Screen with piiinting representing Thunder-bird and Whale. 
 
 services, While these songs, which are called fa'tnCi, are sung, a man in 
 the attire of a thunder-bird stands on each side of the girl. The dresses 
 of these men consist each of a large mask, to which a complete dress, set 
 with feathers and having two winjrs, is attached. The dancers wear no 
 masks. Then eight men take each a dish, go down to the river, and 
 fetch water, with which they return to the house. In doing so they 
 must move in a circle, having their left hand on the inner side of the 
 circle. Then they pour the water on the girl's feet and return to the 
 liver, still moving in a circle, their left hand being on the inner side. 
 As soon as this performance is over, a screen, painted with images of 
 thunder-biids (fig. 16),' is set upon the platform in front of the girl, so 
 as to hide her com])letely. On both sides mats are hung up. and thus a 
 small room is provided for the girl, who has to stay here hidden from the 
 sight of men for a number of days. During this period she is always 
 attended by a number of girls and women. According to Sproat's state- 
 \m nt, she is not allowed to see the sun or a fire. According to my inform- 
 ant, she must he guarded against seeing anything ugly and again.st 
 
 ' A Mcoti'l isiTJcn wlLii a syiuaictrical (Iravvuig adjoins the left ^ide of the one 
 figured iibovi-'. 
 
1' 
 
 ON THE NOliTU-WEs^TEUN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 41 
 
 Rcoing men. During tlie time of licr seclusion slic wearn no shirt, .'uid 
 is ibrlndden to move and to lie down, but must iilwHys sit in a squatting 
 position. She must avoid touching her hair, but scratch her head with 
 a cond) or with a piece of bone, provided tor the purpose. Neither is she 
 allowed to scratch her body, as it is believed that eacli scratch would 
 leave a scar. While she is hidden behind her screen the festival con- 
 tinues. Scmietimes they evx'n begin the Tlokoa'la (see below, j). 47). 
 Hei'e are two songs which are sung on these occasions : — 
 
 
 
 ggj:m^E;£^£g 
 
 ■ 'fS'-yj— j 
 
 
 Clapping '. 
 
 1 - a 
 Kaq - ci 
 
 O - r. 
 Hi - no 
 An - fi 
 
 i - ii 
 
 etc. 
 
 1 - a I - II 
 
 ka - ma' tla - tlii 
 
 tu - tliih as - iih 
 
 tsuti - k-iit at - Hi 
 
 sa - k"o tea kHp 
 
 i - ii i - ii 
 
 a - 1 - va 1 nil 
 
 
 - a 
 
 kui-tutl-sya i • nii 
 
 
 - a 
 
 us ("i - lie pa - tciitl 
 
 
 - H 
 
 ya hnijtlak-tsuk'k lis 
 
 
 - ii 
 
 u - atl-k-atlia - tliili 
 
 
 • a 
 
 a - 1 - ya i - nu 
 
 
 - u 
 
 I.e., I had a bad dream last night. I dreamt my Inisliand took a second wife. Then I 
 packed my little basket and [ ?], and I said before I left, There are plenty uf men. 
 
 Thus I dreamt. 
 
 L(mge. 
 
 
 6 - ma-k*otl he - i ya i na yutc - kotltsek-tsin he i ya - yl na. 
 
 J.e., I wish I had my face at a girl's bosom. I should feel good. Oh, dead I 
 Yes, your face is large enough for a thing that is never satisfied. 
 
 During her seclusion in her small room the girl fasts, and for eight 
 months after reaching maturity she is forbidden io cat any fresh food, 
 
 t^' 
 
 !1 
 
 ,! - 
 
42 
 
 iiKroKT— 1890. 
 
 i f 
 
 
 i ; 
 
 ^i 
 
 
 ;' i i 
 
 ■ i 
 
 
 •.i 
 
 ])iirti(!ularly salmon. On tlio fom-Mi day nUov lior first nicnsos slio puts 
 on a peculiar la'ad-oniaiiiciit, Avliicli slic must, wear cIuHtilc each oF licr 
 iii'st ci^lit iiuMises tor lour days. During these months she nnist eat hy 
 liersell', and use a eu[) and dish of her own. These latter re<,'ulations 
 have to be observed by all women durinic menstruation. After reachinjj^ 
 maturity girla must bathe regularly in the woods. Tlmy are forbidden to 
 bathe near the village where the men might happen to pass by. 
 
 The marriage ceremonies have been so well described by Sproat that 
 I confine myself to giving a few additional data, refeiring to the marriage 
 of persons of the rank of chiefs. When a yonng man wishes to marry a 
 certain girl his father sends messengers to the girl's father to ask bis 
 consent. At first it is not given, and the mes^engers are sent again and 
 again, until the consent of the girl's father is obtained. The messengers 
 do not enter the house of the latter, but deliver their message outside the 
 door. At last the girl's father consents, and then the messengers j)lant 
 a stair into the ground close to the door. A blanket is wrapped around 
 tile staif, v\hich is made to repiesent a wolf, a bird, or a man. Bird's 
 down is strewn on the top of the figure. On the following day the 
 girl's father sends back this figure with a large quantity of food, and the 
 message that the young man may come and marry his danghter. The 
 young man's father invites all his relatives, and gives a feast of the food 
 sent by the girl's father. On the same night whistles imitating wolves* 
 voices are blown in the houses and on the street, I do not know 
 whether the origin of these whistles is kept a secret from the people, bnt 
 think it probable that only the members of the Tlokoa'la (see below) 
 know about it. On the following morning a platform is built by cover- 
 ing two boats with planks. The young men of the groom's family 
 paddle away from the shore and then return dancing. The groom him- 
 self dances in the mask and dress of the thunder-bird, one of his relatives 
 in that of a whale. All the dancers are painted, and have their hair 
 strewn with feathers. They land, and a man dressed up like a wolf is 
 the first to go ashore, A number of men carrying blankets follow him. 
 When the groom's party is heard to approach, the bride's father calls 
 upon a number of strong men from among his family, and places tl:cm in 
 front of his house. When the other party arrives and pi-epares to enter 
 the house the ojiposite party drives them back. This is done four times. 
 Then they are allowed to enter ; the leader throws down the wolf's mask 
 in tlie house of the bride's father, and the blankets which his followers 
 carry arc piled up on top of it. The bride's friends next pi-epare games, 
 which are played out of doors, weather j)ermitting ; else they are held 
 indoors. First, twelve men stand in two rows of six each, one opposite 
 the other. They carry torches of bundles of cedar-bark, so that there 
 is a narrow hitie left between the lights of the opposite rows. The 
 groom's father and one or two of his uncles must pass through this lane. 
 Next two long poles are tied together at their points, and put up verti- 
 cally, A pulley is attached to the joint, a thin rope is passed through it, 
 and a small carved wooden whale is suspended from it. The feet of the 
 two poles stand about six feet apart, and the joint is about twelve feet 
 high. The carved figure hangs so high that it requires a good jump to 
 reach it. One of the bride's relatives holds the free end of the line 
 attached to the carved figure. The groom's relatives try to catch the 
 carved figure, which, however, is pulled up by the man holding the rope 
 as soon as anyone tries to take hold of it. Thetnan who finally succeeds 
 
 
ON TllI^ NOKTH-WliSTKllN THini'S OK C.VNAItA. 
 
 4a 
 
 i 
 
 in grnspiiig it rcciivos a few blankets from Iho <r\rVH fiitlicr. 'PIicii a 
 liorizoiitiil polo is fiistencd at oim end, Hwiiij^fing I'l'ct'ly at i\\v. (itlior. Tlie 
 men Ijclonging to Hie groom's paity have to try to walk down to tlio 
 swinging end, and wliouvcr succeeds receives l)l!iiik(ts I'roni tlie girl's 
 trttlier. Heavy weights ai'c lilted; they ti-y who is the bust jumper. A 
 blaidvct with a hole in the centre is liung up, and men walk up to it 
 blindt'oided from a distiince of about twenty steps. When they get near 
 it they must point with their lingers towards the blaidcet, and try to hit 
 the hole. They also climb a pole, on top of which an eagle's nest, or 
 Komething representing a eagle's msst, is ])laced. The wiiuKT of each 
 game receives a number of blankets I'rom the girl's lather. When the 
 games are at an end the groom's father distributes blankets among the 
 other party. Now they ai'e allowed to take the girl with them. A man, 
 dressed u[) as a wolf or a whale, leads the i)arty, and they follow him in 
 Indian file, going around in a circle, the left hand being on the inner 
 side 'that is, opposite to the cour.se of the sun). They take the girl to 
 their liou.se, ami give a great feast. After a while the Ijrido's father 
 gives a feast to liis sou-m-law, who returns it after a short time, and 
 thus they continue to feast, sometimes for a whole year. Then the bride's 
 I'elatives return all that was paid to them at the marriage ceremony. 
 The wolf's head which was thrown into the girl's house is always 
 returned at once. 
 
 The child belongs to that sept which is considered the nobler. If, for 
 instance, the mother is a Ts'eca'ath, the father a Kuai'ath, the child will 
 be a Ts'eca'ath. Cousins jind second cousins are not allowed to inter- 
 marry, but there is no restriction against marriages between members of 
 the same gens. 
 
 I have nothing of importance to add to Sproat's description of the 
 mortuary ceremonies, except that the names of the deceased must not bo 
 mentioned. Mourners cut their hair short ; but while among the Lku'ngi'.n 
 the nearer relatives cut it shorter than the others, among the Nootka 
 all cut it equally short. The women wail early in the morning. 
 
 Religion and Shamanism. 
 
 The mythology of the Nootka refers to two men who descended from 
 heaven and transformed the semi-human beings of the ancient world 
 into men and animals.' They are called Kweka'stl^csKp, i.e., the trans- 
 formers, and are said to have taught men to worshii) the deity in heaven. 
 The name of the deity is kept a profound secret from the common people. 
 Only chiefs are allowed to pray to him, and the dying chief tells the 
 name, which is Ka'tse (i.e., the grandchild) to his heir, and teaches him 
 how to pray to the deity. No offerings are made to Ka'tse ; he is only 
 prayed to. In a tradition of the Nootka it is stated that a boy prayed to 
 a being in heaven called Cicikle, who is probably identical with Ka tse. 
 The boy is described as pi'aying, his arms being thrown upward. Ordi- 
 narily the Nootka pray to the sun and the moon for health, or, as the 
 expression in their language is, for life and the well-being of their 
 children. The moon especially is asked for food and for good luck in 
 hunting. Botb are believed to have human shape. Besides these higher 
 deities, the Nootka believe the whole of nature to be animated. The 
 rainbow was oi'iginally a man, and still retains much of his power. 
 
 ' tSce Swan, The Indiana of Cape Flattery^ p. ti4. 
 
44 
 
 RErOUT — 1800. 
 
 % 
 
 ':! 
 
 f 
 
 K 
 
 . ! 
 
 ^'i 
 
 *|1 
 
 li 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 ti'i 
 
 '; 
 
 i 
 
 
 V ; 
 
 1 
 
 1 ■' S 
 
 
 L 
 
 
 
 
 1 ) 
 
 
 ' 1 
 
 
 ( 
 
 Wolves are rnnsiclcrod jio^vcrful beings, -wlinso friendsliip is souglit for 
 an;! wlioso aii^'cr is dreaded. 'I'lieicfoi-e eliiifs are not allowed to kill 
 thern. Kspeeially is this (he case with the llnpctcisa'tli chiefH, wluise 
 crost is the wolf. Tlie n al itieaTiiii{» of tliisbelit-f will become cl(;ar when 
 taken in connection with the Tlokoa lu rites and ti-aditioris. It i.s believed 
 that the wolves drive the deer towards the llopetcif-u'th, more particularly 
 to the Ts'o'uios hunters. 
 
 Tho world is believed to be a round disc wliicb is supported by a pole. 
 l*iCli|)Kes of sun and moon are [troduced by the ' door of heaven ' swallow- 
 ing them. This door of heaven oecuis fretiui'ntly in tales, and threatens 
 to swallow any por.son who int<nids to pay a visit to the deity in heaven. 
 Attempts are made during eclipses to free the sun or the moon by making 
 noise and by burning food on the beach. Thunder is produced by the 
 [lapping of tho wings of tho thunder-bird Tfi'tute, the lightning by his 
 bolt, the snake Hahe'ktoyek", which he cnsts down upon the earth. The 
 ibrtunate tinder of a bone of the Ilahe-ktoyek* pijssesses one of the most 
 powerful charms tho natives know of. 
 
 The soul has the shape of a tiny man ; its seat Is tho crown of the 
 liead. As long as it stands erect the per;-;on to whom it belongs is hale 
 and well ; but when it loses its uju-ight position for any i-eason its owner 
 loses his senses. The soul is capable of leaving the body ; then the 
 owner grows sick, and if the soul is not speedily restored he must die. 
 To restore it the higher class of shamans called K'ok'oa'tsmaah (sonl- 
 workei's) are summoned. I cannot give a satisfactory ex[)lanation of tho 
 methods em{)loyed to gain this power, as the natives proved to be rather 
 reticent in regard to these siibjects, as well as many others that are among 
 the most interesting to ethnologists. The K'ok'oa'tsmaah seems to ac- 
 quire his power by lasting and cleaning himself in ponds, as is the custom 
 among all ti'ibes of this region. He catches the wandering soul in his 
 hand, and after having shown it to the people restores it to its proper 
 place by lajnng it on the top of the head of the sick person. I heard 
 several Indians maintain that they had seen the soul caught by the 
 shaman, who let it march up and down on a white blanket. The second 
 class of shamans are the Ucta'k'yu, i.e., the workers. I did not hear 
 anything regarding an initiation of these shamans by encounters with 
 spirits. It seems that the Tsa'yek" ceremony, which will presently be 
 described, is actually the initiation of the shaman of this class, although, 
 on the other hand, I am not sure that all the members of the Tsa'yek' are 
 considered to have the power of curing diseases. These shamans are 
 capable of curing all diseases, except such as are caused by the soul 
 leaving the body. The cause of sickness is either what is called ' ma'yatle,' 
 i.e., sickness flying about in the shape of an insect and entering the body 
 without some enemy being the cause of it ; or the sick person has been 
 struck by sickness thrown by a hostile shaman, which is called 'mEnu'qcitl.' 
 Their ordinary method of removing disease is by sucking and singing 
 over the patient. Here is a song which I heard sung by a shaman when 
 curing a sick person : — 
 
 Eii3 
 
 tJ 
 
 H 
 
 pi=ps^; 
 
 ^=5 
 
 
 ^!5t: 
 
 ::1=:^ 
 
 a no 
 
 nu u 
 
 wa 
 
 uc - te 
 
 ak' - ya 
 
 1 
 
 Clapping 
 
 etc. 
 
ON THE NORTir-WESTETlN TRIHES OF CANADA. 
 
 45 
 
 
 ha lu 
 
 — ya 
 
 k'oa- 
 
 :z»z=q: 
 
 '■^-- 
 
 -=1 — 
 
 ---^-v 
 
 my 
 
 uc 
 
 '-■^—:^: 
 
 tak- 
 
 y« 
 
 a. 
 
 I 
 
 Durir.g the conjuration tliey frequently wash their hands and warm 
 tlioni at a fire. It is told as r feat of a female conjurer that she ii;ave her 
 hushand something to eat which she promised to extract again from out 
 of his belly ; a feat which f^he is believed to have actually ncoomplished. 
 
 Other shamans are said to be able to suck out arr(.)ws, ballets, and tlio 
 like. In cases of fiactures of bones they give the patient a mixture of 
 ground human bones to driidc, or spread it over the fi-aotured place. 
 They treat abscesses by massage or kneading, and opfu them and take 
 out the matter. If the fish do not come in time, and the Indians are in 
 want of food, a shaman makes an image representing a swimming fish, 
 and puts it into the water in the direction in whicli the fish used to come, 
 and it is believed that this means will induce them to come at once. He 
 prays at the same tine for the fish to come, and calls them. 
 
 Every man, upon reaching maturity, may obtain a charm by continued 
 fasting and bathing in ponds. When trying to ascertain how far back 
 historical tradition extends, I was told the following by Tlutisim, a man 
 about thirty years old, belonging to the NEtcimu'asath sept: His great- 
 gi-andfather's grandfather — i.e., five generations back — sat one night on 
 his bed resting, but not sleeping, as hunters will do. At midnight he 
 heard son)eone singing on the beach. He went out to see who was there, 
 and discovered a number of Ya'e — a fabulous people living in the woods — • 
 landing a sea-lion which they had caught. It is always a foreboding of 
 good luck to see those people. The man ran down to the beach, cried 
 ' he,' and the Ya'e were transformed into sea- foam. He gathered it care- 
 fully, and hid it. It became his charm, and henceforth he was a great 
 and successful hunter. 
 
 After death the soul becomes a ghost, Avhich is called Tci'lia. The 
 world of the souls is in the earth (Hita'kutla) ; but chiefs and good men 
 who always prayed to the sun and moon go up to heaven (Hina'yitl). 
 Those who are killed in war and have had tlieir heads cut ott" have in 
 after life their faces on their breasts. Drowned persons become spirits 
 cidled Pu'kmis. They are generally invisible, and linger on the beach. 
 Whenever they appear to men they are seen to shiver for cold. Ghosts 
 have no bones ; they jiroduce nightmare by appearing in sleep ; to see 
 them causes sickness. 
 
 In connection with these beliefs I may mention the following facts 
 which throw some light upon the ideas of the Nootka regarding the rela- 
 tion of soul and body. About twenty years ago a man lost his senses, 
 
w 
 
 
 h 
 
 I 
 
 ■ J ;■ 
 
 II 
 
 46 
 
 UEPOIIT — 1890. 
 
 and attacked another mnn with a liatchct. The other snccocdcd in 
 wrestinfT the weapon from his hands. After some time tlie madman 
 apparently died and was buried, tlie body beinj^ tied up between boards, 
 deposited in the woods, and covered with branches and brushes. Afrer 
 a few days a number of eliildrcn found ]n"m sitting on the beach. He 
 de<'hired tliat the olii)sts had sent liiin back from tlieir country. Tlie 
 peo{)le did not allow him to entfr the villajjfe until he had bathed and 
 cleansed himself. After a while lit; was killed by the man whotn he had 
 formerly assaulted. As the people continued to be in dread of him. his 
 body was cut to pieces. 
 
 A very remarkable method of curing diseases is used when the prac- 
 tices of the shaman prove of no avail. In such case the ])atientis initiated 
 in the secret society, Tsa'yek*.' I obtained the following desci'iption of 
 the Tsa'yek" ceremonies : The members of the Tsa'yek" assemble and 
 begin to make a circuit through fUe whole village, walking in Indian file 
 ami in a circle, so that their left hand is on t)ie inner side. Nobody is 
 alloAved to laugh while they make their circuit. The following song is 
 sung by the Tsa'yek" society of the Ilopetcisa'th and Ts'crfi'ath during 
 thoir circuit through the village : — 
 
 
 hii 
 
 a. 
 
 ha 
 
 — ^- 
 
 hn 
 
 wm 
 
 he 
 
 ha 
 
 0- 
 
 
 :iT- 
 
 iiii) 
 
 Si— W- 
 
 lie - ta'k- - yii 
 I.e., he is not conjuror 
 
 lia ni.' lie hv. 
 
 In dancing they hold the fii'st fingeis of both hands up, trembling 
 violently. They enter the houses and take the patient and all others 
 who have expressed the wish of becoming Tsa'yek along, two members 
 of the society taking each novice between them and holding him by his 
 hair, while they continue to shake their other bands. The novice must 
 incline his head forward and shake it, while they continue th'^ir cii-cuit. 
 Thus they go from house to iionse and take along all those who desire to 
 join the society. The circuit finished, they assemble in a house in wdiich 
 for the following days none but members of the Tsa'yek" is allowed. 
 They sing and dance for four days ; after these days the novice obtains 
 Ids cedar-bark ornament. The latter is almost identical with the one 
 described l)y Swan (p. 74). Small carvings representing the ciest of 
 their septs are attached to the front part of their headrings. The dress 
 of the Ucta'k"\ fi. who is the most important member of the society, is 
 larger than those of any of tiie other members. The following song is 
 one of those sung by the members during the initiation ceremonies in the 
 house : — 
 
 .VA 
 
 Beatinp; 
 
 y 
 
 y!i y 
 
 yji 
 
 
 Ac. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' Kec 
 
 Swan, /.(• 
 
 I 
 
 .Ve 
 
 t. I.,. 
 
 uc 
 
 ta'-k"yii a 
 Ac. 
 
 M'. 
 
 1 
 
m 
 
 ha 
 
 -*. - 
 li.-. 
 
 others 
 
 embers 
 
 by bis 
 
 must 
 
 ircuit. 
 
 'sire to 
 
 wliicb 
 
 owed. 
 
 ibtiiins 
 
 u' one 
 
 est of 
 
 dress 
 
 oty, IS 
 
 one; is 
 
 ill the 
 
 0- 
 
 II a 
 
 mm?. 
 
 ON THE NOHTir-WESTKRX TUIHR.'< OF CANADA. 
 
 47 
 
 
 y»' ya yv ya 
 
 Vc 
 
 hr> 
 
 tie tci - tu - tit 
 
 yo y«'. 
 
 The song is repeated ml hifiintnm ; in tlio repetitions qnnrtcrs jire beaten. 
 Tho daneer jumps nt tlie end of eaeb qiiniter from o';c lee;" to the f)ther. 
 At each jump bo Hfts one hand and extemls the other downward and 
 backward. 
 
 I append here a few omens and current beliefs: If tliere is an 
 irritation in tlio right siile of the nose so that one must sneize, something 
 good is said of one , if in the left, sonietliing bad is said. If or.c eliokcs 
 oneself in drinking, the thing one happens to think of will not eome triir. 
 If one wants to become a great hunter one most not eat of the first <f:iiiie 
 one gets. Tho first salmon of +''.e season are split on both sides of the 
 backbone, which is then taken out. '('he head must not bo cut olf, bur 
 remains attached to the backbone. While the head and backbone are 
 thrown into the water, the rest of the fish must be roasted without being 
 cut to pieces. No fresh venii-on or other meat must be eaten after tho 
 salmon begin to run, as else tlioy would stop running for a number of 
 days. The first salraon of the season must not be sold. Salmon arc 
 alw;iys dried in the houses. 
 
 Thk T.i.okoai.a. 
 
 Among the customs of the Nootka their winter dances have alwiiys 
 nftracted the greatest attention of tnivellers who came into contain willi 
 this people. Good descriptions of the customs connected with thrso 
 festivals have been given by Sproat, Swan, Jewilt, and Jviiipping. Tho 
 meaning of the festivals has, however, remained obseuro. This is in jiart 
 diK! to t,be fact that the custom has been borrowed from the Kwiikiiitl. 
 The name Tlokoala itself, wdiieh is a Kwakiutl word, proves its foreign 
 origin. The Tlokoala of the Kwakiutl will be described in the next 
 chapter. Sunice it to say hero that the Tlokoala of the Nooika (Corre- 
 sponds to the Wakis'acja' or wolfs dance of the Kwakiutl. It lias, how- 
 ever, certain other features embodied in it; for instance, the ceremonies 
 of the Ala'tEm dance. Tho Tlokoala area secret society, who celebriito 
 their festivals in winter onlv. They have a chief who is railed 
 Yak'syak'ste itk'. Anyone who wishes (o join the Tlokoala can do so, 
 or the society may invite a man to become a member. Then the fri< -His 
 of the person who is to become a member make a collection in his be! alf, 
 ami turn over tho property collected to the chief of th(> Tlokoal;^ who 
 distributes it during a great feast among the moml)ei's. Those who aro 
 not Tlokoala: are called Wicla'k yfi, i.c , not being shamans. The Tlokoala 
 is believed to have been instituted l)y the wolves, the tradition being that 
 a chief's son was taken away by the wolves, who tried to kill him, bat, 
 being unsuccessful in their attempts, became his friends and taught him 
 the Tliikoala. They ordered him to teach his peo{)le tho cetcnionios on 
 his return luune. Then they earrieil the young man back to his villnge. 
 They also asked him to leave some red cedar-bark tor their Tlokoala 
 behind, vvhenover he moved from on(^ place to another; a custom to which 
 the Nootka tribes still adhere. Every newiiiemherof tiio Tlokoala must 
 be initiated by tho wolves. At night a pack of wolves — that is, Indians 
 dressed in wolf-skins and wearing wolf-masks — make their appearatuic, 
 
ff 
 
 
 . : ■ 
 
 I" 
 
 48 
 
 REPORT— 1890. 
 
 seize the novice, and carry him into tlie woods. When the wolves are 
 heard outside the villai^e, coming in order to fetch the intending^ novice, 
 the members of the Tlokoala blacken their faces and sing the following 
 
 I.e., Amo g all tribes is great excitement because I am Tlokoala. 
 
 On the following day the wolves return the novice dead, then the 
 Tlokoala have to revive him. The wolves are supposed to have put the 
 magic stone hit' ina into his body, which must be removed in order to 
 restore him to life. The body is left outside the house, and two shamatis 
 go and remove the hii'ina. It seems that this stone is quartz. The idea 
 is the same as that found among the Kwakiutl, where the Mri'tf:m is 
 initiated by means of quartz which is put into his body by ;he spirit of 
 his dance. The returning novice is called u'cJnak. 
 
 After the novices have been restored to life they are painted red and 
 black. Blood is seen to stream from their mouths, and they run ,it once 
 down to the beach and jump into the water. Soon they ai'c found to 
 drift lifeless on the water. A canoe is sent out and the bodies are 
 gathered in it. As soon as the canoe lands, they all return to life, resort 
 to the dancing house, to which none but the initiated is ndmitted, and 
 stay there for four days. At night dances are performed in the house, 
 which the wliole population is allowed to witness. After the four day.s 
 are over the novices leave the house, their heals being wound with 
 wreaths of hemlock(?) branches. They go to the river, in which thoy 
 swim, and after some time are fetched back by a canoe. They are almost 
 exhausted from the exertions they have undergone during the foregoing 
 days. Novices must eat nothing but dried fish and di-ied berries, 
 
 Each Tlokoala lasts four days. It is only celebrated when some 
 member of the tribe gives away a large amount of property to the Tlokoala, 
 the most fnupiently occurring occasion being the initiation of new 
 members. Sometimes it is celebrated at the time of the ceremonies, 
 Avliich are practised when a girl reaches maturity. The house of the man 
 who pays for the Tlokoala seems to be the taboo house of the society. 
 As soon as the Tlokoala begins, the oi'dinary social organisation of the 
 tribe is suspended — as is also the case among the Kwakiutl. The people 
 arrange themselves in companies or societies which bear the names of the 
 various Nootka tribes, no matter to which tribe and sept the persons 
 actually belong. Kach society has festivals of its own, to which members 
 of the other societies are not admitted, although they may be inviivil. 
 'J'hese societies are called iVpiltl. Kach iias a certain song which is sung 
 
olves are 
 g novice, 
 following 
 
 
 
 Ao - k-oa 
 
 ^T 
 
 
 - 
 
 a ni' 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 i_ 
 
 _a:!_ \ 
 
 then the 
 ) put tlio 
 order to 
 .shanians 
 The idea 
 la'tKm ia 
 spirit of 
 
 rrd and 
 at once 
 Found to 
 dies are 
 e, resort 
 ted, and 
 le house, 
 inv days 
 nd witli 
 ell thoy 
 c almost 
 )regoing 
 
 n some 
 lokoala, 
 of new 
 ^monies, 
 ho man 
 society. 
 1 of the 
 people 
 iS of the 
 persona 
 icmhorr-! 
 invitvd. 
 
 m^'^^mmmm'^. 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 49 
 
 during their festivities. Here arc songs of the Nutca'tlath and Mo'tclath 
 societies of the Ts'eea'ath tribe. 
 
 Song of the Ndtdl'thith Soriety. 
 
 
 ya he wii 
 
 a yc o 
 
 a kutcitl hiikwc tsakwa 
 
 Hon[j nf the M'u'tclath Sori'tij. 
 
 A ' A 
 
 ya-i; 
 
 hi; he ha vu-e 
 
 
 tlo - kna'na 
 
 ya-c 
 
 -0- 
 ho 
 
 At night, when the whol(> tribe assnnihlos in the taboo Imiisc, (ho 
 societies still keep to2cther. They are hostile to each other, and i-ailleries 
 between the various groups are continually going on. It seems that 
 there are no separate societies for men and women, but a certain 
 division must exist, as they seem to have S(>para<c feasts. When a 
 man, during a Tiokoala, brings in any game, and he does not give half of 
 it to the women, but retains the whole for the use of the men, the 
 furmer will attack him and wre.st the share due to them from the men. 
 In the same way the women must share all they get or cook with the 
 men. 
 
 Oi'iginally, cry- dance belonaed to one famil}', and was transmitted 
 from generation to generation. IMother as well as father had the right 
 to transfer their dance to their children. Thus dances wliich belonged 
 to one tribe were transmitted to others. The dauce was given to the 
 novice at the time of his or her initiation, nnd no more than one 
 dance could be given at a time. At ])re,sent these restrictions are 
 becoming extinct. Whoever is rich enough to distribute fi snttlcient 
 amount of property mny take any dance he likes. I was even told 
 that the chief of the Tiokoala, at the beginning of the ilancing season, 
 distributes the various dances among the menibers of the order, and that 
 he may redislribr.te them at the beginning of the following season. 
 
 It is a peculiarity of the dances of the Nootka that two masks of the 
 same kind always dance tegethei-. 
 
 4 II G 
 
 M ;i 
 
 I \ 
 
% 
 
 1% 
 
 
 ff ■ 
 
 
 50 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 Among the dances belonging to the Tlokoala I mention the Aai'tlk'e 
 ( = feathers on head). The Aai'tlk'c is supposed to be a being living in 
 the woods. He wears no mask, but a head-ornaraont of cedar-bark dyed 
 red, the dyed cedar-bark being the emblem of the Tlokoala. This orna- 
 ment consists of a ring from which four feathers wound with red cedar- 
 bark rise, throe over the forehead, one on the back. The face of the 
 dancer is smeared with tallow and then strewn with down. The orna- 
 jnents of each dancer — of the Aai'tlk'e as well as of all others — must be 
 
 Fig. 17.— -Ilenrl-mask of Ili'iicmiil. 
 
 I ■ 
 
 '^i 
 
 n 
 
 their personal property. They must not be loaned or borrowed. The 
 following 13 the song of the Aai'tlk'e: — 
 
 
 Hti ya ha yfi 
 
 nanu 
 
 tli 
 
 nie. 
 
 ::1^=i=i: 
 ^—^: 
 
 nu! 
 
 nanu 
 
 izpizzjSjzzI: 
 
 u 
 
 tli 
 
 .=1-i 
 
 mo 
 
 ha ya 
 
 Another dance is ihnt of the Hi'nemiil, a fabulous bird-like being. 
 The dancers wear the head-mask, fig. 17. On the top of the mask there 
 is a hole, in which a stick is fastened, which is greased and covered with 
 
ai'tlk'e 
 ving ia 
 ■k dyed 
 is orna- 
 [ codar- 
 of tho 
 e orna- 
 aaust be 
 
 The 
 
 nie. 
 
 ya. 
 
 lu'ing'. 
 
 : there 
 with 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 51 
 
 down. When the dancer moves, the down becomes loose, and whoever 
 among the spectators catclies a feather receives a blanket from tho chief 
 of the Tbkoala. The following is the song of Hi'nemiii : — 
 
 i 
 
 :q=izl- 
 
 Ha - na - i 
 Clapping •] 
 
 :rq=:dv: 
 
 ^-* 
 
 :q===i: 
 
 1 
 
 yii 
 
 na 
 
 :ir-ij|-5J: 
 ha na - i 
 
 ya 
 
 ha a 
 
 iHi 
 
 na 
 
 U 
 
 irir"^r 
 
 etc. 
 
 ha na - ha nai 
 
 :=i: 
 
 ya 
 
 ha 
 
 --^-ii- 
 
 nai 
 
 y^ 
 
 
 lul 
 
 no 
 
 rr 
 
 i^.-*— :i.r^* .i 
 
 ha na - i ya i a na 
 
 ha na - i ya ha 
 
 ai 
 
 
 na 
 
 ya 
 
 ha 
 
 na - 1 
 
 y<j 
 
 ho no ho. 
 
 Kwai - as kwai - as 
 
 The yv'tlmaqko is a dance in which two men wearing two human 
 masks appear. The masks are called A'tlmaqko. When they appear 
 the spectators sing : — 
 
 Athiiaq - ko 
 I.e., Back out, back out, Atlnmqko 1 
 
 Then they leave tho house and run about in the village. Tho A'tlmaqko 
 i;s a being living in the woods. Tlie first to see hiui was a Netcumu'uHath, 
 and ever since this sept dances the A'tlmaqko dance. 
 
 The SiVnEk (panther) dance corresponds to tho No'ntlem of the 
 Kvvakiutl. The dancer wears a large head-mask, like that of Ihe Iti'nomiif, 
 and a bear-skin. He knocks everything to pieces, pours water into tho 
 fire, and tears dogs to pieces and devours them. Two canine teeth in 
 the mouth of the mask are its most characteristic feature. A roj)e is 
 tied around his waist, by which he is led by some attendants. 
 
 The hl'tltalc, self-torture, corresponds to the Juvrl'natloi the Kwakiutl. 
 The dancers rub their bodies with the juice of certain herbs, and push 
 small lances through the flesh of the arms, the back, and tho ilanks. 
 
 (ithor dances are the Pu'kmis dance (see p. 45), in which the dancer 
 is covered all over with pipe clay ; the Hu'tlmis dance, tho Hu'tlmis 
 
 ' Tlic liisi note drawn down lui (Mglitli. 
 4u 
 
Esn 
 
 52 
 
 KEPORT — 1890. 
 
 bcinp; anotlier fabulous being livinf? in the woods and always dancing; 
 the Hiio'niis dance, which is performed by women only, who wear red 
 cedar- bark ornaments and down, and who dance with one hand extended 
 upward, tlie other downward; tlie A'yek dance, in which the dancer 
 knocks to pieces whatever he can lay his hands on ; and dances represent- 
 ing a great variety of animals, particularly birds. 
 
 The tribes north of Barclay Sound have a dance in which the per- 
 former has to cut long parallel gashes into his breast and arms. The 
 Ha'mats'a dance, wliicli has l)oeii borrowed from Hio Kwakiutl, lias spread 
 as far south as Nurca lath, having been introduced there by intermarriage 
 with the Kwakiutl. The killing of a slave, which has been described by 
 Sproat (|). 157) and Knipping, may belong to this part of the Tlokoala 
 (see below, pp. 05, GO). 
 
 
 i h 
 
 I ( 
 
 til 
 
 1*1 w 
 
 
 III. THE KWAKIUTL. 
 
 The Kwakiutl language is spoken in two main diidects, the Heiltsuk", 
 from CJanlner Channel to Rivers Inlet, and the Kwiikiutl proper. I have 
 formerly given the Le kwiltok" as a separate dialect, but this view has 
 proved to be iiuiorroct, it being almost identical with the Kwakiutl. As 
 stilted in my last report, the tribes speaking tlie Heiltsuk' and Gyiraano-itq 
 dialects are in tlie maternal stage, and are divided into gentes having 
 animal totems; while the southern group are in the paternal stage, and 
 ai'e divided into gentes which have no animal-crest (see Fifth Report of 
 Committee, p. 2l>). I collected in the summer of 1889 an almost com- 
 plete list, of tribes, septs, anil gentes of the Kwakiutl. which is here 
 given. The social position of tlu! tribes and gentes will be discussed 
 later on. The gentes of the Kwakiutl proper are given according to their 
 rank. 
 
 1. 
 
 Qaisla'. 
 
 Geii.h's : 
 
 A. Hktlt.suk- Dialect. 
 
 Beaver, E;igle, WolP, Salmon, Raven, Delphlnus orca. 
 
 2. Qnnfi'ks'ialH, called by the MeiUsuk" Gyimano-itq. 
 o. Qe'qaes. Chinaman Hat j 
 
 4. He'iltsuk". Bellaliella. I Gentes: 1. Wik'oqtenoq (eagle people) ; 
 
 Se^iffi : a. K''o'k aitq > 2. K''oe'tcnoq (raven [leople) ; 3. 
 
 b. Oe'tlitq I lla'hi'aintenoq (killer people). 
 
 c. O'ealitq J 
 
 5. So'mequlitq. U])per end of Awi'ky'enoq Lake. 
 
 Gentes : 1. So'mequlitq. 
 
 2. T'se'okuiraiQ or Ts'e'uitq. 
 
 0. No'qunts'itq. Lower end of Awi'ky'enoq Lake. 
 7. Awi'ky'enoq ( = people of the back country?). 
 Called by former authoi's Wikeno. 
 
 Gentes : 1. K'oi'kyaqtenoq. Crest : whale. 
 
 2. Gyi'gyilkam ( = those first to receive). Crest: bear. 
 
 3. Wao'kuitEm. Crest : raven. 
 
 4. Wfi'wikyem. „ : eagle. 
 
 5. Kue'tl'^la. ,, : e.agle. 
 fi. Na'lekuitq. ,, : whale. 
 
 Rivers Inlet. 
 
ON THE NORTH WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 Inlet. 
 
 bear. 
 
 B. KwAKiDTL Dialect. 
 
 1. Tla'sk'enoq (=pcople of the ocean). Klaskino Inlet. 
 
 Gentes : 1. T'O't'anetlenoq. 
 
 2. O'manitpenoq ( = poo]ileof O'manis, name of a place, 
 alleged to be a Nootka woi'd). 
 
 2. Gua'ts'enoq (=people of the north country). Northern side of 
 entrance to Qaatsino Sound. 
 
 Gentes: 1. Qa'manao. 
 
 2. Gua'ts'Onoq. 
 
 3. Kjo'p'enoq. Entrance of Quatsino S(>and. 
 
 Gentes: 1. Kyo'p'enoq. 
 2. K-'u'tlOnoq. 
 
 4. K'osk'e'moq. Koskimo. 
 
 Gentes: 1. Gye'qsEra ( = chicfs). 
 
 2. NEc'nsiia ( = dirty teeth). 
 
 3. Gyo'qsEms'anatl (=higher than Gye'qsEm ?) 
 
 4. TsO'tsaa. 
 
 5. Woqufi'mis. 
 
 6. Gyek-'o'JEk'oa. 
 
 7. Kwakiik'Ema'renoq. 
 
 5. Nak'o'mgyilisiia ( = al\vays staying in their country; descendants 
 of K-'a'nigyilak'). C.Scott. 
 
 Gentes: 1. Gye'qsEm ( = chiefs). 
 
 2. NEe'nsna (=dirty teeth). 
 
 G. Tlatlasik'oa'la(= those on the ocean; descendants of NomasE'nQilis), 
 Nahwitti. 
 
 Gentes: 1. Gyi'gyilk'am (=those to whom is given first). 
 
 2. La'laotla (=al\vays crossing sea). 
 
 3. Gye'qsEm ( = chiefs). 
 
 7. Guasi'la ( = north people). Smith Inlet. 
 
 Gentes: 1. Gyl'gyilk'ara ( = thoso to wliom is given first). 
 
 2. Si'sintlae ( = the Si'ntliies). Crest: sun. 
 
 3. K"'o'mkyutis ( = the rich side). 
 
 8. Na'k'oartok'. Seymour Inlet. 
 
 Gentes: 1. Gye'qsEm ( = chiefs). 
 
 2. Si sintlae ( =the Si'ntlaes). Cicso: sun. 
 
 3. Tsitsime'lek'ala. 
 
 4. Wil'las ( = tho great ones). 
 
 5. TE'mtEmtlEls (=ground shakes when they step on it) 
 
 6. Kwa'kokyCitl ( = the Kvvii'kiutl). 
 
 The Kwakiutl live at Fort Rupert, Turner Island, Call Creek. Th 
 tribe consists of the following three septs : — 
 
 ri 
 
 i I 
 
 
 *■ islii 
 
 11 
 
i 
 
 ■I 
 
 .^ 
 
 :.l. 
 
 n 
 
 :■ 'J- 
 
 I: 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 11:; 
 
 ■'• ■:? 
 
 54 LEPORT— 1890. 
 
 9. Kue'tEla. 
 
 Gentcs: 1. Maa'mtagyila (=tho Ma'tagyilas). 
 
 2. K'kwii'kuin (=the real Kwu'kiutl). 
 
 tS. Gye'qsEm (=chiefs). 
 
 4. Laa'laqsKiit'aio (=La'laqsEnt*aios). 
 
 6. Sl'sintlae (=:Sintlaes). 
 
 10. K*'0'moyuo (=tlie rich ones). War name: Kue'qa (miirdercrs). 
 
 (I'entea: 1. K'kwa'knm (=t]ie real Kwa'kiatl). 
 
 2. Ila'anaMenoq (=tlio archers). 
 
 3. Yaai'iiak'Kniae (=the crabs). 
 
 4. Haai'lakycmae (=the conjurers"^, or La'qso. 
 
 5. Gyi'gyilk'am ( = tlioso to whom is given first). 
 
 11. Wa'laskwakiutl (=the great Kwakiutl), nickname : Lu'kuilila 
 ( = tlie trumps). 
 
 Gentes: 1. Ts'K'ntsEniik'aio ( = tho Ts'i;'nHk'aios). 
 
 2. GyO'qsKm ( = chiefs). 
 
 .3. Wa'uli|)oe ( = those who are feared). 
 
 4. K''o'mky litis ( = tbo rich side). 
 
 12. Ma'malelek'ala (=Mri'Ielek*ala people). Village Island. 
 
 Gciites: 1. TE'mtEmtlEls (aground shakes when they step on it). 
 
 2. We'omask"Ema( = liigh people). 
 
 3. Wa'las (:=the great ones). 
 
 4. Ma'malelek'am (=the Mil'lelek'as). 
 
 13. K'we'k'sot'enoq (=people of the other side). Gilford Island. 
 
 G elites : 1. Naqna'qola ( = standing higher than other tribes F). 
 
 2. IMe'mogyins (=:with salmon traps). 
 
 3. Gyi'gyilk'am (=those to whom is given first). 
 
 4. Ne'uelpae (=an upper end of river). 
 
 14. Tlau'itsis (=angry people). Cracroft and Turner Islands. 
 
 Gentes: 1. Si'sintlae ( = the Si'ntlaes). 
 
 2. Nunemasek'a'lis (^who were old from the beginning). 
 
 3. Tle'tlk'et (=having great name). 
 
 4. Gyi'gyilk'am (= those to whom is given first). 
 
 15. NE'mk'ic. Nimkish River. 
 
 Gentes: 1. Tsetsetloa'lak'eraae (=the moat famous ones). 
 
 2. TlatEla'min ( = the supporters). Crest : eagle. 
 
 3. Gyi'gyilkam (=those to whom is given first). Crest: 
 
 thunder-bird. 
 
 4. Si'sintlae (=the Si'ntlaes). Crest: sun. 
 
 5. Ne'nelky'enoq '^=people of land at head of river). 
 
 [Ma'tilpe (=head of Mfia'mtagyila) are no separate tribe. They 
 belong to the Kwa'kiutl proper. 
 
 Gentes: 1. Maa'mtagyila. 
 
 2. Gye'qsEm. 
 
 3. Haai'lakyEmae.] 
 
 m 
 
 1, ;. U 
 
.J 
 
 (lorors). 
 
 /kailila 
 
 on it). 
 
 ind. 
 'sF). 
 
 ining). 
 
 Orest : 
 
 r). 
 They 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 55 
 
 16. Tena'qtaq. Knight Inlet. 
 
 Gentes : 1. K-'a'mk-'amtr.latl (=the K-VmtElatls). 
 
 2. Gje'qsi:m (=the chiefs). 
 
 3. K'oO'k'oaai'noq ( = people of [river] K'oa'is). 
 
 4. Yaai'ilak-KinaO ( = tlie crabs). 
 
 5. P'e'patle'noq ( = the flyers). 
 
 17. Aoai'tlEla (=those inside of inlet). Knight Inlet. 
 
 Gentes'. 1. Gyl'gyi:lk'am ( = those to whom is given first). 
 
 2. Ts'o't.-i'ena ( = thuuder-bird.s). 
 
 3. Ku'ekiikn'e'lioq. 
 
 18. Tsa'vvatEenoq (=pcoplo of the olachen country). Kingcombe 
 Ii let. 
 
 Gentes: 1, Le'lEwagyila (=the heaven-makers — mythical name 
 of raven). 
 
 2. Gyi'gyiok-Emao (=the highest chiefs). 
 
 3. Wi'ok'Enme ( = \vhora none dares to look at). 
 
 4. Gya'gygyilakya (=iilways wanting to kill people). 
 
 5. K-a'k-awatilikya ( = K-awatilikalas). 
 
 19. Guau'aenoq. Drnrj Inlet. 
 
 Gentes: 1. Gyi'gyilk-am ( = those to whom is given first). 
 
 2. Kwl'koaenoq (= those at lower end of village). 
 
 3. Kwfi'kowenoq. 
 
 20. HaqutVmis. Wakeman Sound. 
 
 Gentes : 1. Gyi'gyilk'am (=those to whom is given first). 
 
 2. GyO'cisEm ( = the chiefs). 
 
 3. Haai'alikyauae ( = the conjurers). 
 
 4. ? 
 
 The Le'kwiltok-, who inhabit the country from Knight Inlet to Bute 
 Inlet, consist of the following septs : 
 
 21. Wi'wek-ae (=the We'k-aes). 
 
 Gentes : 1. Gyi'gyilk'am (=those to whom is given first). 
 
 2. Gye'qsEm ( = the chiefs). 
 
 3. Gye'qsEm ( = the chiefs). 
 
 4. Wi'weak-am (=the Wc'k-ae family). 
 
 22. Qa'qamatses (=old mats, so called because slaves of the 
 Wi'wek-ae). Recently they have taken the name of Wa'litsum (=the 
 great ones). 
 
 Gentes: 1. Gyi'gyilk'am (=those to whom is given first). 
 2. Gye'qsEm (=chiefs). 
 
 23. Kue'qa (= murderers). 
 
 Gentes : 1. Wi'weakam (=the We'k'ae family). 
 
 2. K*'o'moyue ( = the rich ones). 
 
 3. Kue'qa (=murderers). 
 
 24. Tlaa'luis. Since the g^-eat war with the southern tribes, which 
 was waged in the middle of this century, they have j jined the Kue'qa, 
 of whom they form a fourth gens. 
 
 25. K*'o'm'enoq. Extinct. 
 
 
 
5Q 
 
 v^ 
 
 f ! 
 
 I > 
 i < 
 
 It': 
 
 I 
 
 »l 
 
 !l! 
 
 KErORT— 1 BOO. 
 
 Social Okganmsatiox. 
 
 The social (n-^anisiif ion of the Kwakiiitl is very ililliciilt to nndor- 
 Btaiid. Jt aj)[)ears tliat, in coiisciinoiuio of wars unci otiier events, the 
 niitnher and an-an^ctncMit of tiihfs and fj^ontes have utiderj^ono consider- 
 al)Io <;hanL,'es. Siicli events as that of the foftnation of a new trihe like 
 the Ma tilpi, or the entering of a small tribe into anothei' as a new gens 
 like tli(! Tlaa'lnis, seem to have oecnrred rather fi-equently. On the 
 whole tlie detinition given in my last report of a tribe as being a group 
 of gentes the aneeslors of \\liom oiiginated at one j)Iaee seems to bo 
 coireet. The tribe is cahed (jiji'mklrit = village ('omrnunity, or Ir'Hrnldtlr, 
 the gens nion^C' nmt =:fello\vs l)elonging to one group, "^riio name of the 
 gens is either the colleetive foi'in of the name of tlu; ancestor, or refers to 
 the' name of the place where if originated, or designates the rank of the 
 gens, in the lirst case it appears clearly that the members of a gens 
 wi'i'o originally eoimeeted by ties if consanguinity. In tie,- second case it 
 would seem that historic events had led to the joiinng of a numl)er of 
 tril)(!s, as mentioned above. For instance, in going over the list of the 
 gentes of the Xi;'mk"ic, it would seem very likely that the Ne'nelky'enoq, 
 the people of the land at the head of the rivei-, wiio used to live in the 
 iiiteriorof Vancouver Island, originall}' formed a separate tribe. In such 
 cases in which gentes of various tribes bear the same name, the name 
 being that of tlie ancestor, it seems likely that they formed oiiginally 
 one gens, which was split up in course of time. This seems most likely 
 in cases in which the gentes refer their origin to a common mythical 
 ancestor, as, for instance, that of the Sl'sintiae. This opinion is also 
 sustained by the tradition that the gentes were divided at the time of the 
 flood, one part drifting here, the other there. The varicms gentes named 
 Gye'qsKm, G^l'gyilk'am, itc, which names merely designate their rank, 
 may have adopted these names independently, and are ])robably not 
 branches of one older gens. Changes of names of gentes and tribes 
 have occurred quite frequently. Thus the name K'T/nioyue of one of 
 the Kwakiuil tribes is a i-eceiit one. The name Wa'litsnm has been 
 adopted by the (^aqama'tses only twenty or thirty years ago. The tribes 
 Ma'malelek'alaand Wl'wek'ae bear the names of their mythical ancestors, 
 ]\Ia'le!ek"a and We'k'ae. They have gentes bearing the names of 
 Malelek'a's and We'k'ae's families. It seems probable that the other 
 gentes joined the tribe later on. The impression conveyed by the 
 arrangement of tribes and gentes is that their present arrangement is 
 comparatively modern and has undergone great changes.^ 
 
 According to the traditions of this people the K'osk'e'moq, Gna'ts'enoq, 
 Kyo'p'enoq, and TIa'sk'enoq drove tribes speaking the Nootka language 
 from the regio)i south of Qnatsino Inlet. The K'osk'e'moq are said to 
 l.ave exterminated a tribe of Kwakiutl lineage called Qo'eas who lived 
 (Ml Quatsino Sound. ^ The Kwakiutl occupied tlie district from Ilai'dy 
 Bay to T'.irnour Is'and ; the Nindcish the region about K'amatsin Lake 
 and Nimkish River, and the Lekwiitok" the country north-west of Salmon 
 
 ' After the above was in type the interesting descriptions of the Apache gentes, 
 by Capt. J. Duurkc, and of the Navajo ^^cntes, by Dr. W. Matthews, appeared 
 (Journ. Amcr. Folk- Love, IS'JO, p]), SI), HI). Tlieh- concliisions regarding the ^(Mites 
 of these people closely !)i;ret' willi I lie views expre.-scii ahove ri'^ardin;^' the Kwakiutl. 
 
 - Iriue also Dr. Ci. M. Dawson, Trans, lioy. Soc. (Janaiia^ 1S87 ii. p. 70. 
 
lut is 
 
 ■noq, 
 
 lid to 
 ived 
 
 iii-dy 
 !iko 
 mou 
 
 ntcs, 
 ■ared 
 cntes 
 kiutl. 
 
 ON THE NORTII-WE^iTKRN TRIBKS OF CANADA. 
 
 57 
 
 River. They did not conquer Viildcs I.slund until the middle of last 
 century. 
 
 The child does not belong by birth to the gens of his father or 
 mother, but may be made a member of any gens to which his lather, 
 mother, grandparents, or great-gi'andpai'ciits belonged, (reiieially each 
 child is made a member of another gens, the reason being prevention of 
 poverty, as will be explained latei- on. The child becomes menil)er of a 
 gens by being given a name belonging to that gens. On this occasion 
 property must be distriljuted among the mendx'is ol' the gens according 
 to the raidv of the name. Hy taking a name belonging to another gens, 
 to which one of his ancestors belonged, a man may become at (he same 
 time a member of that gens. Tims chicd's are sonu'times mei)d)ers of 
 many gentes, and even of several tribes. One Kwakiutl chief, lor 
 instance, belongs to six gentes. The gentes dill'er in rank, and in 
 festivals are }ilaced ai.'cordiiigly, those highest in rank sitting in the rear 
 of the house near the tii'e, the others arranged from that place towarils 
 the door, ranging according to rank. In each gons those highest in rank 
 sit nearest tlie tire. The [jrojier placo of a gens is cailetl tl<>' u>i'. The 
 gens highest in rank receives its pre.-ents lirst. The latter arj not given 
 individually but in bundles, one for each gens. Those who belong to 
 various gentes receive presents as members of each gons. I'^ai-h mnii 
 becomes debtor for tlouble the amount of presents he has received, to bo 
 returned at convenience. Therefore those who belong to various rentes 
 become as nifiny times debtoi's as they are members of gentes. AVlien a 
 man dies his grandchild <u- child generally receives his name. Then the 
 latter becomes responsible for all the debts of the deceased, and the out- 
 standing debts of the d(.'ceasod become duo to him. Jf the child or 
 grandchild does not take his name he does not need to pay thci debts of 
 the deceased, nor has he a claim upon outstanding debts. Children are 
 generally given the names of deceased relatives, as then all debts become 
 due to them, and they are thus provided for in case the fathei' should die. 
 For the same reason children of one family are made members of vai'ious 
 gentes, so as to receive pi-operty as memb(;rs of each gens. J f a man has 
 to give a great feast the mei(il)ers of his gens are bound to help him, and 
 are assessed, according to their wealth, double the amount of the loam-d 
 property to bo restored later on. The property given to a gens is dis- 
 tributed among its mend)ers according to rank and wealth. 
 
 The chiefs of various gentes of one tribe are, when still young, 
 iTistigated by their elders to outdo each other in feats of bravery as well 
 as in giving festivals. This spirit of rivaliy is kept up throughout 
 their lives, and they continually tiy to outdo each other as to who will 
 distribute the greatest amount of property, (jenerally this strife is 
 between the chiefs of two gentes; among the Ninnk'ic, for instance, 
 between TUVg''"'tas chief of the Ts'etsetloa'lak'omae, and Wa'cianit, 
 chief of the Sl'sin lae. The two opposite gentes always watch each 
 other to see whether the opponent regards all th(» rules iind restric- 
 tions by which the life of the Indians is regulated. If they detect their 
 opponents in breaking a rule the latter have to make payments to them. 
 In general it is not allo^ved that a woman give a feast; but by paying 
 twenty blankets ti thu opposing gons permission may be obtained. 
 
 The method of acquiring certain privileges by marriage was described 
 in the Fifth Report of the Committee (p. .5;)). It may be added hero 
 that when a man purchases a wife for his brother he also may take the 
 
58 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 m 
 
 I 
 
 ^ i 
 
 I 
 
 privilcfros, particularly tlio dances, of tlio bride's father. The gontcs aro 
 not t'XogamuuH, but marriages between cousins aro forbidden. 
 
 Customs referring to Birth, ^[AuiaAaE, and Death. 
 
 The customs referrin}." to birtli, marriage, and death were described 
 in the Fifth Jli^port of the Committee. 1 have, however, to correct, to a 
 certain extent, tlie statements referring to the dowry. Ueforo and after 
 marriage tlie wonum begins to collect small copper pl.ates {tld'tlaqsEiii), 
 four of which are tied together and to the point ot a short stick, and 
 the gy'i'.M'qsliily each of which is valued at about one blanket. The 
 (ji/l'si'q.ttdl (=sea-otter teeth) or kiilrnhiija' hO ( = lid of box) is a heavy 
 board of cedar-wood about 2^ feet long by H foot wide, resembling in 
 shape somewhat the lids of Indian boxes, but being far heavier. Its 
 front is painted and set with sea-otter teeth. All these boards aro 
 very old. When the woman has collected a sufficifrnt quantity of these 
 boards — sometimes as many as 200- she gives a feast. The gi/'i'set/stdl 
 are placed in a long row on the beach, so that their fronts form one line. 
 The men sit down on them, and beat time on the boards and sing. On 
 this occasion the woman presents the boaids and the coppers to her 
 husband. 1 inquired once more as to the meaning of this peculiar 
 institution. It would seem that it originally meant that the woman 
 owned many boxes, each board representing one lid. Ihit besides this 
 the sea-otter teeth were considered a valuable possession, and it may 
 be that this accounts for the fact that they arc said to represent the 
 woman's ieeth. When a woman has not given gijVseqstdl to her 
 husband it will be said to her : lopiii'pitu, i.e., you carry no teeth in your 
 head, or wl'pst hd'mas laq tld'koa Jc'EUl't, your teeth are not good to bite 
 copper. 
 
 The Heiltsuk* prepare corpses before burial by taking out the entrails 
 and drying the body. A widow, in addition to the regulations recorded 
 in my last report, must wear for four days after the death of her husband 
 his clothing. From the fifth to the sixteenth day after the death she may 
 lie down at night-time, but must sit up again before the crows cry in the 
 morning. She must not comb her hair or cut it. 
 
 P.'irents of twjus must for sixteen days after the children are born 
 live in a corner of the house, paint their faces red, and strew their hair 
 with eagle down every fourth day. 
 
 / 
 
 1 
 
 
 ..M 
 
 inSLIOlON, 
 
 The Kwakiutl worship the sun, whom they call d'ta and gyl'k'amde 
 (chief). It seems that his third name, k'ams o'um}) (our father), was 
 not used before the advent of the whites, but this is not quite certain. 
 He is also called * our elder brother,' ' the one we pray to,' ' the praised 
 one.' They pray to him. I recorded two formulas : In bad weather the 
 steersman of the canoe will pray: dO'koatUi gtjd'genuq ! gyl' k' aw.de ! i.e., 
 take care of us, chief ! A frequent prayer is : iii gyl'k'amde ! ivd'watle 
 gyd'genuq ! i.e., chief, take pity upon us ! 
 
 Besides the sun a host of spirits are worshipped, particularly those 
 of the winter dances, as set forth in my last report (p. 54). 
 
 The soul is seated in the head, and may leave the body in sickness. 
 It may be restored by the shaman. Two days before death the soul 
 
ON THE NORTir-WESTEHN TUIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 59 
 
 in 
 
 tlio 
 
 li'amde 
 iv), was 
 certain, 
 praised 
 bher the 
 de ! i.e., 
 vd'watld 
 
 those 
 
 leaves tlie body. It hccomos a La'li'iioq, iho sij^lit of whom is deadly. 
 Tlio ' suer ' sees the woiil Kaviiij^ tlic body, and llu'i'of'oro can pn-ilict (iio 
 death of aim»n. The La'lC'UOcj either live in Ilebenak ana ( = tho ^'leatt'.st 
 depth) under;.'roiind or roam through tlio woods. They an; nt)t pcr- 
 tuittcd to enter a house and hovir around the viliiij^'cs causinsj^ bad 
 weather. It is said that the name of JJebOnak'aua was not invented 
 / until alter the advent of the whites, Imi, tht; idea of the j^hnsts having 
 
 their abode in the lower world i.s eonsistently carried throuLih all tales 
 aiul customs of the Kwakintl as well as oi the Nootka, and must there- 
 fore have existed Ix^fore the whites airived <>t\ the Noitli Pacitie eo.-vst. 
 The soul of a deceased person returns again in the first child born after 
 his death. 
 
 These beliefs are well described by the following tale, the events of 
 which are believed to have happened comparatively recently. There 
 were two chiefs among the Nak'oartok', Ank'oa'lagyilis and Ts'K(|'K'le. 
 'J'he former had given away many blankets and was Ts'Kq'E'te's superior, 
 lie was one of twins, and ust>i to say that d'ht, the deity, took special 
 c,' J of him, and that he would go to him after death. He had been 
 accumulating proj)erty for a new festival for four years. When the tribo 
 went olachen fishing he hid his property under stones in the woods. J lis 
 Avife helped him. Ts'Kq'E'te ftillowed them unnoticed and killed them 
 with his lance, lie loaded the bodies with stones and threw them into 
 the sea. Nobody knew what had happened to the chief and to his wife. 
 Ank'.ia'lagyilis had a son whom he had left to the care of one of his 
 brothers. When the boy was grown up he married, and his wife had a 
 son. It was Ank'oa'l.'igyilis who was thus born again. The boy when 
 a few > ears old cried and wanted to have a small boat made, and when 
 }.. l.\. got it asked for a bow and arrows. His father scolded him for 
 liaving so many wishes. Then the boy said, ' I was at one time your 
 father, and have returned from heaven.' His father did not believo 
 him, but then the boy said, ' You know that Ank'oa'lagyilis had gone to 
 buiy his property, and nobody knows where it is. 1 will show it to yon.* 
 He took his father right to the place where it lay hidden, and bade him 
 distribute it. There were two canoe-loads of blankets. Now the people 
 knew that Ank'oa'lagyilis had returned. He said, ' I was with d'ta, but 
 ho has sent nie back.' They asked him to tell about heaven, V)ut ho 
 refused to do so. He became chief and refrained from taking revenge 
 upon Ts'Eq'E'te. 
 
 Shamanism and Witchcraft. 
 
 The shamans of the Kwakiutl are called hc'ih'lv/a, paqa'hi, or imu'alak', 
 the latter being the general name ; while the first and second are only 
 used for the shaman when curing disease. When curing a sick person 
 he has a small dish of water standing next to him, and moistens the part 
 of the body in which the pain is seated before beginning his incantations. 
 He uses a rattle, dances, and finally sucks the disease out of tlie body 
 (Jiu'iqoa') which he shows to the bystanders, the disease being a ]"'sce of 
 skin, a stick, a piece of bone or of quartz. He also uses whistles and 
 blows the disease, which he holds in the hollow of his hands, into the air 
 (he'iliJaja or po'qua). He is also able to see the soul, and on account of 
 this faculty is called d'o'qfs'as, the seer. In his dreams he sees leaving 
 the body the souls of those who are to die within a short time. If a 
 man feels weak and looks pale the seer is sent for. He feels the head 
 
 ff 
 
 ,i : 
 
60 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 Mil 
 it'll 
 
 ill 
 
 
 ■ 1 ., J 
 
 i ■ 1 * ■ 
 
 
 and root of the noso of tlio patient, and finda that hL soul has left his 
 body. Tlien ho ordcu'S a laigo lii'o to bo mado in tlie middle of the 
 house, and when it is dark tlie people assemble and sit around the pht- 
 form of the house, the sick one sitting near the fire. The shaman stands 
 near liim, and by means of iticantations catcdies the soul, which he shows 
 u. •• huff on the palm of his hand. It looks like a mainiikin or like 
 a small bird. Then he restoi-cs it to the ])atient by putting it on the 
 crown of his head, whence it slides into his head. The soul is sup^iosed 
 to occupy the whole head. 
 
 Tlie shaman is also able to hurt a man by throwing disease into his 
 body (md'k'a, see p. 70). He throws a stick, a piece of skin or quartz 
 into the body of his enemy, who falls sick, and if tiie disease should 
 strike his heart must die. The shamans of the Awlky'enoq cccasionally 
 perform a ceremony called ^fiVlrap^ i.e., throwing one another, in which 
 two shamans try to strike each other with disease. The dance of the 
 Ma'mak'a (see p. 70) represents the throwing of the disease by the 
 shamans. 
 
 In order to bewitch an enemy two means may be applied. A portion 
 of his clothing may be buried with a corpse {JiV jU'Jdiitr)., or the cerenu)iiy 
 called c'k\i may be performed. Particularly such parts of clothing are 
 effective that are soiled and saturated with perspiration, for instance, 
 kerchiefs, the lower parts of sleeves, Sec. I learnt about two cases which 
 occurred in 1887 and lS8S at Fort Rupert. In one case a girl fell sick, 
 and as it was suspected that she was bewitched the box was opened in^ 
 which a man who had recently died had been put up. Parts of her 
 clothing weie found in the mouth, nose, and e.ars cf tlio body. Tlie 
 articles were t.aken away, the body washed with fresh water, and replaced. 
 In the other case a grave was oj)ened, and it was found that the tongue 
 of the body had been pulled out, and its mouth st^.tfed with pai'ts of 
 clothing This body was treated in the same way as the othei- one. 
 
 The second method of bewitching an enemy is practised by the i''Jr''<'iinij 
 and is called f,'k'\i. This custom has been well described b}- Dr. G. ^I. 
 ]3awson : ' ' An endeavour is first made to procure a lock of hair, some 
 saliva, a piece of the sleeve and of the neck of the dress, orof the rim of the 
 hat or headdress which has absorbed the perspiration of the person to be 
 bewitched. These are placed with a small piec(! of the .'^kiii and flesh of a 
 dead man, di'ied and roasted before the tire, and rubbed and ponnded 
 together. The mixture is then tied up in a piece of skin ov cloth which 
 is covered over with spruce gum. The little pacikage is next |)laced in 
 a human bone, which is bi'oken for the purpose, and afterwards care- 
 fully tied together and put within a human skull. This again is placed 
 in a box which is tied up and gummed over, and then buried in the 
 ground in such a way as to bo barely covered. A fire is next built 
 nearly, but not exactly, on the top of the ' j.x, so as to warm tlu; 
 whole. Then the eviliy-disposed man, beating his head against a tree, 
 names and dcnouTU'cs his enemy. This is done at night or in the 
 early morning, and in st'cret, and is fri'cpiently repeated till tho enemy 
 dies. The actor must not snule or laugh, and must talk as little as pos- 
 sible till the spell has worked. If a man has reason to suppose that ho 
 is being pra/'tised on iti this way he or his fiiends must endeavour to find 
 the deposit and carefully unearth i',. Hough handling of tho box may 
 
 ' Trans, Uoy. Sod. of Canada, 1SS7, ii. p. \, 
 

 ■HUM 
 
 ON THE NORTII-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 61 
 
 left Ill's 
 i of the 
 
 lie pht- 
 n stiiiids 
 le shows 
 I or like 
 t on the 
 supposed 
 
 into his 
 )r quartz 
 e shoriki 
 iisionally 
 in which 
 :;e of the 
 I by the 
 
 L portion 
 icrenioiiy 
 hin^ are 
 instance, 
 f'S \vhii;h 
 fell sick, 
 [lencd in 
 s of her 
 ly. Tlie 
 replaced, 
 tongue 
 parts of 
 
 |)1U!. 
 
 'l-'rilit'l 
 
 pr. G. :^.i. 
 
 lir, some 
 ni of the 
 on to be 
 lesh of a 
 ponndiKl 
 h which 
 ) la cod in 
 (Is care- 
 is ])laced 
 
 in the 
 ext built 
 arm Ihe 
 st a tree, 
 V in the 
 e enemy 
 c as iK)3- 
 iliiit ho 
 
 to liud 
 box may 
 
 })rove immediately fatal. It is then cautiously nnwrapped and the con- 
 tents are thrown into the sea. If the e\Mlly-<lispos(>d person was dis- 
 covered he was in former years immediately killed, i'f aiter niakiiiii^ np 
 the little package of relics as above noted it is pnt into a. frog, the mout h of 
 which is tied uj) before it is released, a jK'Cixliar sii'kness is produced, 
 ■which causes the abdomen of the person against whom the sorcery is 
 directed to swell.' 'I'he reports which 1 lia\e received agree; in all the 
 main points with the foregoing. Mr. George Hunt, of Fort Rupert, told 
 me of an interesting experience. One day, wlien walking in the woods, 
 he feil in with two men who had made a tire, and one of whom was liohi- 
 ing his face and crying* like a woman. The other moved a box towards 
 the tire, keeping it covered with soil. When they saw that they were 
 observed they ran away. Mr. Hunt took the box home, and was pre- 
 vailed upon by a sick person called ' Captain Jim ' to give it to him. T]'.o, 
 latter maintained to have felt a sudden pain and tiieu a relief at tiie 
 moment wdien the box was taken from the tire. He oj)ened the box, and 
 in it wfts found a human right femur, a rigiit hutnerus, and a skull. The 
 former had been split and tied up with human sinews. They were opened 
 and a piece of a shirt, a handkerchief, some saliva, a piece of the rim of a 
 hat, and p'ece of a mat were found in the bones and in the sknll. The 
 nose, orhits, and foramen magnum of tlu; skull were closed with leaves. 
 The contents were thrown into the sea after being covered with (Valhers. 
 When a nian knows tliat an r'/,''///'<y is bewn''ching liim, lie may call 
 • the Jcr}!jinJi-:i~ui)(j, who is able to undo the practices of the former. Ho 
 goes through the same ceremonies, taking parts of the sick man's 
 clothing", inclosing them in human bones, isnd laaking a, tire over tlieui. 
 J5y performing these practices a second time the ellect of the tirst 
 jierformanee is counteracted. 
 
 Various Belihi'S. 
 
 The sight of a gliost is deadly. A few yf nrs ago a \\()mriii who was 
 wailing for her mother suddenly IVil into a swoon. Tlie people first be- 
 lieved lier to be dead, and carried the corpse into the woods. There they 
 discovered thnt she contiiiued to breathe. They watched her for two davs, 
 when she rccov(M'ed. She told that she had seen two pc.'ojile enter the 
 house. One of them had said, ' Don't cry; \ am yonr mother's gliost. 
 We are well olY wdiere wo live.' She had rejilied : 'Is'o, I mourn hecuuso 
 you have left me aUme.' Then she had fallen into a deep swoon. 
 
 When an eclipse of the sun oi- moon takes [)lace the heavenly bodies 
 are being swallowed. The eclipse is called )^/;A'£'/i'=swal]owed. In 
 order to liberate the sun or the moon they make a great fire, and bnrn 
 blankets, boxes, and food. They also make a noise to fi'igliten av.-ay the 
 enemy, and sing liaiilrnii /=lhrow it uji ! 
 
 ]']arih(piakes are produced by ghosts. To drive them away they mako 
 a noise and bnrn blankets, food, boxes, &c. 
 
 Wolves must not be killed, as el>e no game ei)uld be obtained. 
 
 Wolf's heart and fat are used ;is medicines for heart diseases. 
 
 Women a -e forbidden to touch a wolf, as else they would loose their 
 husbands' aihctions. 
 
 Ilnir, na"ls, and old clothing are burnt as a protection against witch- 
 craft. For the same reasoji they spit into water or fire. 
 
 When a salmon is killed its soul retains to the salmon country. The 
 
 ' 
 
w 
 
 62 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 tm 4 
 
 
 ■: i 
 
 bones must be thrown into the sea, as they will be revived in that case. 
 If they were burnt the soul of the salmon would bo lost. 
 
 Twins, if of the same sex, were salmon before they were born. Among 
 the Nako'mgyilisila the father dances for four days after the children 
 have been born, with a large square rattle. The children by swinging 
 this rattle can cure disease and procure favourable winds and weather. 
 
 A story that is worth being recorded is told by the Nfi'mkic re- 
 garding the supernatural powers of twins. An old woman named 
 We'tsak'anltl, who died only a few years ago, had no teeth left. She was 
 one of twins, and told the people that she would ask her fatlior for now 
 teeth. Then a few large black teeth grew in her mouth. Everyone came to 
 see her. A few years later she said, ' I am getting too old. Don't cry when 
 I die, I merely go to my father. If you cry, no more salmon will come 
 liere. Hang the box into which you will put my body on to a tree near 
 the river after having painted it. When you pass by, ask me for salmon, 
 and I shall send them.' She asked the chief, Na'ntse ( = Great Bear), 
 ' Sliall I become your child, and do you prefer a son or a daughter ? ' 
 He asked her to become a boy, and seven months after her death his wife 
 gave birth to a son, although she was quite old and had had no children 
 since a long time. 
 
 Of another twin, a boy, it is told that after eating fresh salmon he 
 became crazy, but regained his senses after having eatea half-dried 
 olachen. 
 
 Secret Societies. 
 
 In my first report I have explained the principle underlying the secret 
 societies of the Kwakintl, and will merely repeat here that each class of 
 this society has its ruling spirit, who initiates the novice, but thnt at the 
 same time only such jieople nre allowed to become members as have 
 acquired the rigiit of initiation by inheritance or marriage. Each class 
 wears certain ornaments of cedar-bark which is dved red, and called 
 tld'h'aJi-. The highest in rank among the members of this society is the 
 Id'mufs^a, the eater, who devours the flesh of corpses and bites pieces of 
 fl(>sh out of the arms, breasts, back, or legs of the living. The season 
 during which the festivities of the society are performed is called Ts'e'kui 
 by the Kwakiutl, while the other tribes use generally the collective form 
 Ts'elm'f'k'a, which me.ans ' the secrets.' This season lasts fi-om November 
 to February. The rest of the year is called Ba'qus, the time during 
 which the secret societies are forbidden to appear. The same name is 
 applied to the uninitiated and to the festivities of summer. The lV('/.<;d'i'k-a 
 does not last throughout the winter, but includes only a succession of 
 dances, ceremonies, and feasts to which one man sends ont invitations. 
 
 No more than four Ts'i'tm'i'lra must be celebrated in one season. The 
 man who giv^es the Ts'etsa'Ok'a has to pay the expenses of the ceremonies, 
 and particularly has to supply the immense quantities of food that are 
 required. He is called ?/(''«'///(7(i. He must have accumulated the follow- 
 ing amount of property before he is allowed to become yP'wiuiJa : Two 
 blankets for each mati who is to take part in the festival, one spoon, one 
 mat, ten pairs of copper braceh^ts, one pair of mountain-goat horn brace- 
 lets inlaid with haliotis shells, two fathoms of pearls, two tla'tlaqsEm 
 (see p. 58), and two gyl'sEqslal (see p. oH) for each man and for each 
 woman, one dish and one box for each two persons. 
 
 The Tx'iVntl'rk'ii is celebrated when a novice or a member of the R(,'cret 
 
 i 
 
Ml 
 
 anio is 
 Isil'i'lc'd 
 sion of 
 ;atioiis. 
 Tho 
 monies, 
 I at aro 
 follow- 
 Two 
 , one 
 brace- 
 lii(|sF,m 
 )r ('ach 
 
 ) 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 63 
 
 society returns ^v in i]^e woods after beinpf initiated or after having had 
 intercourse with tae genius of his dance. Generally it is arranged in such 
 a way that the man who intends to give the IVctsd'ck'a sends his son or 
 some other relative into the woods. By his staying there with the spirits 
 lie will I'ise to a higher class of the society, and thus partake of the distinc- 
 tion arising from the celebration. But this is not necessarily the ease. 
 While the young man stays in the woods the yeivinihi sends two messen- 
 gers around (fhl'laJa) to give notice that he intends to give a IVefmcli-a. 
 A few days before the beginning of the festivities he sends the same mes- 
 sengers to invite the people (ii' ctsdsta) , and finally at the night of the 
 beginning of the festivals, when everything is ready, the messengers call 
 the guests to come (dlau'lt k'd'fsJ'^t). 
 
 So far the cu.s <- as arc common to all tribes speaking the Kwakintl 
 dialect, but tho details of the societies as well as their rank and the cere- 
 monies of various dances differ somewhat among various tribes. Four groups 
 may be distinguished, each having peculiar customs. The fii'st comprise 
 the Kwakintl, Nemk'ic, Ma'malOlek'ala (Matilpi), Tlau'itsis, Tena'qtaq, 
 and Le'kwiltok" ; the second the Tsa'watEenoq, Guau'aenoq, and Jfaqua.'- 
 mis ; the third, the Tlatlalisk'oa'la, Nak'o'mgyilisila, Na'k'oartok", and 
 Gnasi'la; the fourth, the K'oske'moq, Kyo'p'enoq, Tla'sk'enoq, and 
 Gua'ts'enoq. I shall first describe the customs of the first gronp. 
 
 Some time before tho beginning of the festivities the yc'iciiiiJa must 
 give a large quantity of cedar-bark to the ' masLv^r of the cedar-bark' 
 {tld'tlak'alc'siJa^, who has to make all the ornaments for the various 
 members of the Ts'etsa'ek'a. Four days after he has received the bark 
 he invites the whole tribe and distributes the ornaments. Tliis festival is 
 called k'ap^eJcK He also gives to all those present three kinds of tallow 
 for smearing the face, mountain-goat, deer, and k'u'iselc (?) tallow. This 
 office is acquired by being inherited from the father, not by marriage. 
 There are three more offices of a similar kind which are inherited in tho 
 same way, that of the singing-master, who teaches songs and rhythms, 
 the baton-master (tWmintse), who has to procure the batons for beating 
 time ; and the drum-ma.ster {md'mEnatslla), who has to look after tho 
 dram. 
 
 As soon as the Ts'et^a'ek'a begins, the gentes and the social rank of 
 ordinary times aro suspended, and a new arrangement takes place, "i'lio 
 ])(>ople drop their ordinary names and ass'.ime their Ts'etsa'ek'a names. Tho 
 tribe is divided into two groups, the vir'eniknaf (seals) and tholri(i''k'Ht!'i', 
 the former being higher in rank. All those who are initiated may become 
 members of the rne'emkoat, but they are at liberty to join the k'utk'ufse 
 for one IVefm'Pk'a. They have to pay a number of blankets to the 
 mr.'eniknat for obtaining the right to stay away from the group to which 
 they properly belong. Only the highest grade of the members of the 
 Ts'etsa'ek'a, the lid'vuits^i, must join the wr'rnikntd. They must dress in 
 black, and, it is said, are called 'seals ' for this reason. The house of the 
 yr'nuiilhi is their house, and is tabooed as long as the ceremonies last. Tt 
 is called tlamelnfsr, and no uninitiated (Bn'qns) is allowed to enter. They 
 have to stay in this house throuLrhoiit tho duration of the 'IVrhd'fkui. 
 Sometimes a large ring of cedar- hark dyed red, the emblem of the society, 
 is fastened to the door of tho house to indicate that it is tabooed. The 
 ]id')nafs\t is the chief of the vir'onikddf, and, therefore, during the festival, 
 of the whole tribe. If a member of the mr'ankintt wishes to leave the 
 houFO he must obtain his permission inst. When the Inl'maisa wishes 
 
 1-r 
 
64 
 
 REroRT — 1890. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 < \ 
 
 m 
 
 to obtain food he may send anyone huntin<^ or fishing', and his orders 
 must bo obeyed. Only durinfj danecs and feasts the nninitiated are 
 admitted to the taboo house. If anyone intends to invito the nir'snilcoat 
 to a feast tlie hd'^nafsa^s wife may enter the house and deh'vor the message 
 after liaving publicly announced that she will go there. The mO'emkoat 
 are not ])erinitted to toucli their wives, but nowadays this custom is 
 mostly rcsti'ieted to the hu'mals'a. 
 
 The Iruvh'iUsi' are subdivided into seven societies: 
 
 1. M'la'wrfeiwq (killer whales), the young men, 
 
 2. lyniVi'i]!)'}' (rock-cods), men about tliirty to foi'ty years of age. 
 
 3. Tli'-'thiqiiii (sea-lions), men forty to fifty years old. 
 
 4. K'or/k'oim (whales), old men and old chiefs, 
 o. KrkiiafjaJ'Vk'a (crows), girls. 
 
 G. K:d k'(ik'ai) (chickens), formei'ly called wd' qii'tvioli (a small species 
 
 of birds), young women. 
 7. Mnsmns (cows), old women.' (This name was recently ado )ted, 
 
 but I did not learn the old name.) 
 
 Dnrinof the IVvLm'ck'anW these societies wear ornnments of the animals 
 which they represent. They are opponents of the nir'euikditt. The 
 vic'evikuat and each of the groups of the k'uv'k'utnc give feasts to each 
 other ' in order to keep their opponents in good huraonr.' Nevertheless 
 the k'Kck'iit.si' always attempt to excite the mi'.'cniko'it, as will be described 
 pi'esently, and the latter will attack the k'ur'k'Hfsr. The natives consider 
 these festivals not purely from a religicv s point of view, although the 
 hitter is their principal character, but it is at the same lime the social 
 event of the year, in which merry- mal-cing and sjjorts of all sorts are en- 
 joyed. Even the attacks of the vir'emkodi, which will be described here- 
 after, are considered as j)art of the 'fun.' 
 
 Th(> mc'eml-ont are subdivided into a great number of clashes which 
 have dilTcrent rank, I give here the list of the divisions of t\\o inH'Hiukoat 
 arranged according to raidc : 
 
 1. ilamats'a. 
 
 2. Nr)'nt3istatl. 
 
 8. K-'oe'k-oastatl. 
 
 4. Nu'tlmatl. 
 
 f). "NiVne. 
 
 (i. I o q uit. 
 
 7. llailikyilatl. 
 
 8. Me'itla. 
 
 9. Nu'ntlKm. 
 
 10. Kyimk-'alatla. 
 
 11. Tldkoa'la. 
 
 12. lakniMta'lati. 
 l;^. K '.Vmalatl. 
 14. ilawi'nalatl. 
 
 Then follow a number of dances, which are all of e([ual rank : 
 Ha'masElatl, Ha'ok-haok", Ku'nqulatl, K-o'lus, and many othei-s. The last 
 is the Lolo'tlalatl, which is as high in rank as the Ila'mats'a, but is opposed 
 to him, and therefore stands at the other end of the dancers. 
 
 ' This peculiar custom of suspending tliu frentes on certain occasions, and intro- 
 ducing a class sys em instead, .seems wortiiy of attention. Althougii tliis fact is far 
 from lieing a ]iroof of the fi>ruier existence of sue!i a systi'in ainoni;- tlie Kwakiull, 
 still itsc->ire>|iondence to tiie Australian class system is cei'iaiiily suL^ircslive, and may 
 point to a development of tlie social institutions of tliese tribes. Th(! idea of tlie 
 possibility of su'|iending all ^'entes points out that the hitter are either of coiripara- 
 tively recent origin or tiuit they are degeneratinir. 'J'lie former alternative appears 
 more- jirobable, as in religio\is festivities, sueli as the IVrt.sdTlin. G(>nerally ancient 
 iiistitutiims an; preserved. It is hardly necesyary to mention tliat similar class .sys- 
 tems are found east of the Koeky Mountains. 
 
1 orders 
 ted are 
 
 ■'enil'oat 
 message 
 
 stora is 
 
 ?«• 
 
 1 species 
 ado )ted, 
 
 3 animals 
 tt. The 
 s to each 
 ortlioU'ss 
 U;scril)cd 
 consider 
 nugh the 
 lie social 
 s are cii- 
 3ed hero- 
 es wliich 
 'cnikuat 
 
 rank : 
 The hist 
 opposed 
 
 ml iiilro- 
 act is far 
 Kwakiutl, 
 , and may 
 .a of the 
 coiiipnra- 
 (> afipcars 
 ^y aiicii'iil 
 :;hiss sys- 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 65 
 
 1. The lld'mafs^a and the No'ntsistall are initiated by Baqbakua- 
 lanusl'uae,' liaqbakualatle, Ha'niaa, or Ha'ok'haok", the first being, 
 however, by far the most important. During tlie dancing season tlie 
 h(l'mats\t may devour corpses and bite people. It seems that in former 
 times they also killed and devoured slaves. His ornaments are a very 
 large head-ring, three neck-rings and bunches tied into his hair, around 
 his w^rists and ankles, all these ornaments being made of cedar-bark 
 dyed red. His face is painted black. He has six large whistles, ea(di 
 whistle being a combination of several whistles with one common mouth- 
 })iece. They are called mEt><<''.<;, which is said to nie.an ' making him gay.' 
 He dances in a squatting position, his arms being extended hori/ontally, 
 first to one side, then to the other. His hands tremble continually. His 
 eyes are staring, his lips protruding voluptuously. Others in dancing 
 keep their hands pi-essed against the belly, to k(<ep back the spirits which 
 are supposed to dwell in the belly, and whose voices are heard, tlu ir 
 voices being the sounds of the whistles. When dancing the hd'mats'a 
 cries luip hap ! On the morning when the Jin' mats^d returns from tho 
 woods at the beginning of the Ts\]tsd't'k-a he uses hemlock wreaths instead 
 of cedai'-bark rings. On the same evening he dances with his cedar-bark 
 ornaments. Sometimes the Jul' nuifn'a has two or four rnttles. He does 
 not swing them himself, but has four companions, called liiUli'Iiya or 
 sd'latlila, who stand around him rattling. The hiuhest Inl'mats'a use 
 the masks of the /iil'(ih'Jta(ik',ov of the cj'nh^i'kiiiins. Women cannot attain 
 the rank of the highest hd'mafs'a, although they can become members of 
 the fraternity. Tliey use the ha'm^nui {i.e., hd'mal.'i((''s mask for the fore- 
 head), but do not dance themselves, a man acting in their stead. One 
 cannot become hd'mats'a unless one has been a member of one of tho 
 lower ranks of tho Ts'ftsd'ck'a for eight years. When the hd'maln'a 
 returns from tho woods the liiji'mk''alatla (No. 10), who is his servant, 
 must attend him. The latter carries a large head-ring, a small whistle, 
 and a lai'ge rattle. He carries a corpse on his arms, and thus entices the 
 hd'mats'a. to follow him into the dancing-house. From the momein^ when 
 he is found in the woods the sd'latlila surround him. The kiji' rnk'^alutla 
 leads him into the rear of the house, leaving the large fire which is 
 burning iu the centre of tho house to his left. Then he deposits tho 
 corpse, and tastes its flesh four timos before giving it to the hd'mats'a. 
 When the latter begins to devour the flesh, which ho must bolt, not chew, 
 the kiji'mlr'alatla brings him water, which the hd'mats'a drinks in 
 biitween. The kiji'mk'' alalia, cuts the flesh in narro^v strips. The bodies 
 which are used in this ceremony are prepared by being soaked in salt 
 water. The flesh is removed from under tho skin with sharp sticks, so 
 that only skin, sinews, and bones remain. When the other hd'mats'a see 
 the corpse they make a rush at it, and fight for the flesh. The ki/i' mk''a' 
 latla breaks the skull and the bonen, and gives them the brain., and the 
 marrow. Tt was stated above that thi k'nck'tifsr always try to excite 
 thf" meemkoat, and particularly the hd'mats'a. This is done by trans- 
 trressions of any of the numerous rules relating to the intercourse with 
 the hd'mats'a. Nobody is allowed to eat until he has begun. Or: he is 
 olfered a feast. A kettle is filled with food, and as soon as it 'jogins 
 to boil they will upset the kettle. When a LfdnllaJatl (ghost dance) 
 song is sung the hd'mats'a will become excited as soon as tho word 
 
 See ,/((//?•;/. Aiiirr. Ftilh-Lar:'. i. ii. ."ilj, IT. 
 
 5 
 
 II (> 
 
66 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 ^'S 
 
 iH 
 
 Ld'h'nnq (o^host) occurs, the Lnh'/tlalatl being his opponent. As soon as 
 thi ha Hints' a gets excited the naihnatl will close the door aiid prevent 
 the escape of those present. Then the Itd'mats'a rushes around and bites 
 the people. At the same time, when the nutlmatl rises, the ki/i'niJi-'alatlti 
 must rise and attend his master, the hamats'a following all his move- 
 ments. If the latter is unable to get hold of anyone (use he bites the 
 ki/i'iii}i'\ilatla. When the hd'mats'a returns from the w(»ods a post 
 called ha'mi^piq (=eat-post) is erected in the dancing-hoase, and remains 
 there for four days. It is a high pole, with a short cross-piece on top. It is 
 wound with rod cedcai'-bark, which spreads toward the cross-piece in the 
 shape of a fish-tail. After the fourth night the pole and the cedar-bark 
 are burnt.. During the IVrtnu'i'lra season the hn'mntti'a inusl speak in 
 whispers only. When he has eaten a corpse he has to observe certain very 
 strict, regulations for four months after the end of tlie dancing season 
 before he is allowed to have unobstructed intercourse with the rest of the 
 tribe. He is not allowed to go out at the door, but a separate oi)ening is 
 cut for his use. When he rises he must turn round four times, turning 
 to the left. Then he must put forward his foot four times before actually 
 making a step. In the same way he 'las to make four steps b'jfore cfoing 
 out of the door. When he re-enters the house he has to go through the 
 same cercmonios before passing the door, and must turn round four 
 times before sitting down. He must use a kettle, dish, spoon, and cup 
 of his own, which are throw i) siway at the end of the four months. lielore 
 taking water out of the backet or river he must dip his cun tour 
 times into the water before actually taking any. He must not take more 
 than four motithfuls at one time. When he eats boiled salmon he must 
 not blow on it in order to cool it. During this period he must carr^'^ a 
 wing-bone of an eagle, and drink through it, as his lips must not touch 
 the brim of his cup. He also wears a co{)per nail to scratch his head with, 
 as his nails must not touch his skin, else, it is believed, they would 
 come oti'. At the end of the Ts'rtsd'i'k'a many people surround the 
 hani'it^'a and lead him into every house of the village and then hack to 
 the dancincr-hnuse. This is called ivU'lck'a. When the dancing season is 
 over, the }in'»infs\i feigns to have forgotten all the ordinary ways of men 
 and has to learn everything anew. He acts as though he were vvvy 
 hungry. The bones of the corpse lie has eaten are kept for four numtlis. 
 They are kept alternatelj four days in his bedroom and four ilays under 
 rocks in the sea. Final 'y they are thrown into the sea. After the 
 'IVi'fsil'rk-a is over he has to pay everyone whom he has bition. It, i.-s said 
 that the Kwakiutl obtained the lid' inatf<'a ceremonies from the Awi'ky'euoq, 
 Tsa'watEenoq, and Heiltsuk'. 
 
 2. The No'ntsistiitl is al.so initiated by Baqbnknalanusl'uae. He is 
 painted black, covered with ashes, and carries iirebrands, which he bran- 
 dishes in dancing. He hfts two whistles, is allowed to bite people, and 
 eats out. of one dish with the hl'mats\i. 
 
 8. lv"'oe'k'oastatl (from k'\)ek'nasii, to beg), the beggar dancer, carries 
 two whiwtles. He is so called because anything he asks for must bo 
 given him. 
 
 4. Nfi'tlniatl (=t]ie fool dance). The Nutlmatl carries a lane, sticks, 
 or stones. When he is excited by the k'nr'k )ihc he knocks to pieces 
 what he can lay his hands upon, and strikes the people. In v.: der to excite 
 him they si)ig a song taken fi-om a legend referi'ing to the mink and the 
 wolves. Mink, Tle'selagyilak' (= made the sun), had kilUd two sons of 
 
UK 
 
 ', sticks, 
 pieces 
 o exciio 
 and the 
 
 sons of 
 
 ON THE NORTn-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 67 
 
 the chief of the Atla'lenoq (= wolves), who were preparing themselves 
 in the woods for the Ts'i'tyaclra. The AthVlcnoq learnt that lie had 
 committed the murder, and invited hira to a feast, during wliich they 
 intended to kill him. He came and sang : K'np'ttvu'i'/mj Kn''n aqo 
 vEk'amCf'eaiix AtJalrnoi/, i.e., Kilcii ( = mink), took the middle of face 
 (=nose) of Atlii'lenoq for his cap. This song is nsed 'to make the 
 Niitltnatl wild.' If anyone makes a mistake in dancing he is killed by 
 the Xfitlmatl, who is assisted by Na'no, the grizzly bear. (See also 
 No. 14.) 
 
 5. Na'ne, the grizzly bear, also knocks down people when he is excited. 
 He hates the red colour. (See also Nos. 4 and 14.) 
 
 G. To'q'uit Is danced by women, the arms of the dancer being raised 
 high upward, the palms of her hands being turned forward. The npper 
 part of the dancer's body is naked; hemlock branches are tied around her 
 waist. She has four attendants, who always surround her. The dance is 
 said to have been originally a war-dance. The warriors, before going on an 
 expedition, went into the woods in order to meet the double-headed snake, 
 the Si'siutl, wliicli gives them great strength and power. After return- 
 ing from the woods they engage a woman to dance the To'q'uit. Very 
 elaborate arrangements are made for this dance. A double-headed snake, 
 about 20 feet long, made of wood, blankets, and skins, is hidden in a long 
 ditch , which is partly covered with boards. Strings are attached to it, 
 which pass over the beams of the house, and are worked by men who 
 hide in the bedrooms. As soon as the dancer appears, the people begin 
 to sing and to beat time. In dancing the woman acts as though she were 
 trying to catch something, and when she is supposed to have got it she 
 throws back her hands and the Si'siutl rises from out of the ground, moving 
 its heads. If it does not move properly the lla'mats'a, No'ntsistatl, 
 Kfi'tlmatl, and the bear jump up and bite and strike the people, driving 
 them out of the house. Finally the snake disappears in the ditch. A mes- 
 senger next calls upon one of the attendants to kill the dancei'. Appa- 
 rently a wedge is driven through her head. It consists of two parts, each 
 being fastened to one side. She continues to dance, the wedge sticking 
 out of both temples, and blood flowing down freely. Then her head is 
 struck with a paddle, which is cut out so as to fit in the head, and she 
 continues to dance, her head being apparently split by the paddle. Some- 
 times she is burnt. For this purpose a box having a double bottom 
 is prepared. She lies down, and the box is turned over so that her body 
 may be conveniently pushed into it. At the place where she lies down 
 a pit irs dug, in which she hides. The box is turned up again, closed, 
 and thrown into the fire. Before the beginning of the ceremojiy a corpse 
 has been put in*^e +he lower part of the box. From the i)it in which 
 the dancer hidea, a tube of kelp has been laid underground, leading 
 to the centre of the fire. It acts as a speaking tube. The woman sings 
 through it, and her voice apparently comes out of the fire. Af'terwai'ds 
 the bones are found in the fire. They ai'e collected, laid on a new mat, 
 and for four days the people sing over the bones, while the woman 
 remains hidden in a bedroom. At last the bones are heard to sing 
 (which is done by placing the mat over the mouth of the speaking tube), 
 and the next morning the woman is seen to be once more alive. Aftor the 
 woman has been apparently killed the tVi:' tiixiJr is seen behind the spec- 
 tators. It consists of a series of flat carved boards, which arc connected 
 on their narrow sides by plugs, which are pas.sed through rings of Cfdiir 
 
 5a 
 
 ,i .. 
 
08 
 
 Fig. is.- D'K'iii^ik- 
 
 H! 
 
 t<&2 
 
 ili 
 
 .Oi 
 
 h- 
 
 REPOKT— 1800. 
 
 ropc=?. 1>. has two or tlireo point.s on top, and is 
 ofniuiioiitcd witli mica (tii;. 18). It is iiitoiulcMl to 
 ropivseut the Sl'siiitl. It is sot in undulatini^ 
 motions. Crcjncrally thrro of these fii:fnro3 ap[iear. 
 In the To'q'uit tlio No'ntlKmti'vila ( = niakiii(; fool- 
 ish) is also used. It is a small, flat, human fi^-ni'O 
 with movable head and arms. Two lines of mica 
 run from the cyt^s to the corners of the month. It.s 
 h(ad is set with hnnduvs of human hair. In a 
 nnmher of these figures the head can he taken off, 
 being inserted into the body by means of a plug. 
 Then two carved birds ai'o used, which ily down 
 from the roof, flapping their leather wings. They 
 grasp the head and carry it away, to return it after 
 a while. The figure is al.so Avorked from under- 
 ground. 
 
 7. Ha'ilikyilatl is the conjurer's dance. 
 
 V. Xo'ntlKm dances the hands alternately, one 
 turned up to the shoulder, the other downward and 
 backward as far as possible. 
 
 10. Kegai'ding the Kyi'mk"'alatla see p. G5. 
 
 11. The Tlukoa'la is the wolfs dance. It corre- 
 spomJs almost exactly to the Tlokoalaof the Nootka 
 (see p. -l"). Th{;y wear the nlfi'i'inn', a small carved 
 wolf's head, on the forehead. They crawl on the 
 knuckles of the fingers, the thundis turned back- 
 ward, and on the toes around the lire. 
 
 12. lakeiata'latl. Dance of the sea-monster or 
 lake-monster la/kiiim with the mask (fig. ll>). 
 
 VS. The K''6'malatl is initiated by the bird 
 Mati/m, who is said to live on a high mountain 
 inland, and conveys su[)ernatural powers, particu- 
 larly t!:o faculty of tl^'ing, through pieces of quartz, 
 wdiich he gives the novice. The dancer's body is 
 covered with blood, and he has five pieces of quartz 
 in his hail', arranged on the medial line. 
 
 Ik Ilawl'ualatl. The ilawi'nalatl is initiated 
 V)y the Wina lagyilis, a genius o*^ warriors. The 
 Ilawi'nalatl has his shoulders and thighs perforated, 
 and ropes pulled tlu'ough the wounds. .Sniiill and 
 thin slabs of wood are sewed to his hands. A heavy 
 post is leaned ngainst the front of the dancing- 
 house, and a block is fastened to its top. A rope is 
 passed over the block and fastened to the ropes 
 which Itavo been pulled through the Hawi'nalatl's 
 flesh. He is raised on the pole, hanging from these 
 ro{)es. He carries a Si'siutl knife, with which 
 he himself cuts his wounds, and wears a Si'siutl 
 belt. The Ha'mats'a, Nutlmatl, and bear stand 
 around him. If the ropes should give way the 
 latter two kill him, while the Ha'mats'a devours 
 him. 
 
 In the Lolo'tlalatl dance the dancer appears to be 
 
ON THE NOnTU-AVESTEUN TiaidCS OF CANADA. 
 
 69 
 
 liilcon by the jLjliORts to tlie ]i)\ver wiirld. For tliis jjiirposo ti loni^, deep 
 (lilch is dugout behind <lie lire. Tlio (Lmccr, who wfars a loiiij veil of 
 cedar-bai'k over his lUee, has a ropo fled round his waist, whii'h is bidd 
 
 Fk;. 111. I;i'klliiii llead-uiiisk. 
 
 
 to be 
 
 by hia attendants. Sjieaklng tubes of kelp are laid so as to terminate in 
 the lii-e. Through these many voices are heard, and the ghosts take the 
 dancer into the lower world, i.e., he disap[)ears in his ditch, drawing the 
 rope after him, while the others feign to try to hold him. After a while 
 
I 
 
 70 
 
 IIKPOKT— 1890. 
 
 i, 
 
 I- (' 
 
 tlie voices avo licartl again, ami a black head is seen rising from tlie earth, 
 which brings him back. 
 
 The monihers of the Tx\'tsi'i'rl-n among the Tsawatirnoci, (Iiiau'aOnoq, 
 and llaqua'mis arc the following, arranged according to rank: — 
 
 1. ^rri'niak''a. 
 
 2. HiVmats'a. 
 
 3. Hai'ak'anth:Iiill (= speaker duTicc). 
 
 4. Haui'Vjakulatl induces chiei's to break copi)ers, to destroy pro- 
 perty, &c. 
 
 r>. Walns'aqiVatl. 
 G. llaua'iadalatl. 
 
 The IMa'mak'a (= the thrower) dances with his palms laid against 
 one another, making molions like a swimmer. Suddenly he is snpposi-d 
 to have found his magical stick, which he throws upon tlie bystanders. 
 One of them falls down, and blood il tws from his head. He has been 
 wounded by tlu; ^Iri'mak"'a, who then exti'acts his stick. The latter con- 
 sists of a hollow piece of wood, in which another piece slides up and 
 down. It is covered with .skin, so that it appears as though the stick 
 de(!reases and increases in size. 
 
 The Walas'afja'atl (=grefit dance from above) belonged formerly also 
 to the first group of tribes. Tt was, however, taken from them in a war. 
 It is somewhat related to the Tlnkoa'la. In the dance a great wolf appears 
 from above. It is danced by men and women. 
 
 The Haua'iadalatl swings a great knife. He pretends to cut his 
 thi'oat at each beating of the drum. 
 
 The K'o'sk emoq, Ky'r)p'enoq, Tlask'enoq, and Gua'ts'enoq have the 
 following dances, arranged according to rank, so far as I am acquainted 
 with their dances ; — 
 
 1. To'q'uit. 
 
 2. Ma'mak-'a. 
 
 3. Ha'mats'a. 
 
 It is stated that they acquired the Ha'mats'a from the last grouji, 
 which comprises the Tlatlasik'oala, Nak'o'mgyilisila, Xa'k'oartok", and 
 Guasi'la. They have two dancing seasons in winter, the first called 
 Nu'ntlEvi, and lasting from November to about the winter solstice, and the 
 'IV I'Ua' I'h: a during the following two months. During the No'ntlRm the 
 geutes remain in force. Instead of cedar-bark, which has been dyed red, 
 undyed cedar-bark, instead of eagle feathers and down, feathers and down 
 of the cormorant ai'e used. Songs belonging to the Jhi'ijus (see p. 62), 
 Nu'ntlEm, and Ts'ctsd'vlca are sung. There is no difference in rank of 
 the various members of this society. Here belong all the animals and 
 birds which among the Kwakiutl belong to the IVctsd'ek'a and al.so the 
 Nu'tlmatl and Hawl'nalatl. The Nu'tlmatl has not the same duties as 
 among the Kwakiutl. When the Hawl'nalatl's ropes tear out of the flesh 
 Le is not killed, but the conjurers heal him. 
 
 The members of the IVetsd'tk'a are the following, according to their 
 rank : — 
 
 1. MiVmak-'a. 
 
 2. Ha'mats'a. 
 
 3. O'lala (= To'q'uit of the Kwakiutl). It contains the Ts'e'kois and 
 Si'lis. 
 
 
 i ' i. 
 
 i i ' 
 
ON THE NOUTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 71 
 
 Ills 
 
 lis 
 
 and 
 
 4. FiAlo'tlalatl. 
 
 r>. Hiii'iilikyalatl. 
 
 0. Yiri'iatnlatl. 
 
 7. lVM|alalatI, a fomalo conjurer, who has to sooth the Ila'iiiats'a and 
 keep hini from usiiifjc his \vhisthj8. 
 
 H. Wii'tanum. Those who join for the first time the IVC'tsd'ek'a, i.e., 
 novices of tlic lowest grade. 
 
 AnioMLf tliis group the TTa''iiats'a, on returning from tlie woods, dances 
 four niglits with wn itlis of hcniloi'k branches; the following four nights 
 (tifth to eighth) with no ornaments whatever; then four nights (ninlh to 
 twelftli) witii ornaments of J'ed cedar-bark, lie wears eight bundles over 
 his forehead which are cidled h if n' xl icr, and four on each side. The fol- 
 lowing night (thirteenth), after he has linislied dancing one of the 
 lcif<i'slwo is tak(.'n od", which is publicly announced on the following morning. 
 The; fourteenth night two more of these bundles are taken away, tlie 
 next, two mure ; and finally, the sixteenth, one more, which is also publicly 
 announced each morning. The seventeenth night a l)lack line is drawn over 
 his fice from th(! left side of his forehead to the riglit side of his chin, 
 and then he rises to bite jieople. Liter on he is e.vcited l)y mistakes 
 U'adc in songs, and by Jjolo'tlalatl songs. 
 
 The gentes are suspended during the 'IWvfsack'a, and societies take 
 tlieir place. The members of the 'JVr.fsa'tlra are called K''a'kMnri's 
 (' stickshoes ' ?). If a dancer makes a mistake he is tied up in a blanket, 
 thrown into the tire, and I'oasted alive.' 
 
 The following customs belong to the Kwakiutl group, but are probably 
 more or less in common to all those tribes. 
 
 In order to become a member of any one of these societies ilie novice 
 must be initiated by the spirit of the grade he intends to occupy. ]?ut 
 when first entering the society the novice must take the lowest degree, 
 from which he may gradually rise. A number of these grades are the 
 property of certain gentes, so that anyone wlio is a member of the gei;s 
 may ac(|uire it, provided he finds someone who is willing to give the 
 Tx'r/su'rira for him. For instance, the Ua'ili kyilatl belongs to the gens 
 Haai'lak^'cmae of the K"'6'moyue. As a rule, however, the right to be. 
 come a member of the respective grade of the society is acquired by 
 marriage, after the consent of the council has been obtained. After the 
 marriage has been consummated the woman's father must give up liis 
 dance to his son-in-law, as described in my last report (p. 142). If a man 
 ])urcliases a wife on behalf of his brother he may take the woman's father's 
 dance. 
 
 The father of the novice gives a feast, at which the young man 
 dances, and then retires to the woods, where he must prepare himself by 
 fasting and bathing for the encounter with the spirit. The s|»irits 
 appear only to clean men ; others are not likely to see them, and if tluiy 
 did the spirits would kill them. Sometimes the novice disappears sud- 
 denly during the feast, and is supposed to have tlown away. After lie 
 has been initiated by the spirit of the grade he wishes to acquire he 
 returns to the village, and his whistle or his voice is heard in the woods. 
 Then tiie ijc'iviiiihi, who is to give the Ts'ctsd'rlca, calls the whole tribe 
 to the first dance, which is called hikyi'lnala. The iji''' iciiiila has to give 
 
 ' I have no tnistvortliy information regarding the rank of dances of the llO'iltsuk". 
 They call the Ha'iuats'a, Tanl's. 
 
 
?r 
 
 ' 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 ! 
 
 72 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 r . 1 
 
 ';n 
 
 fi 
 
 ^11 
 
 t '■ 1 
 
 the more profi'iils during the T/Ctgd'ck'a, the higher the grade is tliat the 
 novice has ac(|uire(l. 
 
 On this day each society, after having rcreivcd their cedar-bark 
 rings from tlie thl'tlak'itksiln., goes into tlie woods and hohls a moi'ting, 
 in which tlieir (diief insti'ucts them regarding their (hmces. This is 
 called A0^///;////?'//'a7.s ( = beginiiing of foolishness). All those who make 
 mistakes later on arc killed by the Nfitlinatl. 
 
 In the evening the ijr' ii'iiilla sends out two male messengers to invit(5 
 all })eo[)le to his house, which heneel'orth is tlic taboo-liouso of the 
 viroukuat. The messengers sny : himtuils vmthtqnihl pviHiqn'la (let us 
 all try i,o bring him back by our sacred dances). The people assemble 
 and sit down in groups, each society by itself. The vir'oiiknat have the 
 ])laceg of honour, ami among them the li'i'mats\i has the first place, 
 sitting in the rear of the house in the middle. The other mij'emknat are 
 arranged at his sides according to rank around the house, the lower in 
 rank the fariher from the lin'nints\t and the nearer the door. The 
 LnlO'llalall, who is as high in rank as the lid'mats'a, sits close to the door 
 opposite the hn'mats^i. The societies dance one after the other, accord- 
 ing to rank, the Mi'ia'mq'Onoq beginning. The yr'tvinila stands in the 
 middle of the house, two messengers attending him. These ho despatches 
 to members of the various societies, and oi'ders them to dance. The 
 interval until the dancers are dressed up and make their appearance is 
 tilled with railleries between the messengers. For instance, if a woman 
 is to dance, the one will say: ' She will not come ; when I brought her 
 the message she was fighting with her husband.' The other will answer: 
 ' Oh, you liar ! She is dressing herself up, and you will see how nice 
 she looks ! ' As soon as the two watchmen who stand at the door see her 
 coining they begin swinging their rattles, and then the people begin to 
 sing and. to beat time with their batons, which were distributed by the 
 t'lVmiatsa (see p. 63). When the festival begins, the 'drum-master' 
 carries his drum into the house on his shoulder, going four times around 
 the fire, which is on his left, before he takes his place in one of the rear 
 corners of the house. While making his circuit he sings a certain song. 
 The dancer enters the house, and, turning to the right, goes around the 
 lire until he arrives in the rear part of the house. Then the people stop 
 singing and beating time until his dance begins. The dancer first faces 
 the hd'iaafs'a, who sits in the rear of the house. Then he turns to the 
 left, to t;he fire, and finally faces the hd'mats'a again. He leaves the 
 house, having the fire on his left side. Thus all the societies dance. The 
 last are the me'emkoat, the members of whom dance according to rank, 
 the lowest first, the hd'mats'a last. After his dance whistles are suddenly 
 heard outside the house, and the novice appears on the roof of the house, 
 where he dances, eventually thrusting his arms down into the house; but 
 finally he disappears again. 
 
 On the next morning the whole ti-ibe goes into the forest to catch the 
 novice. They take a long rope made of cedar-bark, and having arrived 
 at an open place lay it on the ground in form of a square. They then 
 sit down inside the square, all along the rope, and sing four new songs 
 composed for the purpose. The two first are in a quick binary measure, 
 the third in a five- part measure, and the last in a slow movement. 
 
 9. » 
 
 1, 2. ^ ^ f» 
 
 ^ > 
 
ON THE N()UTH-Wi:8TERN TRIBKS OF CANADA. 
 
 73 
 
 lie 
 
 
 ». 
 
 4. 
 
 2 I 
 4 si 
 
 J J 
 
 I 
 
 Ono man dunces in tlio ccntro of tlio sqnaro. ^Icanwliilo llio \\\fv of 
 tlio i/i'iriiiila invites Llie woinin and tlio old men to a feast wliich is 
 eelehriited in the liouse. All the Mien are iiainted black, the women rod. 
 They wear headrings of red cednr-baik, aiul their hair is strewn with 
 eagle down. The men who are ii' the loiest wear headrings and ii<!cklet8 
 of hemlock branches. While ihey are singing and dancing the i.ovico 
 apjjcars. lie looks pale and haggard from continued fasting ; his hair 
 falls out readily. His attendants ^'urround him at imce, and ho is takon 
 back to the village, where he performs his danc(;s and cereiiKmies.' 
 
 In the winter of 18H()-H7 I collected a number of IVelan'clca songs in 
 Newetto Nahwitti witliout being able to obtuin a translation. In the 
 summer of 188y I read my notes to a number of natives of Alert Bay, 
 and obtained the translation and explaiiations. All the songs consist of 
 four parts, but I have not obtained the complete songs iu all instances. 
 I give a series of these songs hero : — 
 
 I. Ild'matH^a. 
 
 1. Llaok'haok'qo'lac sta'mkliti uwesta'kqtis na'la. 
 
 Udok'fuwk'^a vciice in all around the world, 
 
 Hotiona'kolastlas ts't'tseqk'enqeb's lo'wa ! 
 Assemble at your all the lower the 
 ^ilaces. dances around ivurld 
 
 the ed(je of 
 
 2. K'uik'uaqo'lae stamkiiti uwesta'kqtis nfi'la. 
 
 The raven's voice is all around the world. 
 
 Kyimk'ona'kolastlas bebeku'nqOlis lo'wa ! 
 
 Assemble at your places all the men around the ed(je. of the world t 
 
 3. Hamats'alaqd'lae staraknti ilwesta'kqtis na'la. 
 
 Ilamats'a's voice is all around, the ivorld ! 
 
 Kyimk'ona'kolastlas bebeku'nqoHs lo'wa \ 
 
 Assemble at your jjlaces all the men around the edge of the world t 
 
 ■^' 
 
 ll! 
 
 II. lid' mats' a. 
 
 1. LeistaisKlagyiliskya'so ! 
 
 He goes around the 
 world, truly ! 
 
 2. Hamasaia'lagyiliskya'so ! 
 
 For food he looks around 
 the world, truly ! 
 
 Laq "wa'qsEnqelis kya'tsis lo'wa. 
 Something on both sides of world, of heaven. 
 
 ' This description supersedes the description formerly given in Journ. Amer. 
 Folh-Lorc, i. p. 58, ff. 
 
ir- 
 
 74 
 
 KEroRT — 1890. 
 
 3. K''rilc'el,:'atsii'!a t.^v'l'-'l^yf'sO ! 
 He uhf'ai/« (I'liuts ,'i\''lij'. 
 
 liidcli' to eat uU Wiuiil ; 
 
 Hao, Hnkoj, la. 
 JIdo, the Tluhval.'i. 
 
 li'AU nanaqntsfi'lisaqtiH. 
 Wluif i.<i hits L'*'c)i ealhuj ahine, 
 
 K.-ov'aiAvAh^i'iW^ kju'tsis (lo'wa). 
 Fiir awmj af the cJ'je r.f <iii,)rld, ([fJieitvcn. 
 
 4. ^\''a((sKIlk•Vl;,T^l;l'gy'ilit.•'!;ya'HO ! 
 
 l''ruiii both sides hf ents on 
 'ivld, Iniij- .' 
 
 llru",, tlul ,a'l%. 
 
 U'Uly il'iU 'l\<Jh'r :jil, 
 
 Lf.; iviU)k'"ar-iVsuqtis. 
 iVhi>f lir /.s ./<!/, dft.ilsfied witli. 
 
 O,- i!'.e ric/lit at ?e (,f hutfUl rf heacfn. 
 
 ^]-'-?\\\i\'c\i'r- .: 1. Ti;.Ip. ho goos arciiul tlie world! 
 
 '2. '^i'l'aly, lie looks for food all over the earth, going on 
 !\juli s'dos of earth and heaven. 
 
 3, T'uly, he wishes to eat plenty, the great Tlokoala,' of 
 
 vvliat ho found at the edge of the world. 
 
 4. Tfi^ly, now he eats with both liands, the; great 
 
 TI '>koala, what did not satisfy him when he found 
 it on the right S'de of the sua. 
 
 III. [laialiuiN'latl 
 
 i. Aia iriia ; haialikyu'latlk'uliskyastlala Tlokoa'I.i I Ts'etsa'ek'alak'u- 
 
 liskyastlala I 
 
 Aid hold ; IlaialiJnja'latl' noise, trtdij malce! TlOkoa'la! 7Vi'tm'fk'a,noisCf 
 
 tnilij mnki' ' 
 Tlokoa'la ! 
 TInkoo'la ! 
 
 TiAkoa'la ! 
 
 2. Aialiaia; la'kyastloistlas C'iwa'lakyasth'id. 
 
 Aiii iuiia ; you, ti'idi/, trill to ijon ihci/ will 
 he the one, i-jjcak about thtir 
 wishes. 
 
 TInkna'la ! 
 
 3. Aia haia ; lakyastloisthas kniitlaqa'laskyas. Tlokoa'la ! 
 Aia haia ; yov, tridij, will the ove they ivill Twkoa'lu ! 
 
 he the one, tmtie. 
 
 4. Aia haia; h'l'kyastloistlas ma'mi;ntliakyaVtloth Tlokoa'la! 
 Aia haia ; you, frulij, loiU y<m theij will atik to Tlokoa'la! 
 
 he the one, (jive cnouyh to eat. 
 
 ' Tlokoala - Ha' muts a, the one wl.o found his magic treasure. 
 
in 
 
 gding oil 
 
 koala,' oi' 
 
 :\ic grcaf 
 ht; ibuiul 
 
 k'alak'n- 
 istlalfi 1 
 
 iV, tlditiC, 
 Uill,i> ' 
 
 la! 
 r7u .' 
 
 la! 
 
 1 7c/ / 
 
 ON THE NOKTU-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 
 Translation : 1. Aia haia ! Sing Haialikya'latl, sing Ts'Otsa'Ok'a 
 songs, Tlokoa'la ! 
 
 2. Aia liaia ! Then the people will ask you to fulfil 
 
 their desires, Tlokoa'la ! 
 
 3. Aia haia ! Then they will tjike the cedar-bark 
 
 ornaments out of your hair, Tlokoa la ! 
 •i. Aia haia ! Then they will ask you to give them 
 plenty to eat, Tlokoa'la ! 
 
 IV. Md'maJra. 
 
 1, Han. AV;i ikyasli: ! do'k'oatlakyas naua'laknas ! iii ; 
 Hull, Go VII ! See his ijreat 
 
 naa'alulc; id! 
 
 2. Wii'ikyasli; ! dadnk-sE'mrcis k'a'mina ! 
 
 Go an! Jjdok iijler ijanr sacred iiajdenienf ! 
 
 15. Hiiikya'siiiis 
 Truly it 
 
 ka'niina. 
 the sacred iinplciiK nt. 
 
 \\i osiiRuila 
 makes ihac then have no 
 ti'.ne to eccape 
 
 4. Hiiikya'smis ts'efcsak'wila nau'alak'. 
 
 Truly it sliortens life the naa'alalc. 
 
 Translntion ; 1. ITau : IJeliold his great nau'alak ; iii. 
 
 2. lie careful in swinging your sacred imiilenient. 
 
 o. Truly it kills the people, so that they have no time 
 
 to escape the sacred implement. 
 4. Truly, it cuts short their lives, the nau'alak. 
 
 T^ToTK — Ifa'mina is the narao of the ^la'mak'a's stick, described on 
 page 7o, Nau'alak' designates any kind of dancing inipleuient. 
 
 V. O'lala. 
 
 Olala slttjs : 1. K"'rdak"olistsnoti u u iitinlfi'kyaatla ts'etjpeka'lagyili.s. 
 The world knws me when 1 reached the d>fncin-<jf iiate 
 
 ill >hr tfurth. 
 
 Veople sing : 2. K-'idtitsKnia'aqiis ahi'ac'enis Inwa ! 
 
 You are the hriugct of the f undatiou uj d'jijlijht ! 
 
 3. Alo'mitsEraa'a(ins alri'ae'emf^ Iowa ! 
 You are the finder (f the fouudntioa of daylight ! 
 
 4. K"'otitsiraa aqus k'otk'ote'ems Iowa ! 
 You reach to the ^jointing to heaven ! 
 
 earth 
 
 VI. Tse'Vois (=bird inside). 
 
 1. Oinatatla'lagyila k'a'minatse tse'akos ; iii I 
 
 Make silent ! the sacred implement inside your great ; id ! 
 
 2. Tletleqk'ii'lagyilitsutj, tEmi'lk'oatlalaQus nau'alak" tseak'os ; iii ! 
 Everybody names you, let it be still ivhislle your great; id! 
 
76 
 
 REPORT — 1890, 
 
 * 
 
 in 
 
 3. Tletleqk'alagjM'litsnq ; haiatlilak"as. 
 
 Evcrijlnhlij names ym; viedkine woman. 
 
 Translation : 
 
 Let be silent the sacred voices in your body, iri ! 
 
 Everybody knows your name. Let bo still your great whistle, iii ! 
 
 Everybody knows your name, you great medicine woman. 
 
 VII. Sl'l'is (=snal-e in belly). 
 The imople sw<j : 
 
 Heie, heie, ia. Sa'tsia SEnsk'fi'laite ! 
 
 Hole, heie, ia. How (jreat our renowned man ! 
 
 Ia. Sa'tsia sEnstlek'alai'te ! 
 la. How great our named man ! 
 
 Gyapaqsalaetloq gyi'Iinns na'naualak". 
 He comes in canoe the dreaded uaualak. 
 
 Ia. Sa'tsia wista tlek'alai'te ! 
 Ia. Hoiv great he the named one ! 
 
 Silis sijigs : 
 
 Kya nekHsewo'tikn kua'kunqs'a'lagyitl Hayatlelak'a'so. 
 
 Kya, they say to me they counsel lohat to do for Hayatlelak'a'so. 
 
 Kya nekiisevve'tikii hama'yanilitsuq TtX'lagyilis. 
 
 Kya they say to me they treat very carefully Id'Uitjyilis. 
 
 The people sing : 
 
 Ky'e'slis mVuiiiek-alatl! thVkoitse. 
 VonH be troubled ! great Tldkoa'la. 
 
 Ky'e'slis kyekyalik-alatl ! tlo'koitse. 
 Don't be afraid! great Tldkoa'la. 
 
 Kya gyl'k'ama gyiliskya'ska Si'siutlkyas 
 
 Kya chief the very first is the true Sisiutl, 
 
 tlo'koitse k"'alai'te. 
 you great that yon 
 Tlokoa'la are named. 
 
 VIII. Yiaiafalatl. 
 
 Ifi'haha liana. Haikya'smis ts'atsek'onoctgyi'tl. 
 
 lahalia hiiua. Tndy^ that is irhy they dance icitli, you, 
 
 K''e'nkui'iisus amlaqai'kyaso. 
 
 For that uf which you have you are praised. 
 plenty in your hands 
 
 K"aia yy'tEiiikui'lisu.s. 
 
 Jiecaxse of the rattle in your hand. 
 
 TsEl(K»k"aitkya'.M>. 
 Your name is called. 
 
 IX. LOh-j'tlalatl. 
 
 1. la'qama ia lau qa ma gya'qRn o'laiic kyasotl. 
 Lvpi' ma ia lau ipl'ma I comt ? r* 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 4. 
 
 fcJE 
 
•'alai'te, 
 
 lat yuH 
 named. 
 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 77 
 
 2. TIatlC'k cla'liiit. 
 Evcri/hodii calls ijonr name. 
 
 3. Wikju'stoa sutld'q lela'alenoq. 
 
 Yuii cannnt cnnfi'ud aijainst Idlciioq. 
 the name 
 
 4. Alaraontloaskyastloq lel;Val("'nn(|. 
 They will altcai/s be satistied hij Id'lviioq. 
 
 your supply of food 
 
 X. Wd'tanum. 
 
 1. WiqwC'lo'stoq ; ts' etru'mistfiUs, 
 
 He did not yo in boat ; this news is spread everywhere. 
 
 2. Wlqselo'stoq ; tlr'qk'n'inistalis. 
 
 He did not go in boat ; this name is spread everywhere. 
 
 3. Gyi'lKmkj-astlus nana'alak'. 
 You ii'ill he feared, Naualak'. 
 
 4. AtsiVkyastln" g3ilEmkya8tlaa rianti'alak'. 
 Oh, wonder yon, yoio will be feared, Naualak. 
 
 NoNTLEM Soxog. 
 I. la'TiHira { = badness). 2fask,Jiy. 19. 
 
 K''!VqoHfcpetlala la'ku u\ supa'ni. 
 He will rise the great la'knim from below. 
 
 P'o'Hk'oliVmaKeita Ta'knim aski nil'la ; na'nspfyitala. 
 He makes the sea boil, the lakuim. of the world; we are afraid. 
 
 layakilatla Ta'kuim aski Tifi'laie ; latak'tli'ilatl. 
 
 He makes the face of the la'kuim .; :l^e icorld ; we shall be afraid. 
 Ih dca bad 
 
 Tak'amcryusta'latl k-'a'qola-utlO la knim aaki na'lai'o. 
 
 He will throw up blankets out of the salt water, the la'knim of the world. 
 
 II. Sl'siutl {the douhle-headed snake). Song probably incomplete. 
 
 Sasisla'itia ! Sfins tjylk"emaikya'so Si'siutllaitle. 
 Hoio loonderfnl! Onr very chief dances as Si^iutl. 
 
 Sehs gyik'emaikya'so ia laralau'isoq maqsalisfitl iiKmskitma le'lk^olatle. 
 Our very chief ia he is (j'ling to swi^n in half one tribe, 
 
 (= to dcfitrny one holf^ 
 
 III. NUtlematl. Sumj jprihabi'/ iiicowplete. 
 Waie ai'tsikynsotl ! th -o. 
 
 Wain oh wonder ! 
 
 Aitsikyasoll ! 
 Oh wonder! 
 
 He ??'((.'■.'.■>' '/ -' .//■■■'•I.I ijii II ■ "lit-rth. 
 
 ^.. A. . 1 ■ } '^ . I.„ . / . 
 
 He makes thi .• fh^e earth. 
 
 Gyoqgyoqk'oalngyilii- 
 He makes the noise of breakin'^ 
 
 rttftk. 
 
^ 
 
 78 
 
 KEPORT —1 890. 
 
 Mj 
 
 IV. TsOnu'k-oa. 
 
 ' TTalst'lau'qien wl'tsnmgyila ha'amntisa. lia'amntisa.' 
 
 ' / almu^it nut in tune fur ra^t af fojd on for rr.-^t of food on 
 
 brack. hrarlt.' 
 
 Talaj^jilis lEq nfi'la Imit^sG k^'fi'maqotl tla' wisilak'. 
 Coiitinicing in the loorld the (jreat one always made to stand. 
 
 Walati'i'yllak*, kur-'fjacryilak' 
 "Made ti) pity none, madi' to Icitl 
 
 Gyri'qtlrq wiwangyilatlotl Irkinala'tle. 
 You come to mal:e poor the triJjcs. 
 
 I.e., Tsono'k'oa : 
 
 ' I was almost in time to see them eating on tlie beach.' 
 
 Chorus : 
 
 You are the giant who always stands npi-ighf, in tho world, 
 You are raado to pity nobody, you kill evt'rybody ; 
 You come to impoverish the people. 
 
 V. Xdn (=hlack bear'). 
 
 Hai'(j(3' a hai'io." ! TIe'k'atse'lalaikya nanqatsOla laikya ! 
 Ilai'i'io' a hai'iod' ! Call your great name called, great hear let you ! 
 
 La'tlaoq hayi'mk'ama tlak'e' la tletlok'amnn'qsis e'iatlala na'ukyaso. 
 He is biraiglit to tliefirnt who hare names enslaved verily bear! 
 going the first (iniong your tribes 
 
 Sa'qautlasR'ntsia qomatlatlfi'sia. 
 Then n;e shall have a war. 
 
 Sa'qautlasE'ntsia tslnaQiia'latlfi'sia. 
 Then we shall have trouble. 
 
 I.e., Haioo' a hai'ioo' ! Let your great name be called, great bear ! 
 Y()\i will at once kill tliL.' chieF of tho tribes who become your 
 
 Hlaves, great bear ! 
 Then we shall have a war. 
 Then we shall have trouble. 
 
 VI, Wolf 
 
 lai'i'kiilak'oala ha'is gyasengyaq wa'-vaknlltla. We'kyetlus e'tt'lis 
 N'life iif giving they n-ill come barkin.g in the You will again 
 
 uiray blanlcels. and niahe noise house. 
 
 k"'(>a'{ielis walas tEmna'qoa; k'uliakuii'gyilis stis gylgyika'nia. 
 grow as great as yan were you obi id on of all chitfs. 
 
 always ; earth 
 
 Yi'heyi. 
 Yl'heyi. 
 
 Aiiilu'lae watltr/mas atla'nKmas gylgyik'a'mae ! niirilii'k'nts 
 
 Wioid('rf(d the n'nrds <f tJie n'olrrs of the chiefs ! th<'ii say : we (cnmn) 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. /9 
 
 pyinll'kyele p'iip'ayia'latl p'esagy'i'la p'esagyi'Ia, ma'qoagyila 
 
 together with to promise to to gice nway to give away to (jive aivay 
 
 children 
 
 (jive awaij 
 hhnil'ets 
 
 blankets 
 
 blankets 
 
 manij 
 llankets 
 
 k'()('V>'yilisa 
 
 SOhnthitij 
 
 iiinqsista'Hs'a Irilk^oa'atlo. Yi'hej'i. 
 ti> (jive away tribes. Yi'lieiji. 
 
 blankets to 
 everyone 
 
 Wiiiisala iautlemu'tl atla'nKraa gyliry'ik'a'mae atln'q'e 
 Try to make him. <■/ tlie the chiefs that it may 
 
 mild wolves not happrn 
 
 QuaQue'gyi'lisa wii'Iagyila nliimri'Iisila k'ame'lek'agyila. Yllieyi. 
 (^moving his make short make short make pi'opt,' fall Yilicyi. 
 rail Z) lij'e lived dead tcjelher. 
 
 T e., The cliiofs of the wolves will come and bark in the house, giving 
 
 away blankets. You will alwa^'s bo one of the greatest, you ! 
 
 the oldest of all the chiefs of the world. Yiheyi. 
 Wondei'ful are tlie words of the chiefs of the wolves. They say : 
 
 We shall all assemble with our ciiildren, to the proniiscs to give 
 
 away blankets, to the giving away of blankets to all the tribes 
 
 of the world. Yiheyi. 
 Let us ti'v to make them mild the (chiefs of iho wolves, that he 
 
 may not unoxpecitedly shorten our lives and kill all of us by 
 
 moving his tail. Yiheyi. 
 
 ^11. Kn 
 
 iiujua. 
 
 Knnqnakyastleqk'ae. Sri'k3iisflase ku'nquakyaso. 
 
 Verily ! il will til under loud J'nr lilm. Oh ! ivoi(d''rfnl will be I lad tli under, 
 
 le'telis 
 
 \(jain 
 
 k a'ma. 
 
 llefs. 
 
 Its 
 IrnniH) 
 
 VIII. Q'~i'lus (a f'jieries nj eajle). 
 
 K'oa'lall'ts ha'winalanak' Ts'e'k'oa ci:ns gyl'k'araae qd'loskyaso 
 
 Let us Hijt Jri(jlite)i him 'IVc'kna our chiej llie wonderful eayle 
 
 k'oa'latlala nak'otlio'is Kns nfi'la. 
 sifliiij d(iu-)i, on the middle if of the n/,//. 
 
 top (f 
 
 I.e., Let us not fi'ighten him the great bird, our chii'f, the wonderful 
 eagle, who sits down in the middle of the sky. 
 
 IX. Ilenkyafistdla or Kitd'qoHs. 
 
 Ya'lamla'wisKns ni:mri'Iamene'(|om Qna'nr'k'i/li-(|(le 
 It is said that iofjether the small mooe heads in 
 we will ones dancinj after lum 
 
 nr;mts'aqke'alise. 
 
 the oitlij (jreaiest one. 
 
 ^la'se wa'tldKms Nu'tJEmgyila ? 
 What is the word (f NrdlKmijyiln / 
 
 omagyilak'sKns 
 
 ndio is made 
 
 o'lr chiif\s •'>7)u 
 
 < 'I 
 
80 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 
 Haiqo wfi'tldEms "XutlEmgyila nEmts'aqk'e'alise. 
 That is tlie tvonl of NiitlEnujyila the only (jreated o)ie. 
 
 I.e., It is said that wo, the unhriportant peofile, shall dance after nira 
 who is mado the son of our only greatest chief. 
 What said Nutli:mgyila ? 
 Thus spoke NutlEiiigyila, the only greatest chief. 
 
 X. Tlc'qnlaq. 
 
 Gya'qEn tl("'k'anomntl tloqtlek'a'ita Wina'lagyilis. 
 I come to name ynu named l)y all Wlna'lagyiHs. 
 
 (jya'qRn ; k^'amtRmotltolfi'lagyilitsus Wina'lagyilis. 
 I come; he throws a sonrj out of Wina'lagyilis. 
 hoat on laiid 
 
 Gya'qmesEn ; ha'nk'Emlisasus "Wina'lagyilis. 
 1 have come ; it lands Wina'lagyilis. 
 
 GyiVijen ; kyaqotha'Hsaisng tse'qeoegyilis Wina'lagyilis. 
 
 1 come; he brings me out of hoat his dancing cap Wina'lagyilis. 
 
 IV. THE SHUSHWAP. 
 
 The ancient cnstoms of the Salish trihes of the interior of the Province 
 of liritish Columhia have almost entirely disappeared, as the natives have 
 been christianised by the endeavours of Catholic missionaries. Only 
 a very few still adhere to their former customs and usages; for instance, 
 a group of families living in Nicola Valley and another on North Thomp- 
 son River. I did not come into contact wiih any of these, and conse- 
 quently the following remarks are fonnded entirely on inquiries. I 
 teloe'ed the Shush wap as an example of the tribes of the interior. The 
 customs of the Ntlakyfi'pamnQ, Srlfi'i-liumQ, and Okanfi'k'eu ditf'er very 
 sliglitly from those of the Shush wap, if at all. The information con- 
 tained in the following chapter lias been collected at Kamloops. The 
 proper name of the Shushwap is SiiQuapmuQ or SeQuapmuQ. The district 
 they inhabit is indicated on the map accompanying this report. They 
 call the Okana'k'en Set .wa'nuniQ, the carriers Yu'nana, the Chilcotin 
 PESqa'qEuEm (Dentalia people), and the Kutonaqa Sk'ese'utlk'umQ. The 
 organisation of the tribe is similar to that of the southern branches of 
 the Coast Salish, as described on p. 17 ; that is to say ; the tribe is 
 divided into a great number of septs, or, as we might say more properly, in 
 the present case, village communities. While on Vancouver Island these 
 septs bear still a limited similarity to the gentes of the northern coast 
 tribes, this is no longer the case on the nuiinland. The Ntlakya'pamuM. 
 Stla'tliuraQ, Shushwap, and Okana'k't'u are subdivided in the same way ; 
 but besides this the tribes speaking' the same language are comprised 
 under one name. T shall not enumerate the villages of these tribes, as 
 my lists are far from being complete. 
 
 Houses and Lodges. 
 
 The characteristic dwelling of tli<^Re Indians is the subtorranonn 
 lodge, generally called in the Jargon ^ keekwiU'v-lKinse,'' i.e., low or under- 
 
i«p 
 
 rovinoo 
 
 39 have 
 
 Only 
 
 istanco, 
 
 .Miomp- 
 
 consc- 
 
 ics. t 
 
 Tlio 
 
 very 
 
 OOTl- 
 
 Tlio 
 sti'ict 
 They 
 lootin 
 Tlio 
 les of 
 ihe is 
 riy, in 
 these 
 coast 
 atnuQ. 
 way ; 
 )riso<l 
 es, art 
 
 ON TMK NOUTH-WF.STKRN TRIBK^ OF CANADA. 
 
 ftl 
 
 ■aiiean 
 uulcr- 
 
 fjromid honse. It was used by all the Salish tribes of the interior, and 
 spreads as far down Fraser Kiver as the month of Harrison River, whero 
 
 fid. 20. — i'liui ef Suhterriinoiin liud.irc and Const nict inii nf Uoof. 
 
 botVi thp large wooden honse of Vancouver Island and the lUibterranean 
 lodge are in use. The latter is built in the following way. A pit, about 
 
 V.IG. 21.— Klevation of Subtvrrancan LodL,'e (.'^ecLioii A H). 
 
 12 to 15 fiMt in diameter and 4 feet deep, is dug out. Heavy posts, 
 *''>»'nung a squt're, are planted in the bottom of the pit, abont 4 feet fiotu 
 
 1 1 
 
ms^- 
 
 H 
 
 4<l( 
 
 f ' 
 
 i 
 
 I,, 
 
 ft 
 
 \h 
 
 «2 
 
 iii;p(MiT- -1 SOD. 
 
 its cifciiiiitcicncf'. TliOM' posts (1, li>;,s. 2<i, ~\.) hvv about fi or J" feoi 
 liigli, and liavo a fork foniuMl by a Ijruiich at their toj), in which slanting 
 lieaiiis rest (2), rnniiiiig from tlio edge of the pit over the fork to the 
 (.•entr(!, which, however, they do not reach. These Ix'urns consist of trees 
 spht ill halves, and siippi)rt the roof. \ext. poles are laid from the edg(! 
 of the pit to thes(> beams, oiw on eMch side ('A). Then heavy timbers are 
 laid all around the pit ; they are to serve iis a foundation for the roof and 
 run from the beams along tlu* slanling poles ( )\ Thus the whole build- 
 ing assumes approximately an octagonal form. On top of these timbers 
 other timbers or poles are laid, tlu; shorter the nearer they approach the 
 centre of the pit and the higher parts of the beams (2) on which they 
 rest. They are laid Hlternateiy on adjoining sides of the octagon, so 
 
 h'n;, l'lV I'lim ol Winter Loilire. 
 
 c-:^ 
 
 "^-^ 
 
 -r^k^-i 
 
 that the poles of one side always i-est on the ends of those of the neigh- 
 bouring sides. This framework is continued up to the ends of the 
 In-ams (2). Here a square opening or entrance- way, of the form of a 
 chimney, is built, the logs being placed on top of each other in the same 
 way as those of a log cabin. The whole roof is covered with bundles of 
 hay, which are kept in place by means of poles (G) laid on top of the 
 root', between the beams. Finally, the whole structure is covered with 
 earth. A ladder cut out of a tree ascends into the entrance, the steps 
 being cut out of one side and gointr down to the bottom of the pit. The 
 upper extremity of the ladder is llattencd at both sides and provided 
 with a notch, which is used for tying the moccasins to it which are not 
 taken inside the dwelling. The fire is I'ight at the foot of the ladder ; 
 the beds are in the periphery of the dwelling, behind the posts (1). 
 
 Another kind of winter lodge is built on the following plan : A hole, 
 
ON TIIK NoUTH-WKSTKUN THlllKS oV CAWHA. 
 
 h:\ 
 
 ahntit. \>^ iiu'lirs dcfp, is du;;'. It i.s about. 12 U-vi ioii^ arul H or 9 feet 
 wide, with fniiuded corners. In the front and tlic rear — that is, at tho 
 iiarrowfr ends - pairs of conv('rgin<^ poles ai'o crcetcd (1, ti<^s. "22, 2'A). 
 Thc^y are connected l)y two cross-bars on each sidf {2]. In the front and 
 the mar four or more slcTider poles are tied to the converf^iiipf poles and 
 planted into the jjjronnd, so th;it they f'oijn a slijrht curve in the front and 
 in the rear of the lodiri' C'^}- I'hoy are steadied by means of wic^kcrs (!•). 
 The lower part of this structnni is covoi-cd with bundles of hay. the upper 
 part with a double layer of mats made of rnshts. The ridge remains 
 open and serves as a smoke-escape, in some instances the hut is covered 
 with bark. 
 
 The tempoj-ary summ«'r lodge consists merely of three or foui- con- 
 verging poles, cot\neeted by wicrkers, and covpi-ed with mats made of 
 bullrushes- iiinch more usually a complete criss-cross of branches riint)ing 
 
 Kio. 'J'.i. l-'iniit I'^lcvatirxi III' WiiiiiT I-o<lpc. 
 
 in (wo directions, six or eight sticks each way. Ft differs in no essential 
 tVom sweat-houses used all over the northern interior of the continent. 
 
 The sweat-house is always used when a person has to undergo a pro- 
 cess of ceremonial cleansing. It is built on the bank of a creek and 
 consists of two stout willow branches, crossing each otluT, both ends 
 being planted into the ground. It is covered with skins. The door is 
 at the foot of one of these branches and can be closed by a piece of skin. 
 
 The principal method of fishing is by means of bag-nets. Platforms 
 are built, projecting ovei' the rivei'. On tlu'sc the ftsliurmen stand, pro- 
 vided with a large bag- net. Salmon are also caught -.Tlth the spear. 
 The fish are dried oa platforms, which are erected on the stuep banks of 
 the rivers, the lower side being supported by two pairs of converging 
 }ioles, the upper resting on the ground. Venison is dried on platforms 
 of a similar description. Provisions are stored, either in small sheds 
 which stand on poles, about (> feet above the ground, or in caches. If 
 venison is to be dried very ([uickly it is hung u|) in the sweat-house (see 
 below). 
 
 (*>a 
 
 ' )| 
 
Ml 
 
 Ri; I '1)111 
 
 S!t(l. 
 
 i 
 
 vM 
 
 m 
 
 Tlie clulliiiig of i\ui iiiitivrs was niailt' tif furs or of dfur-skin. I am 
 luiablc to giv(! a siitisfiu'tory (L'script imi, iis I liavo not seen any. 
 Women wear denfalia in (he pi'iforated septiuii of llic nose. Men and 
 wouit'ii wear ear-ornaments of shells oi- teeth all aroinnl the lielix. Poth 
 111(11 aiiJ women were tattooed, the desij^ns eonsistiiij^' of oiieor tliree lines 
 on each cheek and three lines on the chin. So far as 1 could make out 
 ihrre is no connection between this custom and the reaching of imherty. 
 In dancing the face is painted with designs representing sun, moon, or 
 stai's, birds or animals, 'f hey niay take any design they like. The hair 
 is sti'ewn with eagle down. 
 
 Deer-skins are prepared in the following way: The skin is soaked in 
 a. brook or in a I'iver for a wc-ek. TIumi the hair is ri'inoved with a kniff. 
 1'he hind-feet are next tied to a stick, which the worksr holds with his 
 I'eet. Atiothin- stick is pushed through the fore-le'ct, which are also tied 
 together, and the skin is wi'uiig out and dried. When it is dry, water is 
 made lukewarm, and the brains of a deer or any other atumal are mixed 
 witli it. This mixtui'c is spread over the dry skin, whi(;h is then wrung 
 out once mon*, and worked with a stick, to the end of which a stone 
 scraper is attached. Now a {)it is dug, the bottom of which is filled with 
 rotten wood. The latter is ignited, and both sides of the skin are smoked 
 tiver the burning wood foi' a short time, the skin being stretched over 
 the pit. Finally, it is washed in clear water and dried. It is believed 
 that the Smoking process has the effect of preventing the skin from 
 becoming hard after getting wet. The skins 6f bucks and does are con- 
 sidered e({ually good ; they are best in the autumn. 
 
 The Shushwap do not know the art of pottery, and do little, if any, 
 carving in wood. Their household good.s at-e made princi[)ally of 
 basketry, in which they excel. Hasketry of the Shnshwap and Ntlakya- 
 jiamuQ is sold extensively to the tribes of sontherti Vancouver Island. 
 Their baskets are made of roots of the white pine. The roots are dyed 
 black with an extract of fern root ; and red with an extract of alder- 
 bark or with oxide of iron. Very beautiful patterns are made in these 
 three colours. Baskets are used for storing, carrying, and cooking pro- 
 visions. 
 
 The Shush wap make mats of bulrushes, which are strung on threads 
 of nettles, in the same wav as the LkuTitjKn and their neicrhbours do. 
 Mats are also plaited, threads made of nettles being braided across bul- 
 rushes. 
 
 Fire was obtained by means of the fire-drill, rotten willow roots being 
 used for spunk. In travelling they carried glowing willow roots. 
 
 Canoes are made of cotton- wood, cedar, or in rare instances of liark. 
 For working wood stone hammers, and wedges were used. In hunting 
 expeditions they cross rivers on rafts made of rushes or on logs. In 
 winter snow shoes are used on hunting expeditions. There are two 
 patterns, one imitating the shape of a bear's foot. The former consists 
 of a frame of bent wood, with a cross-bar near its broad end. Thongs 
 run from this bar to the front, like the toes of a bear's foot, and a net- 
 work of thongs runs back from the bar, filling the hind part of the 
 frame. The balls of the toes rest on the cross-bar. The other pattern 
 consists of a long frame of bent wood, the point of which is turned up. 
 There are two cross-bars iiear the centre; in front of which the foot rests. 
 The IVoiit and rear ends are filled with a network of sinews. 
 
 Deer were hunted with the help of dog.s. ' In the autumn, when the 
 
in. [ ;nii 
 ieeii any. 
 
 Men iind 
 K. Roth 
 Iii'eo lines 
 make out 
 
 pnberty. 
 
 fiiDon, ()i- 
 
 Tlic liaif 
 
 soaked in 
 
 h a knirr. 
 
 with his 
 
 also tied 
 
 , water i.s 
 
 re mi.xed 
 
 m wrung 
 
 h a stone 
 
 lied with 
 
 ' smoked 
 
 hed over 
 
 believed 
 
 \in from 
 
 are con- 
 
 i, ii' any, 
 ipally of 
 Ntlakya- 
 Island. 
 ire dyed 
 if aldei'- 
 in these 
 ing pro- 
 
 tlireads 
 Durs do. 
 o.ss hal- 
 
 ts beinjr 
 
 of bark, 
 hunting 
 . Tn 
 ire two 
 consists 
 Thongs 
 d a net- 
 ; of the 
 jtattern 
 ned up. 
 )t rests. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 0\ THF. NOI!Tir-Wr.,<TEI?N TRIBES OK CANADA. 
 
 85 
 
 ICIJ tlic 
 
 deer oros.s the lakes and rivers, ihev were driven by huntei^ and dogs to 
 a certain point, where others lay in waiting with their canoes. As soon 
 as the deer took to the water they were attacked by the eanoe-inen. 
 
 Dent alia and copper bracelets serveil as i?ioiiey. Tht' former' wero 
 obtained by trade from the ('hiicoiiii, who lor this reason had the natno 
 Psqii'qlciiK.ni, /.<•., deritalia people. In exchange, the Shushwap gave dressed 
 deer-skins and, probably, in late times, horses. They traded the dentalia 
 they had received From the Chilcotin to the ( )kana'k'en for horses. Trader 
 was also carried on with the iioi'lhern Tinneli tribes, especially the C'ar- 
 riers. There was no communication with the Ijower Kraser River on 
 account of the [ireviiiling luistility iictwren the tribes of these ir-oions. 
 ( 'opper was obtained, paitly by trade. l)ut some was dug by the natives 
 themselves. There was a digging at Kandoops Lake, wliich was worked 
 up to the last gener.ition, when a man was killed by a fall of rocks which 
 buried the mine. Since that time it has never been worked. 
 
 Food was boiled in baskets, whic^h were filleil with water tliiit was 
 made to boil by throwing rcfl-hot stones into it. Hoots are cooked in the 
 following way : A hole is mode in the gi-ound, and red-hot stones ate 
 thrown into it. These ai'e covered witti willow twigs and grass. A 
 stick is placed upright in the ci'titre of the r>it and the roots are laid on 
 top of the grass abound the stick. They are covered with more grass 
 and the hole is tilled up with earth, so that part of the stick remsiins 
 projecting oui of it. Then water is poured out, so that it runs down tho 
 stick into the hole, arid on touching tlie red-hot stones ])i'0(luces steam. 
 Finally, a tire is built on top of tlic hole. The belief prevails that tlie 
 roots must lie cooked in this particular way by women only, and early in 
 the morning, before they have taketi any food, as else they could not be 
 properly done. Xo man is allowed to come near the place when they 
 are being steamed. 
 
 There is no fixed time for meals. Hnnters who leave early in tlie 
 morning take breakfast before leaving, their wives eating after they have 
 gone. 
 
 The reports on social organisation wln'ch T obtained from my infor- 
 mants are very meagre. Each of the numerous tribes of the Shushwap 
 I. ad its own chief. The people sire divided into nobility and common 
 people. Common people can, on account of liravery or wealth, attain 
 high rank, but cannot become noble, as nobility is hereditary. There is 
 no indication of the existence of geiites. The family is ' paternal.' The 
 chieftaincy is also hereditary. The chief is naturally a member of the 
 nobility. At the death of the chief his eldest son or, if he has no son, 
 his voungfer lirother, succeeds him at once. The affairs of the whole 
 tribe are governed by the cliief and a council of the elders. ;Vmong the 
 j)rerogatives of the chief J heard the following : When the first salmon 
 of the season are caught, or when the first berries are picked or the first 
 deer killed, no one must eat of it until it has been presentee' to the chief, 
 who must pray over it and partake of it. It did not become ({uite clear 
 from the statements of ray informarits whether this is entirely a religious 
 function, or at at same time a triiiute. It is certaiidy of interest to see 
 that here, as well as among the Nootka, we find certain religious func- 
 tions vested in the chief. At the time when the berries begin to rip(Mi 
 an overseer is set [by the chief?] over the various V)erry patches, whose 
 duty it is to see that Tiobody begins pi(*king until the berries are ripe. 
 
 M 
 
 e announces w 
 
 h(M] the time has come, and on the next moi'nintr the 
 
^aj 
 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 h 
 
 A 
 
 .</ 
 
 v. 
 
 .r^. 
 
 
 (A 
 
 V 
 ^ 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 •« I— 12.2 
 
 - lis iio 
 
 M. Ill 1.6 
 
 V 
 
 <5^ 
 
 
 <^: 
 
 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 iV 
 
 5v 
 
 4^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 *% 
 
 
 23 WEST MA!»i •tTmr'ST 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14560 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 n^'^. <^ 
 

 
 
 
HC> 
 
 RKPORT— 1890. 
 
 il I 
 
 whole tribe set oat and begin to pick berries, the 6eld being divided uj» 
 among tlie tribe. After they are through picking, the berries are divided 
 among tlie t'anulies of the tribe. The chief receives the greatest portion. 
 In the same way an overseer is set over the salmon fisheries, and the 
 catch is divided among the whole tribe. It seems that the various tribes 
 of the Shushwaj) had no separate hunting grounds, but that they hunted 
 over the whole territory, wherever they liked. I do not think, however, 
 that the fisheries and berry jiatches belonged to the whole people in 
 common. Disputes arising between niendiers of the same tribe were 
 generally settled by arbitration. For instance, where a number of men 
 had driven deer into a lake and a dispute arose as to who had driven 
 one particular deer, an arbitrator was appointed, who liad to track it and 
 whose decision was tinal. The old were well treated and respected. In 
 .some instances when a man believed him.self slighted he would commit 
 suicide. 
 
 The tribes and families had .separate hunting grounds originally. The 
 custom still holds to some extent among the Nicola Indians, but is now 
 almost forgotten by the Kamloops people. 
 
 The chief was not leader in war, the war-chief being elected among 
 the ' braves.' The hostile tribes would meet, but sometimes, instead of a 
 battle between the whole parties taking place, the war-chiefs would tight 
 a iluel, the outcome of which .settled the dispute. Their weapons were 
 bow and arrow; a lance; a l)one club with a sharp, sabre-like edge; a 
 stone axe having a sharp point, the stone being fastened in a perforated 
 liaiidle ; and a stone club, consisting of a pebble, sewed into a piece of 
 hide, and attached to a thong, which was suspended from the wrist. 
 They protectcul themsi'lves with armours of the same kind as those used 
 on the coast coats made of strips of wood, which were lashed togethei-, 
 or jack(;ts of a double layer of elk-skin, and a cap of the same material. 
 In time of war a stockade was tiade near the huts of the village. A 
 cache was made in it, and baskets tilled with water were kept in it. 
 When an attack of the enemy was feared, the whole population retired to 
 the stockade, the walls of which were provided with loopholes. Captives 
 made in war were enslaved. At the end of the war, captives were 
 frequently exchanged. 
 
 The following talc of a war may be of interest. One summer, about 
 eighty years ago, the SEka'unn^, wlit) live near the head waters of North 
 Thomp.son River, stole two Shnshwap women at Stlie'tltsiiq (Harriere) 
 on North Thompson River. Their brothers pursued the SKka'umy, but 
 were unable to overtake them. In the fall, wlien the snow began to 
 cover the country, they starttid out again and soon found the tracks of 
 their enemies, who were travelling northward. One of the women wore, 
 at the time when they were surprised by the enemies, a white-tail deer 
 blanket. She iiad torn it to pieces and put them into split branches of 
 trees, which she broke and turned in the direction in which they were 
 travelling. The Shnshwap found the.se, and knew at once that they were 
 oil the right track. Finally the Shnshwap reached a camp .krhich the 
 SEka'uniQ had left on the same morning. They followed them cautiously. 
 While they were travelling a troop of deer passed clo.se by, and they 
 wounded one of them with their arrows. Among the party of the 
 SKka'umy was a blind old man, who was led by a boy, and, as he was not 
 able to walk as fast as the others, followed them at some distance. The 
 wounded (ieer ran past them and the Uoy nbserved the Shushwap arrow. 
 
.. ..m.tedlliMllAB^a&uiih'ui^iixmh^ 
 
 divided up 
 tre divided 
 st portion. 
 8, and the 
 ious tribes 
 ey liunte(J 
 , however, 
 people in 
 ribe were 
 er of men 
 ad driven 
 aek it and 
 jcted. In 
 d commit 
 
 ally. The 
 it is now 
 
 ed among 
 
 stead of a 
 
 i>uld fight 
 
 pons were 
 
 ! edge ; u 
 
 perforated 
 
 t piece of 
 
 -he wrist. 
 
 hose ased 
 
 together, 
 
 material. 
 
 lage. A 
 
 'pt in it, 
 
 retired fo 
 
 Captives 
 
 ves were 
 
 er, about 
 of North 
 ^arriere) 
 limy, but 
 )egan to 
 tracks (if 
 en wore, 
 tail deer 
 nches of 
 ley were 
 ey weie 
 
 liclj tfie 
 itiously. 
 
 id they 
 
 of the 
 was not 
 t^. The 
 
 arrow. 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTKHN TRlliK.-^ OK i ANAjJA. 
 
 87 
 
 He cried : 'There is a deer tliat has been struck by •) Shushvvri]i nirow.' 
 Tlie old man at once dcspatclied him to the main party, aiul told him to 
 inform the chief oi' what he had seen. The boy obeyed, bnt the chief did 
 jiot believe him. He merely mude a ir^'-'^tnre indicating tlmt the Shusb- 
 wap would not dare to show their backs in this countiy. (He clostnl tlm 
 thumb and the tliird luid fourth tiiiLTcrs (t' his right hand, bent the first 
 and second fingers towards the thuml), holding them apai't, the palm 
 direi^ted towards his face.) The two women heard what was going on. 
 They thought that their brothers might have followed them, and at 
 nightfall went back to see whetiier they might discover anyone. They 
 
 met the Shushwap who instructed them to keep their liiisbaiids tor 
 
 they had been married to two men of tiic .SKkaumy — awake until i-ai'ly in 
 the morning. Tliey obeyed, and when the men had tallen asleep in the 
 morning the Shushwap made an attack upon the (^amp and killed all but 
 three, who had succeeded in putting their snow-shoes on and fled. The 
 Shushwap pursued them, and one of the Si;ka'umi,i jumped into a hole 
 formed by the melting of the snow around a tree. From hi.; hiding 
 place he wounded a Sii 'shwap calletl T;Vlci|iin, when passing l)y. Two 
 oftheHeeing SEka'umy were kille(l, the thii-d esc.ipcd. Ta leqiin died 
 of his wound when they were returning homeward. His body was burnt 
 and his bones taken along, to be buried in the hui'ial gioimd of his native 
 
 vilhige. 
 
 .^KiN .iANiilAi.K. 
 
 On the coast of British (!oluml>ia the extensive use of llie Ciiinook 
 jargon has almost entirely superseded the use of the sign language ; but 
 there is little doul)t that it lins lieen in use? in formei' times. The only 
 instance of the use of signs — e\cc]it in making talcs more vivid and graphic 
 ~ -tiiat came under my observation was when an <)ld llaida, who did not 
 understand Chinook, wanted to tell me that he could not speak the 
 jargon. He introduced the fii-st iinger of his rii^ht hand into his mouth, 
 acted as though he attempted to ili-aw out sonietliing, and then shook his 
 finger. 
 
 In tiie interior of the province the si<;n language is still used 
 extensively. The following siuiis wci'e collected among the Shushwap. 
 
 1. All. Uight hand held in front of l)r«'ast, [»alm downward, nioscd 
 around horizontally. 
 
 2. Hear. -Roth fists held in front of breasts, kmn^kles upward, the 
 thumbs touching the bent first lingers ; fists pushed forward alternately 
 in circular motions, imitating the movements of a bear. 
 
 ',i. /Mir's hole. — Second, third and fourth fingeis of both hands closed ; 
 thumbs and first fingers extcndi'd. points of botli thumbsaiid of lM)th first 
 lingers touch, so that they foi'm a eii'cle. 
 
 4. Beaver, — Right hand drops, palm downward, b(>tvveen the extended 
 thumb and first finger of left, so that the wiist rest.s on the intei'stice. 
 Imitation of beaver's tail. 
 
 5. HiiiJ, nhii'if Jljh'e.n ijeant of (f/c-— Open hand raised in fi-ont of 
 In-east to the height of the chin, palm turned toward face, 
 
 t». Dimh. — Open han<ls placed against each other, sf) that both 
 thumbs and both fourth fing(<rs touch. 
 
 7. /'a///)';//*/. — Haiuls half opcrii'd, lii'st ting(>r slightly extended held 
 upward in front of body, palms inward at height of chin, 1 amis then 
 niovcil outward, descriliinir I'li'des, 
 
88 
 
 KEPOHT — 1890. 
 
 H. Tier. — Hands liehl up on botli .sides of hoin\, at height of ears, 
 jtalias foi'Wiird, opt-ii. 
 
 ;». />«('/• iiinnliuj. — Fists held in front of breast, kuuckles upward, 
 8trikiii<r out altci-iiiitcly and hoi-izoiitaily full leno'th of arms. 
 
 lU. X)' 16'.— Hands hrouLjlit n\) to ears, thumb, third and fourth fingers 
 closed, tirst and seeoiid e.xteiuled backward, touching i)ne another, back 
 of li.'ind upward. 
 
 11. Fish. — Hand sireteliod out, held horizontally in front of breast, 
 ])ahn downward, niovin'^ in quick wandering motions in horizontal 
 plane. 
 
 \'l. Mninj lh<h . — Both hands held in the same way as last, one above 
 the other, but lingers slightly spread, botlj hands performing wandering 
 motions. 
 
 13. Girl. — Botli hands, half opened, luld not far from shoulders, palms 
 forward, then suddeidy pulled back to shoulders. 
 
 Ik Ilursf. — Tliiunb, third and fourth lingers closed, first and second 
 extended horizontally, [)arallel to breast, touching one another. 
 
 15. / ill) >iiit nmler.'^ttind. — Palms clapped on ears, then hands taken 
 olf and shaktMi. 
 
 It), ijiikn. — Hands held before breast close together, tingers describe a 
 ■wide circle forwai-d and back to breast. 
 
 17. Ni<jhtfall. — Both hands held slightly bent in front of brea.st, palms 
 downward, tlieii moved downward. 
 
 18. Soon, liight hand closed, first finger extended, held up in front 
 of face. 
 
 Itt. Old »/»/m.— First finger of right hand held up, slightly bent, the 
 other fingers being closed, indicating the bent back. 
 
 l2<). (Jiilrl,-. — Higlit arm pushed upward and forward, slightly to the 
 right, at the same time left fist striking breast, 
 
 21. Uiili-r. — First and second fingers of right hand straddling the tirst 
 and .second or the left, wliiehis held in the position of ' horse.' 
 
 22. /i'()<7r. - Both fists held up in front of face, knuckles towards 
 body, struck together and separated again. 
 
 2."i. '/'(' A-^///.- - Klbows close to body, lower arms held horizontally, 
 hands closeil. 
 
 2'1. Slop. Hand rai.sed, open j)alm forward, then shaken. 
 
 2."). Sinirlf^r. Uiglit hand hidf opened, first finger slightly extended 
 upwiird, palm towards body, then moved upward. 
 
 2(). Sniixi'l. — Kirst linger pointing downward in front of breast and 
 moved downward. 
 
 27. 'rni[i. — Both palms clapped together. 
 
 28. Yiiinnj man. — As ' Boy,' but hands raised higher. 
 See als(» pp. Stl, 87. 
 
 For indicating the direction in which a party tr.avels, poles are planted 
 into the gfound, {)()inting in that direction, or twigs of brushes or trees are 
 broken and pointed in the same way. A pole directed toward the part of the 
 sky where the sun stands at a certain hour indicates at what time some- 
 thing is to be done or has been done. Figures of men drawn on the sand 
 indicate how many have beeii killed by a war party. A number of hairs 
 from a horse's maiu' indicate the nQnd)er of horsemen that passed by, 
 Stich messages iii-e left particularly at crossings of trails.' 
 
 , 
 
 ' St'f I'ilili Kfj.ort, p. ti.i. 
 
ON THK NORTlf "-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 89 
 
 fc of ears, 
 
 > upward, 
 
 til fingers 
 her, back 
 
 5f breast, 
 lorizontal 
 
 me al'ove 
 aiidering' 
 
 rs, palms 
 
 id second 
 
 da taken 
 
 esfM'ibe a 
 
 st, palms 
 
 in fj'ont 
 
 ^nt, the 
 
 y to the 
 
 the first 
 
 to wan! H 
 
 ontally, 
 
 ^tended 
 ist and 
 
 jlanted 
 ees are 
 t of the 
 
 some- 
 
 e sand 
 
 hairs 
 
 id by. 
 
 I 
 
 Fires are used to give signals to distant parties. 
 
 A number of rock paintings are found on the shores of Kamloops 
 Laktf. I have not seen them, and do not know wliat they represent. 
 
 Gamk.*^. 
 
 The games of the Shushwap are almost the same as those of the coast 
 tribes. We find the game of dice played with beaver-teeth (see p. 19), 
 and the well-known game of lehal. Children and women play ' oat's 
 cradle.' A peculiar gambling game is played in the following way : A 
 long pole is laid on the ground, about fit teen feet from the players ; a ring, 
 about one inch in diameter, to which four beads are attached at points 
 dividing the circumference into four equal parts, is rolled towards the 
 pole, and sticks ai-e thrown after it, before it falls down on touching the 
 pole. The four beads are red, while, blue, and black. The ring falls 
 down on the stick that has been throivn after it, and, according to the 
 colour of the bead which touches the stick, the player wins a number of 
 points. Another gambling game is played with a series of sticks of maple 
 wood, about four inches long, and painted with various marks. There 
 are two players to the game, who sit opposite each other. A fisher-skin, 
 which is nicely painted, is placed between them, bent in such a way as to 
 present two faces, slanting down toward the players. Each of these 
 takes a number of sticks which he covers with hay, shakes and throws 
 down one after the other, on his side of the skin. The player who throws 
 down the stick bearing a certain mark has lost. 
 
 Shooting matches are frequently arranged. An arrow is shot, and 
 then the archers try to hit the arrow which has been shot first. Or a 
 bundle of hay or a piece of bark is thrown as far as possible, and the men 
 shoot at it. The following game of ball was described to me : The 
 players stand in two opposite rows. A stake is driven into the ground 
 on the left side of the players of (me row, and anoi'ier on the right side of 
 the players of the other row. Two men stand in the centre between the 
 two rows. One of these pitches the ball, the other tries to drive it to one 
 of the stakes with a bat. Then both parties endeavour to drive the ball 
 to the stake on the opposite side, and the party which succeeds in this 
 has won the game. 
 
 CuSTO.MS REGARDING lllRTll, MaRRIAGE, AND DeATH. 
 
 My information regarding customs practised at the birth of a child Is 
 very meagre. The navel-string is cut with a stone knife. The child is 
 washed immediately after birth. The custom of deforming certain parts 
 of the body does not prevail. The mother umst abstain from ' anything 
 that bleeds,' and consequently must not eat fresh meat. There are no 
 regulations as to the food or behaviour of the father. The cradle after 
 being used is not thrown away, but tiung to a tree in the woods. If a 
 child should die, the next child is never pat into the same cradle which 
 was lised for the dead child. 
 
 A girl on reaching maturity has to go through a great number of 
 oereuionieis. She must leave the village and live alone in a small hut 
 on the mountains. She cooks her own food, and must not eat anything 
 that bleeds. She is forbidden to touch her head, for which purpose she 
 uses a comb with tliiee points. Neither is she allowed to scratch her 
 
•JO 
 
 Rf.PoKT— 1.S9C). 
 
 1)0(1}', except witli a painted dcer-lione. She wears ilie bone and ilie 
 CDinb suspended f'roin lier Itelt. She drinks out of a. painted cup of 
 hirch-bark, and neither nu)re iior less than the (|uantity it holds. Every 
 night she walks about her hut, and phmts willow twigs, which she has 
 painted, and to the ends of which she has attached pieces of cloth, into 
 the ground. It is believed that thus she will become ri(;li in later life. 
 In oriler to beiioine strong she should cliiub trees and try to break oti' 
 tlu'ir points. She plays with li'lml sticks t'liat her future husbands njight 
 have good luck when gaud)ling.' 
 
 Women during their monthly periods are forbidden to eat fresh meat, 
 but live principally on roots. Tht-y nmst not cook for their families, as 
 it is believed tluit the food would l)e poisonous. During this time the 
 husband nmst ke(!p away from his wife, as t?lse the bears woi Id attack 
 him when he go«'s hunting. 
 
 A man who intends to go out hunting must keep away from his wife, 
 aB else he would have bad lui'k, They do not believe that the wife's 
 infidelity eutail.s bad luck in hunting and other enterprises. 
 
 WoiiuMi must never pass ahuig the foot or head of a sleeping person, 
 as this is unlucky. 
 
 Women who are with child must not touch food that has been touchetl 
 by mice, or eat of a plate which a dog has licked oH'. If she should eat 
 a bird that has Ikhmi killeil l)y an animal her child wotild be subject to 
 diz/.iness. 
 
 The marriage ceremonies weredescrib(!d to me as follows: A young man 
 who wishes to many a girl takes a number of horses and other property 
 that is considered vahuible and oti'ers it to the father of tne girl he wishes 
 to mai'ry. The latter, before accepting the price otl'ered, invitea his 
 whole tamily to a coui\cil and asks their consent, if they agree to accept 
 the suitor ami the pi'ice he has oH'ercd for the girl they tie the horses to 
 their stable, and take the other goods into the Ikjusc, as a sign of their 
 willingness. After this the young man nn\y take the girl without further 
 ceremonies. After the marriage tlu^ bi'idegroom and his family go on ;i 
 hunting e.vpedition, and try to obtain as much game as possible, which is 
 to be given to his fathei-in-law. The latter dresses the meat and invites 
 the wiiole tribe toa feast. Then he and his family in their turn go hunt- 
 ing, and pri'sent the game they have ol>tained to the young man's father, 
 who jrivcs a feast to the whole tribe. At this time the twirl's father 
 returns all the payments he has i-eceived to the young man's father. Kor 
 a number of days the couple live with the girl's family. When the 
 youny mail goes to reside with his wile he asks all his friends to support 
 him, and they yive him j)resents of food and clothing. The latter he 
 puts on. (Jiic suit on top of the other, goes to his fath(>r-in-law, aiul gives 
 
 ' I'lic fnllowirii,^ c.ii-itdiu was di^sc.ribed to nic liy .Mr. .1. W. Mackay, the Indian 
 Ai:eMt lor tin' Kaiii[(»u|).s district He heard it ilesorilied it Yule, and thiMid'ere it 
 |iri)l)alily bel()iiir> i,i tlie trilics ul' Llit; Lower l'ra>er Hiver. My iM(|iiirie.s at Kaniloopx 
 regardJM}; the ciustoin were result less. .Mr. Mackay slates that at the end of tlie 
 puherly (!ereini)tiii'S the sharniin led the irirl liack troiu her seehision to the village 
 ill jjiauit proe('ssi(in. He t^arrieil a dish called fxii//f(l')i, whieh is carvtul oiit of 
 steatite, in one liaiiil. Tin; dish re|iresetils a woaiaii ^q\iiig hirth to a ehil<l, aloiiff 
 wliosfi hack a snake crawls. The ehild's hack is hollowed out and servt.'.s as a reeep- 
 taele for water. In the other hand the shaman (tarries oerlain herbs. When they 
 ii'liiriied to the villau'Li the herbs were put into the di>h. and the iriri was sprinkled 
 with the water eontairied in the disli, the >>liMiaati pra\in!.;- at the siiine time fof her 
 I ■) h.n r tnaii\ '■hiidii-n 
 
 
ON TllK NKlilll-WK.si I.U.N TUIHKS OK (AN.VUA. 
 
 1)1 
 
 IP and tho 
 ed flip of 
 Is. Kvery 
 fli she has 
 clotli, info 
 later life. 
 • l)r(!ak oH' 
 luls might 
 
 "onh meat, 
 
 iniilios, as 
 
 <iirie the 
 
 Id atta(ik 
 
 I his wife, 
 the wife's 
 
 J< person. 
 
 n touclied 
 hoiild eat 
 iiibjeet to 
 
 )n!i<r man 
 
 propi-rty 
 
 le wislies 
 
 vites his 
 
 to aceept 
 
 jorses to 
 
 of their 
 
 t fiiitlier 
 
 u'o on a 
 
 which is 
 
 invites 
 
 ro liunt- 
 
 i father, 
 
 s father 
 
 r. For 
 
 len tlie 
 
 support 
 
 itter he 
 
 .y'ives 
 
 t' fndian 
 rd'oro it 
 
 I of flit-- 
 villat,'!' 
 out of 
 
 , iiloiifj- 
 
 II rt't'f})- 
 cn they 
 )riiikl('il 
 
 fur litT 
 
 him all the |)ro[)erty he earries. The latter distrihntes this property 
 amonj^ the whole tril)e accordiiif to the eontril)ut ions everyone has 
 made. Then the young coujde remove to the young nmn's family, anti 
 before leaving her t'atlu*r's house the hride is fitted out with presents in 
 the same way us the young man was when he came to r(side with her 
 family. This is a present to the young irian's father, who also distributes 
 it among the tribe. Marriages between eousins were not l'()rl)id(len. 
 
 When a person died at thtf village the l)ody was tied up in sitting 
 posture, the knees being bent to the chin, and the arms tied together. 
 A gi-ave was dug, and its sides were rubbeil with thorn bushes. Then 
 the body was burieil, and a number of pole.s were; erected over the grave 
 in the shape of a conical hut. The sand inside and around tin- hut was 
 carefully smoothed. If on one of the following days tracks were seet> 
 in the hut, the being animal or niiin- to whom tlu-y belonged would be 
 the next to die. If after a while the sand should be b'own away, the 
 bones were burit'd again. Wherever they find human bones they clean 
 them and bury them thinking that others may do the same to their own 
 relatives. When a person died far fivMii home, for instance on a hunting 
 expedition, the body was burnt, and the charred bones were cairii-d home 
 to be buried at the native village of the dect^ased. Thi' report that the 
 Ivones of the do,M\ were washed regularly, which has been imnle by 
 several travellers, seems to ivst on thesi> facts. No carved tigiwes wert) 
 placed over the graves, as was the custom on the Lower Thompson Kivei-. 
 At the bui'ial oi" the burning of the body, slaves, hounds, and horses of 
 the decea.seil were killed. His favoui'ite slaveys were i)uri(>d alive ; the 
 horses were eaten by the mourners, to whom a feast was spread on the 
 grave. In some cases the uncle oi- nephew of the deceased would kill a 
 number of his own slaves at the grave. Wintei' provisions, prepared by 
 a woman before her death, were burnt. The clothes of a dead person 
 must be washed before being used aijaiii. 
 
 A year after the d<;ath of a pi-rson his relatives collected a large 
 amount of food and clothes, and gave Ji new feast on the tjravt'. 'i'his 
 was the end of the mourning period, and henceforth they tried to forget 
 the deccc;sed. At this feast his sou adopted his name. 
 
 The I'clatives of a dead person during the inDurniiiiX p(M-iud must not 
 eat deer, salmon, or beri'ies, as else the deer and salmon would be driven 
 uway, and the berries would sp(jil. Their diet is eoiitincd to dried veni- 
 son and tish. They cut their hair, and katp it short fur one year, until 
 the final feast is given. They must avoid touching their heads except 
 with a stick or a comb. Names of deccHsed persons must ntjt be men- 
 tioned during the mourning period. Men as well as women must go 
 every morning to the river, wail, and bathe. When a man or a woman 
 tlies, the widow or widower is kept as a captive in the house of a brothei'- 
 in-l»w. As soon as the mourning perioil, which in this case is particu- 
 larly strict, is at an end, the widower must marry a sistei' cn' the nearest 
 relative of his dead wife ; the widow is married to her dead husliand's 
 brother, or to his nearest relative.' 
 
 Widows or widowers have to observe the following mourning ivgula- 
 
 ' The niouniiug ceremonies of the Sliushwap are rvidently greatl.v influenced by 
 tliose of tiieir northern iiciLdiliouis, the Carrier.-., which liavi- Ijeen "le.scrihed by the 
 |{ev. \. Ci. Mor'wo. in tlic /'rocfidinffn of '/ir ('iiii(tili(t>i liiKfifiitr, IK '.(. Tiir stri(;tiK'ss 
 of the leviratf and the rcrfuionies cfli'liraini al the ^^lave arc almost the same in 
 Loth eases. 
 
92 
 
 IlKl'i.ltT— 1«1>U. 
 
 tloiis: Tliey must huilil it sweat -lioiise on a crock, sweat tliore all night, 
 uml Imtlu- ii't;ularly in tlie cn't-k, altor which tiiey must nib theii' hodies 
 with spruce hranclies, the branches must he used only once, and are 
 Htuck into the ground all around the hut. The ruourner uses a cup and 
 cooking M'ssels hy liinLHeH", and must not toucli head nor body. No 
 iiunter m.ist come near liim, as his picsence is unlucky. They 'nust 
 avoid letting their shadows tall upon a person, as the latter would fall 
 sick at once. They use thorn hiislu's for pillow and bed, in order to keep 
 away the ghost of the deceased. Thorn bushes are also laid all around 
 their bt'ds. A wi(h)wer must not go hunting, as the grizzly bear would 
 got his scHiit and attack liini at once. 
 
 1^ 
 
 m 
 
 1 
 
 jft 
 
 : 
 
 lirE 
 
 If 
 
 '■ T 
 
 id V 
 
 i 
 
 i' 
 
 i; 
 
 ^ 
 
 X'akiois Mki.iki's. 
 
 Twins. — When twins are born, the motlier must build a hut on tlie 
 slope of the mountains, on the hank of a creek, and live there with her 
 children until they begin to walk. They may be visited by their family, 
 or any other who wishes to see them, but they must not go into the 
 village, el.se her other children would die. Twins are called sk-ioriku'mif- 
 .st,s-/7/, t'f'., young giizzly bears. It is believed that throughout their lives 
 they are endowed with supernatural powers. They can make good and 
 bati Weather. In order to produce rain they take a small basket filled 
 with water, which they spill into the air. For making clear weather 
 they use a small stick, to the end of which a string is tied. A small tiat 
 piece of wood is attached to the end of the string, and this implement is 
 shaken. Storm is produ(!ed by strewing down on the ends of spruce 
 branches. While they are children their mother can see by their plays 
 whethtu" her husband, when he is out hunting, is successful or not. When 
 the twins play about and t'eign to bite each other he will be successful ; 
 if they keep ijniet he will return home empty-lianded. If one of a 
 couple of twins should die the other must clean him.self in the sweat-house 
 ' in order to remove the blood of the deceased out of his body.' 
 
 A decoction made of certain herbs, when used as hair-oil or mixed 
 with the saliva of a person, acts as a love-oharm. 
 
 To break eggs of the ptarmigan produces rain. 
 
 If one has a feeling as tliongh .someone was standing behind one'si 
 back, or if a sudden chill goes down one's back, it is a sign that son.eone 
 will die. If one's leg twitches, someone is coming. When the ears r.ng, 
 someone speaks ill of one. The owl cries viuh-fsd'lr (he is dead), 
 and calls the name of the person who will die. 
 
 One cannot make tire with the tire-drill after having eaten in the 
 morning. 
 
 Hair that has been cut off must be buried or thrown into the river. 
 
 lieaver-bo^u^s (not tho.se of the salmon, as is the custom on the coast) 
 must be thrown into the river, else the beavers would not go into the 
 traps any more. The .same would happen if a dog should eat beaver-meat, 
 or gnaw a beaver- bone. 
 
 When making bullets they mix wood that has been struck by lightning 
 with the lead. They believe that the bullets thus become more deadly, 
 as they will burn the deer's flesh. 
 
 They believe that the beaver, when constructing its dam, kills one of 
 its young and buries it under the dam, that it may become firmer and 
 not u'ive wav to Huods. 
 
 i 
 
 li 
 
ON TllK Ni)[;Tfl-\vi;sTii;\ TRun:5> '>F rvN\ii.\. 
 
 n:i 
 
 mixt'tj 
 
 iver. 
 coast) 
 to the 
 ■meat, 
 
 itning 
 sadly, 
 
 )neof 
 r and 
 
 
 KhMHIii.N ASH SHA.MAM>M. 
 
 I rrccivcd very scanty information only rcpjardint; tlir rclijjfions ideas 
 of tho Sliushwap. Chiefs before smokint,' tln-ir pipes would turn them 
 towards sunrise, noon, and sunset, after havins; them h<^hted, and thus 
 offer a smoke to the sun, at the same time prayinj^ siUnitly to him. TIih 
 same custom is practised in liritisli Colundiia by the Kootouay. 1 did 
 not find any other trace of sun-worship. 
 
 Souls do not return in newborn ehihi 'en 
 When a person faints, it is a sif^n that a ghost pursues liini. 
 The shaman is initiated by animals, wlio become his guardian spirits. 
 The initiation ceremoni«!S for warriors and shamans seem to be identieal, 
 tho objecrt of the initiation ceremonies being merely to obtain super- 
 natural help for any object that appeared desirable. The yonng man, on 
 reaching puberty, and before he had ever touched a woman, had to go out 
 on the mountains and pass through a number of performances. He had 
 to build a sweat-house, in which he stayed every night. In the morning 
 be was allowed to return to the village. He had to clean himself in tho 
 Hweat-house, to dance and to sing iluringthe night. This was continued, 
 sometimes for years, until he dreamt that the animal he desired for his 
 guardian spirit appeared to him and promised him its help. As soon as 
 it appeared the novice fell down in a swoon. ' He feels as though he 
 were drunk, and does not know whether it is day or night, nor what he 
 is doitiir ' I'he animal tells him to think of it if he should be in iiei'd of 
 help, and gives liim a certain song with which to summon him up. 
 Therefore every shaman has his own song. wlii(rh tmne else is allowed to 
 sing, except when the attempt is made to discover a sorcerer (see p.'.'i). 
 Sometimes the spirit comes down to the novice in the shape of a stroke 
 of lightning. Tf an animal initiates tlie novice it teaches him its lan- 
 guage. One shaman in Nicola Valley is said to speak the ' (;oyote lan- 
 guage ' in his incantations. Unfortunately, I did not learn (he details of 
 this language, so that T do not know whether it is a .sacred language 
 common to all shamans, or merely an individual invention. If the young 
 man desires to bee me a successfnl gambler he must ]>ractise gamblinir 
 while he is on the mountains. He throws the gambling sticks into the 
 water while it is dark, and tries to pick them up again without looking. 
 If he wishes to become a lightfooted runner he must practise running. 
 It is said that one young man used to roll rocks down the slope of 
 Paul's Peak, near Kamloops, and then ran after them until he was able to 
 overtake the rocks, which leaped down the steep sides of the hill. 
 
 After a man has obtained a guardian spirit he is bullet and arrow 
 proof. If an arrow or a bullet should strike him he does not bleed from 
 the wound, but the blood all flows into his stomach. He spits it out. 
 and is well again. ' Braves,' who have secured the help of spirits, are 
 carried to the Hghtiiig ground. No woman must .see them when on 
 their way, as else they would lose their supernatural power. When an 
 attack is going to be made on a village the guardian spirit of the warriors 
 will warn them. In dreaming or in waking they see blood flying alKiut, 
 and this is a sign that someone will be murdered. Before going on 
 a war expedition warriors Avonld fast and abstain from sleep for a whole 
 week, bathing frequently in streams. It was believed that this would 
 make them nimble-footed. 
 
 Men could acquire more than one g-uardian spirit, and powerful 
 
94 
 
 HKPMUI — IH!)0. 
 
 MT 
 
 .sliaiiiiuis liiid iilways niotf I li;iii iptin liolpci-. I'lic princi|ifil <Inty nf flin 
 Hlumiaii was to <;uro tliu sick. Disciisi! inav be tluc to a f'oi'cijrn body enter- 
 \n\r th(! hf)(ly of a jxtsoji, to disolicyiiii; ccrtmii iiilcs, to tlic t»'iiipnrary 
 absence of tlic soul, or to w itcbcnil't. In all of tlicsc cuscs the help of tlic 
 sliaman is nccilcd. The most important amuni>; tlii' paniplicrnaiia of tlic 
 shaman is a lieadilrcss made of a mat. which is worn in his incantations. 
 'I'he nnit is about two yards long iiy one yai'd widu. The corners of on(^ 
 of the nai-row ends are sc^wed toijether, and it is put on as a headdi-ess, 
 the whole leiiLfth of the mat haii;,'inif down the buck of the shaman. 
 Mefore piittin<; it on they blow on it ami spriiikl(> it with water which 
 had been poured over ma<(ic herbs. As soon as th(> shaman putfi on 
 the headdress \w ' acts as th«>u<^li he was <'ra/.y.' /.'' , hv puts himsolf 
 into a trance by siiiL:in^' the sonij^ he hud r)btained fi'oni his ^^'iiardian 
 spirit ttt the time ol' his initiation. H(> dances until he pers]>ires freely, 
 and finally his spirit comes and speaks to him. Then he lies down next 
 to the patient and sucks at the [)art of thi' body where the pain is. He 
 is supposed to nnnove a thoULT oi' a feather fi-o?n it, which was the cause 
 of th«! diseiise. .\s soon as he has removed it he leaves the but, takes 
 olf his nuit, and blows updii the nbj'ect he has removed from the 
 body, which then disiippeai's. It is stated that in bis dances lie some- 
 times sinks into the j^i'oiind down to his knees. 
 
 If the disease is produced by witehcrart or by disobedience to certain 
 refjulations. the shaman. diiriiiL.'" his ti-ancc, };oes into the lower wf)rld, /.'' , 
 undergi'ound, in order to i-onsiilt with his guai'diun spirits. After a while 
 he retuvns to the upper worhJ and announces the cause of the sickne.xs, 
 saying that a woman passed by the hi-ad of the patient, or that the 
 shadow of a mourner fell ii|)on him, or Lfiving some other imaginary 
 cause of sickness. The most elaborate performance is the bi-inging back 
 of absent .souls, The Shushwap believe that while a man is alive the 
 shanum is able to s(>e the soul. After d(>atli the soul becomes invisible, 
 although its movements may be luvird. Therefore the shaman will some- 
 times lie down, th<* ear on tlie ground, ami listen. If lu; hears a noise 
 of a passing soul without seeing .inythin'^ he will .say: 'So-and-so has 
 died. I heard his soul, but did not see it passing by.' If ho sees it, it is 
 a sign that the ])erson to whom the .soul belongs is sick, but may recover 
 if his soul is restored to him. Then the shaman puts on his mat and 
 b(!gins his incantation. As soon as he has succeeded in summoning hi.s 
 spirit he sets out with him in .search of the lost soul. While he is 
 unconscious he runs and jumps, and is heard te speak to his spirit. He 
 wiM say, for instance, ' Here is a chasm ; let us jump across it ! ' He 
 actually gives a jump and says, ' Now we have passed it,' &c. Finally 
 he meets the soul, and is seen to have a severe ti{?ht with it until it is 
 finally overcome. Then he returns in company with his spirit to tlio 
 upper world, and throws off" his mat as soon as he comes back. He 
 restores the soul to ttic sick person by laying it on the crown of his head. 
 
 Sickness due to witchcraft is treated in the following way : When a 
 shaman hates any person and looks at him steadfastly, he .sends the labter's 
 soul undergroutid, to sunrise or sunset. The anger of a shaman may be 
 aroused, for instance, by a young man who prides himself of his courage, 
 and in ordtT to show his undaunted spii-ifc paints his face with figures, 
 representing stars, sun, moon, birds, or any other designs that are con- 
 sidered becoming to the most powerful me>i of the tribe. After the soul 
 has left the body of the young man another friendly shaman is (!alled. 
 He begins at oiu:e to sing all the songs of the shamans of the tribe. It 
 
n\ nil. Nni;iii-\vi..>ri:i;N ii;ini.> <ti ( \.\\i'\. 
 
 •»,) 
 
 IS hrlifvcil lliiit UH soiiii US lie l)»'j;iiis the h<iii<; (if the sluimiiii uhit Ikih 
 lit'witclicd lli»! patient, tho »;vil.<l<icf will hccnriu' cni/.y. 
 
 'I'lic sliaiiiaii iiiii also bewitch lii«i ciit'iiiy l>y llimw iii^' the eanse of 
 fliseiise, i.e., ii I'trnthei- or a thoii^, at liiiii , or hy juitliim' iiiaL'i'" lieilis into 
 his (li'ink. (iidiuiil liutnaii lioiies, niixcil with I'ikkI, afe Ix'lieved to make 
 the haif ot" the )iefsoii who eats it I'all out. Il'jiaits oi' the clothing ot' ii 
 |H!r.S(»n aft' placed in contacl with a eorp.se the owner rMn>t die. It. is 
 helieved that the slianian eun in no way liann a wlnte inun. 
 
 The ^^llanlan also endeaAours to oittiiin t^Mtne in times oC want. Ilti 
 begins his in(;antatioii and sends his soul in search ol' deer and other 
 ;;ame. When he retui'iis he tidls the hunters to ^o to such and siicli a 
 place in oi-der to find the animals. When they lind any they must l)iin<.^ 
 the venison to the .■-hamiiii. No!)odv is allowed to i-at of it unlil thu 
 stiHinan has eaten his share. 
 
 Freipienlly altera death has o<-curred the shaman is call«d hv the 
 relatives ot' the decea.sed li is believed that t.ic irhost of the dead 
 person is naj^cr to take one of his nearest relatives with hini to the country 
 rjf the souls. In order to diive the ;_diost away the shaman is called, lie 
 S(H!S the j^liost, and orders all the mei!il»ers of the mourninjj; family to stay 
 in the house, which the yl'o^'t cannot entei'. Then he speaks to the j^'host, 
 askiiif.^ him whom he wants, and tclliiiL;' him that he caninit have the 
 pci'son he wants. He 'ippeasts the liliost. who then li-a\cs. and does not 
 i'nrther troubK* his relatives. The shaman is paid a hijj-li price for 
 this service. 
 
 Contests between shamans, in on'cr to ascertain who is the most 
 powerful, are lutt rai'c. The one will take his cliarm tii'st, l)low on it, 
 and throw it at the other. If the other is weaker he will fall on his bark, 
 and blood will How from his mouth. Then the former Mows on him a»id 
 restores him by this means. They also practise ini.ff^'leiy. The shaman 
 is tied, ami he frees himself liy the help of his spirit. 
 
 It, it IS 
 
 ecover 
 lat and 
 nir hi.s 
 he is 
 , Hh 
 • H(^ 
 inally 
 1 it is 
 to tho 
 . He 
 head, 
 hen a 
 atter's 
 lay be 
 iirage, 
 ;nros, 
 con- 
 ? soul 
 ailed. 
 
 m. It 
 
 DKFOK.MKI) CUANIA KWO.M TlIK NoUITl I'ACIKIC COAST. 
 
 I II dcscribinj,' t he custom> ot rlie l,ku ri<;i- ii and of t lie K wa k in tl, men- 
 tion has been niadi; of the methods employed for flcforniinir the cranium. 
 It remains to sav a few witrds reirardint; the efl'ccts of such defoi-mations. 
 So tar as I am awai-c there exist three distiiutt types ol intentional head 
 fleformation, which, however, arc connected by intermediate types. These 
 types may be (h'si>xnali'd as the Chinook, the Cowitcliin, and tlie Koskinio, 
 Irom the names of certain triiies practisiiif.^ these methods of deformation. 
 The first is found in the rej^fion of (.Ailiimbia River, principally atnon;jf 
 the Chitiook and Cowlitz. Its northern limit is unknown to me. The 
 second is prai;tised on I'uyet Sound, by the Lku i'l^'Kn, Cowitcliin, and 
 Sk"(|omic of British C'olumbia. The Catlolttj form a jjradual transi- 
 tion to the last tyjte, wliich reaches its hitrhest developnajnt at Kwatzino 
 Sound, but e.vtends .southward alon^ the coast of Vancouver Island 
 and the mainland opposite to Toba Inlet and Como.v. Tim Chinook 
 cranium is excessively flattened (tif^s. "21 to "Ji)), the forehead beinf^ 
 depressed. The head is allowed to ^n-ow laterally. Conserpiently a com- 
 pensatory growth takes phicc in this direction. The Cowitcliin do not 
 flatten the craninra, but rather shorten it by means of a strong pressure 
 upon the region of the lambda and farther down. It appears that the 
 subsequent flattening of the fordiead is mainly due to giowth under the 
 altered conditions, after the compressing cushions have been removed. 
 
Of) 
 
 ni:r()irr-IH!in. 
 
 I 
 
 If 
 
 Tlio tliinl t'unn nf (;ratiiinn is prodiiciMl hy combinatioti of frdiitiil. 
 (tccipital, mid lateral prcsMirt'. In cfaniii of the sdutlici-ii triht'K of this 
 rugion, evidence of a prossurc upon the Itirnlida may b(! seen; but the 
 fnreh((ad is at thii samo time fluttciicd, and the fotal distanee from 
 ^lahelhi to lairibda inereasod, the oecnpiit beiin/ iiKjlinod haekward. There- 
 tore th(! o(!eipita,l iiuh'x of these eraiiia is very birjifo. The Koskimo crania 
 are ('(miprossed on all sides, and therefore very long, the axis of the 
 cranium being depressed. 
 
 I give here a series of measurements of (-rania, showing the typical 
 deformations. F have to thank Professor F. W. Putnam, Dii-ector of the 
 Peabody Museum nf .Xmeriean Areh»v)logy of Canil>ridge, Mass., for his 
 kind permis.sion to me to desf ibo the three Chinook crania. 
 
 ly 
 
 
 « 
 
 ^3 
 
 ItK.. 
 III. 
 
 t 
 
 .«! 4, 
 
 93 
 
 
 hi 
 
 1 >:^ 
 
 r ^ — 
 
 •~ •? '— ' 
 
 '■J V 
 
 1-3 
 
 si 
 
 1 u<fi< 
 
 MM (V. 
 
 
 ¥ 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm 
 
 nun. 
 
 mtii. 
 
 mm. 
 
 inm. 
 
 
 Horizontal IcnKtli . 
 
 166 
 
 170 
 
 1 .-..■) 
 
 1 tlO 
 
 , 181 
 
 199 
 
 Maxinuim leiijrtli . 
 
 167 
 
 171 
 
 1 .-..-. 
 
 1«1 
 
 181 
 
 199 
 
 Occipital Icny^th 
 
 ■ — 
 
 .{7 
 
 .'».") 
 
 39 
 
 55 
 
 73 
 
 Maximum vvidlli . 
 
 157p 
 
 I(i4p 
 
 152 
 
 1 COp 
 
 1.34p 
 
 137 
 
 Minimum frontjil width , 
 
 9» 
 
 101 
 
 (90) 
 
 95 
 
 92-5 
 
 102 
 
 Height . .... 
 
 126 
 
 . 129 
 
 
 134 
 
 131 
 
 130 
 
 Height of car 
 
 116 
 
 11(5 
 
 _. 
 
 . 120 
 
 115 
 
 114 
 
 Length of basis 
 
 (93) 
 
 km; 
 
 — 
 
 95 
 
 99 
 
 106 
 
 Width of basis 
 
 (102) 
 
 113 
 
 94 
 
 (111) 
 
 99 
 
 105 
 
 Ijongth of pars basilaris 
 
 25 
 
 28 
 
 -_ 
 
 2(i 
 
 2.". 
 
 27 
 
 I,ength of fnramen tiiagnuiii . 
 
 •An 
 
 :}8 
 
 — 
 
 38 
 
 1 39 
 
 35 
 
 Width of foramen magnnno . 
 
 'JS 
 
 :<'j-.T 
 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 29 
 
 Horizontal circumtViciuc 
 
 .-.!<; 
 
 r,:u 
 
 492 
 
 508 
 
 .507 
 
 555 
 
 Sagittal circurafcrt^nct' . 
 
 s;vj 
 
 •v,u 
 
 30,". 
 
 ;i35 
 
 357 
 
 399 
 
 Frontal arch of sagit. cirfMim. 
 
 117 
 
 12 
 
 101 
 
 id; 
 
 121 
 
 138 
 
 Parietal arch of sagit. circum. 
 
 M.-. 
 
 114 
 
 I04 
 
 119 
 
 109 
 
 133 
 
 f)ccipit.arch of sagit. circum. 
 
 Ml' 
 
 I(t8 
 
 100 
 
 100 
 
 127 
 
 128 
 
 Vertical (!ircunif(;rcnce . 
 
 :ii.-> 
 
 :t;iO . 
 
 — 
 
 , 3;u) 
 
 298 
 
 296 
 
 Height of face 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 lis 
 
 — 
 
 126 
 
 Height of upper part of face 
 
 70 
 
 78 
 
 .■".2 
 
 70 
 
 69 
 
 80 
 
 Width of maxillary bone 
 
 !t«; 
 
 107 
 
 72 
 
 105 
 
 91 
 
 110 
 
 Wiflth between zyg. arches . 
 
 140 
 
 148 
 
 108". 
 
 149 
 
 125 
 
 141 
 
 Height of no.se 
 
 !-)(► 
 
 5.T 
 
 36-5 
 
 50 
 
 49 
 
 60 
 
 Width of nose 
 
 22 
 
 27 
 
 19 
 
 23 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 Width of orbit 
 
 40 1 
 
 42 
 
 34 
 
 41 
 
 39 
 
 41 
 
 Height of orbit 
 
 36 
 
 38 
 
 32 
 
 36 
 
 36 
 
 415 
 
 Length of face 
 
 97 
 
 112 
 
 — 
 
 101 
 
 97 
 
 105 
 
 liength of palate . 
 
 4S» 
 
 .*)5 
 
 34 
 
 51 
 
 49 
 
 51 
 
 Anterior width of palate 
 
 H!» 
 
 44 
 
 30 
 
 39 
 
 37 
 
 34 
 
 Posterior width of palate 
 
 (4-,) 
 LiitOcc. 
 
 .'>0 
 
 , 35 
 
 — 1 
 
 45 
 
 39 
 
 43 
 
 Capacity .... 
 
 Cephalic index 
 
 il4(i 
 
 !1(i-4 
 
 981 ' 
 
 1000 
 
 740 
 
 68-8 
 
 Index of height 
 
 74-7 
 
 7.'>!) 
 
 _ 1 
 
 80-4 
 
 72-4 
 
 65-3 
 
 Index of upper part of face . | 
 
 oO-O 
 
 52-7 
 
 47-9 
 
 470 
 
 55-2 
 
 56-7 
 
 Index of nose 
 
 44 1 
 
 491 
 
 51-8 
 
 460 
 
 44-9 
 
 38-3 
 
 Occipital index 
 
 — 1 
 
 21-7 
 
 355 
 
 24-4 
 
 30-4 
 
 :«.T 
 
_,,^„0Sii^MiMMi;i>^^'^' r 
 
 ON Tin; N0nTII-WF8T|;i;N II!Ilir> 111' CWAIiV. 
 
 !>; 
 
 1. Wyman, H'.iO. Adult male. Calvariiiin. 'I'lu- I'miiinrn is nmcli 
 tiattonod ami asytiirncti-icjal, ixh appears in flic norma ocripitalis. Sutiiios 
 open; tooth not worn. The sutiircs arc rather complicated, a Woi'inian 
 body in the right coronal suture, othci's in the loft aslcrion. 'I'he sagittal 
 suture from nbclion to hindida is dej)rossed, being the ih'cpcsl lino of a 
 shallow groove. Tlie lolt nuistoid process is absent, two small elevations 
 
 Kl(i. 21.— Chinook Male. 
 (Wyman ('(illoction, SDO ; I'oubody Museum, < aiiiliiiili.c, Ma--,) 
 
 as* 
 
 •i 
 
 mm. 
 
 199 
 
 199 
 78 
 
 137 
 
 102 
 
 130 
 
 114 
 
 lOfi 
 
 105 
 27 
 35 
 L>9 
 
 555 
 
 399 
 
 138 
 
 133 
 
 128 
 
 29fi 
 
 12fi 
 80 
 
 110 
 
 141 
 60 
 23 
 41 
 41'i 
 
 105 
 51 
 34 
 43 
 
 being the only indication. The condyles are small. The squama occipitalis 
 is very asymmetrical, the oooijiital protubcjranco largo lyut flat. The jmlate 
 is high and arched ; short traces of the sntnra incisiva are Ibund. The 
 alveolar arch is almost angular at the canine teeth, turning suddenly 
 backward. The right wisdom tooth is not developed. Fossa glenoidalis 
 shallow ; styloid processes harge and heavy. Kight oar round, left oar 
 
 FlO. 2').— Chinook Male. (Wyman Collection, 890.) 
 
 68-8 
 fi5-3 
 567 
 38-3 
 36- 
 
 narrow, oval. Pai's basilaris high. On .he right side n, complete 
 processus frontalis of the temporal bone is fonnd, and in addition to it an 
 epipteric bone ; on the left an incomplete processus frontalis and a larger 
 epipteric bone are found. Part of the tissues of the face are preserved ; 
 upper portion of the face is coloured green by copper. The cross-section 
 
 7 hO 
 
p 
 
 '■ t 
 
 r 
 
 \ 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 i . 
 
 J 
 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 l:^ 
 
 
 
 
 98 
 
 REPORT— 1 890. 
 
 of tho nose Is high and rounded ; its upper part is narrow, the lower rim 
 rather sharp, the septum asymmetrical. The lacryraal ducts are small. 
 
 Fig. 20.- Chinook Male. (Wj-raan Collection.) 
 
 Superciliary ridges well developed ; slight traces of frontal suture above 
 nasion. 
 
 2. Peabody Museum, 38046. Adult male. Sutures open ; teeth 
 moderately worn. Left zygomatic bone broken, Calvarium. The skull 
 
 Fig. 27.— Chinook. (Peabody lluseum, Cambridge, 38,946.) 
 
 is flattened in the same way as the foregoing. Sutures rather simple. 
 A small Wormian bone in the lambda, others near both asteria. The 
 superciliary ridges are strongly developed ; the temporal lines short and 
 
) lower rim 
 are small. 
 
 l)ure above 
 
 ten ; teeth 
 The skull 
 
 5.) 
 
 r simple, 
 ■ia. The 
 )hort and 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTEHN TRIBES OF CANADA. 99 
 
 indistinct. A trace of a double frontal suture extends from the nasion 
 
 Mastoid processes large, incisure mastoidejB deep. The pars basilaiS is 
 vnde, the condyes far apart, much curved. The stylofd pro^ ' are 
 large. The palate is high but flat-roofed. Teeth largo ; ^reSon of 
 
 Fio. 28.-Chinook. (Peabody Museum. Cambridge. Mass., 38m C.) 
 
 second left incisor. On both sides very large exostoses in ears. Alveolar 
 arch rounded^ Juga alveolaria large. Fo.?s» caniua) deep. Nofe large 
 Nasal bones 30 mm. long, with many foramina. Cross.section of nose roimd' 
 Prenasal foss«. Septum asymmetrical. Edges of orbits overhanging 
 3. Peabody Museum, 6782. Child. Pars basilaris lost ; right side of 
 
 Fio. 29.— Chinook. (Peabody Museum, Cambridge, Mass., No. 6782.) 
 
 sujJSe* ^SnZ'.. ^J""", ''^. '^r? ^^^^""'^ ' ^^«P «'^^^' ^'^^^^ coronal 
 suture. Sutures simple ; frontal suture persistent. On inner side of 
 
 7a 
 

 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 \ 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 1 ; 
 
 1 
 
 
 ; 
 
 
 
 
 . ;' 
 
 % 
 
 \ 
 
 ".I M ' 
 
 % 
 
 •1' 
 
 1 .' s .■ 
 
 100 
 
 HEPORT — 1890. 
 
 frontal bono deep deprossions of convolutions of brain. Squama occipi- 
 talis ellipsoidal. Palate very uneven. First and second molars developed, 
 first dentition. Sutnra incisiva open. Nose flat, lower edge rounded 
 
 Fio 30.— Chinook. (Poabooy ^luscuni, Cambridge, Mass., No. 0782, ) 
 
 T 
 
 On the left side a small epipteric bone and a small frontal process of the 
 temporal bone, which remains, however, (5 mm. distant from the frontnl 
 bone. 
 
 4. Cox Island. Adult male. Flattened from obelion to inion, 
 
 Fig. 31.— Cox Island, 
 
 Sutures open, simple. Wormian bones in right coronal suture. Pore- 
 head flat ; Huporciliary ridges moderately developed. Pterion depressed. 
 
 li 4i ' 
 
ON IHK NOKTH-WESiTLUN TJUUL,^ OF CANADA. 
 
 lama oncipi. 
 s developed, 
 ?e rounded 
 
 G782.) 
 
 cess of the 
 Hie frontnl 
 
 to in ion, 
 
 e. Fore- 
 lepressed, 
 
 
 lOi 
 
 bquama occipitalis low and flat. Inci.suiw niastoideiu deei.. Alveolar 
 arch round; palate arched. Teeth niodrratoly worn. Fucial l,oucs 
 Jioavy. Knot ot none Hal, narrow. Lower rini of no.sc .sharp. Lower 
 
 Fk; 
 
 -L'lix Islanil. 
 
 jaw heavy; incisura seniieircularis small. Large epipteric bone on right 
 
 side 
 
 5. May's Place (Thksiwi). Adult female. Saj^ittal and coronal 
 butures partly synostosed. fekull artiticially lengthened. Hutures com- 
 
 Fig. ;^3.— MuvV Placf. 
 
 plicated, Squama occipitalis very high. Base of skull flat. Alveolar 
 arch parabolical, iiairow. Nose high ; cross-section of nasal bones arched. 
 Lower edge of nose sharp. Foramina infraorbitalia double. Slight trace 
 
 
102 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 ■I 
 
 t 
 
 I % 
 
 
 of frontal suture near glabella. On right side large processus frontalis 
 of temporal bone, separating the sphenoid from the parietal bone. 
 
 Fig 34.— May's I'lace. 
 
 6. Bull Harbour. The cranium has all the characteristics of a male, 
 although the excessive elongation ia said to be practised on females 
 only. The bones ai'e thick, the whole crrnium largo and heavily built. 
 
 Fig. ;55. 
 
 I 
 
 Sutures very simple, but a few Worniian bones are found in the right 
 coronal suture. The teeth are well worn, the lower parts of the coronal 
 
 I 
 
ON THE NOHTH-WKSTERN TUIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 10.1 
 
 isus frontalis 
 )ono. 
 
 of a male, 
 m females 
 ivily built. 
 
 .siitui-c synostosed. Tlie frontiil bono is long and narrow. Suporciliary 
 ndges hirgc. Doable temporal lines well developed. Depi-ensioii all 
 iiround (he cranmiu behind the coronal suture. E.vostosi.s at obebou. 
 
 Fu;. ;{<).— liiill Harbour, No. 'JU. 
 
 Protuberantia oeeipitalis very large. Squama oceipitalis narrow, high. 
 Foramen magnum small ; condyles small ; mastoid process large. Fnei- 
 sura mastoidea of right side small. Nose very high and narrow; lower 
 edge sharp. Orbits large. 
 
 It seems that the lateral compression of the cranium affects also the 
 face, as the indices of the upper face and of the nose show. 
 
 LINGUISTICS. 
 KWAKIUTL. 
 
 . he following notes ohservations on the lloiltsuk' and Kwakiull dinlccts of 
 tins .'^tock are contained. The former wore obtained in the years 1888 and 188') 
 Irom a number of men wlio visited Victoria. The latter are d(!rive<l from (•(illoctinns 
 made at Hope Island and Alert Hay, 188(5; Victoria, 1SS8; and Alert l!av, 188;t. 
 I give only sucb parts somewbat fuller in wliicli niv conclusiDiis diUVr from tbo^e of 
 tlie Uev. Alfred J. Hall, whose notes on tlie j.n-ammarof the Kwakiiitl lanu'iia-c wi-rc 
 pnblisbed in tlir •Transaction> of tliu Royal Society of Canada," 18««, >.ec. ii! K. in 
 tlie following cbapler means Kwakiiitl dialect : 11. moans llc'illstik- dialect. 
 
 ho right 
 i coronal 
 
 / 
 
 Phonetics. 
 
 ro/fW.v: a, •■;. e, i;, i, o, u. 
 
 Cotmmnts : b, p ; w ; m ; gy, ka ; g, k ; g . k' ; q, Q ; v, II : d. t, n ; s, ts ; 
 (c, tc) ; 1 ; dl, tl ; li. 
 
 There is a strong tendency to eliminaliou of vowels in the Uciltsuk- dialect. 
 
t« 
 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 104 
 
 iii;rf)UT— 181)0. 
 
 The surds iiinl sonants arc (litlicnlt to distinguish. S and ^.s have frequently a slight 
 touch of the (■ and ^■, the teeth being kept apart and the articulation being post- 
 alveolar. I spell hero kii in preference to A//, as this soniid — the anterior iinguo- 
 palatal sound —i> almost always strongly exploded. It i> the sound described by 
 Ml. Hall as ' the croaking of the raven.' 
 
 All sound> occur as iiutial soun<ls. Tiicre In a remarkable ditfereiice Hetwcen the 
 two dialects regarding iiiiiial combinations of consonants. Among ai^proximately 
 120i» words of th(! K'.vakiutl dialect I found the following beginning with more than 
 one consonant : 
 
 /.vy.t/.v, trousers. 
 kii'fj/ii/,-, crow. 
 
 ij/i, my, but also qKn. 
 fnk'iilx, obsidian (?). 
 
 In the lleiiisuk' dialect the following combinations of consonants were found to 
 begin words : 
 
 -'H 
 
 ks 
 
 k-ks 
 
 kuk 
 
 11 m 
 
 (,k 
 
 mky 
 
 sq 
 
 tk- 
 
 Ilk 
 
 k-kil 
 
 knql 
 
 
 qt 
 
 
 ss 
 
 
 f.lky 
 
 kp 
 
 klip 
 
 
 qtl 
 
 
 Slls 
 
 tqk- 
 tqs 
 
 tlk- 
 
 tlH 
 
 k's 
 
 kllsk- 
 
 
 
 
 
 Iqtl 
 
 tlHs 
 
 k-t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tHt 
 
 tlq 
 
 k'tS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tsk- 
 tsq 
 
 tss 
 
 tlqlk 
 
 It is of iinpoiiancc to note that these combinations occur rarely, and that they 
 evidently originated through elimination of vowels. The following examples, taken 
 from both the lleiltsuk- and ivwakiutl dialects, will prove this fact: 
 
 Hciltsuk'. 
 to .speak (man), lif/ua'la ( = man's voice), 
 eye, /r/w. 
 
 k'l'i/n'xit. 
 
 ytJiijids. 
 xqain. 
 
 tQUif. 
 
 tlliur-'g. 
 tlltoa'nr. 
 
 All the combinations are such as are likely to originate through elimination of 
 vowels. It is remarkable that the combination fc, st, sp, ice, do not occur. 
 
 Sonants do not occur as terminal sounds. W and hii do not terminate words. 
 The following comViinations arc found to terminate words : 
 
 Iks 
 
 widower, 
 
 bark, 
 
 grouse, 
 
 Chinook canoe, 
 
 to jump, 
 
 bow, 
 
 old woman. 
 
 Kwakiutl. 
 hi:gua'la (hiTkuK, men). 
 k'a'yalfs. 
 k'eliyd'sit. 
 qa'k'um. 
 nuThouh. 
 DK'qcm. 
 fu'q'tiit. 
 tlii'kuis. 
 tlaJiotl'nr. 
 
 kk 
 kk 
 
 .,k 
 
 kiik 
 
 Ik 
 
 sk 
 
 tsk 
 
 ntk 
 
 k-k- 
 
 Ik' 
 
 nk' 
 
 tsk- 
 
 tk' 
 
 tlk' 
 
 nq 
 
 mkii 
 nkn 
 qskH 
 
 mp 
 
 mil 
 
 msH 
 
 k's 
 qs, pqs 
 
 Is 
 
 ms 
 
 ns 
 
 Is, uts. Its 
 
 qt 
 k'Ql 
 
 mt 
 nt 
 st, qst 
 
 Grammaticai- Notes. 
 
 TlIK NOUN AND THK ADJECTIVE. 
 
 The noun iias im iiiural, but a di.stributive, which is mostly formed by reduplica- 
 tion, cpenlhesis, or diieresis : 
 
 man, hrj/tn'i'mim, K. 11. a deer, Iri'i'mPla, H. 
 
 two men mnlfi'k' h luj ud' hh in , K. a group of deer, hcnrri'nirlit, II. 
 
 iiitllo'iinis l)i:<iu(Tniiiii, II. a stone, fr'xi-.m, K. II. 
 
 a group of iiR'n, lirhnjiifi'num, K, II. a heap of stones, fi't'asinii, K. II. 
 
 \n\ 
 
itiily a slight 
 being post- 
 erior linguo- 
 described by 
 
 between the 
 iproximatcly 
 h more than 
 
 ire found to 
 
 Ilk 
 
 tlky 
 
 tlk- 
 
 tlH 
 tlHs 
 (Iq 
 llqlk- 
 
 1 tliat they 
 iple.s, taken 
 
 en). 
 
 ON THE iNORTH-WESTEKN TUIBBS OF CANADA. 
 
 106 
 
 aiiiation of f. 
 
 late words. 
 
 t 
 , qst 
 
 •cduj)lica- 
 
 II. 
 
 i. H. 
 
 When the noun is used as a verb corresponding to our noiui with verbum sub- 
 t<tantivum the distributive may be used for forniing the plural. 
 
 I am a smoker, i/n't/jiini/i, K. naqphnoiiiui^ II. 
 
 we (inci.) arc smokers, in' iioqiiiahits, K. iiaanqjiisiius, II. 
 wc (excl.) arc Europeans. k-'omiixVoanttavA hoi'l, oiini^i'oni,tk\ II 
 
 The plural of adjectives witii tlic verbum sul)stantiviiin is inimed in llic .simc way, 
 dead, tli:!, pi. tlrtli:!, K. 
 sick, is'i:qk((', pi. fifr'f.s'n/jtf/, K. tUiqini'ld, 1>1. tl'>tl>-iij[iio' l<l, ii. 
 
 'Jlic plural of the verb is formed in the .same way (.see p. 1 II ). 
 The genitive is expressed by the preposition /.v, whicli >cr\c^ also to c<'iinccl llic 
 adjective with the following noun : 
 
 Na'ntsc's child, qonn't is yantm',, H. 
 a large country, tS'ki/as is tstcnust, H, 
 
 NITMEKALS. 
 
 K. 
 
 1, nKm. 
 
 2, matl. 
 
 3, yutq. 
 
 4, raft. 
 
 5, sky 'a. 
 
 6, k-atla'. 
 
 7, atlibrr. 
 
 8, matlguanatl. 
 ft, na'nEma. 
 
 10, lastu. 
 
 1 1, nE'mayu. 
 
 12, ma'tlagyu. 
 
 13, yii'tqwagyu. 
 
 14, mu'agju. 
 
 15, sky'a'gyu. 
 
 16, k'atla'gyu. 
 
 17, at lib ft 'agy ft. 
 
 18, matlguanatlagyu. 
 in, na'nEmagyft. 
 
 20, niatlsKmgyustau, 
 
 21, nanEmkala, 
 
 22, ma'tlaala. 
 
 23, yfttqaa'la, 
 24, 
 
 25, 
 
 80, yutqsEmgyuslau. 
 
 31, yfttqsBmgyustau hlmi.>?a nLui 
 
 r>o, 
 
 ()0, 
 
 70, 
 
 80, 
 
 90, 
 
 100, la'kint or nEmpEnya'gi, 
 200, matl pEnya'gi. 
 
 C'AKDINAL NVMUEKS. 
 
 U. 
 
 mEn. 
 
 matl. 
 
 yutq. 
 
 mu. 
 
 Hky'a. 
 
 k'atla . 
 
 matlaau's. 
 
 yu'tquaus. 
 
 ma'mEnc. 
 
 ai'ky'as. 
 
 riEne,egyu. 
 
 mala'gyu. 
 
 yutoa'gj-ft. 
 
 mua'gyu. 
 
 sky'a'gyu, 
 
 k-atla'gyft. 
 
 matlaau'sgyft. 
 
 yutquau'sgyu, 
 
 mamEnc'agyu. 
 
 masE'mkosteyo nr niasEmkiiifltt ua, 
 
 mEne'k-aola. 
 
 raatlau'la. 
 
 yutqao'la. 
 
 mok'oao'la. 
 
 sky'ak'ao'la. 
 
 yutqsuk. 
 
 yutqsuk gyigyi mKnu'k'. 
 
 mok'suk. 
 
 sky'A'ksuk. 
 
 k-atlai'nsuk. 
 
 matso'ukaus. 
 
 yutqsftkaus. 
 
 ma'mEnElisu'kua. 
 
 o'jiBnKstais. 
 
 matlpEnltstais, 
 
 loqsEmH'it, 
 
 1,000, lO'qsEmH'it. 
 
 It appears that in the Kwakiutl dialect eight and nine are formed from two and 
 one respectively, being two and one less than tin. In the llciltsiik- dmlect .seven 
 and eight arc formed from two and three, as is the case in most languages of Piritisli 
 Columbia. Nine i.< derivcnl from one. The inversion of the consonants in the Words 
 for ' one ' {nn-.n .iUd /*kw) is \ery curious. 
 
 The numerals take sutfixes which denote the objects counted. Besides the cla.,s- 
 sullixes for animate beinga, round, long, Hal objects, days, fathoms, tlio numerals 
 
 1 )| 
 
106 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 il 
 
 may lake an) of the noun suffixes (sec p. Ilii). Tlie llev. A. J. Ilall lia.s given a 
 tew rlasse> in tlie Kwakiutl dialect on pp. HH and (iH of liis j^ranini;u. Here are a few 
 classes taken from llie llciltsiik- dialect : 
 
 One 
 
 Um 
 
 Th no 
 
 Animate . 
 
 IJoniid 
 
 l.onp 
 
 Klal .... 
 
 Day .... 
 
 Kailioni 
 
 (iroupcd loj;':ihei 
 
 GlOU})S of ol)j('Cl.- 
 
 Filled cup 
 Empty cup 
 Full liox . 
 
 Empty box (..>ee louud) 
 Loaded canoe 
 Canoe with creu 
 Togetiier on Vjcacli 
 Together in liou.se \i . 
 
 viy.no' t 
 die' II sh' II III 
 mi:' iiti<'iilr 
 mimti/Kii' 
 ojnnr'iiiils 
 I'l'p'i'.nku 
 
 it,i:mfsmo'fs'ii// 
 
 miitijtid'/.a, 
 
 III 1:111/ 1 III' 
 
 mi.nxliaivii'la 
 
 nil '11 lit 17 III 
 
 mjcnfii'ak'e' 
 
 mji'nlii'ak'iii 
 
 iiiili'/i'i'/,' 
 
 niii'sEiii 
 
 ind'ta'ali' 
 
 ilii'illqsil 
 
 mil// ji'i'iu'-'qiiIs 
 
 mil///)' 1:11 hi 
 
 liul't/dll/l 
 
 inn/l/bino/n'iitl 
 iiii'i/l'iiq/lii'lii 
 )iii'i'//\in//fi 
 mii'ifKinfilfi 
 miTtniii 
 viil'tsah-r' 
 mii't^'alrlit 
 mil' a I IK 
 maa'/'i/l 
 
 iju/nh' 
 
 ijfi/ijsi-m 
 
 yfi'/ /s'li/r 
 
 i/i'i/q.fii' 
 
 i/ii/'//> iiii'ijiil-* 
 
 i/iitijl>'i:iikll 
 
 ipi'/oii/l 
 
 i/ri/qfKiilo'/.s'ii// 
 
 i/i'i/i/Z/ii'lil 
 
 i/v'/i//li' 
 
 yiidisi iiii'ilii 
 
 yfifif/Em 
 
 i/fifii(s'ak'f' 
 
 iivtntg'nli'la 
 
 It appear.-^ from these examples that the number of cla.^.scs. is unlimited. 
 are simply compound.s of numcr"Is and the noun-sutfixes. 
 
 .)RDiNAL Numbers, 
 
 at first, ijya'ln'it, II. 
 
 They 
 
 the first, gyil'la, H. 
 the second, at/' if, II. 
 the third, rvaiuVkifa, II. 
 the last, n'ald'qtlP, H. 
 
 NraiEHAL Advekbs. 
 once, ('I'jitcitHit, H. four times, mojn'nHif. 
 
 twice, i>u7t/j)i:'niiit, H. five timcis, .iki/'ajiE'nHif. 
 
 three times, ijutqpE'iiHit, 11. ten times, Mitldjin'iiuit. 
 
 PRONOUN. 
 
 Personal Pronoun. 
 
 The per.'ional pronoun in the Kwakiutl dialect is very ditiicult to understand. 
 There are two forms, but I cannot explain tlieir separate use. It seems that only 
 one form occurs in the Heiltsuk- dialect : 
 
 K. 
 
 nil' gun, i/in. 
 ,10', yfifl. 
 
 I, 
 
 thou, 
 
 he, 
 
 we (incl.), no'giuints, i/inin. 
 
 we (excl.), nd'guaniiq, gi'iivq. 
 
 you, soqilii'q, yiddaqd't/ . 
 
 me, gijCi qi:n. 
 thee, KT>t. 
 
 us, gyd'qEnts. 
 us, gyd'qi-niiq. 
 
 H. 
 
 no'gua. 
 Irqsii. 
 
 iidgua'nff. 
 
 nrigna'ntk*. 
 
 Iraclisoii'ea. 
 
 It is remarkable that while in Heiltsuk* the plural of the .second person is formed 
 by reduplication, in the Kwakiutl dialect, the sutHx -ddq is used fortius purpose. We 
 shall see later on that the same dilferenee is found in the inilection of the verb, it 
 seems that the steiu of the second person is .s*'). I have not given the third persons, 
 as they seem to be rather demonstrative pronouns. 
 
 In order to explain the use of the two separate forms in the Kwakiutl dialect 1 
 give a series of examples : 
 
 I .' yin.' (in reply to, They say ;,ou stole it, 
 also to the question. Who .shall do it ?) 
 
 it is I, noguai:m. 
 
 I, m'l'gua (in answer to the ques- 
 tion, Who is going to do it ?) 
 
 I, gilt (Shall he do it .' No, I). 
 
ON THE NORTIt-WB.«TERN TllIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 107 
 
 I will gu, luyuatl Idtl. 
 Is tliat thou .' tfi'o / 
 thou, tO'inn (in reply to: 
 
 said so 7) 
 we (will do if), nogiianinj. 
 
 Who 
 
 thou, j/utl (in answer to, Who shall do it f 
 1 / Yes, thou I) 
 
 DUMONHTUATIVK PKONOUN. 
 
 Tiip Kwakiutl lnnLruii.t,'c distinguishes four lueatioii> of objects which take the 
 pla('c of dornonst rat ive pronouns. The location i^ expressed by ^utlixcs, whicli are 
 used Willi all classes of words. They are the following : 
 
 K. 
 
 Near speaker, — ikn. 
 
 Near person addressed, — iiq. 
 Distant, visible, —ii. 
 
 Distant, invisible, — e'. 
 
 II. 
 
 -"I- 
 
 -a (e). 
 —ats ieif). 
 
 For instance : 
 
 K. H. 
 
 he (near speaker) is my father, b/e'mnit d'mpikii. )u',<hj au'mi). 
 
 he (near person addressed) is my father, i/iVtiu^n ompuq, /iZ-'nuq au'inp. 
 
 he (absent, visible) is my father, hn'mKii o'ntpP. nr'sr au'mj>. 
 
 he (ai^sent, invisible) is my father, hci'iuEn d'mjn''. iiP'srfa nn'mp. 
 
 The following is the independent demonstrative pronoun in tiie Kwakiutl dialect : 
 
 he (near speaker), (f>jat. 
 
 he (near person addressed), yut. 
 
 he (absent, visible and invisible), hit. 
 
 they (near speaker), (jyinjdiioq. 
 
 they (near person addressed), yu'qdaoq. 
 
 they (absent, visible and invisible), hiqdaoq. 
 
 Possessive Pronoun. 
 
 The adjective possessive pronoun is derived from the article-pronoun. Fn the 
 Kwakiutl dialect it has a number of separate forms, formed by one of the letters 
 q, s, U, and the termination derived from the article-pronoun. It seems that q stands 
 for the subject and object, s and ts for the geniti' e and instrumentals. It is, how- 
 ever, far from certain that this explanation is correct. The terminations are in the 
 Kwakiutl dialect : 
 
 Singular, l,st person, ii. 
 
 2nd „ —is. 
 „ 3rd „ —s. 
 
 Plural, 1st person, inclusive, ntx. 
 ,, „ „ exclusive, nnq. 
 ,, 2nd ,, — is daoq. 
 „ 3rd ,, — daoqs. 
 
 Generally the location of the object possessed, and in the third person also that 
 of the possessor, is expressed by means of the demonstrative terminations. The 
 latter is placed between tiie character of tiie pronoun {q, s, ta) and its termination, 
 and is also affixed to the noun. The pronouns of the tirst person seem to lake the 
 demonstrative ending for ' near the speaker' only. 
 
 ,, „ ^, I m_ .■ 1 Our (imlu- (Uirfexclu- ,. . ,, 
 
 Myf.thur .Thy father ,ive)tathcr .sive ) fath.T , ^ ""'• '^'^t''" , 
 
 ■i~^ 
 
 Near si)cak(>r . (ininn omitihu (ikii n sihii^ • '■ .•' ., '•'?, .', ^ ■> , •; , 
 
 Near person ad- 1 ., - f <iint>i (iiniui qini 
 
 dressed \ \ ' i i i i t ^ „ nipi/q n nipuq tisdiivqiiq 
 
 ' s ^ ., .1 ^ )■ 11 ft Kdnoijn 
 
 \ 11 mjja (I mpa J ' ' 
 
 ' ., ., y a a sdaoqe 
 
 Absent, visible qin ompd 
 Absunt.invisiblei qi-n o'mj)i'' 
 
 q n gn 
 
 q li'sr 
 
 J ql-nfs 
 
 mj)f 
 
 ' (is, thy father ; ovip is a compound of the stem li (from ami) and -Enij? desig- 
 nating relationship. Tiie latter evidently drops out in the second person. 
 
108 
 
 UBi'our — 1890. 
 
 ■ 
 
 11! ; 
 
 flin fiithcr 
 
 near Kpcsiker jnt'iir |"r-oii mlclri-^c'l 
 
 illi-rllt, vUhll" 
 
 Near -piaki T ijiiiky^ n'mpkijes i/iriHye n' niiili/ai""/ tili/l!/'' o'm/ihDan 
 
 Nrar |X'l-iili iii|- 'jiijii'i ii'iiipiiiifikij iil'im/ o'lUjjmix I l/ii/iiii ii'miiii'/si 
 
 All-out, liivi-'il)li' , iiii/ 'I'liijH .'iiii iii'i nm/>iiiiit \ iiiij u'lnpixi 
 
 iilp-uiit, ilivlsililf 
 
 yi'lkfh- d'lnphjaft' 
 iji''!"'/ "'//ly '"/.«•' 
 
 11(1/ u'lnpusi 
 iji'l I'l' mpff.' 
 
 Their fiithi'i' i> fcjniied corix'sjjoiiiliiij^ly : iii<ihiir omjitlooiilnics Sic. 
 Tlic! nso ol" the various I'ornis of tlie po>Ncs>ivo pronoun ii illustnitcl l>y llie 
 luUowing exampk'.s :— 
 
 lirFjii n'(l'Udi;m qn o'mpii^ dial is what they said to my I'alhur (literally, that 
 
 the word to my I'atlier). 
 hv^Km n-ri'tldi:m si:ii o'm/w, tiial is wlial my I'alher said (t lial is ray father's word) . 
 fiPhut ml'tUlKh'tl fsH. o'mjxi, thai i- what my Fallier will say. 
 hPhvi ■wdtldinntl c/m o'mjxi or Aw' i/n d'liipa, ihni is what Ihey will >ay to uiy father . 
 ;/i/il'ko(r sK)t o' mjio, my father's house. 
 qii. o'mpa </i/i''fi:Ir, my father took il. 
 fs'd tsicn tltifrnfinq la qn o'mjni, gicc my hat to my father. 
 ts\i qn tlfi-^mtlnij, give to my hat ! 
 
 fajir'iKntla qiiiskij'm I'lhyriinikii, I broke this with my hammer here. 
 f'ap 'e'tKUtla q'jijin likiju'ynkn, 1 broke my hammer here. 
 qn o'mpa aqe't tm tltK'nitla, my father took my hat (away). 
 
 qti d'mpaaqufUi^ot j "■ I tltK'mtlc, my father took my liat (but left it here). 
 
 When the sentence contains an interrogative or demonstrative pronoun the po>- 
 sessive pronoun is generally attached to them. 
 
 wVdi:ti likyu'iji'i .' where i> my hammer? iji/i')tiKn fiki/<l'i/i'i, here is my hammer. 
 w7'MB/t ()'w(^>rt .•■ where is my father ? ijyi'a'mijyin ompky ne'kya, my father 
 
 here said this. 
 lu''inE)i o'mpci nr'hya, my (ab.sent) fat her 
 
 said it. 
 
 The pronoun may be affixed to the noun as well : 
 
 he (absent ) i.s thy father, hii'i-.m. O'mjtr and /id'r.m ri'ur. 
 
 he (ab.sent) is your father, hdKina n'mitilonqin' and hiiKvi n'sdooqnr. 
 
 It is remarkable that the possessive .mUHx maybe given to the verb as well, a,t 
 leapt in imperative forms : 
 
 give me thy hat (near thee), yr'lfdn fits' mtluq. 
 
 Substantive Possessive 1'rosoun. 
 Mine ' Thine 
 
 Near .speaker . . . 
 Near person addressed 
 Absent, visible . . . 
 Absent, invisible . . 
 
 Ours 
 
 Ours 
 
 (inclusive) (exclusive) 
 
 Yours 
 
 no'sihy hd's'ihy no'KKiitfif/y tidHi:nuqliii hd'sdooql-y 
 
 ild'nilq fld'silq no' i^Klltnliq Hd'sKmiqllq /lo'sdiioqUq 
 
 no'sr '. ho'sP \ nd'ni-Jitsr lui'sr.nuqr hd'sda.oqr 
 
 no'sc' : hu'se I tiD'siudsc' nu'si:nuqc' ho'sdaoqti' 
 
 Near speaker 
 , Near jjerson ad- 
 j dressed 
 ! Absent, visiljle 
 I Absent, invisible 
 
 near .spenker 
 
 Jioxf/i/tVkihi 
 hdi^d quqlfihn 
 
 hani-'lrikii 
 hdsP'k'ihu 
 
 His 
 
 near jiersou 
 addressed 
 
 hottkyu'k'iiq 
 haxd'quak'Uq 
 
 haad'k'itq 
 hasdhuq 
 
 absent, visiblr al).sout, invisible ! 
 
 haskyu'lr 
 ha^d'qoak: 
 
 liast-'t 
 liasc'iik 
 
 hd^kyd'k'r 
 hagn'qoak'r 
 
 hoKl-'ke 
 kasc'jik'r 
 
 u 
 
 n 
 
ON TIFF NOnrir-WESTfRN TRinFS OF PANADA. 
 
 109 
 
 Theifs* is formed in I ho -aiiic way : htuxfaoijl-t/tTH/tii iic. 
 
 The pofscHsivc pronoun of iho |[.'ih-iuk dialect i-. far less complicated. 
 
 AD.IKCT1VK POS-*ES^IVK rilONOI'N. 
 
 Sintyular, 1st person, kn — 
 •Jiid „ {o).^ 
 
 „ '■'•n\ .. — ;» 
 
 IMural, 1st person (incl), k-antn — 
 „ 1>I „ (oxcl.). Iriinfk* 
 ,, 2nd „ - (o)s 1 noun redu- 
 
 «, :^rd „ — ,v j plicated. 
 
 We lia\'c to disf inguisii in this dialect aUo the four locations of near to -.poaker, 
 near person addressed, visible, invisible. 
 
 M., 4-0*;,-.. vi,,. f .i,„. O""" (inclusive) Our (exclusive) ,. ,, ., 
 y father Ihy father i t„ther lather i our lather 
 
 Near speaker . Jcsnii'ni/tJnr'av'mphjx hunifsdii' mpkii Iftinfhov'mpliu oUni' mpkyg 
 Near person fr.ii(ii'in/ii/i/ iii/'iiiin/iiu/s k'ontMii'iiijii/ij kmilhiiu' iiijniij nimi' ihptiqH 
 
 addressed ' 
 
 Absent, visible h'Miu'mixi un'mj/dn IfontKtDi' mpa kanthau'iiqia tiiaii'mpos 
 Ahscn{,\n\\s\b\e k'sau'mj/atsaii'nijMtsrKi kautsan' m [latg k'anthan' mjiati( aian'mpntiias 
 
 His father 
 
 neiir person 
 
 near .peak..r ';;,^,^-;|" nhseut. visible 
 
 ab.ient, 
 invisible 
 
 Near speaker 
 Near person addressed 
 Absent, visible 
 Absent, invisible 
 
 (iii'mkjiashii oit'mjiiiqtihy iiii'nijuiskii aii'iiijxifsltii 
 
 (Ill'llllilldSllq i/l)'llljliuj.tllq ini'llljKlSUq Utl' inpolaUii 
 
 ! au'itikljiixr (III' nijniqar llll' llipiiKr illl'lil/xifxr 
 
 I an' inhjan'itK au'mpuqitlts , au'mpaa'its au' mputs'itx 
 
 Thc'if filth II' is formed in the same way from tiie reduplicated noun: iiion'in- 
 kijnakii. 
 
 Substantive Possessive Pronoun. 
 
 Ours 
 
 Mine j Thine j (inclusive) Ou»^ (exclusive) Your> 
 
 Near speaker . . ' nr'sohi h-auno'hi'iu-so'k-Kntgkn^^ lu-sd'k-inth'kit IrPk-iV mdku 
 
 , Near person ad- ; nr's^riq k-aiiso'q \ ni-xo'k'juitsuq . nPso'k-Kutkuq k-Pk-nvsd'q 
 dressed j i ' 
 
 \k-mixf 
 
 \ Absent, visible 
 
 nciio'k'Kiitsv < >u\id'k'i:ntkP k-pk-d'iis5 
 
 Absent, invisible .1 nP'i^Ptx k-nvuP'ts \7iP,<>o'k-j-:nfsPts nesd'k'i:nfkPfs k-Pk'tVusPts 
 
 his (ab.sent, vi.sible), axo'k'oP. 
 ,, ( ,, , invisible), asPt'koPts. 
 
 theirs (absent, visible) aPsit'k'oP. 
 „ ( ,, , invisible), aPso'k-oPtii. 
 
 THE VERB. 
 Intransitive Verb. 
 
 KvmMuil Dialect. 
 
 1. Noun or Adjeciire ivitk verbum substantivun 
 
 smoker, ua'rj2:>i!^. 
 
 1st person singular, 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 3rd ,, „ near speaker, 
 
 ua qjnsin 
 
 va'qpits. 
 
 ua'qpialka. 
 

 no 
 
 iiKroiiT — 189(:. 
 
 3rd person sinffidar, near person addressed, tia'tj/iinii/. 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 * II t" 
 
 )j ■ ii 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 • 1 
 
 
 'H ' M ' 
 
 "•1 i 
 
 3rd 
 
 3rd 
 
 1st 
 
 1st 
 
 '2nd 
 
 3rd 
 
 3rd 
 
 3rd 
 
 3rd 
 
 |iliiral 
 
 absent, visible, 
 jibsfiit, iiivisiblf, 
 iiiL'i., 
 
 t'Xcl., 
 
 I/O t/jimr. 
 iin'ij jiitirK. 
 
 Ill'lllKjJiiKKhtM. 
 Il'>'llili/ /nHKHIIfJ, 
 
 uhifi'ij/nfu. 
 near speukcr, iili;ti'(//)i!i7ku. 
 
 near person luMressed, vliiti'(/pisii,/. 
 absent, visil>lu, iihtti'i/jiixr. 
 
 absent, invisible, u'mn'qjtUiK 
 
 U. Jntransithf Vcrh. 
 to eat, hamd'p. 
 
 Ist person 
 
 singiilai 
 
 » 
 
 
 hamil'pr.H. 
 
 2nd ., 
 
 II 
 
 
 
 /lumd'jiKK. 
 
 3rd .. 
 
 II 
 
 near speaker. 
 
 
 huiiiu'jnkii. 
 
 ard ,. 
 
 11 
 
 near person adilre 
 
 5sed, 
 
 humd'jntq. 
 
 3rd ,. 
 
 »i 
 
 absent, visible. 
 
 
 humti'pc 
 
 3rd .. 
 
 ti 
 
 absent, invisible. 
 
 
 haiml'jjv'. 
 
 1st „ 
 
 plural, 
 
 inch. 
 
 
 hamii'jiF.nts. 
 
 1st ., 
 
 ,, 
 
 cxcl., 
 
 
 hanuVpEnuq. 
 
 2nd ,. 
 
 ,, 
 
 
 
 hamiVpdaoqx. 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 <i 
 
 near speaker, 
 
 
 Itamu'jnlaoq'ikn 
 
 3rd .. 
 
 «, 
 
 near person addresse<l. 
 
 hami'i'jxluoq'uq. 
 
 3rd ., 
 
 ,, 
 
 absent, visible, 
 
 
 havul'jxlaoq'r. 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 tt 
 
 absent, invisible, 
 
 
 hamii'iHlaoq'is. 
 
 1st person sing., nd'k-anDgua. 
 
 2nd 
 3rd' 
 
 Iloilhuh' Dialect. 
 
 1. A'ouH or Adji'ctive vitfi verbum substantivum. 
 
 smoker, ua'qpis. 
 
 va qpisnoyua. 
 
 va'qpitsii. 
 absent, visible, na'qjiitsP. 
 incl. naau'qj/isKiits. 
 
 excl. vaaii'qpisKHtk'. 
 
 vaau'qpitso. 
 absent, visible, vaau'qpisc. 
 
 2. Intransitive Verb. 
 
 to drink, n&'k'j. 
 
 1st person plural, incl., ndh-a'nts. 
 
 1st ,, „ Qxc\.y nd k- a' ntk^. 
 
 2nd „ „ a^-d'stla and nend'k-as^,. 
 
 3rd' „ „ 7idk-d'se and tiend'k'afB. 
 
 1st person 
 
 singular, 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 M 
 
 3rd „ ' 
 
 It 
 
 1st „ 
 
 plural, 
 
 l8t „ 
 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 „ a 
 
 'dk'a'so. 
 'dk'd'se. 
 
 I do not enter ito the tenses of the verb, as the material at my disposal is not 
 
 sufficient to bring c ■ clearly the nice distinctions between the numerous tenses (see 
 
 Hall, I.e. p. 79 ff.). turn at once to the transitive verb with incorporated object, 
 
 which has been tret id very fragmentarily by Mr. Hall. 
 
 ' As the various forms of the third person are formed in the same way as those 
 of the possessive pronouns, &c., they have been omitted here, 
 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 in 
 
 Kioakintf Dialect. 
 to kill, llKld'mas. 
 
 Sin^riiliir 
 
 Object 
 
 Ist pors. sinp. 
 
 2nd „ „ 
 
 l^rd „ ..' 
 
 Isi pers. plur. incl. 
 
 1st ,, „ excl. 
 
 i-'ncl „ 
 
 3rcl „ ,.' 
 
 Ut. ptTSOIl 
 
 — EHfllttf 
 
 — Eiiflohiku 
 
 —daoqrnthitl 
 —duDf/ h'.ntfnliVni 
 
 2ti(l ncr>on 
 — as ij:,1'ijt:ji 
 — anT'hihit 
 —(IK ijijiViiEnuq 
 
 .tnl pers. nfurnpenkor 
 
 — /A'h' ginV<ih.ii 
 —ikiiiifi' 
 
 — ki/il/i -'ill ' 
 
 — ?/.// i/i/iTi/iittn 
 - Iku !/!/('i''/i uiiij 
 
 — (fnoqikyiitl 
 
 — ilaoqliijiVk'ikii 
 
 Plural 
 
 1st pors. incl. , l.st person excl, ' 2n(l person 
 
 1st pers. sing. 
 2nd „ 
 Srd „ .,' 
 1st „ plur. 
 
 incl. 
 Ist pers. plur. 
 
 excl. 
 2nd pers. ,, 
 
 3rd „ „' 
 
 — — —daoqas ffi/d'qFti 
 
 — — K»iiqntl — 
 
 — icntmklliH — Knuqiiak'lkn —daoqasck'tku 
 
 -daoqax ijya'qK- 
 /luq" 
 
 —duoqasEklkn ' 
 
 3rd person 
 
 — daoqikii' i/i/u'qun 
 —daoq'ikyufl'^ 
 — daoqki/il'klkH* 
 tlitlKld maxdtioqikH 
 
 gi/d'qKiifs '■ 
 tlPtl t: hi ma sda oq i kn 
 
 i/i/u'qKnuq 
 tlctlKla/nas 
 
 dcoqikyvtl 
 tlctlEldmns- 
 
 daoqkyd' klku* 
 
 The characters of the tenses : —nil for the past and —tl for the future follow tlie 
 stem of the verb : 
 
 we are going to kill thee, tlEl^lmasfiEnu'qiltl. 
 we have killed tliec, tlrlumas'ittlEnn'qutl. 
 
 The transitive verb may be inflected bj' means of auxiliary verbs, in which case the 
 latter are treated like an intran.sitive verb, while the verbal .stem retains the incor- 
 porated pronoun or is followed by the pronominal object. 
 
 I have killed thee, himEn tlEWmaHutl. 
 
 I have killed him (near me), Ieiueii tlEla'mask'ika. 
 thou hast killed mo. lEK'mx th-ld'mas gyd'qEn. 
 
 ' The form for ' person near speaker ' is here given ; for ' near addressed person ' 
 the ending is — uq instead of — jAm; for absent, visible, — 5; for absent, invisible, 
 — iE or e'. 
 
 '-' Also instead of the plural form with — daoq\i'\i\i reduplication: tli-tlEUl'ma- 
 iase'k'i\H. 
 
 ' Near person addressed : — vqtltl; absent, — Pfitl. 
 
 ♦ The various forms corresponding to the locations of subject and object correspond 
 to those of the substantive possessive ,irononn, third person (see p. 108). 
 
 '•• These forms have the same ending as that with the object in 3rd (viz. 2nd) person 
 singular, but is reduplicated : tUtlEldmasEntsak'V ka, tlStlKld'masEfivqufi, and tletls- 
 Id'vianBHvqvakV ku. 
 
 " Or tlttlElu' mmtax gyd'qEmtq. 
 
 ' Or, if it does not appear from the context that the object is plural : tlHlEldma- 
 msikVkii. The forms of the subject, second pei'soii singular, object, third person 
 plural, and subject, second person plural, object, third person singular and plural are 
 identical ; it must be decided from the context what is meant. 
 
 * In this and the following form the verb must be reduplicated. 
 
112 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 !ii 
 
 r^i 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 'U< 
 
 • 4i . 
 
 Hi'iltsnk Dialect. 
 to kill, Elqa (— stands foi' the singula!*, Elqa : = for the plural, aiElqa). 
 
 Object 
 
 1st person singular 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 3rd ., „ ' 
 
 1st „ plural incl. 
 
 1st .. „ excl. 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 :5rd „ 
 
 
 Sin^^ular 
 
 
 1st person 
 
 2n(l person 
 
 3r(l person ^ 
 
 — niiyiitla 
 
 — )u>'yualfkii ' 
 
 = no'ffutla 
 = niifpialfkii 
 
 - srmtUi 
 
 - St'itJ/ll 
 
 = iiontVntfh' 
 
 — soJrl'H 
 
 - hyinfla 
 
 — ki/fitla 
 
 1 
 
 - hjintlints 
 
 — hjintlinth' 
 =■ xtlsoskhi'* 
 
 1 
 
 Object 
 
 Plural 
 
 Ist person incl. 
 
 Ist person excl. 
 
 2nd person 
 = santla 
 = S(ifckn 
 = srmtlidth 
 = soJrJ/ii 
 
 .Srd person - 
 
 1st person sing. 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 1st „ plur. inol. 
 
 1st „ ., excl. 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 3r<l „ „ ' 
 
 — wKntslflai 
 = mEntshl'n 
 
 — mEnthitla 
 
 — mKntMu 
 
 =8 ViEnthitla 
 = )nEntkkH 
 
 = kyintla 
 
 - h'fitla 
 
 1 
 = hjintlints 
 =:hjintlinth 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 The characters of tlie tenses — ainte for the past and — tl for the future follow 
 the stem of the verb. 
 
 Th(? i)rincipal differences between the inflexions of the transitive verbs in the two 
 dialects are found in the incorporation of the object first person in the verb in the 
 Heiltsuk- dialect and the constant reduplication of the stem in the same dialect. 
 The latter evidently disappeared in the Kwakiutl dialect through the use of the 
 plural —dtioq. Auxiliary verbs are used in the Heiltsuk" in the same way as in the 
 Kwakiutl. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Kwahiitl. 
 eat ! (singular) huma'p ! 
 let us eat ! haniliVtatsEnIs! * 
 
 cat I (plu- al) lu-'map ! 
 
 mntsulr. 
 ha'msEiis! * 
 haia'msEHSEnts ! 
 haia'msKHS ! 
 
 Huiltsuk- 
 
 let him (near speaker) eat ! JMWSEmr'hhh I 
 
 let him (near speaker, food near speaker) eat 1 humsi:hsi-'lrhi ! 
 let him (food, absent, visible) eat I hamsEmv k-eh ! 
 
 let him (absent, visible) eat ! hamsEBSe'U' ! 
 
 let him (absent, invisible) eat I hamsEmeWts! 
 
 ' The third person location near speaker is given. The other forms are formed 
 from the corresponding endings : near person addressed, —-noguahvq; absent, visible, 
 —noguak-P ; absent, invisible, — ti^yuak-Ms. 
 
 " Near person addressed, — vqintla; absent, visible, — Hntla ; absent, invisible, 
 — Ptifintla. 
 
 3 Also = kyntlu. aiElijastho'sP he (absent, visible) will kill you. This form 
 appears rather dcabtfol. 
 
 * Formed from another derivative of the Btem Jia?n, to eat, viz., kamn' it ; while 
 the others are derived from huma'p. 
 
 ' From ha'msa. 
 
 ■',' i 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 113 
 
 Kwftkiutl 
 
 Ilciltsuk- 
 
 ral, aiElqa). 
 
 n\ person « 
 
 f>/i»tla 
 '{i/f'tla 
 
 ? 
 •yintrnits 
 'l/intUntk' 
 
 •1 
 
 ird person -' 
 
 hymtla 
 
 ki'vtla 
 ? 
 
 hjintlints 
 hjintlhifh 
 
 7 
 
 ? 
 
 tnre follow 
 
 in the two 
 t-erb in the 
 me dialect. 
 
 use of the 
 r as in the 
 
 ih/ 
 
 •e formed 
 t, visible, 
 
 invisible, 
 
 lis form 
 
 t ; while 
 
 sfrilio (singular) 
 
 strike (plural) 
 
 kill (singular) 
 
 n»e ! miiri'tas ffi/d'qEH, 
 
 him! miiiVtaskiku 
 
 (near speaker) 
 ns ! miit'Vtas gyd'qEniiq 
 them ' same as singular 
 
 iiiiii'7tiiida'oqelus ElqniiSF.n'tla aii:lqaiiSE'ntla 
 
 ijfld'qF.n 
 
 m lii"itin(la'oqelaK- ElqaHSc'k' ikii a lElqaiisc'li'iht 
 
 Iriliit ka. 
 
 — ElqaNSE'ntUntk' aiElqausE' utUntk* 
 
 — a'lEiqaiisii'kihi air.lqaiis?'k iku 
 
 kill (plural) 
 
 let me feed thee I 
 let me feed you I 
 let us feed thee ! 
 let us strike him, them 
 
 let us kill him ! 
 let us kill them I 
 
 hanujy'dnlasEntliltl , K. 
 ha mayllada oqJai' EUtlittl , K. 
 liamtp/dald'ssnoq tUl, K. 
 mliufasEiitsak', K. 
 
 ElqamK'utsk'P, H. 
 au'.lqamE' ntd'-T- , H. 
 
 An interrogative exists in both dialects, but it bar. not become quite clear to me : 
 
 dost thou eat ? hamm'sa? H. 
 
 does he (near pers. addr.) eat 1 hamm'i'iiqtga ? H, 
 do you eat ? ha'm'mms? IT. 
 
 One of the most important characteristics of the verb is that, whenever it is 
 accompanied by an adverb, the latter is inflected, not the verb : 
 
 I do not eat, kycd'snogua ha'msa, H. 
 
 he did not(l) say(2) so, kyi's7kii(l) n/}'kyaQ2), K, 
 
 In the case of transitive verbs the adverb takes the endinj;- corresponding to the 
 intransitive verb, the verb retains the incorporated fibiect. Thus the adverb 
 assumes the character of an auxiliary verb. In some cases the object is treated in 
 the same way : 
 
 we see (2) all (1) of them, ilyya'mEntk^ (1) doJroJa'k'ar (2), H. 
 
 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 Mr. Hall does not enter into this subject very fully, and the following notes 
 will, for this reason, be welcome. The analysis of words of the Kwakiutl language 
 is very ea'-y. A great number of nouns occur in two separate forms, independent 
 and dependent. Whenever such a noun occurs in connection with another word it 
 is incorporated in the latter. So far as I am awaro, only suffixes occur in Kwakiutl. 
 A number of these nouns signify classes, for instance tree, female. Locative suffixes 
 are found in very great numbers. Adjectives and verbs are also incorporated. I 
 give a list, a- anged alphabetically: 
 
 about, here and 
 there 
 
 along 
 
 ~v/,7;/,/,> K. 
 
 — titdfa, K. 
 
 tWkvUUa, moving about. 
 
 It'i'hnUla., camping here and there. 
 
 along round object ; composed with — nfds, side 
 
 of — , k-iV tsmitsEntala ,\ to walk along round 
 
 object, 
 along flat object : composed with — Euq, edge 
 
 of — , k-d'tm-nqEnft'iln, to walk along flat 
 
 ()l)J0Ct. 
 
 amd'qiihiil, always giving away blankets. 
 haqhakn'lntl, always eating human tlosh. 
 nKq'ak-d'la, to pull out of full box, K. (/.f., 
 
 from among. 
 md'h-ak'a, to throw among, H. 
 oQSddpr', upper arm, K. H. 
 fVPtiddpt'', skin of upper arm, IT 
 k'vk'ittsWjt?, skin of upper arms, H. 
 
 ' The — la in this and several others is probably a verbal suffix. 
 
 8 H G 
 
 always 
 
 —n, K. 
 
 among 
 
 —ak-a, K. H. 
 
 arm, upper 
 
 —^dpe, K. H. 
 
t&*-* 
 
 I \ I 
 
 m 
 
 ' -i 
 
 ^1 ■ I • 
 
 114 
 
 arouivl 
 
 back 
 
 beach 
 
 —is, K. H. 
 
 
 —Hi, K. H 
 
 body 
 
 - «/^ IT. 
 
 bottom of 
 
 — q><fc, K. 
 
 breast 
 
 —qfi', M. 
 — j>oP, K. 
 
 to call 
 
 — jjoa, H. 
 —qa, K. 
 
 in canoe 
 
 — qsa, K. 
 
 
 -qs, H. 
 
 capable of 
 
 
 to take care of 
 
 — qsil{7, K. 
 
 corner 
 
 — 7u; K. 
 
 countrj', outside 
 house 
 
 — «S, — I'S, 
 
 down 
 
 —nlif, 11. 
 — qa, K. H. 
 
 down river 
 oar 
 
 oarth 
 pdge 
 
 —tuxFhi, K. H 
 —clfdr, K. 
 — ato/i, H. 
 — gyihs, K. II. 
 —nqe, K. H. 
 
 expert 
 
 —l)h, K. n. 
 -ilk; K. H. 
 
 eye 
 
 face 
 
 to do something 
 with face 
 
 — qstoT', K. 
 — qstou, H. 
 — /•;/«tt/', K. 
 — Kmv, H. 
 
 farthest 
 lire 
 
 fraita, K. 
 -qtlala, K. H 
 
 foot 
 
 - ,<;/s5, K. H. 
 
 forehead 
 t'riiL,nnent 
 
 - t-'ioa, H. 
 --tsi:s, K, 
 
 REPORT —1890. 
 
 — t'.'i/rt, K. H. hd'Ui'»tala, to walk all around, K. 
 toc'stala, to go all around, H, 
 owr'sta, rim. 
 — ihja, K. H. aivVhya, back, K. 
 
 dtikame'loja, back, H. ( = round out.side of back) 
 
 miHThycnt, K., to strike hack. 
 
 iB'qois, wide beach, K. 
 
 ya'k-ois, driftwood on beach, H. 
 
 I'igyixpaVis, sandspit on beach, K. {ailiu, ^ood, 
 
 --in beach [compound /'!/'/_(/'/« = sand], —pa 
 
 point, — Ax beach.). Cf. country. 
 ohona', body, II. 
 
 tl'iqmnid'ht, sick all over body, 11. 
 o'qstP, bottom of a thing, K. 
 I- qti'qie, notch of armw ( -nutcii in bottom), H. 
 Oiw'p, breast, K. 
 liiV h'' dpdc , breastbone, K. 
 tsiu'pdii, breastbone, II. 
 Qud'qioiaqii)), I call .1 canoe's name, i.e., want 
 
 to bu}' a canoe. 
 g'tM'qmlu, to sit down in canoe {gva, to sit ; 
 
 — qsa, canoe ; — la, verb), 
 laqsi/t, to load canoe (/«, to go ; — qs, in canoe ; 
 
 —lit, v.a.). 
 tWqts'p.g, seer (^diiiq — to see). 
 k-d'tvafES, with good power of hearing. 
 mu'muqsila, taking care of salmon weirs. 
 giia'nt, to sit down in corner. 
 
 hsg'u's, man in woods, in country, K. 
 th'iau's, to stand outside, H. 
 nu'nahiis, world, K. 
 — liSyK. hPstalis, vownd. the world ( — ?sta, around; lis, 
 
 country), K. 
 iui'i'lis, land where always wind, II. Cf. beach. 
 lu'qa, to go down, II. 
 IvCi'tseqala, to go down, K. 
 latii'sela, to go down river in canoe, K. 
 ts'oid'tola, ear is sick, K. 
 wal'sudEtoa', both ears, H. 
 h'i'yijilis, to land, K. H. (^la, to go.) 
 amai'nqP, j'oungest child, K. («?««, small; — nqP, 
 
 edge = smallest.) 
 mrtlfa'nqaut, to throw along, II. (mdlra, to 
 
 throw; — iiqr, edge; —nt, v.a..) 
 luVk'/iis, drunkard, K. H. 
 niVk-ilk-, drunkard, K. H. 
 lulk-i'lk-in, I drink often, K. 
 i'ikmoqstoP, with pretty eyes, K. 
 hd'haqntoa. eyelashes, H. {hdp hair.) 
 nir'inaotlKmar, two faces, K. 
 k'li'xmr, skin of face, H. 
 
 l.il'ikyaki:»iu'if, to look up, K. (dikya, above; 
 —k-Kiii, face; —ii'it, verb suffix), see: outside 
 of round thing. 
 tiikyak-aiia, farthest above, K. 
 hiTnatlohi, kettle on tire, K. H. 
 h' I' qtlala, much rtre, K. 
 k'ttiVkoaitxitsT', toes, H. 
 oqtlakxi'tsr, heel, K. 
 aikya'oe, pretty ( = g()od forehead), K. 
 thlkr'ioa, headring of cedar-bark, U. 
 Qiii'i'kinuitsEs, fragment of canoe. 
 
 I 
 
 
WiP 
 
 ssnswn 
 
 K. 
 
 itside of back) 
 
 L. (aikn, gfood, 
 = sancl], ~j,a 
 ry. 
 
 in bottom), H. 
 
 me, i.e., want 
 
 (i'w«, to sit ; 
 
 -ys, in canoe ; 
 
 mng. 
 weirs. 
 
 around; /15, 
 . Cf. beach, 
 
 imall; ~ fitjP, 
 {mt'ik'u, to 
 
 r.) 
 
 'qia, above; 
 ee; outside 
 
 \.. 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 115 
 
 to go to look for 
 
 — alala, K. 
 
 group 
 
 — qsEm, K. 
 
 hand 
 
 — tsana, K. 
 
 
 — skyanu, H. 
 
 liead 
 
 —h-ea, H. 
 
 head covering 
 
 —mtl, K. II. 
 
 hindpart 
 
 —qtlee, K. H. 
 
 in 
 
 — fsd, tsoa, K. 11 
 
 instrument 
 
 — ayo, K. H. 
 
 interior of liouse 
 
 —itl, K. 11. 
 
 interior of man 
 
 —7.<, K. H. 
 
 large 
 
 — tse, K. 
 
 
 — ^i/d'oB, H. 
 
 to make 
 
 —y'yila, K. 
 
 
 —ila, K. H. 
 
 motion 
 
 — nahila, K. H. 
 
 mouth 
 
 — aqstS, K. 
 
 
 —qta'B, H. 
 
 inside of mouth 
 
 — I'tlqd'oS, K. 
 
 mouth of river 
 
 — dwae, K. 
 
 neck 
 
 — qa'oi', K. 
 
 
 — qd'oa, H. 
 
 noise 
 
 — kyala, K. H. 
 
 
 —ala, K. H. 
 
 nose 
 
 -~ltlj}a, K. H. 
 
 on (roof, chair) 
 
 —latlB (/a), H. 
 
 on flat object 
 
 — tsue, K. 
 
 
 —tsoa, H. 
 
 on a long object 
 
 — hyena, K. H. 
 
 opposite 
 
 —hjTd, K. 
 
 other side 
 
 — xut, K. 
 
 out of — 
 
 —otltsoa, K. H. 
 
 outside of house 
 
 — aquc, H. 
 
 outside, in woods 
 
 -iLs, K. H. 
 
 participle piissive 
 
 — so, K. H. 
 
 penis 
 
 — mk-ao, K. 
 
 people 
 
 -i-noq, K. H. 
 
 — /Cy, H. 
 — ahi, K. 
 
 place of, house of — an, K. H. 
 
 place where some- 
 thing is regularly 
 done — ticniK, K, 
 
 place of, probably 
 hollow receptacle — aixd, K. H. 
 
 point —pa, K. H. 
 
 pole — z^'*', K. H. 
 
 to pretend 
 
 —hfttla, K. 
 
 purpose 
 
 — luima, K. 
 
 to reach 
 
 —k-a, K. H. 
 
 real 
 
 — kyaso, K. 
 
 refuse 
 
 ~ inM, K. 
 
 
 — aoa, H. 
 
 hd'natlaia'la, to go to buy a gun. 
 
 gyv'qsum, a group of chiefs. 
 
 k-F.mqo'tltsiiiia, loft hand. 
 
 h'vqskyana, hand cut off. 
 
 tVo'kk-rn, barelieaded. 
 
 yiqn'mtl, mask ( = dancing head covering). 
 
 uoqtWe, stern of canoe, K. 
 
 wala'qtlPk-x, youngest daughter, H. ( — ks, fem ) 
 
 M'tsoa, to enter, H. (Ja, to go.) 
 
 fs'i-iitmla, headache, K. ( = inside sick.) 
 
 si'/cayo, paddle, K. 
 
 qtu'yo, knife, H. 
 
 yoa'lil, to sit in house, K. H. 
 
 3t''ills, snake in man, K. 
 
 yyokfsc, large house, K. 
 
 t'u'sKmkyii'oL-, large stone, H. (see : real) 
 
 hu'mggUa, to feed. 
 
 hd'iatlila; to mend, K. 
 
 kt'inahila, to go straight ahead, H. 
 
 hd'paqstu, beard, K. 
 
 hdpqta'e, beard, H. 
 
 TvajidtlqaoB, saliva (water inside mouth), K. 
 
 (see neck.) 
 
 tliasl'n'ae, mouth of river with clover roots. 
 
 uqu'oe, K., neck. 
 
 tValv qd'oa, H., neckring of cedar-bark. 
 
 k'dmHSluakyala, H., white man's language. 
 
 hgua'la, K. H., to speak (man) ( = man's noise). 
 
 kkya'la, K. H., to speak (female) ( = woman's 
 noise). 
 
 a'lk'itlpa, H., to bleed from nose. 
 
 gua'latlEla, to sit on chair. 
 
 kuVtSEltnue, to walk on a plank. 
 
 tO'tsoa, to walk on a plank, 
 
 gud'kyena, to sit on a long object. 
 
 nF.qkyft'ta, opposite a rocky place {—a, rock). 
 
 k-oc'sut, far away on other side. 
 
 tddtltsoa, H., to jump out of. 
 
 giia'qsi-, H., to sit outside the house. 
 
 d'ajn'ls, K., to flood ground. 
 
 hd'inakyalasd, K., the hated one. 
 
 mdqsak-d'o, K., with tied penis (a name oc- 
 curring in a tradition). 
 
 tlfisk''B'7ioq, K., people of the ocean. 
 
 Did'q'i'noq, K., killer whale ( = secretly pursuing 
 people). 
 
 fia'lq'Piioq, H., killer whale ( = murderer). 
 
 K-fih-di'tq, H., people of K-o'k-a. 
 Tlu'tldKik-oa Iti, K., people of the ocean. 
 
 gy'fi'lotait, K., porpoise place. 
 
 k-ui'hmfKms, K., feasting place, 
 
 iiu:koa'tsP, H., mortar. 
 
 ai'knj)(i, K., sharp = good pointed. 
 
 /»o'qt)ik-, K., heraldic column ( = pole to which 
 
 [blankets] are tied). 
 ml'qahutla, to pretend to sleep. 
 h'dk'othVinima, to come to learn. 
 lii'kui, K., to go past. 
 hKguo'numkyaso, a real man. 
 hd'mfit, rest of food. 
 hdmasd'iia, rest of food. 
 
 8a 
 
 i 
 
li.-* 
 
 '•• \ 
 
 si 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 116 HEPOIIT— 1890. 
 
 an'iiijj, H., fatlier. 
 
 o'niitlnnr, check = niflp of face. 
 
 l/ydJ;jjitu, pi. gyohHEnl'q, smi;U house. 
 
 (I flit up, small house. 
 
 ua'qji'aJa, .smell of .smoke. 
 
 (jHu'la, H., to sit on .stone. 
 
 iiololfKmai'-, nd'hknmT:, K., tlie greatest fool. 
 
 ffl/ilu'flPy to steal on water, to go stealing iu 
 
 canoe, K. 
 aiJiiij)'a, sweet = good taste. 
 JaqsO'oa, to go through — 
 tl'iK'nq, H., time of potlatch. 
 haqiil', having lost one tootli (-notch in 
 
 teeth). 
 fluqoauxia, toothache. 
 f/ua'qtoii, to sit on top of a thing. 
 
 n'v'hija?, II., not quite full (/iv, negation). 
 
 bii'aqinnis, maple ( = leaf tree). 
 
 fod'Dvt, H., to walk under. 
 
 tl'K^ustd'la, to climb a mountain. 
 
 d'oqsusti'' iva, to look up. 
 
 tVopmt, H., it is ebb tide. 
 
 nd'k-'it, K., to drink. 
 
 tlukoa'la, IT., to be .sick. 
 
 td'Jnimt, H., to cover face with blanket. 
 
 la'qsfit, H., to load canoe. 
 
 nu'k'eqst, K., thirsty. 
 
 tu'qsta, H., to jump into water. 
 
 whnniq'd'jiois, H., bottom of sea (~nqe, edge ; 
 — apoa, under ; — is, in water). 
 
 tliilvkas, niece. 
 
 d'taka, pet daughter. 
 
 Bl'hilqulaqsEm, Bilqula woman (stem redupli- 
 cated). 
 
 mEJifi'yak'i, sister. 
 
 NOOTKA. 
 
 The following notes have been derived from material collected in 1888 in 
 Victoria from two Tlao'kath, from other material collected 188J) in Alberni, prin- 
 cipally from a half-blood Indian named Wa'tf;. Bishop N. J. Lemmens, of Victoria, 
 B.C., had the great kindness to give mo the ])ronouns and the inflection of the verb 
 in the Tlao'kath dialect. A nunibov of suffixes wore obtained from a manuscriiit nf 
 the Rev. Fatlier Brabant, wlio is said to bo thoroughly' conversant with the language. 
 The dialect treated here is the Ts'icift'ath, which differs somewliat from the nortiiern 
 di.alects. Incidentally, remarks on the Tlao'kath are given. 
 
 relationship 
 
 -wyy, H. K. 
 
 •ide of round thing 
 
 —nutl, K, 
 
 small 
 
 —J} it 11, plur. 
 
 
 — ntKni-'q, K 
 
 
 ~ui; H. 
 
 smell 
 
 —p'ala, K. 11. 
 
 stone 
 
 —a, K. 11. 
 
 superlative 
 
 — Iram?, K. H. 
 
 surface of water 
 
 —tl?, K. H. 
 
 taste 
 
 — /<7, K. H. 
 
 through 
 
 — qiu'oa, II. 
 
 time of — 
 
 —Kfiq, K. H. 
 
 tooth 
 
 — jiP, K. 
 
 
 — usia, H. 
 
 top 
 
 —qto'P, K. 
 
 top of box, bucket, 
 
 
 &c. 
 
 —Jii/aS, K. H. 
 
 tree 
 
 — mis, K. 
 
 under 
 
 —a'poa, K. H. 
 
 upward 
 
 — vxtd (la), K. 
 
 
 — mtitPwa, H. 
 
 verbal suffixes 
 
 -Hit, K. H. 
 
 
 -it, K. H. 
 
 
 —la, K. H. 
 
 verbum activum 
 
 -t, K. H. 
 
 
 —vt, K. H. 
 
 to want 
 
 —Pqst, K. H. 
 
 water 
 
 —xta, K. H. 
 
 in water 
 
 —h, K. H. 
 
 woman 
 
 — ka, — k-ag, K. 
 
 
 — aqsEm, — Jis, H 
 
 Phonetics. 
 
 I 
 
 Voivch : 
 Consonants : 
 
 a. 
 
 p; 
 
 e, 
 
 w; 
 
 
 g : y, n ; t, n ; s, ts 
 
 1, o, o, u. 
 >, ky; k; k-, q; 
 (c, to); tl; h. 
 
 s and ts partake of the character of e and tc, as in Kwakiutl, and it is doubtful 
 whether they can be considered sopar.ate sounds. All consonant.- occur as initial 
 sounds. No combination of consonants occur in the beginning of words. The 
 following terminal combinations were observed : 
 
 kh k-s 
 
 dk hs • kt k-tl 
 
 tok qs pt qtl 
 
 tk tk' th ms mts ct nitl 
 
 ntl 
 
y^i'^WmwWmmim 
 
 dN THE NORTH-WK.STEKN tRlBE,< OF CANADA. 
 
 117 
 
 ouse. 
 
 oalcst fool. 
 xo stealing in 
 
 ( ^ notch in 
 
 ;:ation). 
 
 nket. 
 
 -nqe, edge ; 
 em rediipli- 
 
 in 1888 in 
 berni, prin- 
 of Victoriii, 
 of the verb 
 uuscrijit of 
 L' languagi'. 
 le nortligiii 
 
 ;s doubtful 
 • as initial 
 rds. The 
 
 
 The terminal /// and ;t are sonant und somewhat lengthened. In this dialect 
 takes generally the place of r/ of the northern dialects. 
 
 Grammatical Notes. 
 
 THE NOUN AND THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 The noun li;i> a lingular and plural. The hdler i> luruied liy the suilix —»>i:na. 
 In <i lew case.s it is formed by leduplieation, epenthesi.^, ur di.Tresit>. 
 
 lire, i'lii/i ; pi. Vt'inik an<l i'iii/,'iiu:iin. 
 
 house, niahtv; pi. niuina'htr. 
 
 village, ma'iitl; pi. ma'mcnltl. 
 
 common man, md'dcint ; pi. ninhVxfi''niin. 
 
 child, ti(' iia ; pi. ta't iii'iit ( - -ix, diminutive). 
 
 van<K,fcfi'ji(itfi\ pi. ffCj/iTj/iiti and to'iiKift'iiu.nn. 
 
 man, /iv'/.v ; pi. hft'ox. 
 
 man, tcii'kvj> ; pi. tviV Imprn . 
 
 island, teu'ok ; pi. tcl'tcdh. 
 
 woman, tlo'tsnui ; pi. f lot, win". 
 
 chief, tctl'main \ pi. ic\i.tca'mata. 
 
 I am not quite certain whether tlii^ is really a plural or whctlirr it is rather a 
 distributive. In a number of case.- I found the singular form ap[ilied where we should 
 expect the plural ; /'.c, all the men, tcM'to tct^'kuji. My impression is that -micnir 
 i.s a real plural, while tlie amplilied stem is actually a distributive. The exceptions 
 given above may be explained by assuming that the distributive is used instead 
 of the plural. This opinion is supportetl by the fact tluit any nouti when it is clearly 
 distributive has a form corresponding to the exceptions given above. This becomes 
 clear in compounds of parts of the body that are double. We lind, for instance, in 
 compounds witli -n>/k, hand : 
 
 l)ones of hands, lia.ha' mufiiuku'in ; 
 flesh of hands, fs'isk-tsi'sniiku'in ; 
 second tingers, tet€'itsntiku'm\ 
 skin of hand, tiitu'k'oakniiku'm ; 
 strong-handed, na'cndknuk 
 
 from ho.'mftf, bone. 
 „ ts'i'skmis, tlesh. 
 „ ta'ia, elder brother. 
 „ tii'toak', skin, 
 
 , na'cuk, strong. 
 The plural of adjectives with the verbum suUstantivum is formed in the ;nime 
 
 way 
 
 sick, te'ltl; 
 long, id'k- ; 
 large, Ik ; 
 
 (See p. 119, Inflection of the Verb.) 
 
 pi. tatc'iti 
 ,, ia'iak. 
 „ u'h. 
 
 1 nup. 
 
 2 ii'tla. 
 
 S k-a'tst,sa. 
 
 1 mo. 
 
 5 su'tca. 
 
 (> no'po. 
 
 7 a'tlpn. 
 
 8 a'tlakutl. 
 
 1 man, ts'o'wak. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 Cardinal Numbers. 
 
 1) ts'o'wakutl. 
 
 10 hai'a. 
 
 1 1 hai'u io ts'o'wak. 
 20 tsa'k-eits. 
 
 ;{() tsa'kcits ic hai'u. 
 10 alle'k-. 
 (U) k-atstscVk'. 
 80 moye'k-. 
 
 100 sfitc'e'k-. 
 120 no'p'ok'. 
 110 a'tlpok-. 
 KiO a'tlakutlek-. 
 180 ts'o'wakutle'k- 
 200 hai'uk-. 
 1000 sutcek'pKtuk- 
 
 The .sy.-'tem of numerals is (piinary vigesimal. Eight and nine are rcsj)ectively 
 two and one less than ten. 
 
 The numerals take suflixes whlcii denote the ol)jects counted. Besides the class 
 sullixes for round, long, Hat objects, days, fathoms, the numerals may take any of the 
 noun and verbal sullixes (>ee ji. 121). The numerals are all derived from the same 
 stems, the sole exception being one. ts'r>'>i'(il\ which is ni)plie(l to men only. It is a 
 curious fact that in counting olijects other than men derivatives of f^'o'ivrk are uaed 
 for nine and twenty. 
 
 III 
 
 < i| 
 
m 
 
 '•■ ! 
 
 118 
 
 REPORT— 1890. 
 
 
 — 
 
 One 
 
 Two 
 
 round thing ; animate 
 
 nu'pk'amitl 
 
 u'tlak'amitl 
 
 long 
 
 
 nn'i)ts'ak' 
 
 a'tlats'ak" 
 
 fiat 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 (lay 
 
 
 nu'ptcitl 
 
 a'tlatictl 
 
 fathom 
 
 
 nu'pie'l 
 
 iVtlietl 
 
 span 
 
 
 nu'pi: 
 
 fi'tlpitanOull 
 
 l^roup of objects 
 
 { 
 
 nu'ptakak' 
 nupta'k-amitl 
 
 ~— 
 
 basket, bag 
 
 
 nuplitak 
 
 a'tlahtak 
 
 round thing in caime 
 
 
 nupk'a'mias 
 
 atlak-a'mia» 
 
 round thing on beach 
 
 
 nupk'a'miis 
 
 citlaka'miis 
 
 &c. 
 
 
 
 
 the first, u'wi. 
 
 tlw second, o'pitcas. 
 
 Ordinal Ncmbeks. 
 
 the third, o'hsnutl. 
 the lastf oa'ktlc. 
 
 Numeral Adverbs. 
 oucc, iiu'j/it. twice, ii'tlpit. three timc^, ta'tstKo/rit. 
 
 Distributive Numbers. 
 
 one to each, tmtm'wah, nunu'p. four to each, md'nio. 
 
 two to each, ud'tla. Hve to each, susutc'a', 
 
 three to each, kaka'tstao. six to each, nw^^mo. 
 
 Distributive numerals arc abo formed from compound numerals : 
 one long thing to each, niihiiq/tsa'k-. 
 
 THE PRONOUN. 
 
 Personal Pronoun. 
 
 Kayokatq dialect. 
 
 I, se'i/a. 
 thou, so'ua. 
 he ((»/«). 
 we, ne'tva, 
 you, sl'wa. 
 they {ots). 
 
 me, sc'tcHtl. 
 thee, su'titl. 
 
 us, ne'liuitl. 
 to you, nB'haitl. 
 
 we, nO'tva. 
 
 us, iid'haitl. 
 
 In a few cases I find another personal pronoun derived from the article pronoun 
 (see the Verb, p. 119): 
 
 we, a'nine. you, anc'tso. they, ane'atl. 
 
 Te'etc'im'i'sini'a aiie'tsO matemU'sis, make yourselves ready, you tribes. 
 
 Possessive Pronoun. 
 
 it is mine, xeid'm. 
 
 it is thine, .■^oiid'srits. 
 
 it is his, o't^niil . 
 my, -u. our, -Irhie. 
 
 thy. -r. your, -itli'so. 
 
 it is our>, nrivo'siJi. 
 
 it is yours, sewase'itso. 
 
 it is theirs, ntsmd'atl. 
 his, •ye. Ilieir, -yectl. 
 
 his (absent), -7. their (absent), 'letl. 
 
 In terms of relationsliip the sutli.v; -r/i-.w, forming the term, is omitted in the lir>t 
 anfl second persons of the possessive pronoun : 
 
 father, noive'tso. thy father, ii/)'we. 
 
 my father, iwwhs. his father, ndive'ksoije. 
 
 DEAtONSTKATlVE PrONOUN. 
 
 Wna, hitViv; (Ac'w, Tlaokath). 
 
 that, a'qha ; 
 
 (i/u'is, 
 
 )• 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTEKN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 119 
 
 
 
 lid 
 
 Tliu >tcni hit' is cnmiiOM.d with sutlixes denoting locality to form ilemon.stiiUivi' 
 pronoun*, wliich ;irc vury niunoioiis : 
 
 hitdjioiit, thiit one iindorneatli on lie;icli, 
 hitaliK, tliiil (inu in canue. 
 /lititl, that one in liotise. &c. 
 
 utl 
 
 [Eft 
 
 is 
 
 ifojnt. 
 
 aitL 
 
 le pronoun 
 
 1. 
 es. 
 
 
 , Utl. 
 
 1 the fiivst 
 
 TIIK VKUiJ. 
 Jnijicatui;. 
 
 I'lTaciil 
 
 I !>t pursiin Miigular 
 
 -n<l „ „ 
 
 i :h-fl ,. 
 
 1st ., phnal 
 
 •2na „ 
 
 :trd ,. 
 
 Ii(i-ii' liii'iih 
 
 ll(l-i(kor' ii.f 
 
 JLd-ii'knm 
 
 hll-Kkll'l' !!<■ 
 
 hti- II /,•(>('' Uki'i 
 ha-ii'hniutl 
 
 liii|M'rro('t 
 
 hii-vkUiih 
 
 llil-iikifrUa 
 
 h<i-vkitiiia 
 
 /i(i-u//ifi'nf 
 
 lia-ukitP.'itKo 
 
 hii-iikifdtl 
 
 Pliisfiuam I'ert'ectum 
 
 1st person singular 
 
 2nd ,, „ 
 
 :Srd „ 
 
 1st ., plural 
 
 2nd 
 
 :5rd 
 
 hn-nkEtlitak 
 
 &c. 
 
 FiiHirc 
 ha-uka'Irfl(ih 
 
 He. 
 
 i'niVi-.t 
 
 /iii-ii/. l.'fh'/i 
 ha-iiki tir'it.i 
 
 \c. 
 
 FiUiiniin Kx.iitum 
 
 /la-iika'k'tlifah 
 kc. 
 
 There are four principal tenses, fium which the others are derived: Present, 
 Imperfect, Terfcct, Future. The lirst is derived from the stem ; the second has the 
 character -i7: the third, -i:tl\ the fourth, tiktl. 
 
 In the plural forms the stem of the verb may be amplitied l)y reduplication, 
 direresis, or epenthesis, as the case may be. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1st person plural, hduhieinc and haKakamine, 
 
 2nd „ ,. lui-uhmitso „ hihvalMme'ifito. 
 
 3rd „ ,, ha-u'hmdtl „ han-a'kamautl and hawiVkoma. 
 
 Or, from te'itU sick : 
 
 1st person plural, te if line and tutc'itli' ne. 
 
 Other plurals of verb;, arc : 
 
 wolio \ino\\, ltd 11 i'mhe; \i\. hiVluujimkr. 
 
 to sleep, ira'-ifr ; 
 
 awake, tlti'/iki/ : 
 
 to .•-nceze, fo/i'ilKcit/ ; 
 
 ,, /Ht'i/e. 
 „ tlO'i/iijtlft. 
 ,, frifi'i/i'/faei/L 
 
 When the stem of llic verl> ends with a vowel, m \> Inserted between strni and 
 ending. It mav also be used uft(M' tiie character of tlie iieii'ect -itl. 
 
 not U) see, tctl't>ir. 
 
 I do mil see, ti'a'fnriiiilh. 
 
 we eat, hd ivtikciiii' iic. 
 
 1 have i;aten, lid-iikLllnli ;ind ha-iiki.'tlnidli. 
 
 When the stem ol liie verb ends in j> the latter i> Lransfuruu:d into m when 
 followed by a vowel, except in the ease of tiie perfect ; 
 
 to know, k<7'i/iPtdj>. 1 know, kdmetamd'h. 1 have known, ki(meta/>i:tld'/i. 
 
 The perfect is used frequently where we should expect the [)re^ent tense. The 
 imperfect is used in describing past events. The meaning of the other ten-es nee<ls 
 no explanation. 
 
 \i 
 

 120 
 
 llEPOHT — 1890. 
 
 I 
 
 
 ■i .1- 
 
 
 4 '■ .-' 't= - 
 
 
 ;■ '1' 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 Conditional 
 
 Tlie following forms were obtained from the Rev. Father Nicolai, tlio missionary 
 stationed at AUxTiii : 
 
 I should liavc I should have known, or 
 
 known. I intended to know, 
 
 /.v7 nutapah Hit h . ko m rtojuiqn t ll'to It. 
 
 kc, ice. 
 
 I .should know, 
 l.-t person siniiular : kihurta/in'm/i. 
 2nd „ „ hTmrtcjiii.ir'itli. 
 
 3nl ,, ,, hltiirtapoKiiKi. 
 
 or kdmrtajiosa. 
 1st „ plural kdiiu'faprisiiic. &c. 
 
 J iia.vc obtained none of these forms, but another instead ; the f<irm was obtained 
 in the following sentence : 
 
 if 1 had been well I should have left, wekcahiV initkos nuckd'kitlitk'fs 
 (n'a/id'k, to leave). 
 
 By varying this sentence I obtained the following forms : 
 
 I should have gone, iKdhTkitlitkfs. 
 thou wouldst have gone, ivahukiilitsuk. 
 he would have gone, ivahd'kit'ithn. 
 we should have gone, waha'kitlitkiitc. 
 you would have gone, wahd'kitlitaKuk. 
 they would hu\e gone, wuhukitlkaatl. 
 
 The termination> of this form resemble those of the conditional in the TlaO'kath 
 dialect, which will be found further below. 
 
 SUPl'OfcSlTIOXAL. 
 
 to kill, k'a'qsajj. 
 if I should kill. &c. 
 
 ~ 
 
 Present 
 
 Past 
 
 Future 
 
 Futurum Ex- 
 actum 
 
 1st pers. sing. 
 2nd „ „ 
 3rd „ „ 
 1st ,, plur. 
 2nd „ „ 
 3rd „ „ 
 
 k-aqsapk-u's 
 
 kaqsapko'k 
 
 kaqsapto' 
 
 k'aqsaphu' ne 
 
 k'aqsapk'o'so 
 
 k'aqsaphd'atl 
 
 kaqsamitko's 
 kc. 
 
 kagioiiak'tlk'd's 
 kc. 
 
 kaqsapaktlitko's 
 kc. 
 
 The .suppositional is also used as optative. It seems that in this case it takes a 
 terminal -o. 
 
 I wish I could cat -if 1 could eai, ha-ti'kkuc. 
 I wish thou couldst eat, ha-u'kkokc. kc. 
 
 The .same terminal c was found in a number of cases ; 
 
 if he had been well I should have gone, wekcalui' mitkoc icitlid kitlkes. 
 
 iMPEUATlVb. 
 
 The impcrati\e has a great \arictj' of forms, and I wa.> unable to classify them in 
 any satisfactory way. According to Bishop Lemmens, the subjunctive and impera- 
 tive are distinguished in the Tlao'kath dialect, and similar forms may occur in the 
 Ts'icia'ath. 
 
 The mo-t frequent fijrms are on -7 in the second person singular and -itc in the 
 second person plural. 
 
 eat ! (singular) hn'-ukwi. 
 eat ! (plural) ha'-ukwUc, 
 
 go away I kc'xtcv ; from kc'i. 
 
 drink I (singular) nukcii'. 
 drink ! (plural) luikciitc. 
 
 come here ! tcu koa. 
 
B missionary 
 
 ! known, or 
 
 ■■ to know. 
 atlVtah. 
 
 'as obtained 
 
 tk'r/t 
 
 3 TlaO'kath 
 
 um Ex- 
 turn 
 
 ik'tUtkd's 
 
 :c. 
 
 it takeh a 
 
 .' (hem in 
 I imjiera- 
 ur in the 
 
 'c in the 
 
 1 
 
 ""SfPI 
 
 ON THB NORTH-WKSTERN TRIRE^ OF CANADA. 121 
 
 Relative. 
 The use of the rchilive form will become clear from tlie followinK example : 
 
 I say (1) so C-J), who 1 am (U) sliaman (1). 
 n'amah\\) ted {2) ijntkiUil^yictali- yn{\). 
 
 1st [jcrson singular, i/n/r/nTs. 1st person iiliiral, ijOh liho . 
 
 2nrl „ ,, )iak-h-r'ih. -'iid „ ,, yi'ilrku'sd. 
 
 \\r(\ „ „ t/tilr/rr'i. :\n\ „ „ ifiTk-kt'-'itoC. 
 
 Past, yakittus. Future, iinh-ak'tllrax or ynku'ktfn. 
 
 There are other variations of this form : 
 
 what a shaman (-') I am (1) I k-mnirx (1) ndn'k'yu (•_') ' 
 
 which is inliected in the same way. 
 
 1 believe the foUowinjj; form mu>t be classed here also: 
 
 I know (1) that thou art ("J) a s\M\mimQ\),kama'tamah{\)iiiir;'k{2) rn-tu'tyfi. 
 This form is inliected as follows : 
 
 1st person singular, anv's. 
 2nd ,, „ anc'k. 
 
 IJrd „ „ 
 
 anc 
 
 1st person plural, ani'nt. 
 ,, (tni'sd. 
 ani'toil. 
 
 .'nd 
 :jrd 
 
 The personal pronoun mentioned un \\ J 11' i- e\ idcut ly derived from the same stem. 
 
 iM'KKKOCiATIVi;. 
 
 vsick, tcitl 
 
 1st person singular, tr'itlhas. 
 
 2nd 
 3rd 
 
 tii'itlhak. 
 U'itlha. 
 
 1st person plural, (t'itnn n 
 
 2nd 
 3rd 
 
 fr'itlhnso. 
 tr'iflhoatl. 
 
 Passive. 
 to shake, Id'scitl. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1st person singular, hisciata'h. 
 2nd „ „ hlscintc' its. 
 
 3rd „ „ hl'si'latina. 
 
 1st person plural, hisciati'tic. 
 2nd „ „ hisciatrifsd. 
 
 3rd „ ,, hisciatinaa'tl. 
 
 Imperfect : hiscianitah. 
 
 Perfect : hisciEtlota/i. 
 
 Future : hiscitlali-latah . 
 
 Ful. exact. : hiscitlak-tlanitah . 
 
 Conditional : hisciafosak (according to Rev. Father Verbeck) 
 
 Subjunctive • kisciatlis („„.,) 
 
 The Verb of the Tlao'kath Dialed according to Bishop J. K. Lemmens. 
 
 Indicative. 
 to kill, k'u'qsap. 
 
 Present 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 Perfect 
 
 1st per. sing. I ktiqsaj/s or k'uijsaj/sif 
 
 I 
 
 2nd „ „ i k-aqsapitsk 
 
 3rd „ ,, ' k-aqsapic 
 
 1st „ plnr. k-ciijsajiHir 
 
 2nd ,, ,, k-aqsajntsdc 
 
 3rd ,, ,, k-uqsa/j(aka)ir 
 
 k-i/qsa Di'tts or kaqs(7jil)ifs taqsapatls orj 
 
 k'aqsajiatUic. 
 k-aqsain'itit.^kork'aqso pi ntit.sk 
 
 k'aqsujnntic ! 
 
 k'aqsaminic ' 
 
 k'aqsapintitsuv 
 k'aqsapintic 
 
 ii 
 
 4l 
 
- I 
 
 ill 
 
 M 'i 
 
 122 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 L'ml I'eifcct. l*lii>(|nan!iicTli'ctiiin 
 
 Fiitiiri' 
 
 1st per. sing, ^.f i/Hfi/Hltnifs frtn/xft/iaffinfK /r/u/sfi/mff/lx 
 
 !2iid ,, ,, Irruisii jn'i' mitttgh frrnji*fi/>fif/i»fi/K/; /ratj.ii'jiti/^'f/ifxli 
 
 „ IriKjUd immiih' Irnqsii jxitli iiti(' h'lii/xdjiah'tlir \ 
 
 pliir. /r(iqKKa/i(Tmi/iir IraqKoixitlinhfic fru/jxa/rdfrtlnir j 
 
 ,, ' /rdf/Ka/xiiinfi/xof hiKisa juniiHilitor ffdr/sn/mk'f/ifxoi' 
 
 ,, ! k'fiijm/xhiiitw k'dijsd/ii'midc Iraqmiiahtlh' 
 
 Fiituruni cx/uiiim 
 k dqiidjiak' flint f 
 
 list 
 
 2n.l 
 
 l:ird 
 
 I 
 
 2n'l Condilionul 
 /iatjKii/ii'qaf/infx or .'idi/Kd/ii">j'i w i li 
 
 (.'ONDrriONAL 
 
 ist (,'onilitional 
 l.il i)L'i'.son singular, /••ai/.sd/)fsimi/s 
 2nd per.son singular, h'dqsdiitsinifitsh 
 
 StrpposTTIONAL 
 is identical witii tliat nf tho Ts'tcia'ath dialect. 
 
 .SriUUNCTlVE. 
 lot mo kill. hdqudih'i'qa lot ns kill, knqfnpil' nr 
 
 tlion iiiayest l<ill, k'dqxii/iri'rts you may kill, knqsojn'i'dftn 
 
 be may kill, Irdqsapfi'at they may kill, k-nqxupii'dt 
 
 IMPKRATIVK. 
 
 2nd person singular, k'a'qsaji or k-aqsajieflf' 
 2nd person plural, ?raqs(rj>ic or kaqmpdtlic 
 
 
 
 Relative. 
 
 Past 
 
 
 
 Presoiit 
 
 yah-ix 
 
 ydk-ik 
 
 ydk'H 
 
 ; yak ill c 
 
 . yakvsD 
 
 \ yakei 
 
 Conditional 
 
 1 st per. sing. 
 2iid ,. 
 :iid „ 
 
 i.-t ,, plur. 
 2nd „ „ 
 3rd „ 
 
 ydlroiidtix 
 
 ydkcvtd'tik 
 
 llol-r»id'fr or yakcDid'titk 
 
 yakciiui'tlcinc 
 
 yaki'mo'tilkso 
 
 yakcmO'tc 
 
 yakoxit 
 
 ydh'oxUi 
 
 ijdko'xv or yakfisitrk 
 
 yakosiiii' or yakosecinc 
 
 yakosisO 
 
 yako'se 
 
 Interrogative. 
 dirty, tsicgal. 
 
 rrescnt Past 
 
 ivdwa, to say. 
 
 
 \ 
 
 Past 
 
 1st person singular 
 
 2nd ., 
 
 3rd „ „ 
 
 1st „ plural 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 3rd 
 
 tsicgalhas 
 
 tsicyall' 
 
 txicyalh 
 
 fxicyalhiHC 
 
 fxicgalhui't 
 
 txicyaM 
 
 tsicyalinths 
 
 tsicyal'nitk 
 
 txicgalinth 
 
 tsicyalinthinc 
 
 tsiryalinthxo 
 
 tsicgnl'mth 
 
 ' ivaivnimithai 
 ! ivaivaimitk 
 
 < 
 
 Passivk. 
 to strike, hiscltl. 
 
 
 Present 
 
 \ PllSt 
 
 Future 
 
 Isl person singular 
 
 hixcidtx 
 
 hischiniis 
 
 liixcitlaktldtxh'. 
 
 -'nd „ 
 
 hisciotitxk 
 
 hixvianititxl; 
 
 hix('itlaktldt?ifxk ' 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 hm'idtic 
 
 MscVanit'ic or liiscidtmhuc 
 
 A:c. 
 
 Ist „ plural 
 
 hi.sciateidc 
 
 hhrUinitciiic 
 
 
 lind „ 
 
 hlxciatitxdc 
 
 hixcianititsdc 
 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 hisciatic 
 
 hixciamtic 
 
 
I'l'ijidlrflinfn 
 
 Ill' ijinin/i 
 
 ' II tun 
 lit 
 
 nal 
 
 'Kiitrk 
 fosechic 
 
 ire 
 
 thifxU- I 
 tlutritfJi I 
 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WFSTKUN TKIUKlS oK (ANAPA. 
 
 123 
 
 Futurum nxactum 
 l«t Conditional 
 2nd Conditional 
 
 h'umtlak'tlaaitt 
 
 hiKcifltitimiifsir 
 
 hinciHataliint$ 
 
 S V U.I UN C I'l V I-; I'ASSI V K. 
 
 let mp he >tr»ck (-.-triko me'), hifciix 
 thou inayosl ho struck, hhcii'itsk 
 
 ho may be struck, hi.icir'it 
 
 let u> be struck, hi.ini'in 
 you may be struck, hi,i(ur'ifsfl 
 tlicy may b« struck, hhcir'if 
 
 Active : to strike, fdncitl 
 
 iNnyiTlVE. 
 
 I'assive : to be struck, hhriat 
 
 Participle. 
 
 one killing, kaquipc' one being killed, kaq^npnli 
 
 one having killed, haqsaptskmr one about to kill, kaqgopnnkci 
 
 Bishop Lemmens does not give any detailed information on the transitive verb 
 incorporating thu pronominal object. 1 found tlic following I'nrms in tiie 
 Ts'icia'ath diaioct. The terminations arc suHixcd to tin; verb with its various 
 temporal ch.aracters. In order to simplify matters I give only the terminations: 
 
 Suhject. 
 
 Object 
 
 Singular 
 
 Piuial 
 
 Ist Person 2iiil Person ■ 3rd Pur.-on ' 1st Person ' 2nd Person Srd Person 
 
 1st person singular 
 
 ; 2n(l „ 
 
 , 3r(i „ 
 1st „ plunil 
 ■.'nd „ „ 
 
 ! 3rd „ 
 
 — all so'titl 
 — ii 
 
 I 
 
 — u'ltSES 
 
 —(■•'its 
 —Cits iiC'httl 
 
 — ahse'haitl' 
 
 — utl I — O'it.^atl 
 
 I 
 
 — ata — I— eits6(?) — attihati 
 
 — ate'its —ine so'titl | — — ate'itsatl 
 
 —atic'ina — iiic — c'ltso aniaatl 
 
 — atiiiK I — — O'it,-o nO bctl — atineatl 
 
 — atO'ctso |— iuc.si'liaitl — — ato'etsoatl 
 
 - atKmaa'tll— incatl — e'itsoatl — attmaatl 
 
 Imperative. 
 Subject. 
 
 1 Object 
 
 2ncl person singular 
 
 '2ucl person plural 
 
 ' 1st person, singular 
 
 i 8rd „ 
 
 1st ,, plural 
 3rd „ „ 
 
 — ine 
 — iatl 
 
 — itces 
 —itc 
 — itcine 
 —itc'atl 
 
 Note. — Whenever the verb is accompanied by an adverb the latter may, and in 
 the majority of cases doet;, take the verbal intiections. 
 
 I do not(l) sing (2), ivc'kah nonO'k. 
 
 The looseness of the composition of the verb and its modal and temporal cha- 
 racters and personal terminations is clearly brouirhl into view by this fact. The verb 
 sometimes retains its temporal character, while the adverb takes both temporal 
 character and personal eu"^^': „. 
 
 If I had been well I should have gone, i/i/i'tli/d/i trrhrnha' mitknn ivohn'k'ntl. 
 iiijetlitah, I shoidd have been some time (frum Oyi, some time). 
 Krkcaha', to be well. Suppositional past, 1,-t jjerson singular, wrkcaha'mitk'ot. 
 H'oha'k'atl, having gone, from woha'h to go, to leave. 
 
 DEK1VATIVE3. 
 
 Quotative : — Ko-i'n, TlaO'kath : wa-Vc 
 
 it is said he is sick, teitlwn-i'n (Ts'icia'ath) 
 mtlTva-i'c (Tlao'kath) 
 
" k 
 
 124 
 
 iii;rniir— 1800. 
 
 I' 
 
 Ir; 
 
 Dcsi<lci'alivc : — inniiiqll— lie wislas to eui, hn-ii^madi'i^fhiiu 
 
 - MH'li— I am f liirsty, iifll-rmf'fin, froni to drink, nut — 
 
 Diinitivc ; — fih — I cmI alwajs, hatvi'ikah 
 
 liiclinativc: —vtl— I lu'^'iii to >?lcc[>, /i7/i7c'///r//f 
 
 Krccincntativc is formed liy rcduplieation. 
 
 t'> yawn, hiirijrk'cUl, to yawn ultcn, hdhd'cijikn 
 For othciH .sec under Formation of Words. 
 
 FOli.M \Ti(>\ (tF \VOI!i».s. 
 
 Tlie remark- made on I lie formation ol' \vord> in Kwakiutl liold },'ooi 
 nlso. A> llie ^itniliuily of -tnicUirc of tlio two liui;;iia;,'c> i> hroiiglit out 
 in lliis rcspcrt I ^'ivc a li-t fur liic i)ur[io>o of comiiarisKJii : 
 
 I in \iMiika 
 \ cry clearly 
 
 to acf|uirc 
 
 —h„ 
 
 alon^:, Ion;,' 
 
 — onif/ 
 
 among 
 
 — rkgia. 
 
 back 
 
 —!'<■ 
 
 beach 
 
 — is 
 
 belly 
 
 — iilfikP 
 
 belon;;ing to 
 
 — irf.s 
 
 breast 
 
 —asl(o{ll) 
 
 to cause, to make 
 
 -<'1> 
 
 out of canoe 
 
 —ollla, 
 
 in canoe 
 
 — ahii 
 
 dance 
 
 — inek 
 
 daughter of 
 
 — is 
 
 down 
 
 — ato 
 
 dry 
 
 — net 
 
 car 
 
 — Imtl 
 
 expert 
 
 — iiuk 
 
 eye 
 
 -.su(f/.) 
 
 face 
 
 -n(f/) 
 
 to fetch, to get 
 
 -itl 
 
 foot 
 
 — qtr 
 
 full (solid objects) 
 
 —tsb 
 
 to go to 
 
 —as 
 
 hand 
 
 — nnk 
 
 hanging 
 
 -l>e 
 
 head, point 
 
 —k-i; 
 
 hind part 
 
 — ak-tle 
 
 inside 
 
 —tsD 
 
 into, inside 
 
 —ttfPitl 
 
 inside of house 
 
 ~itl 
 
 inside of mouth 
 
 — fsuka 
 
 inside of man (male) - ok'tl 
 
 inside of woman 
 
 -- tii/i/fi 
 
 i'T-lrumcnt 
 
 -l/rk- 
 
 li(iui(i 
 
 — «7 
 
 looking like 
 
 -- kuk (will) re 
 
 
 duplication) 
 
 made of 
 
 — tilt 
 
 just made, new- 
 
 — k'ak- 
 
 man, people 
 
 -nth 
 
 middle 
 
 — irini.t 
 
 mouth 
 
 — ki<n{tl) 
 
 neck 
 
 —iniitl) 
 
 tlu'ti'hti, juarriage ^liuyinp a woman. 
 hiiiiTmill, alonus up river. 
 /lUail'iiiit/, rc'lar-haik ropi'. 
 ok'iri'ksid, among certain people. 
 u'l'itrt l>ack. 
 iH'kpr, sore l>ack. 
 k'ri'ii,iy, to camp on beach. 
 hithui'is, sandy i)tach. 
 Hdcstiik-r', si roup belly. 
 m'kiffs, orphan, tieluiigin;; to noliudv . 
 iiTki'mhotl, sore breast. 
 tn'i'iijik'at^ho))!, l)reast hone. 
 k'd'h.tajt, to kill. 
 r't/mp, to maki: (jnc cry. 
 tlotco'tltdf landing a woman. 
 
 titxkutkini'k, thunder-bird <lauce. 
 
 Tokivitu, daughter of Tokwit. 
 
 lUitc'O'ato, to look down. 
 
 tlosmct, dry herring. 
 
 idiaaJmith long-eared. 
 
 kiioiuk, smoker. 
 
 iil'iaksuH, sore-eyed. 
 
 hi'tiutl, face 
 
 h!ik:o'ma, mask = hollow thing used for face. 
 
 luT-umitl, to fetch food. 
 
 tEtc'iqtim, big toe, = elder brother of feet. 
 
 fia-u'tntso, containing food. 
 
 ha- lid's, to go to eat. 
 
 wkid'kF.mik, sore hands. 
 
 hayu'j)c, ten banging ones. 
 
 d'sku', bald-headed. 
 
 fiita'k'tlP, hind part. 
 
 (■'k'tud, large bag. 
 
 iutstuc'itl, to enter == to walk into. 
 
 fr'kuitl, to sit down on floor. 
 
 id'ktsnka, sore inside of mouth. 
 
 ta'aktl, splinter in llesh. 
 
 otsi/qtl, woman, being happy. 
 
 tla'tcijck', cliisel. 
 
 tcamd'gsit, sweet liquid (molas.ses). 
 
 xi'stfuknk. rice -similar to maggots. 
 
 n'ahkuk, it looks large. 
 
 iiiiksT'tia, made of wood. 
 
 tld'iiiak'ak'. new canoe. 
 
 o'afh, people of a certain place. 
 
 nid'jifiUfsnf/i, warrior. 
 
 td'iviiiiit, to erect \ertically in centre. 
 
 id'knksutl, with sore month. 
 
 id'kumtl, with sore neck. 
 
 I 
 
'Irink, ««/,■•— 
 
 ON TIIK NOHTU.WK.yrKIlN TIlIDKS oK (;aNAI>A. 
 
 125 
 
 ill Nniilk.i 
 
 very cloiuly 
 
 nan. 
 
 
 j.l\. 
 
 I for face. 
 )f feet. 
 
 7 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 uu-p, piiint 
 
 —ahta 
 
 iidi eon 
 
 - tif 
 
 to obtain 
 
 —yn> 
 
 ohtaint'd 
 
 ■ iikt 
 
 on a lont? ibiny 
 
 tVilllFi 
 
 on round tliint; 
 
 — h-M$ 
 
 one anollicr 
 
 — Sttlf/ 
 
 out (»r 
 
 kllKt<l(i) 
 
 o\it8i(U' of ro\inil 
 
 —im{tl) 
 
 thiiiK 
 
 
 outside of liousc, 
 
 ~iti 
 
 in woods 
 
 
 to take part in 
 
 —aftntP 
 
 to partake of some- 
 
 — ("/■« 
 
 tiling 
 
 
 people of Olio 
 
 — lltHf/Ui 
 
 family 
 
 
 place where some- 
 
 —nil 
 
 tiling is done 
 
 
 regularly 
 
 
 place of 
 
 — nit 
 
 to play with 
 
 — XII a of I 
 
 to pretend 
 
 —tc'i/lu 
 
 lo possess 
 
 — nah 
 
 quality ,of 
 
 — mis 
 
 receptacle 
 
 —SKtS 
 
 relationsliip 
 
 — rk'so 
 
 road 
 
 — tnk 
 
 season 
 
 — Sito 
 
 season when some- 
 
 —jmtl 
 
 thing is done 
 
 
 to separate 
 
 — utii 
 
 side 
 
 —2>a 
 
 side 
 
 ^fih 
 
 side of body 
 
 — as 
 
 small 
 
 — is 
 
 smell 
 
 —jnik-s 
 
 son of 
 
 — Ill it 
 
 sound of 
 
 — afvk 
 
 st one 
 
 — II 
 
 surface of water 
 
 -ti'ict 
 
 drifting on water 
 
 "iHlltllli'' 
 
 
 — ilUtf/r, 'I'l.'l 
 
 taste 
 
 —Jj'ilfl 
 
 thing 
 
 — tup 
 
 through 
 
 — Slh 
 
 time when some- 
 
 —iltlro 
 
 thing will happen 
 
 
 time, when some- 
 
 —viih 
 
 thing happened 
 
 
 top, end, ahead 
 
 -pT- 
 
 towards 
 
 " — tsaqtik 
 
 tree, wood 
 
 — mapt 
 
 underneath 
 
 — Cipoa 
 
 uscleas, fragment, 
 
 —tskui 
 
 &c. 
 
 
 ii'iirlitiis, with ^hort nose. 
 huijuit'htii, with nniiiii point. 
 ikVuintctc/','Ai\\\\\.v\\,.\ ruimlryone ha; never 
 
 Mcon. 
 iii/l^tp, lu find. 
 
 /iiir'ii'k/, oliiained id potiatch. 
 t'i;'h'iiinii:s, to sit un long tiling. 
 t'i"fri>(is, to <ih on round thinL'. 
 tmi'lrstdfl, to >trikt' one another. 
 iiit.'tliiistiiii, to w.'ilk out of. 
 /ti't/liiitt, outside of fuund thing. 
 
 thVdn, outside. 
 
 Ci'-'as, to sit in woods on ground. 
 t.Mii'kste, to take i)ait in a conversation. 
 tid' iiichsiia, to (lr'!:k warm water. 
 
 hiV-uia hut skill, chief families. 
 
 fiawil' ittl, table seating place. 
 
 viathi'it, place of coldness. 
 
 Iii Ill-Ill iiis/iaot I, to play with HinemiH (a 
 
 mask). 
 /rriti'tr'itlii, to pretend to sleep. 
 tUitcnak, to have a wife, to bo married. 
 tc'iiniqtii'hiiiis, avarice. 
 kiri'SKts, pipe = tobacco receptacle. 
 nuirr'k'so, father. 
 
 ur/iPiotcik, clone in shore (fromi/r7/r'i.M, bush), 
 tlop'L-'itc, summer = warm season, 
 k'otjMtl, hunting season. 
 
 miikittii, to sell = to separate by trading. 
 k'atspii, left side. 
 
 nnnati'i uk, paddle steamer -wheels on bide.-;. 
 pape'nahnm, ear ornament ; pan, ornament, 
 
 •ak side, -uiii used for. 
 k-atsil'us, left side. 
 am'i'h'is, small. 
 trn' iiinsjiuk's, sweet smell. 
 A'tuciiiit, .son of Atuc. 
 l-oatsa'tlatuk, nice sound. 
 t'ia'a, to sit on a stone. 
 hi'iuitcict, surface of water. 
 nid'uuithir, European - lionse adrift on water, 
 ikath iiu'i' inatlr, European. 
 
 ica!maspatU sweet ta.ste. 
 
 i'litiip, whale - big t lung. 
 
 tVtUiip, devilHsli'^- bait thing. 
 
 tu'frsvP, to jump through. 
 
 iiir>thi'huih}rti, when it will lio high water. 
 
 iiioflukuifk', when it was high water, 
 
 ojip, ahead of. 
 
 im'i'pcas, house on top of hill (•<«, outside, 
 
 country). 
 aptsaqtuk yil'S, fair wind. 
 k-at inapt, oak = hard wood. 
 hitd'jHias, underneath in woods. 
 ta'ijtskui, saliva = useless water, 
 ki'tltskui, fragment . 
 
 I' 
 
:.«f I 
 
 
 
 iil 
 
 
 :m 1 
 
 126 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 to become useless 
 
 — kuitcitl 
 
 to make useless 
 
 — kviajj 
 
 usitative 
 
 —fik 
 
 voice 
 
 -(ky^'intl 
 
 woman 
 
 — ak'svp 
 
 iniiJiiiitcitl, to lie b'lrnt. 
 inikhiiap, to burn. 
 han'Vlt, always eating. 
 jnclri'lvtl, bad, croaking voice. 
 Jlfheihi'ia' k'suj), Heskwiath woman. 
 
 COMPARISON BETWEEN THE KWAKIUTL AND NOOTKA LANGUAGES. 
 
 From what has been said regarding the formation of words in these languages it 
 is clear that a mere comparison of words cannot bring out the similarity or dissimi- 
 larity between the two languages. Their similarity is most clearly brought out in 
 comparing the methods of formation of words. 
 
 1. In both languages only suflixes are used for forming words. Among these the 
 following are found to have similar phoneLic elements : 
 
 
 Kwalciutl 
 
 Nootka 
 
 In boat 
 
 — aqs{a) 
 
 — aJis. 
 
 out of boat 
 
 — Oltld 
 
 —utlta. 
 
 beach 
 
 —is 
 
 — is. 
 
 having 
 
 —nak 
 
 — nuk. 
 
 inside of house 
 
 -itl 
 
 —itl. 
 
 head, tojj 
 
 —h-5a 
 
 —k-B. 
 
 point, end 
 
 ~pS 
 
 — pe. 
 
 people 
 
 —itq, 'tnoq 
 
 —ath. 
 
 stone 
 
 — a 
 
 —a. 
 
 underneath 
 
 — apoa 
 
 — u'poa. 
 
 receptacle 
 
 —atsS 
 
 — sets. 
 
 round things 
 
 — k-am 
 
 — k-am. 
 
 long things 
 
 —ts'ak- 
 
 —ts'ak: 
 
 female 
 
 —aksup 
 
 — aliSEm, 'ttk's, -k-at. 
 
 drifting on surface 
 
 -tie 
 
 — matlnd, -matle. 
 
 to partake of 
 
 —cs 
 
 — eis 
 
 through 
 
 — swa 
 
 — sue. 
 
 hind part 
 
 —ak-tlP 
 
 —aktlt. 
 
 inside 
 
 —tsoa 
 
 — fsu. 
 
 rim 
 
 —Ssta 
 
 —Its. 
 
 smell 
 
 —p'a'Ia 
 
 —puks. 
 
 taste 
 
 —pa 
 
 —p'at. 
 
 upward 
 
 — iixfa 
 
 — kvxta 
 
 liquid 
 
 — sta 
 
 sH 
 
 outside of house 
 
 — as, -Us 
 
 --as 
 
 side of 
 
 —us 
 
 — as 
 
 In Nootka these suffixes may be made independent words by being appended to 
 the stems o-, a certain (definite), oc- some (indefinite), hit- and hitl-, that ; ap-, prob- 
 ably side. In Kwakiut) the suffixes may be made independent nouns by being 
 affixed to y-, oh, os-, hi-, am-, the separate meanings of which have not become clear 
 to me. They are, however, used in exactly the same way as the corresponding stems 
 in Nootka. 
 
 2. The following words, other than pronouns, are alike : 
 
 
 Kwakiut 1 
 
 Nootka 
 
 hair 
 
 hap- 
 
 hap- 
 
 to fiy 
 
 materia) 
 
 viu'mati- (reduplicated) bird 
 
 chief 
 
 hr'/vas, hc'maa 
 
 haii'ia. 
 
 ear 
 
 j/Ksp'e'i/O 
 
 p\i'pi;. 
 
 eye 
 
 ku'yak-s 
 
 Jra'si'. 
 
 star 
 
 t'o'i'oa 
 
 tafu's. 
 
 wind 
 
 !/v- 
 
 yv'P. 
 
 moon 
 
 no'si 
 
 sun, Ms. 
 
 earth 
 
 tsqams 
 
 ts'ah'n'mts. 
 
 salt 
 
 tEmp 
 
 toip). 
 
 stone 
 
 nVkye 
 
 hu'hsi, mv'ksi. 
 
 to drink 
 
 nah- 
 
 )iak\ 
 
 to eat 
 
 havi- 
 
 ha-viV' 
 
 j 
 
Oman. 
 
 INGUAGKS. 
 
 J languages it 
 y or dissimi- 
 rought out in 
 
 )ng tliese the 
 
 , -k-at. 
 IS. 
 
 jpended to 
 ; a/); prob- 
 by being 
 come clear 
 3ing stems 
 
 ) bird. 
 
 
 Hi 
 
 ON THE NORTH-'WESTPRN TRIBES OF CANADA. 127 
 
 Nootka 
 
 Jwt'.i. 
 
 flo'/)'atr. 
 
 IliV/ivf. 
 
 amaho' (Nitinath). 
 
 ah. 
 
 (/?•)?. {h:)i. 
 
 tuq- 
 till /J. 
 iltla. 
 »iu. 
 si'i'tca. 
 
 (I'tljJU. 
 
 -pit. 
 — pan a, K, 
 
 Willie many of these may be loan-words, it is highly improbable that any of the 
 suffixes should be borrowed. 
 3. Pronouns : 
 
 Kwakiutl Nootka 
 
 I, no'gva sB'ya. 
 
 thou, stem : sO su'wa. 
 
 we, nu'guants. iiv'wa. 
 
 iw'iva, KayO'kath. 
 
 Personal SHffi.res of verb, indicative. 
 
 Kwakiutl Nootka 
 
 —nogua, H. —in, K. — «(ic), Tl. —ah Ts. 
 
 —sc>i H. —MS, K. —itsh Tl. —eitK, Ts. 
 
 —En(^ts) —snivq). —nic, Tl. —i?ie, Ts. 
 
 —itsu, II. —itsoc, Tl. —iitxd, Ts. 
 
 
 Kwakiutl 
 
 snow 
 
 liul'sa 
 
 root 
 
 tlu'j/aJiu 
 
 wedge 
 
 t hi' Hilt 
 
 mother 
 
 aho'k 
 
 hollow opening 
 
 ah- 
 
 not 
 
 (;i07, (/<)?, (h,)^ 
 
 to jump 
 
 tuq— 
 
 one 
 
 iiF.m 
 
 two 
 
 mitt I 
 
 four 
 
 mfi 
 
 five 
 
 sh/'a 
 
 seven 
 
 atliliV 
 
 times 
 
 — jjKniiif, H. 
 
 I. 
 
 thou, 
 
 we, 
 
 you, 
 
 4. The formation of the collective form of nouns, of plural of verbs, the in- 
 flection of adverbs accompanying verbs instead of the verb is the same In these two 
 languages and in the Salish. (The exclusive use of suffixes is not four.d in the 
 latter.)" The peculiar use of the negation in compounding words is also coninioii to 
 the two languages. 
 
 5. The phonetics are probably the same ; the few instances in which a word begins 
 with several consonants in Kwakiutl seem all to be due to an elimination of vowels, 
 and these words are found in very rare instances only in the southern dialect. 
 
 The similarity of structure of the two languages is far-reaching. The words 
 which may be referred to the same root are so numerous, considering the small 
 amount of available material, that the conclusion seems justiiied that both have 
 sprung from the same st'/k. 
 
 THE SALISH LANGUAGES OF BRITISH COLUMBIA. 
 
 As at least one Salish language, the Salish proper, is comparativelv well known, 
 through the efftjrts of ilu, Jesuit missionaries,' 1 confine myself td a iv\\ brief re- 
 marks on the languages belorging to this stock. I select the liilqula, Snanaimuy, 
 Shiishwap, StlatlumH, Okana'k'On, as representing the principal types uf the great 
 number of dialects. 
 
 Bilqula. 
 
 The plural of nouns is formed in variou> ways : 
 
 1. Singular and plural have the same form : beaver, kolo'ti. 
 
 icor, HiipiinVtl. 
 stout, tqt. 
 
 2. The plural is formed by the suffix —uhs. woman, sing, iiiiac, pi. una'cukn. 
 
 3_ ,, „ -til : man, sing, tl'ii'nigta, pi. t/'um.ita'tii 
 
 4. ,', „ ,, reduplication • tree, mw. Kfn, pi, .'<tntn. 
 
 ' See Mengarini's Grammatica Lingv(F Selira ; Giorda, IHctiunai-yof the Calinj/elm. 
 
m 
 
 128 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 ii 
 
 .;.: 
 
 
 1 
 
 I i 
 \ 
 
 :l 
 
 ■■■] 
 
 '- 1 
 
 
 . •*. 
 
 
 v. 
 
 f 
 
 
 4( ■ 
 
 ,■( • 
 
 > 
 H 
 
 ' S. 
 
 An article is used extensively : it precedes nouns and adjeotivcs, and stands be- 
 tween the substantive and the verb. If lias a masculine and feminine "-ender. 
 
 the bird (1) Hies (2), fnltxipP' (\) tl aVHSek (2) 
 my grandmutiier, txl hildo'isixii. 
 
 It seems that only females of men and animals have the feminine aiticle. 
 The numerals have various classes : 
 
 xMfn 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 5 
 G 
 
 iiDumav c 
 
 nuilnv'sav 
 
 naaxmu'sau 
 
 mimo'sau 
 
 nvts'c'ii'oa 
 
 nutqv'tlau 
 
 Animals, I 
 
 fiithonis, I 
 blankets ! 
 
 smd 
 
 tliios 
 
 axmo's 
 
 mOx 
 
 ts'i-Q 
 
 tqotl 
 
 Long objects, 
 (lavs 
 
 umau'aaq 
 
 fin ml' (1(1 
 
 asmOm'dtj 
 
 niom'(i(j 
 
 ts't'Qii'aq 
 
 t(iutld'aq 
 
 maii'atl 
 thuVsatl 
 iisviu'autl 
 mu'siitl 
 
 smiVotl 
 tbu'/sutl 
 asmu'sntl 
 mu'sntl 
 
 ts'c'Qiitl 
 t(jo'tlutl 
 
 Numeral adverbs arc formed by the suffix — ans'iiists. 
 
 Personal pronouns are : I, ois. we, mnitl. 
 
 thou, inu. ye, tVuptl. 
 
 he, fain, they, fats. 
 
 The possessive pronouns are twofold : 
 
 my, eiistl. our, unfdl. 
 
 thy, Indtl, your, tVuptl. 
 
 his, faiHtl their, (?) 
 
 my house, e:Ml ti soil. 
 
 The second form is suffixed : • 
 
 my — 1$. our — itl. 
 
 thy — no, your — apa. 
 
 his — s. their — avtn, 
 
 my grandson, stlemtsts. 
 
 thy grandson, stUnntsnv, 
 
 When the noun is a femine the possessive pronoun takes the ending — utsn : 
 
 my granddaughter, stleintstsiitsa. 
 thy granddaughter, sflvmtsnuirtsn. 
 
 The intransitive verb is inflected either by means of suffixes or by joining the 
 pronoun to it by the article. A third form originates by repetition of the pronoun. 
 
 1st i 
 
 jerso); 
 
 «ng. 
 
 2nd 
 
 .. 
 
 It 
 
 3rd 
 
 
 1 
 
 Ist 
 
 )> 
 
 plur. 
 
 2nd 
 
 II 
 
 »> 
 
 3rd 
 
 II 
 
 i> 
 
 
 to 
 
 go 
 
 , tVap, 
 
 
 tVapstn 
 
 
 
 ens ii tl'a// 
 
 tVapnts ti ens. 
 
 tVuiinuta 
 
 
 
 iui) ti tVup 
 
 tVapmiti) ti i)UJ. 
 
 tl'apti 
 
 
 
 f((in ti tVap 
 
 traps ti iit'aiii. 
 
 tVapUl 
 
 
 
 innltl va tl'ap 
 
 trajritl va lonltl 
 
 tVapapa 
 
 
 
 tVuptl V(J tVnp 
 
 tl'apapa ua, tl'dptl. 
 
 tVapanis 
 
 
 
 fdts va tl'ap 
 
 tVapants va ats. 
 
 The pronominal object is incorporated in the pronoun. My collection is, how- 
 ever, not sufficient to give the transitive verb in a paradigmatic form. 
 
 Snanaimuq. 
 
 Tlic noun has no separate forms for singular and plural. It has a distributive 
 formed by reduplication, openthesis, or diieresis. 
 
 deer, imT'yHq. 
 deer, hd'pet. 
 miuk, tcitd'ek'an. 
 
 Distributive, 
 tEmB'i/ei;. 
 hald'pEt. 
 tcilric't'ek'an. 
 
 Diminutive. 
 
 I* ■♦ 
 
ind stands be- 
 gender. 
 
 ^le. 
 
 Kmind things, 
 hoiisos 
 
 smu'otl 
 thid'svtl 
 asmu'sntl 
 mo'svtl 
 
 nttl 
 
 lutl 
 
 umitl. 
 tViqnl. 
 t'afs. 
 
 -utSH : 
 
 joining the 
 pronoun. 
 
 /■ ens. 
 ti bUJ. 
 I fain. 
 % umUl 
 na tVdptl. 
 va ats. 
 
 on is, how- 
 
 istributive 
 
 ON TUV. ,N()inil-W1>rF.[tN lltl 1> OK CANaHA. 
 
 Dimiiiuli\ 
 
 120 
 
 Whillf, li' '( HIS. 
 
 r;ivi'ti, s/hU 
 crow. k'i:l('i' h<i 
 rivnr, tit li' III. 
 saliiKni. aflii'iitlt Kill 
 j)Ost, kiVIi-Kii. 
 I'rog, ii'i/'qan. 
 Mower, sj)ii'/;i:)ii. 
 liiiuse, IH'Ikiii. 
 
 I >i>tribuii\e. 
 /t'l'i/tii'i'ni.i. 
 spEljid' I . 
 
 k F.Ik- 1:1(1' kii . 
 
 Klidtd'lf'. 
 xtsEltnii'iilUi-.n . 
 kii'lalryn. 
 Iii7inri':'i/c(.<. 
 yjiii'lal," Fill, 
 lain' I Kill. 
 
 .'<tiTtKlr>. 
 
 ■ifrii'fsiclalltF.n. 
 
 kti'kk'Kii. 
 
 irr'irrqax. 
 
 Kjia'ji/ricm. 
 
 la'lttm. 
 
 An augiiu;iiti\ti\e is I'nnin'l hy >iiiiilar processes: sit t:' quit I, boat ; cao'nuiXI, largp 
 boat. 
 
 The imnicraN havf Iwd classes ; one lor counting men, the other I'or all other 
 'ilijects : 
 
 ( Diintin:,' Men 
 
 I, HK'tx'n. tn'nih.tK'n. 
 
 '2. i/ist/'li'. ijiTii^Eln. 
 
 H, tlrq. (Iiiiiala. 
 
 (, ijiii'i' i^Eii . fjiirti'hi. 
 
 '>. tlliit'tsKS. tllt-afKii'ln. 
 
 Thp numpval- nw not frei|iicntly combuipl with nominal affixes, a? is the case in 
 <he diajpets of lhn interinr. 
 
 J'ersonal |ironiiiins : 
 
 I. iniK. 
 
 thou, no mi 
 
 he ( present ), Ir^u. 
 
 \\f (alix'hl ). /i7,v>. 
 
 >he (present ), rii . 
 
 she (absent ), hi In. 
 
 ,Siiii;ul;ir 
 
 I'nMMit 
 
 I Mase. fxEii 
 I Fein. (;eii 
 I Mase. Isii'e.s 
 I l'"ein. .vr/'/'.v 
 f .^Iase. fsE' -.vfii 
 \ Vvm. ('/■■ .■<l(;ri 
 I Mase. fi^E -si;{i 
 \ b\'n\. (;e — lif^fi 
 
 we, lylliir' liiEtl . 
 
 you, tEtlirE'li7/>. 
 
 Iliey ([iresent) in. and t',, t.iii'l'ri. 
 
 they (absent) in. and 1"., kru'ln. 
 
 ToSSKSStVK PUn.NOI'N. 
 
 Plural 
 
 my 
 
 thy 
 1m> 
 h.-r 
 
 Ali.-eiit 
 ki;E 
 
 ktlE 
 Itcii' ES 
 kflii'EX 
 kcE ,1 
 kflE .1 
 
 Ii(;e k 
 
 llflE -S 
 
 Present 
 
 . f Mase. tsE—ti<t 
 \ Fein. SE — tst 
 
 ( Fein. xU'e — lap 
 
 I Mase. tsn'E — laii 
 
 ^j fMa.se. tsE -itflii'IH 
 \ Feni. .</■; atlii'li'i 
 
 AliscMt 
 
 k(;E txf 
 flE—i»f 
 k'lin — Ifiji 
 hsKH —hip 
 krK- xtii' li'l 
 tl E -sfxii'lri 
 
 TlIK VKb'l'.. 
 
 The vi'ib is indeeted cither by means of sntlixes or by au.xili;iry verb>. The tenses 
 are exjiressed by suHixes, —rll diMioting the j)ast, —fuEH, the future. 
 
 .v/'e/' • pri'si'iit k-'iik-'vx, fill iirr k'ak''e'itsi;n, pant k- ak'e'ietl. 
 
 N'erbs form a j)hiral as well as nouns; it is, however, not always used, the jiluial 
 being expressed sufbeient ly eleaiis bv the suilixes. In sidemn sjieeches the plural 
 forms are alvavs used : 
 
 Sick 
 
 ginmilar, l^t pcr-^on 
 •.'11' 1 .. 
 lira .. 
 I'liirnl, 1st ,. 
 2ii(l „ 
 3nl „ 
 
 Presfiit 
 
 k-'rik''r'i-t-i:n 
 k''iik''("'i-( Kile 
 k''fik-'i"'i 
 k''rui)k-'f''i-tst 
 k'Tuilk 'rl-l Kit slip 
 k-TilkVi 
 
 
 I'm lire 
 
 PllSt 
 
 k- 
 k- 
 k- 
 k' 
 k' 
 k- 
 
 'lik''r'i-tsKn-tsK 
 
 'rik''ri-t^ii:ii-(Kiti.' 
 fik' r'i-t:Ji:ii 
 Tuilk'T'i-tsKii-tsI 
 fKilk'T'l-tsKii-i Klt-iip 
 iiik-'i"i-fsi;ii 
 
 k-'ilk''("i-t"tl-rsi;n 
 k-';ik-'i"'i-i'tl-( Kite 
 k-';'ik-'ri-rtl 
 k'Tililk-'f'i-f'fl-t^l 
 If'Sli |k''i'i-c'H ( i:it>iip 
 k''riik''ri--("tl 
 
 II (3 
 
A 
 
 30 
 
 KKl'OKT— 1890. 
 
 
 i .1 
 
 Mi :; 
 I*' . 
 
 I i." fdllowing futun^ forms iinlicjite ttic Pxi>t(MKT iit'jiiintlici- future: — 
 
 7 .ihcll •'at. ;itltMi-ti;n-tsi.:. / >•//«// h( .ilrh. kTik'Oi-l i;n-t>io 
 
 Inflection by moans of anxiliarv vfrl)s is vcrv frcuiiiMii. 
 
 Siok 
 
 I'll->CMl 
 
 Sin,'., Nt piT<. 
 
 ■-'11(1 .. 
 
 Sri) ,, mil-, 
 loin, 
 rill Ml. Isl ., 
 
 •i\v\ .. 
 
 3r.l .. 
 
 I'll t .ire 
 
 I'ast 
 
 (nirtl-tsi.dil k-'rrk''f"'i 
 
 (nirtl-(i;)ic 
 
 (IDrll 
 
 (n)("-tsr.ii k-'ak'r-i niini-t-ii'ii k''a'k''ri 
 
 (ii)<"-(i:)i' ., lliilll-( Kite 
 
 (ll)("(-t=K) ,. lliilM 
 
 (-Vi:> 
 
 (n)e-tst k''ii(i )k''iM lll^nl-l^^t k Ti'd ik'ij (ii^i'll-i-i k aii ik'Ti 
 
 (inf'-n:)t>iiji ., nain-(i:il'.:ip ,, (niotl-Ktsip ., 
 
 (11)0 k''iiik''(''iL'tlti:ii n'riiii k'Tiik' I'i (n ii"tl-k''iT'ik''(''i-etlti-.ii 
 
 The auxiliary v(Mh of the fiituie ti'iiso means' to l;'o," tliat of t)ic [iiesent and i)as'. 
 tpnst;.sr is evidently tlu- verbiun snbstantiviim. KrtM|iKMiily tlie particle y>'« i.s addoil 
 to the inflected forms. I am unable to e.x)ihiin its nicaninu'. 
 
 / am »ich. k "ak-'^'i-tsKii [in. 
 
 ('■-tsi;ii p'a k'ak'O'i. 
 / hni-f l)i-i'ii .lifk, etl-t.-!K p'a k'a'k''ri. 
 '/f, net) p'a. 
 
 I'ho initial ;' is nr^vd if , fiersoii spukcn of is aliM'nt, In tiic ihirii person .i di.s- 
 timtion is made between the person lieiiii: present, absent, and iinisiiili-, and absent 
 and visible. 
 
 /(/• i.s .lir/; (lie jtn'.-'rnf), e-p'a k';ik'ei. 
 
 {Ill' (iliKext, inri/iihli'). lie ji'a k'ak'ci. 
 (Iir ahxi'iit, ri.iililr), \\\'\ p';i k''rik'ei. 
 //(/'// (//•(' sick {f/ii'i/ iiri'sciif), e p'a k-'a'ik'ei, 
 
 nr e p';i k 'Ak''e'l-et It l-;ii. 
 
 Tiie jireseiit ten~e funned willi tlie auxiliaiy \erh ser\i'~ a-- a perfret ; 
 
 / //(' llinrii III .s/'rr/i, i''!-:! Ill -t > Kli. 
 / l/lll il.i/i'r//, etsr:il e'l-MKt. 
 
 / .sil iloini, .Vinat-tsicn. 
 I am .li/fiiii/, e-tsr;n amat. 
 
 When the initial n is used in the lir>t jiiid secon<l persui.-- ilie veili ri'lers to a 
 past or future state or action. Tlii.'i is pinbably caused ' • he e.\j)ression of abseiiec 
 which in Mie.se persons cannot be in space, but must be in time. 
 
 A double future is suinetinie.-. formed by iisin^' the future ol th*' au.\iliary vc\\) : 
 
 J sIkiIJ III' sii'h, "■n-t<Kn-t>i-: k-'a'k'ei. 
 
 TIk^ aciive \erii, when it has no inonoiin for object, i> inileeted in rlie >ame \v;iy 
 as the neutral \erl>, either by .suffixes or by au.xiliary verbs. If it lias a pronomina! 
 object the latter is expressed liy a siillix to tfie verb, and the latter is then treated 
 exactly like an intransitive verl). This eloseeonnect ion of \\\v aeti\ity and the olijeet 
 acted upon, \vhih> the subject remains ind(\)iondent of this coinbiiiation, is very inter- 
 estinj;. It explains also tlie .syntactic- peculiarity that th<> subject is attached to ilic 
 adverb, while the object is attached to the xcrb. f collected only a small portion of 
 the objective forms of flic verb. 
 
 Sitiyriilar 
 
 Olij.ci 
 
 Nt iicrson 
 
 ■Jml |it'rseii 
 
 1st per. sin^-. 
 
 
 — - 
 
 L'nd ., 
 
 ;ird „ .. 
 
 
 — aina 
 ~ ii'i 
 
 1st ., plunil 
 
 
 
 ■-'nd „ 
 
 
 a'la 
 
 :!rd .. 
 
 
 -t(ptlfKn) 
 
 amc 
 
 •inl |ii'isiiii 
 
 -amc 
 
 rinrid 
 
 1st llClSdll 
 
 •ama 
 
 -•Uc| 
 
Kn-i>K 
 
 I'ilSI 
 
 I. (Ill k'Ti'k''(-i 
 
 f K'.Kiik-'ri 
 
 -iip 
 
 i'l'Ik-'Oi-ctltliii 
 
 5ent ;ili(l |)ji>! 
 pa \ii nddcd 
 
 
 ■;ii. 
 
 of illisclK'C 
 
 :tiv Verb 
 
 I' >illn(' \v;i V 
 
 pronominal 
 lion ticatt'd 
 1 I he olijcci 
 ' very inter 
 ehed to ilic 
 I pnrt iidi of 
 
 I'liii-iij 
 
 I |i('rs(iii 
 
 ania 
 
 131 
 
 '!5^w!?^5'9S?'Pl 
 
 ON nri; NORTir-AVKsir.KS tkiuks of canapa. 
 
 rhe>r forni- are treato<1 exactly as the intransitive verb : 
 
 / ^cp ijoK, liii<^niai;ri'iiia-tsKn (p'a). 
 
 or (n)r'lsK(n)(p"a^ liilEmai;il'ina. 
 / .^liiill ."I'' 1/111/ , Uilf:inaeiVina-t.sKn-tsK(p"a) kc. 
 
 iMI'KKAIlVi:. 
 
 Sin^nilar : ;c?vY/' .' (ja'lKni-ila I 
 I'lural : writ r I ()alKniii'-tla I 
 
 Tlie iniperntive i> freipiontly circumscribed by; it is /joixf lliat i/o>i , ai— . 
 
 tii//r care .' ai ku sia I 
 
 fdkr /lift/ UjXDi me .' ai(|)"aj kuns tsQni'iiiK<;;iina I 
 
 riir indicative is frc(]uently used instead of the imperative. 
 
 /Jiiiit I/O.' (phdv/) au'atsi;)! iiiini (rrrlxifiin, ijnii do not f/o). 
 
 Shnshii'oji. 
 
 Tlie iirinripal iieeuliarities of tbc shushwap are the oecuiiciice.- of an exclu>ive 
 and inclusive ('orm of the plural and the great fre(]uency of irregular plurals. 
 
 The <ii>tribulive form of the noun is formed by aruiililicalion of the stem, generally 
 by reduplicatio. Irregular distributives of nouns are rare. Plurals of adjectives 
 ;ind verbs are tVri'. d in the same way. ]n the latter tJie plural is fretiuently derived 
 Jroni a separate stem : 
 
 1 M ly , 
 
 
 tfnrr'iit. 
 
 <li>lributive 
 
 . tfitinrr III. 
 
 country. 
 
 
 t r.mr' Q. 
 
 1- 
 
 tEmti-vir'Q. 
 
 dot::. 
 
 
 x/ro'ijo . 
 
 1- 
 
 slraqk'ii' i]o . 
 
 liea.l, 
 
 
 ■■<k(i'i>h-i:n. 
 
 *) 
 
 skyjtka'itqi.n. 
 
 liouse. 
 
 
 txilQ. 
 
 1« 
 
 tiCiti'V Iq. 
 
 man. 
 
 
 .\lro' 1 EtlDIQ. 
 
 n 
 
 fin'i Ih'iJ 1- miiq. 
 
 <ild man, 
 
 
 yflifiVom. 
 
 1' 
 
 ■■<t F.qiUfti'om. 
 
 old woman, 
 
 f/'ip'ia. 
 
 ., 
 
 (liflir'in. 
 
 woman, 
 
 
 >ioiloi; iiij. 
 
 i» 
 
 noqiio' qoii'iq. 
 
 bad. 
 
 
 /■V',v/, 
 
 ^» 
 
 Iii/'l.shrst. 
 
 good. 
 
 
 la. 
 
 
 h-.lo-. 
 
 ^t rong. 
 
 
 fiihal. 
 
 ■»i 
 
 rilrilrn'l. 
 
 <.ld, 
 
 
 kii' iviihi. 
 
 !■• 
 
 kukiV ii'iitq. 
 
 tn cnnie, 
 
 
 ftl'dti. 
 
 plnivil, 
 
 ,iti:/l/i'q. 
 
 to dance, 
 
 
 k'oir'lq. 
 
 t» 
 
 iroiJroir'Ig. 
 
 t ( 1 go. 
 
 
 h-ut.f<rtx. 
 
 ,, 
 
 h'lifKiTnti'. 
 
 to run (animal) 
 
 nnq. 
 
 " 1 
 
 no'qnoq. 
 
 to sing, 
 
 
 .11 1 .\r' n 1. Ill . 
 
 1 » 
 
 i^itiii-^r' )>hm. 
 
 to stand, 
 
 
 .■il.iihV lit . 
 
 .. 
 
 i>t.Ki,^tjiihV III . 
 
 ular plural 
 
 > : 
 
 
 
 
 small, 
 
 
 huiri.-id , 
 
 ,, 
 
 ' sit ,-<if.-ii mil ' F.f . 
 
 to cry, 
 
 
 t .t'oill . 
 
 ,. 
 
 k-oo'hi. 
 
 to laugh, 
 
 
 oirlElll. 
 
 1' 
 
 qoillOiV l/os . 
 
 to run (m 
 
 111). 
 
 lUl'iri/h/. 
 
 *> 
 
 too' irii. 
 
 to sit (v.a 
 
 •). 
 
 (iliio't. 
 
 ?• 
 
 tliVI/ila. 
 
 to sit (v.n 
 
 •). 
 
 mot . 
 
 1. 
 
 (siiTm. 
 
 to return. 
 
 
 /.■<'i rii'/i. 
 
 ,. 
 
 t.^hitx,i 
 
 to sleej). 
 
 
 liF.lr't . 
 
 , ■ 
 
 <ji:nihT III. 
 
 to speak. 
 
 
 koto't. 
 
 f. 
 
 1,' oil' h'.-'. 
 
 to w;ilk. 
 
 
 hoiriV tiin. 
 
 ^» 
 
 (jiiari'i . 
 
 Tliere i> no indication of tlie existence of ;\ gender. 
 
 niniini:tives are formed by anipHlications of the stem : 
 
 girl, n'TiitKm. di>tril>ulive, niiM'nilKni. 
 
 little girl, (^('«'?'«'//k///. ., Q'/Qijo' jiil i m. 
 
 ];)kv, po.'<i'l ll'iio . >tnall lakt . y^yx/V '.iio. 
 
 i I 
 
«*•' 1 
 
 132 
 
 heport — isno. 
 
 Aiigtnentativps arc formorl Viy a -imiliir jtruccs* 
 
 '■ ■ ■ J 
 
 I 'A 
 
 ' ■ '1 
 
 1 
 
 -i 
 
 \ 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 f 
 
 ^ ^h 
 
 7 
 
 ■ :■' 
 
 ! 
 
 I 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 ■ ' 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 S'^ 
 
 stone, sqatiQ. 
 There are various classes nf luinicnils 
 
 laru*' ^tdiu', SQrjQii'nQ. 
 
 Counting- 
 
 I 
 
 Men 
 
 IlKUIlll. lilll lllijccIS 
 
 Dm 
 
 1 )i f:k'o 
 
 2 .v /■;.'>v7 ' 1(1 
 
 4 nn'in 
 
 6 fhniilkd 
 
 inik'itd'fl 
 
 iiJm'i'hii 
 
 tUii-.tlu'K 
 
 tkt.'<ritnikxt 
 tkiiiil7riiii/Li/ 
 
 niifo'tl 
 HiVn'tl 
 
 inik-''axkt 
 xilfiKkf 
 kiliixkt 
 •»:MiKkt 
 
 The numerals may be composed will: any nominal affix: 
 
 1 head. >ink''o'x. 1 pii^oe of clolhiiiL:', nuli'n'h.h s. 
 
 1 hand, nuk'a'kxf. I tooth. Q/iuk'd'us. 
 
 1 water. QFJiuk'^a'tkno. I road. ij/ii/k'Ti' nx. 
 
 the first, qtaks. 
 
 tiie second, k'lkul he Qfiikx = \\i'X\ to (ir^t, 
 the third, klknf nr .■<ki<wiVns = nt'.>it to middle, 
 the fourth. Av/.y// ///■ .v/.'/;//^/'.< = iu>xt to three. 
 
 iince, Ji,i:iiQKti7'kK. three times, iiEtskithl'sla. 
 
 twice, n.FSii-tnTlc.t. four times, niiDuontn. 
 
 I'KRSONAI. I'ltitNolN. 
 
 1. iinlxd'n'ii. 
 thou, nnil'r 
 lie, she, iKiH'i. 
 
 my house, iitxitn. 
 thy house, raf.iitw. 
 his house, fsifQs. 
 
 wi'. inchisivc, (illniir'kl. 
 we. exclusive. i//hn/r'rxk>/Q. 
 you, ufl iiKr'nu/i. 
 t hev, iitl-tiiir'i'x. 
 
 I'UHBKSSIVK I'llONolN. 
 
 our (inclusive) Iidusi;. txilQkl. 
 our (ex(^lusi ve") hniise, fsi'tj.\ki"/ 
 your hduse, fxi/Qiii/i/>. 
 their lujuse, fsi'/xitij.'i. 
 
 In some cases the initial ;■ of iju^ 
 
 it is mine, /ifsfitiiwu. 
 it is thine, (ixo'tnti. 
 it is his. stotKnx, 
 
 sroiind ]iers<iM siii^ulav is omitted. 
 
 it is ours (inclusivi'). xofruk/ . 
 it is ours (exclusive), xn'thiixhuq 
 it is yours, xotKiiE' nip. 
 it is tlu'irs, xo'fE/ix. 
 
 The verb is geiiurally inllected by the means ol' auxiliary verl)s. wliicli express 
 the tenses with f,'reat nicety. 
 
 I am a Ivaniloops. .i/knw/o /ixijiKjkr)/. 
 
 thou art ,, .. xikanilo' /isi-inqk. 
 
 he is .. ,, xthiiiilo'jiitKDiqk. 
 
 we (iiu'lusjve) are Slkamlojis/- nui, sfkinii/o/i.ii-iiK//,/. 
 
 we (exclusive) ,, .. ■■<tkiim/ri'/)si:m//kiiQ. 
 
 you „ „ ■ifkuni/o'/ixi i::-//:/). 
 
 they ,, ,. sikii mh'i' jixhiniil;. 
 
 Jn the [iliiral ihe \erij takes generally its plinal form : 
 
 I a,m sick. hijrnpki'H you are sick, hijrhiin' php. 
 
 Statements are geiu'rally made in a mil'!, dnbitativc form. Instead nf, he i.« 
 siek, kijiii' p, one says, ki/rii' ptinh, 1 lliink he is sick. 
 
 to eat. r'th:n. 
 
 Perfect : mi: ("fliiil/rii, I liavc eaten, 
 Imperfect : ii't'/n I'lh-.nunn, i was eating 
 l'"uture; mn r'tlEiikrn, I am jroino- id oat. 
 
ON Tin: NdRTII-WKsTKliN TIMIIKS uF CANADA. 
 
 133 
 
 [•ins 
 
 ri:.\Nsni\ i: \i:i;i'. 
 Siihjrrf, 
 
 
 (M>ii 
 
 • 
 
 
 SiiiLi'iliir 
 
 
 
 
 
 •rt 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 1st |n'rs(m 
 
 2nil pfrsiin ' 
 
 IJnl person 
 
 l>t 
 
 person 
 
 silll.'Mll!tl- . 
 
 
 
 t m' t ■•< l-lll "it 
 
 -tM' fur 111.1 
 
 2ii«l 
 
 ,, 
 
 ,, 
 
 t/<ini 
 
 
 -tsr.'! 
 
 :;ril 
 
 
 .. 
 
 ti'i'ii'ii iii/r'x 
 
 — fih/ 
 
 "tils 
 
 1st 
 
 
 |ilur. iiirl. 
 
 
 
 - tlVlES 
 
 Isl 
 
 J, 
 
 „ rx.'l. 
 
 - - 
 
 tii'i/hiiii 
 
 - -fll'.l/illlj 
 
 :.'n(l 
 
 
 .. 
 
 / (')' 1 1< III h: II 
 
 
 1 1 K III x 
 
 :;id 
 
 •• 
 
 »' 
 
 hi' fin iitl iiin'-'.i 
 
 ti'llj ufl lllli'.'l 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 riiirai 
 
 
 1st \n'V. ini'l. 1-t iKT. I'Ncl. 
 
 1 >t |i('i'-'iii ^iiiii;ul;ir — 
 
 L'nd 
 
 ;ir(l ,, ,, . ti'iiii nui' ^ 
 
 j Isl „ |iiur. iiicl. 
 
 ' Isl ,. ,, fxcl. 
 
 ■InA ,. „ — 
 
 ;!nl ,. ., 
 
 2iul ptTsciu 3rd person j 
 
 — f.<ii'fxi//i — tsd'tuh-ms j 
 
 , - fsr'/ 
 
 
 - turtt 
 
 lil'iiilnuj iiiir's 
 
 tdjl 
 
 - tthi 
 
 " ' 
 
 — 
 
 -tll'lK.t 
 
 
 — 
 
 'td'shiiq 
 
 —tn'/i-wf 
 
 tlV pklKj 
 
 to' 1 Kins 
 
 tsU 
 
 ti'i !> 
 
 — 
 
 SUn till III n. 
 
 'I'lif noun has no separate forms for siii^^ular ami |)liiral. 'I'lie disl ribiitive is 
 foriueil liy reduplication of the stem; the diminutive and aut;nientati\v are also 
 ainplitications of the stem. There is no i,'ender. 
 
 Tlu" numeral lias several (jlasses. In counliiiK men the numeral is reduplicated. 
 Ill counting animated beings it is amplilied in anotlier way. It may lie compounded 
 with anv ol' the innumerable atlixes. 
 
 ( OUtllillL 
 
 M.-ii 
 
 Auimatt' 
 
 oil express 
 
 i |>f, he is 
 
 1 fiK'ln 
 
 2 I'i'llllKC 
 
 ;{ l/ilKtliVr 
 
 4 ijoo' trill 
 
 5 tcViikst 
 
 6 fl'o'kiiwI.lH 
 
 7 Ici'itlohii 
 
 1 meiiiion the followini.;- compounds 
 
 1 canoe, /iti'/o/iiit/. 
 1 house, /III' I'li/fr. 
 1 t ri e, /III' I'll! lib- . 
 1 water. ihilTt'th an. 
 1 country, /in/'i'i' !iii im. 
 
 Personal pronouns arc 
 
 I, cKiiitrii. 
 thou, Km, II. 
 he, rar'itl. 
 
 pa' IieIi'ki 
 hinV nnKi- 
 khfi'iii'tliTi- 
 ili'ii o tciii 
 tcritcili/t.'it 
 trnk'K tlkii'iii/i-i.4 
 tnitltrhihii'ii 
 
 JIe' jIF.Id 
 
 iVaniirr 
 
 h'KitlE'li 
 
 i/'o'otrin 
 
 ti'i'tciUkst 
 
 *Va'tlk-amh-»t 
 
 feu'tclaka 
 
 I lire. //ii'Ifi/iii/). 
 1 t\'dy, j>ii/'i/.ik r' it . 
 1 stone, jHi' I'altc. 
 1 dollar, />a'/'oc<i. 
 kr. 
 
 we, iiiirni'' iimtl. 
 you, .infilii'j). 
 t hev, iciirnc' itl. 
 
 I'ttaSKSSIVK I'HONOIN. 
 
 my, // our, — tlkiitl. 
 
 thy, —liuii. your, — /<■//> 
 
'iiil 
 
 1 1 
 
 i [ 
 
 134 
 
 iJKI'oltT - IMUO, 
 
 liis, — n. \ heir, P. 
 
 my l; I'll nil lull (If, iii/:'i'tsi'/i'i/ . 
 uHV L'l'iiiiilial her, i/:'i't.sh/nit//.;iti. 
 
 I NTitANsiri vi; V 1:1:1;. 
 
 I am a 1mU'o|m';iii {rii' ma ), m' iiiidlhfiii. 
 tlioii art ,, tii' mtitJhhii/. 
 
 lie is ,, <■</' iiiniifi". 
 
 \V(; all- I'iin'i'i.ii'aiis, ci'i' iiKintl hal I . 
 yuii ,. I'ti' iniUlliit' liiji 
 
 tlicv ,, I'd' inaivit. 
 
 The V(ji() is ill many cast's inllfcteii l>y means ol' auxiliary v.'il.i-; ; 
 
 I am (mating, inn-f/kihi r'tli-.n (r't/f.n, ti> cai). 
 
 I am just sittini^' duwn tu eat, r'tli-.iitlli(ln. 
 
 I have ca,\tiu, paid' iitlltd II to ivn ii'tlKii. 
 
 I was ju.-t '^o'm^ to eat, ho'itUtan ci'iiii v'lhn 
 
 1 was i-aling' (i.r.y wiit-n yuii caiiie), r'/ci/ (/// r't/ru. 
 
 il 'f 
 
 M 
 
 (■ 
 
 
 1 
 
 ' i 
 
 ■; 
 
 1; 
 
 -.1 
 
 
 
 
 Tkassiiivk 
 
 \'i:i:i!. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Siihjcft 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 
 Sitii;ullll- 
 
 
 
 OI,i,.,-t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1>1 pi r>iiii 
 
 2nil person 
 
 .inl piTMiii 
 
 1st person siiiL'ular . 
 
 _ 
 
 - chl'uQ 
 
 —car 
 
 2n(l 
 
 • 1 •» 
 
 
 —eltlkdn 
 
 
 ■ '('I'll lie 
 
 ■Mi\ 
 
 i» 1* 
 
 
 ltd II 
 
 hdfm 
 
 ii.i 
 
 1st 
 
 ,, plural 
 
 
 
 - niiHitlhd ini 
 
 — til' iiiotlus 
 
 2n(l 
 
 )« i» 
 
 
 0' inotlktiii 
 
 
 - fiiiiid'lii/iijs 
 
 1 aid 
 
 »» >i 
 
 
 unillkan 
 
 Owiikd'tm 
 
 i 
 
 C) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Oiijcot 
 
 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 1st person 
 
 •2iid person 
 
 .'!nl |»crsiiii 
 
 1st I 
 
 )orson sinsjul 
 
 ar . 
 
 
 — cl'ii'ln/) 
 
 valifan 
 
 2nd 
 
 n )» 
 
 
 - c'lm 
 
 
 -rV fills 11 if 
 
 ;h<l 
 
 II »» 
 
 
 — h:m 
 
 ha' III/) 
 
 c'tllH 
 
 1st 
 
 „ jihir 
 
 il , 
 
 
 n iiiotlldi'liiji 
 
 molitiia 
 
 2nd 
 
 H )» 
 
 
 --fKiiitlhiVJai) 
 
 
 — fiimiiliijjd'sirit 
 
 3rd 
 
 91 If 
 
 
 j ~-ta' iiKtmiit 
 
 liu'ldpuit 
 
 (?) 
 
 It is of great interest to see that wlienever the verb is intiecled with an auxiliary 
 verb, the latter takes the t;ndings of the intransitive verl.), while the transitive verb 
 retains the incorporated object. This is the case also in the dialects of the coast, 
 and in Sliusliwap, but I have nut given a paradigm, as 1 liave no romplete set uf 
 forms in the other dialects 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Singular anil Plural 
 
 Ol.jlM-t 
 
 1st person 
 
 2n(l person 
 
 I 1st person singular 
 ! 2nd „ 
 I 3rd „ 
 
 1st ,, plural 
 i 2nd .. 
 
 I :5rd .. 
 
 -cm 
 
 ■to mot/ 
 fiiit 
 I til' II if II II 
 
 foiiiotl 
 nit 
 
OS TItK NoltTII-WKSTKltN Tl!in);> OK fANAHA. 
 
 13j 
 
 NmUIi- li;iw ;i ili-irilintivc wliicli i> Ini'inc^l l.y ;iiiiplilii';it inii of lln' >tcin ; 
 
 Iiiili.iii. .>■/,■ ('•/«, ilNtril), .</.-*;M"("'7«. 
 
 mail, sliEltiinr'u ,. xlry.lh' F.Jtriin' Q 
 
 liny, tiiinrr't ., to'tnil. 
 
 ti) giv;', i)iir'/.tiijf |ilniill. .i(jiii''fsiQtr. 
 
 ti) \r\\ u Vii\ ■itiii'i'/i/iK/ihi. „ sniH/miUl-.liD/ii'fl. 
 
 si.'k. sir' i' 1 1 II „ sIr'iUrr'l/u. 
 
 liTti'jiihir |iliir;iN iirr ii^t n^ riri|ucni ii> i> Slia^liwap, luii still vitv muiieruui : 
 wmnali, /1,-lfl i-iii''' In//, d i-l rilml ivc, cnulinhr' m. 
 
 lldV, xD'iilin' llltQ. 
 
 Iiali\ , shiikni' III I It 
 
 to niii, Iri'U'lilit 
 
 1(1 >ll'C)l, //f,l 
 
 111 speak, Iriilhor' 1 1 ll 
 t n >taiiil, iikKinr?' Q 
 \>\ walk, (jii'i'sIq 
 
 pliiial 
 
 s/ih:l(i' I, 
 .\ifKi- iii'i'i' I'l ■ 
 nr' I Eiiirxl . 
 
 Is'dtQp'liQiQ. 
 HklUllfiKl'l. 
 
 t'owr's. 
 Ifkiui'tturi-. 
 
 I'tT^iill- 
 
 Nr.\ii;iiAi-s. 
 
 OtlllT uliji'i'ts 
 
 I'crsdiis 
 
 ( Mlu'r tilijft't^ 
 
 iKihs 1. IrE/iio'si-mix mos j 
 
 ,u>ri ."). liU'iltcUlinst ti'llltttst 
 
 kiVllrc I (".. hiiihtdhi-mhn!.t fa'hinikiiKt . 
 
 liL-.-i<lc> thi> miiiu'ral.^ iMii W .'uiijihisimI wiili any <>f lii<' numi-rous atli.xos uf the 
 
 I. Iri-.niiku 
 'J. /.-(tiiKa.il'f 
 I!. Iriiln'iiitl't'i 
 
 laiiu.iiuu't' : 
 
 I wo hdllM's, itslf'tlti, 
 
 two canoes, axli'-'uti, 
 two troL's. tinlri'liil,-. 
 \ w(i faces, osi-h'i' ■■<. 
 
 Pci->niirtl pronouns art.' : 
 
 1. Kltttl'llEII. 
 
 thou, hriiiiir' . 
 he. fvhrt'tl. 
 
 The piis.sessiv(! pronouns are ; 
 
 my, in — . 
 thy, fin. 
 ills, h? li- 
 my father. //( li:c'i/. 
 his failier. In- li-u-'iii<. 
 
 two tires, aaeli'xi-lp. 
 two days, axrla'iik f. 
 two stones, ascWxQKti. 
 two lilankets. n.inl'i't.ia. ice. 
 
 wo, iinif' mltit, 
 you, iiine'mtlt:ni. 
 thev. iiiiu-'mfeiliQ. 
 
 our, /;■;/. 
 your, w//. 
 their, — .v//«. 
 
 our father, li-:r' nfrt. 
 
 III.-' m I J n 1 • " % «•' ' n M ■ 
 
 When llif noun he^lns with .tu ,v. 7 Mini -7 st.and I'or ilie tir-t and sccon<l ijer.sons : 
 my mother, 'm/^'fi'i. 
 
 J N II! ANSI ri\ !•: \'i Ull. 
 
 I am sick. kitii-K I.-'i'-'IpI/w. we arc sick, /nig tyiidtu. 
 
 you are Ack, jjs It 'r'/i:l(». 
 they arc sick, situ k'P'ttQilQ. 
 
 thou art sick, k'nts h'r'hltQ 
 ho is sick, .•(/,'■ 'c 7/-. 7/ v 
 
 The dil^fercncc between tlic verbs with dctinite and indefinite object, described 
 by Meni^farini in his Salish grammar, is found here also : 
 
 I work, liUiKx k'0'li:in. 
 thou workest, k'ntK Ifo'lEin. 
 he works, Fo'Ikdi. 
 kv. 
 
 I work at it, hPtft h'o'Juftt-n,. 
 thou workest at it, hPts k'o'li<--'t^- 
 he works at it, hPts kTi'luxtr. 
 wc work at it, lu'tn k'd'lusfh.ni. 
 you work at it. hcts k'oli:ntijJ. 
 "they work at it, ht'tit li'r,'U.:.itrilu. 
 
 i amfjaajMfc gJS 
 
i:\c> 
 
 UKI'OUT -I.Sf)(». 
 
 ill 
 
 » 1 5 
 
 l»- 
 
 
 
 •I ■ 
 
 lUi 
 
 1 i. 
 
 
 i'S 
 
 
 'riiOHO brief tidtcs will siiflku! to izivc an idea of the ^'oiiPi-al clnifuftcr 
 of llie variouH (iialec!ts ol' the Salisli liiiiiruaf^es. 1"lie |»i'iiu'i|)al jioiiits of 
 ditlbroiict' at'o the followiiit^. Tlie 15il(jiila and the ('(last Salish have a 
 proiioiiiiiial geiuU'f, niasoiiline ami femiiiine, and dislinguiHu thi'ou^hdut 
 presence and ai)senee. The Sjuishwaj) has exclusive and inchisive t'oriiis 
 of the hfst jterson plural, ami a rt;iiiarkal)ly ^ival nund)er ol' irro<;ular 
 plnrnls. 'i'he OkamVk'en and Stla'tleniH liave ni>ne ot' these pecuiiarities. 
 'The NtIakya'paniU(| reS(Mnhles the Stlii'tlemli in its s( i-nc-f uic. It seems 
 that incorporation of nouns is carried to a tar tiji'eatei' extent in the 
 dialects oC tiie interior than in those ol' the coast (see N'ocahulary ). All 
 the Salish dialects use aiixiliai'V vii'hs in iidlecting the verh. 
 
 'J'K'WMS OK KKLATlONSHIf OK TIIK SALISll liANdTACiKS. 
 
 It is rather intercstiiiLj to compare the systems ol' tei'nis of relation- 
 ship in various groups of Salish people, as thi' systems ai'c t'lmdanu-nially 
 ditt'erent. Anu)n<^ the Coast Salieh, to whom the Lku ugKu lielouj^'. 
 thei'c is no distinction between relations in the nude and in the tenude 
 line. Relations of males and females ai'e desi}j^nated by the siimc term. 
 While brothers and sisters of both parents are designated as uncles and 
 aunts, their wives and husbands are styled 'accpiiird fathers and nu)thei's.' 
 Cousins are termed and considered brothers, although there exists also a 
 separate name for the relationship. Brothers' and sist(>rs' grandchildren 
 are termed grandchildren. The most peculiiir features of the Salish 
 system of relationshij), ])articularly among the ('oast Sidish, is the use of 
 distinct terms for indirect alllnities, when the interimdiate relation in 
 alive and when he is dead. This seems to iniply tliat after the death of 
 the- intermediate relative the mutual I'ciation between the two indiivct 
 relatives undergoes a change. 
 
 I give here a table of terms (U' relationships representing the system 
 of the Coast Salish. It is taken from the Sk'qo'mic diale(;t. 
 
 I. OIIM'XT IJEL.VTIONSlllI'. 
 
 Urea t-great -great -grandparent, /ui-ii'lin-rj/ii/r great-great-greiit-grandcliiM. 
 
 great -great-giandpareiu , fsO'ju'i/uf/ great-great -giaudchild. 
 
 great -graivlpiirent, nff'i/'niik- great -grandeliil<l. 
 
 ., , ,1 ffatlier, mother.1 ., , , feluld 1 
 
 .sV'(»/. grand '^ , ' . rma/s. un-nifl < , 
 
 iiitlii, father w/;//, cliild. 
 
 tei'ca, luother ^r'aitl, eldest child. 
 
 (I'liontatc, second child. 
 
 inKntfi-'fc'it, third chil i. 
 
 ■•id'tit, >()ungertt child. 
 
 ftiijifiiu'i'jiif.s, brotlier.s, sisters, and cousins together. 
 
 , ., ,.. ,, fbrotlier, ) ffatlier's ~1 ,, j' brother's 1 , ., , 
 kuujnts, elder , . , •, ,i • >• elder ' . . , .chad. 
 
 ^ V sister, J t mothers/ ^sisters J 
 
 ,. ., , „ /"brother,! f father's "\ /"brother's i ,.,, 
 
 skak-, youwetix- { . ^ , , ^v. . -vounger' . . . ^ child. 
 
 •' ° I -sister, J' [mothers/- " (^sister^s J 
 
 anfr'o'iti, cousin. 
 
 II. INDIURCT REIATlOxVSHIP. 
 1. Intkkmediatk Hklative alive. 
 
 - . ftuther .s hrot iiTl 
 
 t^iuuthers J (^sister ) 
 
 , ., ,, f hroth'M's I , ., , 
 lilii riltl, • , , ' chilli. 
 \ sister s J 
 
•'il c'liiiraotiT 
 '111 poiiifs of 
 
 lllisll liiivf ;t 
 
 tliroui^hoiit 
 nsive forms 
 <)l' iri'Ofi-uliii- 
 (''■UiiiiiifioH. 
 
 It SCCtllS 
 
 '••lit ill tin- 
 l.'irv). All 
 
 rirAOKs. 
 
 it' ii'latioii- 
 il.'Uiiciilullv 
 ^:ii lifloiiH'. 
 the fiMualt; 
 ■iiiine tui'iii. 
 unc'lt's uiid 
 I motliei's.' 
 cists also a 
 iidcliildi'cii 
 :lu' Salish 
 tlie use of 
 •elation i» 
 e death ol' 
 o indirect 
 
 he svstcni 
 
 iilchilij. 
 
 1 
 
 ie(;e ) 
 
 id. 
 
 uS Till. NdlcTII-WKSTr.KN TUIHKS uV t'VNAKV. 
 
 I ciiusih. 1 I rnlisill'.s 1 ... , 
 
 "•«'"•'••■• I ;::x;„4-, I ;'•.'•""-■!■ I "i':"::- 1- 1::.;;..,..., ! 
 
 l:i7 
 
 >istfr. 
 
 sl-iliM- 
 
 I son \ 
 
 ., ' (liiiiKhtor ' 
 """"/ father 
 
 ' Mini III- 
 
 '-ill-l,lU . 
 
 aku'f'na* If a iiiciiilxT of oiit- faniilv lia.^ iiiiirrit't.l a iiieuiluT of aiioili.T his und 
 hfl- IflatiM's .Mil cadi other skvr'n-iin, r.i/.. -Ifp hloliuT, \<' 
 
 •>. 1nti'.I!Mi;i>i.\ I'l. IlKi-.m vi; i>k.\ii 
 
 , ... .,, r lalh.'r"> 1 I brother 
 •' ( iiiollier .s J I Mslei 
 
 . . .,.,, f lirolliel -< 1 , ., , 
 
 XUIIIIIIKI ill, 1 : , . , Cllllli 
 
 1^ slater s I 
 
 I ron.sill, "I I eolisili .si,-, 
 
 lister. 
 
 , . , , r Soil. ilau!.;hli!r. 1 • 1 , 
 .1 rtiri' I, ,. ,V ,1 . -Ill-law. 
 
 I lal her. mother J 
 
 .vw,vrV/. wife's c-raii.l [ i:;.'.'.',;;,'., ; , step-LnanU ^ „„,(,„.,. ^ 
 
 111. A(\»rii!KI) UKI.ATIONSIIJI' (TH hol'ti II .M.\ IMM.MU';) 
 
 f father, 1 , I father ] 
 
 \ mother, I 
 
 m'liiini, aunt's liushaiid, step-father. 
 smtci'i'u, iiiu'le's wife, sleji-Diother. 
 KQiuKU, step-chilil. 
 
 1 r wife \ 
 
 hu>haii(l "I 
 
 ,., , , I son s ( / wito 1 
 
 .v<, ,■ mats, -rand | ,jj^„^,i„er-s / \ hushan.i J 
 
 /wife's I , , /father, i . ,, ....n,.. niu> 
 "'"""/• Ihushamrs J ^"'l' Ijliother. I ' ^^^I'-' '"''' - I wile , 
 
 Jlili^ulii. 
 
 I have not boon able to f^et a atisfaclory collection of terms of lulalioiiship fiuiii 
 the Bihiula. The following will show, however, that their .system differs greatly 
 fioiii that of the Coast Salisli. it si'i'ins the ilistiiietioiis between the two olu.^ses of 
 indirect relationslii[) does not exist. 
 
 • kn'kpi, f '''■^'"'''■"^. |. fatht-r, graiidniicle. .sV/z-'w/.s', grdiidehihl. 
 
 ' |_ mothers / " 
 
 uhjNi', ['""^'"''■•■: jmotlier, orati<lauiit. 
 •^ ■' '1 iiiother ^ j 
 
 miiii. father 
 ahl ji, mother. 
 
 mn'/ia. child. 
 . , ., ( father's 1 • , ,„ 
 
 ("father I 
 
 xkiisl. \ mother |. -in-law. 
 
 [child J 
 
 hi/m/'sini, married couple. 
 
 , . , , , , r brother"! 
 
 l/iiali- III. el<ier , • .. ,. ,• 
 
 |_.-.i.>iei J 
 
 , f brother 1 
 
 ,s<5,/^.'. younger I ^.^,^,,. | 
 
 ., . f father'.^ 1 , .. ,, . .. 
 il a. \ ,., • brother. 
 ^ mother s 
 
 S'laih.mH. 
 
 There is no distinction between terms of relationship u.sed by male or female. 
 only terms of affinity are art'ected by the death of an intermediaie relation. 
 
 Great -^Muiidparent, /s'u'jiPyuk-, great-graiidcliild. 
 
;ls 
 
 i:i I'Di.'i 
 
 s!M». 
 
 r- 
 
 M 
 
 > : 
 
 ;'i 
 
 
 
 
 l;i? 
 
 i/:"it.'t/> I'l'ii . :ii| ilri-<('i| sjii'i' inii , 
 
 f liitlu r> 1 . 
 
 (_ Iiiii||m'|» j 
 
 f:illifr. 
 
 , ,, . I , ] , -•, I liltllCf !* . . 
 
 I iumI Iii'I » I 
 i fiiiiilr, ui'iiiii|r|ii M, 
 
 .«/■ iV till . liiilur 
 
 H/'i'i l/ri/:i~l'<t, Mini hl'I-, 
 
 iki>:ri'ii, i;liilil. 
 
 /■■ h:l;-ti-ih. clilrr lunllifl. 
 ht'ill; I I/, rlili'l "•i-lrf. 
 
 ■k I'i'ii, 
 
 i I'.llllCl'- 
 
 I niMllicT' 
 
 111. I ln-r. 
 
 t/ll'll. 
 
 I'ii/i'ini 1/ :, \miiiil;( I' 
 
 li''tniili\ lin-'li;ilj<l. 
 crin'ri'iii. wile 
 
 I liMtliiT I 
 
 -t 11' II in. 
 
 i IiiiImt's 1 
 l^iiKillicr'.- J 
 
 I liLilllcl", I 
 
 i>tcr. 
 
 clllll'.jlllrr. 
 
 (^ (•/■■(■'/ (/, 
 iir'll, llililrc.-i.s I'ol liiisli;iliii Ulld svifc'. 
 
 Ti;i!.\i.s oi' Ai'ii.M TV. 
 I. Iliiithiniil , ri: , iritr iilirr. 
 
 ., , f wiiV's 1 . 11 r liusb:ui>r> "1 
 
 rviinii ml , , , ,. ; iiiiirnl^ i;ul , •,• • paieiils, 
 
 ri'i' hi/ilti , pa'<'iit-iii-l;i w , 
 
 rt iltri'll. Siiii-iii-l;i\v. 
 
 n'l'jji/i. ilauf^litiT-iii-law. 
 
 rt.t'dijt, wiff's liintlior. 
 
 rlnVfi, hiislijiiul's sifter. 
 
 r'li'rtHiii. \vift'"> ^istrr and liiisl)an(l'> ItrulluM'. 
 
 -. Jliixhdiid, ri:., wife tleml. 
 
 i'k\i'l/}<iiJ, used fur all relatives by uiarriago after deatli of iuisl. 
 
 It is a significaiir fart that um- term servi>s to designate the wife .> ..ht and liie 
 husband's brotlier, who lieconii> the wife or husband of the widower, or widow. ()n 
 tlio coast, when a masculine era feminine article i=i used, the same terms serve fur 
 male and female relations. Here, where there is no grammatical ilistlnctiun between 
 the .';exes, separate terms an? used. It is worth reniaiking that the I'ilqida, wlu^ 
 have grammatical distinction of sex. distinguish between but a few of tliese terms, 
 This may indicate th.'it the >e)iarati' fornix havi- bcc-h li^t liy liie tribes who use 
 grummaticid se-v, • 
 
 Sliusliwap. 
 Hi-re we tind a luimber i<\' teiins ditl'ering for males and ftMoales : 
 
 W ift' 
 
 .sli'i'f, great-grand[iareni ;uid ancoturs. imKintK'i'txilf. great-grandchild. 
 
 ijijiVii, grandmotlier. 
 rmtf, grandchild. 
 iiili-'rqii, mother. 
 
 ihl'ii, grandfather. 
 ti'i'iitzti, father 
 V" 
 
 , -, r brother .s 1 
 
 til (/<!, son \ ■ . . St'!! 
 
 \sisters J 
 
 ^!iiu/t, chiltlren. 
 iqU'liui, Inisband. 
 ko'tsfra, elder lirother. 
 
 ,, I 'u \ 1 . [ Ijrothers 1 . . 
 xtlKiiikii It, dantditer •' ... ilaughter. 
 
 l_ sister s J ° 
 
 iiiKiiiil'iin, married couple. 
 liilHll.' Ill, wife. 
 Icii'hn, elder >istel\ 
 
 f brol lier. 
 
 thnrii' n\ vi>ungei , ■ . 
 
 l^ sister. 
 
 Tkkms isi;i) it\ .Mali;. 
 
 ii'ki\ brother. 
 
 ,., f fatiier'.s "I , , 
 Ui III/, , .111' onither 
 ^ mother s J 
 
 ,,., i fatlier's 1 . . 
 t II i/i/, : .1 , sister. 
 •' \_ mot hers J 
 
 ' 
 
V i ft?. 
 
 " W i f I'. 
 
 m- and iJa^ 
 iii«»sv. On 
 s sorvi' fur 
 (ii between 
 li|iil;i, wliu 
 ese terms. 
 •s who use 
 
 liiltj. 
 
 iU" liter. 
 
 i 
 
 ON Till', NtlUTIl-Wl-STr.UN TlllHi:S OK ( A.NU>A. 
 
 1 :ii> 
 
 iKitMs 1 sKi» iiv ri:.\i.M.i:. 
 
 \ luulliCI ■< \ 
 
 f'i'/rP. sinter. 
 
 ri'ii'lH'i's T . . 
 fii mil, ■[ .1 .■ , •■*l-i' '• 
 \ llluthrl ^ J 
 
 AlllMl'V. 
 
 I. lliix>i<iiiil, li:.. iri/i- liriiii/. 
 s./.ri/o.l. failin- ill-law iuhI i,i> tlhifxii'k. innilieriii-luw uikI her 
 
 lpnilliei>. -ister.^. 
 
 ;.//,/.•//. M,n-iii-law. .»J>K//. .laiiKliter-ih-liiw. 
 
 }/.<\i,ff, wife'ji l)i..ilier, ^istei's </w'/7, hiishaml - sister, 
 
 hu>l>:iri(l. 
 
 .ii'i'tntmi. \\\W- >ister. lili-iiiiliti- lnotlier. 
 
 '_'. H iixhiniil . n:., iri/r ilniil. 
 sk-,i'lj,, u>e.l t.ir all relatinn> l.v iu,irria-e atier death of liusl.aiid nr wife. 
 Theiu„>t inipuriant feature ,.f ihi. >y.st.it,. I.esides those wlnrh are similar I., 
 the Stl;Vtli;inli. i> tlie u.se of >ei)arate terms for • uncle' and 'aimi l>v l.-v ami j,'"i. 
 i'rom u cumpari.swu with i.lher dialects it appears, that h..vs call their uncles tatliers. 
 their uua^s aunts, while ;-irls call I heir aunts in.n her- C'h'nv"''! trom ti„i,,u, suck). 
 1 heir um les uncle-. 
 
 (i real -Ki'andf.it her. tiit'O'/ifi, '^reat-grandchihl. 
 itiju'o/m. father's fatlier. kr/ioa, mother's father. 
 
 /ni'k iiini, father's muth.'r. Ktumti'imi, mothers muther. 
 
 SKu'i'iniit, grandchild. 
 i/isS, son. M'F.kir-UU, daughter. 
 
 .iiji-'hii, husy);ii\.l. ml' II II III/, wiie. 
 
 inajHiiiii/iii'iii*, married couple. 
 tlkiVkfuiJ, elder l.n.ther. tlkV/i'/u, elder .sister. 
 
 si'r^Entsa, younger broth.-r. doKtcEo'pn, younger sister. 
 
 .'^mi'elt, father'.s brother. ninV, mother's brother. 
 
 Hk'b'koi, father's -ister. mihva'sn, mother's sister, step-mother. 
 
 .■ithnri'l, brother's, -ister's child. 
 
 h:e'u, father. 
 mistm, father. 
 
 sqa qa, father-in-law 
 iiti'mtn 
 
 ri;u.\i.-> I'SKi) nv Mali;. 
 
 .i/t'o'i, mother. 
 
 TEHAIs I SUO 15V pHMALt:. 
 
 torn, mother. 
 
 Tekms of AKI'INITV. 
 
 1. Hiiiihuiid, ri:.. wife alirc. 
 
 tlti'iti-k, mother-in-law. 
 
 „,[^'ff ,) fan.ily calls .f;;';^;:^'"^''^1fanuiy. 
 ' ( hunband.sj • ( nmi*' > ) 
 
 ntsiat, wife's brother, sister's husband. 
 
 .trastiVm, wifti's sister, brother's wife, husband's brother. 
 
 '2. Ifuxhiim/, ri:., wife dead. 
 Kelationship cea.ses, except the one corresponding to siantum, which is called 
 nKkoi't»ti-:)i, deceased wife's sister, deceased brother's wife, ileceased husbands 
 
 brother. , . ., 
 
 This brings out very clearly the peculiar form in which the levirate prevails among 
 
 this tribe. 
 
110 
 
 )M:ri.i!T — IHfM). 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 KiilisiU'Jiu . 
 
 I givt; tlif terms of i'claii()ii>lii|i in this iliiilcct, which is flo-^clv rt'latcd lu the 
 Okana'k on accurdjnii' td Mcni^niini. 
 
 fii'jtie, ancestor. 
 sqaejJiu father's father. 
 silv' , motlier's father. 
 xknsr'r, snii. 
 
 k'eitx, eltler Iji'other. 
 sin.'.i; younger brother. 
 
 iim'iL father's bmthei. 
 n'.ii'i, mother's brotlier. 
 
 /'i^M, father. 
 
 iiit'xtin, father. 
 
 heibr', father's mother. 
 ch'clii'r:, motlier's mnvher. 
 .■<f<>mc/i( It, (iaiiiihter. 
 
 "/ch'c/ixcfiii', elder sister. 
 //t(i/t':i\ younger sister. 
 
 kii'i/r. mother' sister. 
 
 Ti.UMs rsKii itv M.\i,K. 
 
 •v/i'c/, mother. 
 
 .•dioltoi, father's sister. 
 
 .^f/iiii'i)ih/i . sister. 
 
 ,. , r brother's 1 . ., , 
 toiisr/i. ... 5- chihl. 
 { -.ister s j 
 
 TkU.M.S t.SKU JSV Fhmai.k. 
 
 /om, mother. 
 
 fikii!, father's sister. 
 
 .•inhiuiiiii, sister. 
 
 , . , . r brutlier'sl 
 skioirlt, ... son. 
 
 tsi.stcrs J 
 
 ,,.,.( brother's) , , , , 
 >ittiiii-h lit, -, _,• ., .■ , ( Oil 111^ liter. 
 
 Ill Kalispehii wo tiiid once more a sc|iarate set of terms for indirect rehitionsiiip 
 when the intermediate rehttioii is dfinl: 
 
 ulai'iiin, father'^, brother. 
 
 shi'flt, lirother's i;hil 
 
 Ik K.MS or .\ II I > ITV. 
 
 I. II iiahmiil , ri:.. ivifi' ii/iri . 
 
 sffuf/t-e, husband's, wife's fatiier. Izi'zch. liushand's, wife's lu.itlier. 
 
 si/ehii, husband 
 xi'!/ II 111 lilt, 
 
 fwift 
 
 ,1 1 1. ,■ parcni - ca 
 l^husliand s j ' 
 
 ziii-vlilijUy son-in-law. 
 iii'iclit. sister's liushand. 
 
 HOi/iuit/, wile, 
 fiiusbanil'.- 
 
 parents. 
 
 I wife's 
 /III, dauLihl ei'-in-iaw 
 
 iei^ti'iii, sister's hii.--baiid, liiuther's wifi'. 
 
 'J. Iluxi'iiiiil. riz., iri/r driiil. 
 
 s'rhi'lji, da 11 ji liter- in law 
 iiJiiii' :t ii, sister's hiishand, brother's wife. 
 
 rOMPAHATlVK VOC'AIiULARV OK KIOHTKI'LX LANUrAfiKS 
 SI'OKI^^N IN I?HI'nsH COIJ'MHIA. 
 
 I 'riie foUowiiig vociilmlaries comprise mainly tlio well-known li.st (.>!' 
 words selected by Gallaiin for his great work, the ' Synopsis of the Indian 
 Tribes' (published in 1SH«)), which may be said to have laid the founda- 
 tion of American ethnology. The list was necessarily adopted, for the 
 purpose ol' comparison, ten years later, in the Report of the \N'iikes 
 I'iXploring Expedition on (he Tribes of Oregon, and subsequently, lor ihe 
 same object, by other itivestigatoi s. includiiio' such eniini'iit authorities .as 
 Alessr.s. (.iililis, Dall. and l\ ■vers, of the I'.S, Ibirtan of I'lt hiioloov. tit, I 
 
MN IHi; N()I!Tll-Wi;sTr,i;N TlUni'.s nV (■.\NAI>A. 
 
 141 
 
 rt'latetl lu the 
 
 rc-laliunsiiip 
 
 lutlier. 
 
 GfTAracs 
 
 wn list of 
 fhf Iiiiliaii 
 
 le rouiidii- 
 
 'd, for the 
 »' ^^'iikes 
 ly, for the 
 lorities ns 
 •loyv. !(t, 1 
 
 Drs. Tolrnie and Dawson, of Canada. Willi sonic obvious dfrccls. due 
 to Ciallatin's iinpert'LH't iiiriterials, it lias tin- cavdmal iiu'rit of iiielndiji<; 
 all those groujis of words which art' sprcialty scivict'ahle in fraciiiij the 
 athliatioii of lang-iiagcs, viz., the prima rv trrins uf kinship, the names of 
 the parts of the body, and of the niust conuiion iiatiu'al objects, the pei'- 
 sonal pronouns, and the numerals, in praetiee Anieriean ethnologists 
 have i'ound (Jallatin's vocaiiulary of very gi-eat scientific nsefnluess. 
 They have been able, mainly by its aid. to accomplish already, in great 
 part, the difficult work of elassifyiiig the nuniert)us tri' 'S and languages 
 of N'orth Amciica and hi-ingiiig the ethnology and .rchfcoloay of that 
 region out of utter chaos into some iiopeful or:L-r. The following 
 vocabularies, which have lieen gathered with much care, will, it mav be 
 hoped — taken in connecition witli the grammatical (/utlines given in thi.s 
 and the p!e(!e(iing reports — serve materially to further that important 
 work as well as to ilucidatc (he di\ision into linguistic stocks and 
 dialect ,»re>ented in the map aeconipanying this re[)ort. H. H.^ 
 
 The dialects of the Athapascan (or Tinneh) languages are not con. 
 tained in the list. It would have been desirable to add vocabularies of 
 the Knigani dialect of the Ifaida, of the \a-s(|a dialect of the Tsimshian, 
 and of the liower Kutoiauja, in order to give a complete review of all the 
 distinct dialects of this gi'oup of languayes. Thei-e are slight dilferences 
 between the dialects of various tribes in each group which, however, 
 cannot be included in ilri.s bi-ief iwiew, as they ar*- merely provincialisms 
 which do not hinder (•ommnnicatiou between the tribes. The dialects of 
 the various stocks, particularly tho.se of tlie Salislnin stoi-k. are ari-angcd 
 in gro\ips acccrdiny to th"ir aihliations. 
 
 M.iu 
 
 \\ olii;iii 
 
 - 1 ■ 11 ■ k 
 
 
 Diiili'ol 
 
 
 In.lipi-na.'iil 
 
 111 Coin- 
 |iiniiiiis 
 
 1 niii'|«lli|rlit 
 
 TIiii;ril 
 
 ! 
 
 stiKi'i'ii 
 
 
 k'li, tliii'jit 
 
 
 ■•ii'wilt 
 
 ll.ii.lii 
 
 >t 
 
 Skiilpirat'- 
 
 
 );!i, r''tliii;_'a 
 
 i/'i'dt 
 
 \ve'.<i:iii 
 
 hKv'tl 
 
 ■Ij-ll 
 
 T,'^iiii>liiiiii 
 
 i 
 
 'rsii)i.^lii;iii 
 
 
 hllllfV'lHl 
 
 Kvviikiiitl- 1 
 
 1 
 
 lir-iltMik' 
 
 
 s-'-'aiiK'iii 
 
 Nimfkn ) 
 
 ;> 
 
 Kwiikiiul 
 
 
 1)i;ku;Viuiiii 
 
 
 t>i-:tii'i| 
 
 
 H 
 
 N'lKirkii.'I'-'n 
 
 ■iutli 
 
 tcK'knp 
 
 
 
 atti 
 
 tliVtsliwl 
 
 Salisli 
 
 ~ 
 
 ilililiilM 
 
 
 tl'uiusl-!i' 
 
 ivi'lIiP. 
 
 
 iiimi' 
 
 
 
 yatloltq 
 I'Kiithit. 
 
 
 k'iii'niui 
 .'uviiV 
 
 
 Siltltll 
 
 »Wnni 
 
 
 III 
 
 Slciatl 
 
 
 ^k•n'ln)il| 
 
 
 aliVtim" 
 
 
 n 
 
 .-^iiiiiiiiinniii 
 
 
 "iiO'k'.i 
 
 
 ^t!ii'llr 
 
 
 1L> 
 
 8k-iir5iiii( 
 
 
 •Jiii'-'k-n 
 
 
 
 ■itlfl'lmr 
 
 
 13 
 
 i.kiiripi.ii 
 
 
 siiO'k'ii 
 
 
 ^tlu'iiO 
 
 
 n 
 
 Nt!nk.vii|>iiiijiii| 
 
 ■'k'ft'vriq 
 
 
 I'KtmVtliit'' 
 
 
 l.S 
 
 Stliitlniiai 
 
 
 sk'A'uiii 
 
 
 ciA'k-ioK 
 
 
 16 
 
 SrijiJiirMiimj 
 
 
 .sk'^'jcniiii-i 
 
 
 iiiviiniuu) 
 
 
 17 
 
 ' Ikiina'k'Oi 
 
 
 l!k'KltKllli''<,> 
 
 .,- 
 
 tkitii'iiii-'liHi 
 C'oll..i'liTimKi"''n; 
 
 111 Coiii- 
 
 )>0ll|ll|.5 
 
 k\iiy-,iik«i;m 
 kyH.v-.k'ns 
 
 iik'Siip 
 
 KiifiOnnqa 
 
 19 Columbin Lakes tl'tkaf. 
 
 pii tiki 
 

 i 
 
 i 
 
 ^li' 
 
 142 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 iStoi'k 
 
 KiiiUrt 
 
 box- 
 
 Tliii^rit 1 Siikei'ii irat'a' 
 
 I 
 
 iraMii 
 
 •2 skiil(>witi' f-'vit 
 
 Noutka 
 
 lalisli 
 
 H Vatlcilt-i 
 
 !• rr.iitliitc 
 
 In Siciatl 
 
 11 i^iiaiiainiiui 
 
 12 >k'i|()inic 
 l;i Lkin'i^'Ku 
 
 tco'i 
 
 ^taii'cjoatl 
 iiir'maaii ' 
 sti("'k'a'tl ' 
 
 s,ii'''kMr.il 
 -ur'k-alail 
 
 ifirl 
 
 cfttk' 
 
 Tsim-'hiuii 3 T-iiiis|iiaii wonitlk tlkn haiiiViiq 
 
 Kwakiull- 1 1 lli'ilt^uk' 'iSiKii'i' u''aiii:'iii<i 
 
 Kwakiml ba'hakiirii' kvavfi'laiii' 
 
 l> Niintka.TsTciarli nir-i'tlk-at< lia'ktiati 
 
 7 Bil(|ula ivilivi'lkii ' lliiiiiaV* 
 
 Infant 
 
 P'at'a').'l-.'t.-k«'' (lualcl 
 catk'gK'tsk'i" ( female) 
 
 J'iiqil 
 
 ^'yiiip'(,'> I mail' I 
 wok'Ti'uts' (fcmalfi 
 
 qMiii <| I 
 wi'sa 
 
 iia'iak'ak- 
 
 <a'allq ' 
 ^la'atliKir ' 
 slii'atliiai" ■ 
 -ll.iiia'M ' 
 
 s'liliia'ltl. k'';Viii;i<" 
 slMMtcii'l.-itl 
 
 Ml PI'," tri tcial. 
 t' iti-t.u«ft'a 
 
 k-ii'rl:! " I mall') 
 k'ii'k'c'la ' ( female I 
 
 sk-ak-el 
 k-ak- 
 
 r 
 
 (!i; 
 
 ill 
 
 It Ntlakyaiiamu'i ttiot eiri'iml- .«krikmiirme't 
 
 l.i silatliiinii .^ki 'kT\ u'l ' e'vo'ik'tea ' sk'Ok'mi't 
 
 (.li 
 
 Hi r^Kcjuaimi 111,1 i.ri^e'iit <,iri'iitr.ni 
 
 17 iikaiia'keii ti-.tuue'l 
 
 i,iei,")tl-.lli 
 
 Kut(iiiaiii< 18 C'liliimliia ],akcs st.ilid'tl o'te 
 
 ' -- little miiii. 
 * — iliniiiiiitive, 
 ■• _- witliinu l.ilii-et, 
 
 ■•' - oliiM. 
 
 ' - voiiM^.' woman. 
 
 ' = er:elle I Kwakiiiil). 
 
 tikiiima'iiielt 
 
 sknkiii'mtlt. 
 eiill., sitsl-iiii'a'la 
 
 tlka'mri 
 
 ■' - yiiiiiijr man. 
 " = iittle l)OV, tiiii. 
 • ^ weak. 
 
ON Tin, NORrH-'WE.STERN Tiar!l> OF fANAPA. 
 
 143 
 
 I-'iltlliT 
 
 Mothrr JIu~1>hikI 
 
 Wife 
 
 Cliil.l 
 
 atir 
 
 k-a 
 
 cft'wnt 
 
 LT'iU a' 
 
 kiifi (siuil liy iiiiilci uo 
 qiit, (saiil liy I'eiuali') 
 
 tIAl 
 
 'ij'ii gyit 
 
 iiKfiiiaiit 
 
 il'bi) (iiiMro-;-(.'cl I 
 
 11 a K 
 
 iiaks 
 
 iiak-' 
 
 tlkua'iiiKlk 
 
 iiu iiip (Mt'iii : :nvii-) abo'iik 
 
 at (a(|ilre!<i<.-u'l I 
 
 au'iiip (stci)i : a»i(-i abK'iup 
 
 ats (aiMrcsst''!) at (aiMrcs-cl ) 
 
 tIa'uiiKiii ^.'-'aiiKiii 
 
 lla'UIIKMI 
 
 llo'.'Klk 
 
 I'OllCf., f-'vilUl'llKIl 
 
 ^'I'l'iKik 
 
 t'oIU'c. trviiia'tu",!! 
 
 IHIWrkVi'l 
 
 iin'wO (ai|'li'ps>eil I 
 
 iniiiiii'r''k>ri ti'K'kiip 
 
 6'iiif (aililrt'S-i-'il I 
 
 tlo't~iiia 
 
 I'taii 
 
 k-ii:iiit- lliiar 
 
 iiiK'ii:i ; kr ktp 
 
 man 
 
 
 tan: inklHa' 
 
 • liv--..',! 
 
 1 L'va'k'a-! 
 
 salltq 
 
 Mia'alia 
 
 iii.'ia 
 
 
 ta'a 
 
 
 ciiwa'kMi- 
 
 ti'uwa'c 
 
 liiK.'na 
 
 IIJ.I.II 
 
 
 tan 
 
 
 KU« a'k'av 
 
 ia k 
 
 liir'nian 
 
 niii'ii 
 
 
 tii'li 
 
 
 sta la~ 
 
 t~U'i 
 
 >tlrtlck'atl 
 
 iiiil'iiia 
 
 
 tciVia 
 
 
 tiMiwa'i- 
 
 I.Miua'i' 
 
 in Ml 
 
 Mian 
 
 
 tan 
 
 
 ^\l^■'k•a 
 
 -la Iks 
 
 tirtlk-rn 
 
 MK'nKIUa'l^M 
 
 sk'iv'tsi 
 jifip (aililn 
 
 "fh 
 
 -kilirtsa. a 
 
 'ka 
 
 stiai'owr 
 
 I'laira'rii 
 
 skn'/a 
 
 ••kri'tza 
 
 skT'iirda'a k".aiiiti- iM iii'ii in -ko/a a 
 
 iii'U (aiMr('--i'il) MfMi di'Mri' Ii cull,. -Kn'knza 
 
 
 k-a'at-a 
 
 ryO'ciia 
 
 -(|;ilii;{ 
 
 li;''''u (sanl li> nialoi -k'n'i i -ai.l In nial.'l -ir'lni 
 nii<lni (sTi.) by l.'tiiiiU'i tnin (>ai'l bv VcniMln 
 
 -nial-. Ill 
 
 na. 'jiinq 
 
 small 
 
 sr'Minki- ii-li, (laiifrlitir 
 
 tK'to (sail! hy male I ma 
 so (sail! by li'inalc) 
 
 li'lkat iiii'llki 
 
 tlkainn 
 
 '* 
 

 ii ! 
 
 { • 
 
 t 
 
 f:i: 
 
 
 ii;f 
 
 114 
 
 .■■tiii;k 
 
 'I'liiiglt 
 
 Hai'lM 
 
 T-iiiisliian 
 
 KuiiKi'i'l- ' 
 Nootkii 
 
 .Sili^li 
 
 Kuloiiaci 
 
 .-lork 
 
 TliiiL'it 
 
 Hai'lii 
 
 Tsiuisliiaii 
 
 Kwaktutl- 
 Nootka 
 
 Sallsli 
 
 Kiitiiiin(\a 
 
 iJialert 
 1 .~likiTM 
 
 i! skiili'L'atf 
 
 3 'rsiiiisliiaii 
 
 t llrMJt^Mk- 
 .') Kwakiutl 
 
 nr-.r-oRT— ISOO. 
 
 I'ililer brotliir 
 
 iiiiii'i| 
 
 >.'iia'l 
 
 wejfV (said bv iijali') 
 
 Vu'.iiij-'i.'r lirutlier 
 
 kik' 
 
 ila'orKM 
 
 tli'iiiktr' i-iaiil In Iciiiale) 
 
 liiiiiaii 
 
 MO la 
 '1 Nootka.'lV'i'ciar ii tai'ic 
 
 Mo'ln : ^rvi'i (U'l'IrossiMJ) tsTi'ea ; wis (aiMri'>-^i'il) 
 
 7 IliLnila 
 
 M (;iltlnltM 
 
 !l I'KTltlaH' 
 
 III SiciatI 
 
 II Snaiiiiiiiiiii| 
 
 !".' >k'i|MMii(,' 
 
 !.■) r,kiiriL.'l'.M 
 
 k-oa'liii 
 
 IH'l'lltl ' 
 
 (!(■•' Wit 
 
 sKtla'aM.n, iiMiitl 
 >i:fla'("tRii 
 
 i-a'itl 
 
 It .Nrl:ik.va]iaiiiU'| k'atck' 
 15 Stlalliiiiill k't.k'trik ■ 
 
 In i^i:i,iiia|iiiini,i 
 17 I ikaiin'k'rii 
 l.S r(iliiiriliia Lake 
 
 k-a'Isk-a 
 
 tik'a'k't.-a 
 
 tilt 
 
 ts'a'ea ; wis (a^Mressi'ili 
 k'atla'trk' 
 
 a'no 
 
 k'r'('i| 
 
 kT'c'i 
 
 k("''<vi : kali '(' 
 
 fka'ck' 
 
 sk-iik- 
 
 -ii'iti'i M 
 
 ri'tiiri 
 i'irk''fia'i|/ 
 
 skiirA'n"' 
 
 si'sKiitsa ' 
 
 tsiY 
 
 tlinuit 
 
 ha''i'iiiii 
 l)a'i|'iiiii 
 
 knK':< 
 
 sk'a'iritiiiiv 
 
 vu'lnim,! 
 
 Viio'lniii,! 
 
 >tK'liiiii,i 
 
 HiiO'linii.i 
 
 ska'iiui 
 ri'i.niiliiiiii 
 
 sk-flg 
 
 t<Kii a-ilscnia' 
 kinik 
 
 l!iirrii^>'"l I'viiai Kwakiiiil. 
 tll.ik'ia, pMi'i- sistor. 
 
 1-OlVlll'o I 
 
 k'i;'i|k-i'ii. I'M'T -i~tiT. 
 Mi'Kti'Ko'jis, ymiiiyfi' >i-t('r. 
 
 Kai- 
 
 liiali'i't 
 
 IlplclH-lllll'Ilt IlM'ntiipiillMiU Ilp!i'I>rll'|i'llt III I'nllipnllMiN 
 
 1 Miki'iai 
 
 kak- 
 
 — 
 
 Ifflk 
 
 ~" 
 
 
 2 Skiili'trate 
 
 k'lil 
 
 
 g.VO 
 
 
 
 3 Tsiiiisliiaii 
 
 wilpii 
 
 — 
 
 1110 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 llOiltsiik- 
 5 Kwakiutl 
 
 ti:k-("''i<m 
 o'k wi war 
 
 c'ioa 
 aiif' 
 
 h'F.sli("'yn ' 
 h'l-:'shaya 
 
 1 — atoa 
 [ -atoo 
 
 
 li NiHitka.TsTTiatl] 
 
 iiiiits il't'a 
 i'loiiia 
 
 — 
 
 pa'p'e 
 
 ta'iikllta 
 
 1 — i'mtl 
 
 1 
 
 T Iiil.|nla 
 
 alsikyaii 
 
 8 yatlniti| 
 n I'Kiitlati' 
 111 Sii'iatl 
 
 11 SiiaiiaiUHK) 
 
 12 ^k•l|Olllic• 
 l.'i Lkun^'lMi 
 
 i''itrsi;M 
 
 •:iktM"'ii 
 
 R'ltctKli 
 
 sk''(i'inals 
 
 st'o'kyiis 
 
 k-'iVii'ini|!! 
 
 — 
 
 ■ ■ * 1 
 
 1 k'Ha'aiia 
 sqnO'iia 
 k'ula'iia 
 k''ii'iii:ii 
 k''o'laa 
 k''i)'li;ii 
 
 iiil 
 
 
 11 NtlakyapauiiHi 
 I'l StlatluiMll 
 
 a'lkrims 
 
 k rill IS 
 
 tl'a'iiO 
 tl'r.'iiH 
 
 I'ana 
 
 i 
 
 Hi SK9iia|aiiiii,> 
 
 tk'aiur'sHin 
 
 — isiiiMi 
 
 tlTi'iia 
 
 ana 
 
 
 17 Okana'k-rMi 
 
 k'aiin''lsi;|r.ii 
 
 iVgKli 
 
 t'f'iia 
 
 I'lia 
 
 
 IH ('Mliuiilila reiki's 
 
 iii|klM^'ii'tl 
 
 
 aii;; ri'k'ont 
 
 1 ' 1 
 
 
 )i li-po yi 
 
Imliaii 
 
 8) 
 
 (la'eilu 
 
 Vi;i'i|'ilin 
 l)n'i|'uiii 
 
 kol-.'s 
 
 sk'ii'lOiiiiy 
 
 i,iun'linii,< 
 ^tl■;'llnil,) 
 qurlmic,) 
 
 ."k il iui| 
 ri'(,uiiliiiii,i 
 
 sk'flg 
 
 t-^Kii iiil-^cniii' 
 kiiiik 
 
 Km- 
 
 I ri i''iiii])ciiiiii|- 
 
 iit<iii 
 
 iiicir' 
 i'liitl 
 -alsikviin 
 
 Villlii 
 
 -Biin 
 
 •»j«>j|^ 
 
 ON THE NOUTII-WRSTEUN TRIBK.S OF CANAnA. 
 
 145 
 
 People 
 
 Head 
 
 Imleiicndent 
 
 tliugit 
 
 111 COUl- 
 IMIlUlilH 
 
 IiiiU'lX'inli'iit 
 
 111 COlll- 
 )l(lllllc|> 
 
 Ifiiir I'lict; 
 
 in,ie,.,i.in,t i-;;;- .,„i..p..,.,,..,„ ';;,;;;2 
 
 cift'filqa 
 
 6ath 
 
 -cnoq.-itq 
 -Ciioq 
 
 — ath 
 — UlV 
 
 k'ai'miy 
 
 vi'va ' 
 vfl'yits ' 
 
 tca'.iiii' 
 
 k'E'lmuq 
 
 uiiiv 
 
 sEuak'se liui 
 iUitseiua'kinik 
 
 ca 
 
 • 
 
 caqi'wii •■ 
 
 — 
 
 IK 
 
 — 
 
 : k-a'tsC 
 
 
 k-'aitl 
 
 — 
 
 (lafi 
 
 — 
 
 1 tBmg-a'u>; 
 
 — 
 
 g'a'iis 
 
 — 
 
 ts'al 
 
 — 
 
 liai'Hte 
 1 ha'iute 
 
 — k'f'u 
 -k'«i 
 
 sa'iii 
 
 sa'iu 
 
 liap- 
 Imp— 
 
 k'Ok'Cmc' 
 k'Sk'ouie' 
 
 — EDlC 
 
 — Kuie 
 
 i t'o'qts'ite 
 
 1 
 
 — 
 
 lia'iis'iiip 
 
 hap- 
 
 liitloti 
 
 —ml 
 
 tK.iia'(i 
 
 -(■.ail 
 
 mK'liik-na 
 
 — 
 
 iiio'sa 
 
 — OS 
 
 uiOo'v 
 
 .sqio's 
 
 uioO's 
 
 ; sqa'yis 
 
 ! suiSO's 
 
 — ck- 
 
 —Ilk 
 
 —kTii 
 ■ ■ 
 — a'yak'Kii 
 
 nia'k'Oii 
 
 sqik'C'ii 
 
 snia'k'tii 
 
 ca'yitEii 
 
 sk-'ouia'i 
 
 sI'atRii 
 
 r^ky'a'pkiiii 
 uiaTt-cii 
 
 — 
 
 uioo'v 
 
 si^uiO'stcii 
 
 uioo's 
 
 v'a'vKs 
 s'a'tsiw 
 
 ~6s 
 
 k-'ii'mk-an 
 1 k-"i)'mk'En 
 
 — 
 
 sktluo 
 ok'utlo's 
 
 -eT 
 
 , sk'a'pk'Eu 
 
 k-a'iitKii 
 
 sk'tlOs 
 
 —6s 
 
 1 tsa'eiak-Eii 
 
 k'apk-f'ntFu 
 
 -- 
 
 sk'tlOs 
 
 -& • 
 
 aqktlilui 
 
 aqg'ok-otla'in 
 
 Relatives. 
 
 = lioacl hair, 
 
 Eye 
 
 Nose 
 
 Moutli 
 
 Tongue 
 
 Imlupeiuleiit 
 
 III coui- 
 poiuiils 
 
 Iiiilependeut 
 
 111 com 
 pouml:- 
 
 j^' Iiidu,.eiiiii'iit 
 
 In com- 
 pounds 
 
 Independent 
 
 lu COUl- 
 
 ponndi 
 
 wftk- 
 
 — 
 
 qa'iigC 
 
 — 
 
 Wlll'K'l 
 
 — 
 
 k-ks 
 k-4'yak'.s 
 
 — qstoa 
 — qstoO 
 
 Ica'se 
 
 — ksutl 
 
 tlkdoks 
 
 — otla'k'os 
 
 k-a'wQm 
 
 k'KlC'iu 
 
 k'Klo'm 
 
 k'a'lEui 
 
 k-Kl6'm 
 
 k-a'lEui 
 
 1 i 1 1 1 1 
 
 1 nuktl'u'otBN 
 1 tl'o'ctKn 
 
 — aluo 
 
 tra'stEu 
 
 — 
 
 (REUUkHlfl'stEll 
 
 — 
 
 aqg'*'ktlitl 
 
 — 
 
 — I tia 
 
 — , k-'a 
 
 trdt 
 
 kuu 
 
 ds'aq 
 
 11 milk 
 Hi'iits'as 
 
 ni'ts'a 
 
 qe'tl'e 
 
 — t'a'figKl 
 
 — I kutra'(i 
 
 du'Ela 
 
 -itlpa 
 -itlpa 
 
 sums 
 
 iUUlS 
 
 —qtafi 
 
 gyi'lEni 
 
 -alita ' vi'neksutl 
 
 — qsta6 gyi'luui 
 — akirutl I tc'up 
 
 — alk's 
 
 ..aQ'tsn 
 
 -ots 
 
 tl'Htsa 
 
 -If'its 
 
 ruE'k-sKii 
 mE'k'SKu 
 mK'k'sKii 
 mE'k'siai 
 
 UlE'k'SKll 
 
 nK'k-sEU 
 
 aqknik'tsa'tla — 
 
 — I i;6'?iii 
 
 — [ (jfl'sin 
 
 — i (jil'sin 
 
 — tsC'tsKli 
 — Ek'SKn sS'sEii 
 
 — splQ'tcin 
 -alEk's 1 tcu'tt'iii 
 
 ■ak's ' splQ'tcin 
 
 ak's I spEle'intsEii 
 
 aqk'atlu'ma 
 
 te'qvuatl 
 
 te'q(;u;ul 
 
 te'q(,imtl 
 
 te'q<;utl 
 
 niEk-a'liitsntl 
 
 te'qsEtl 
 
 ta'tla 
 -ite tfi'lla 
 
 — tsin tiquil'atsk' 
 
 -a'UBk'Kn] ;eQto 
 
 watlOna'k' 
 
 ' ^ point. 
 
 nO 
 
'T 
 
 
 i i * ]i 
 
 I* 
 
 f 
 
 146 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 
 
 Dialect 
 
 1 Stikeeii 
 
 2 Skiilogato 
 
 3 Tsimsliiaii 
 
 Tootli 
 
 IikIo- In coiu- 
 ppinlont iKjiiiiils 
 
 Beard 
 k-atatsft'yt" 
 
 X 
 
 r.c'n. 
 
 
 Ptnck 
 
 IiideiHMidcut 
 
 dlftu'q 
 
 qil 
 
 t'Eniia'n5 
 
 g''6f?''6'iie 
 g-'og'o'n 
 
 Ill compounds 
 
 Tliiisit 
 
 ., 
 
 
 
 Hai.la 
 
 dz'iiu 
 
 sk-'t-'ore 
 
 — 
 
 1 Tsiiii^liian 
 
 ua'n — 
 
 emq 
 
 Iiapeiisift' ' 
 !iapa'(isteya " 
 
 — 
 
 Kwakiiitl- ) 
 Nootka j 
 
 4 Uciltsnk- 
 
 5 Kwakiiitl 
 
 6 Nootka.T.s'tfiatli 
 
 7 Bilqnla 
 
 gyiky — Hsia 
 gyiky — iiwij 
 
 tci'tcitci — 
 
 
 
 lia'paksuui '' 
 (•k-ob6'ts 
 
 ts'C''kiiiuEts 
 asa'lqo 
 
 — 
 
 Sali>li 
 
 I'tsa — qa'lits 
 
 
 
 8 CatlGlt(i 
 
 9 PKiitlatc 
 
 10 Siciatl 
 
 11 Siianaiumq 
 
 12 Sk-qOuiic 
 
 13 LkiiHgEii 
 
 dji'iiis — 
 yi'iiia - 
 yi'nls — 
 ve'iias — 
 yi'iiI's 
 
 tSE'llES j — 
 
 qia'q — 
 ra'itcniKii — 
 
 qEla'q — 
 
 k'o'po^Eii 
 
 k-o'povKii 
 
 k'op6'f)(,'iii 
 
 k'niiH"'i(;i:n 
 
 sk-oa'ns 
 
 k-oai'iiiseii 
 
 euptci'n 
 cwuptc 
 
 sa'itlatl 
 
 sik'tlsf-'i! 
 
 s'a'ltlatl 
 
 a'ltlatl 
 
 k-E'nKk- 
 
 qoS'Bgan 
 
 sk''anie'tEn 
 k-a'k-anaa 
 
 — 
 
 
 14 Ntlakvapamnq 
 
 15 StlnthiniH 
 
 — atlk'uitl 
 
 
 16 SEQliapuiUQ 
 
 suptsB'n 
 
 qkuya'pstEu 
 
 — vapstEn 
 
 
 17 Okaiia'k-en 
 
 aai'tEuiEii — 
 
 c5ptcB'u 
 
 kEspa'ii 
 
 — 
 
 
 Kutouiqa 
 
 18 Columbia Lakes 
 
 aqk'u'naii, — 
 
 aqkuk'tla'qa 
 
 aqgo'ugak 
 
 — 
 
 
 = tooth hair. 
 
 " = mouth hair. 
 
 Stock 
 
 Dialect 
 
 Nail 
 
 Body 
 
 Chest 
 
 
 Independent 
 
 In com- 
 pounds 
 
 --na 
 — na 
 
 Independent 
 
 In com- 
 pounds 
 
 Tlingit 
 
 1 Stikeeu 
 
 qak- 
 
 
 Hctka 
 
 — 
 
 Ilaida 
 
 2 Skidegate 
 
 sl'g'u'ii 
 
 tca'iu" 
 
 k'an 
 
 — 
 
 Tsiuishian 
 
 3 TsiuiRliian 
 
 tlKllS 
 
 
 k-a'yek- 
 
 — 
 
 Kwakiiitl- 1 
 Nootka / 
 
 4 Hciltsuk- 
 6 Kwakiiitl 
 
 ts'F.'uits'Kinskyaiic 
 
 ts'K'nits'EUl 
 
 ok'oiia' 
 ok'ona' 
 
 tqk'apoa' 
 opoP 
 
 — iwa 
 —pot' 
 
 6 Nootka. Ts'eciatli 
 
 te'a'tltc'ft 
 
 
 -p'a 
 — aios 
 
 ama'shotl 
 
 -shotl 
 
 Salish 
 
 7 Bilqula 
 
 
 sk-'atiic'qoak 
 
 s'o'nqta 
 
 sk*ma 
 
 — alos 
 
 
 8 Catieitii 
 
 9 PKiitlatc 
 
 10 Siciatl 
 
 11 SiiaiiainiiKi 
 I'J Sk-i,miiic 
 l;j Lk iTigKii 
 
 knp'adjek'o'dja 
 
 qolO'k-ov'i 
 
 k'ap'c'koyaiii 
 
 kqoa'lautsis 
 
 kiioyi'kO'yatc 
 
 toea'lses 
 
 gi'Cus 
 \vt"'yiis 
 
 tca'10iti;n 
 
 — -Ckus 
 
 aie'nas 
 
 sek-enfi's 
 
 alu'na.s 
 
 s'e'les 
 
 s'e'lcucs 
 
 tsrigatl 
 
 — ?nEs 
 — enES 
 
 
 14 Xtlakviijiaiiiiiq 
 
 15 StlaiMimii 
 
 k'liqke'nkqst 
 k'ljkciiakaa 
 
 UlKlVtC 
 
 — 
 
 tliknuVcitck 
 ta'qoatc 
 
 — qoatc 
 
 
 
 IG SKfjuiipuiuQ 
 
 'k'oqkoe'iiek'st 
 
 snwa'uuq — 
 
 tkma'lis 
 
 -ails 
 
 17 Okaiia'kcii 
 
 18 Coliniitiia Lakes 
 
 k-ii.|ki"iikHst 
 aqgOukp 
 
 skrtlk' 
 
 — _- 
 
 sky'iltkauiF'les 
 
 skyilt- 
 O'les 
 
 Kutounfia ■ 
 
 ~ 
 
 aqguwi'tr.gak 
 
 — 
 
 '\- 
 

 i 
 
 Xcck 
 
 It In compoiiiiil- 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 •■ 
 
 — atlk'uitl 
 — .vapstEn 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 Chest 
 
 ttdent 
 
 In com- 
 pounds 
 
 -poa 
 -poO 
 
 — shotl 
 
 
 — alCs 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 
 — &nKs 
 
 
 
 — enEs 
 
 
 .■k 
 
 — qoato 
 
 
 1 
 
 -aiis 
 
 
 ifles 
 
 skvilt— 
 
 O'les 
 
 
 gak j 
 
 — 
 
 
 ON THE NORTir-TVESTElJN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 147 
 
 i« 
 
 r 
 
 Arm 
 
 Indopondont Vi.'^T" 
 
 ll.llU 
 
 Hi 
 an'o'n 
 
 Haii.l 
 
 In.lcpon.lont \ !" ''"V'^ 
 
 pii\llli|S 
 
 tljin 
 
 — trc'k 
 
 Fiuscr 
 
 Thiinil) 
 
 go'tio 
 
 orisiap (.' 
 a,'\'aso 
 
 — j sla'C 
 an'o'n 
 
 slk''a'figO 
 
 aap)ii'mtl 
 stl'qya 
 
 I toia'iiis 
 I sik'oliKia'ii 
 I tcia'las 
 
 i fa'io 
 
 naqtc 
 
 t'a'io 
 
 ke'iq 
 
 sqora'iiKli 
 
 kahi 
 kilH 
 aqktla'at 
 
 -sinpO' 
 
 — yeniitl 
 
 11— aqnu 
 
 liaia'so -skyaiu' k-oaiv-oaqskyaiiC' 
 
 k'oa'k'oaqt^ana —taina k'i'ia'k-oaqtM\iic 
 
 sli'k'iisT 
 
 uuls 
 
 k'o'na 
 k'u'iiia 
 
 kwi'knnikso ■ — imk 
 
 ts'ats'atlak'nukn'niE 
 
 iitsTi'tlikak 
 
 — sk'iUic'lijsek 
 
 ! !i;liknniE'ts 
 k'O'iia ' 
 
 kutCtsiiioMja ] — fMlja toa'las 
 
 sik'enatfO'ya ' — Oya (loa'nk'oilja 
 
 knt'ocinO'ya ' —oya niko'vats 
 
 tcii'lic ! — autsis i (lolik'b'ya 
 
 — , —autsis \ suF.'qtsks 
 
 sals ! — asEs — 
 
 tliiqCk'u'ilja 
 
 thitl(iO'qk'uya 
 
 tlaqnk'O'ya' 
 
 sHntia'laiitsis-' 
 
 asf'ntlEk'O'yatc' 
 
 sltla'lesos '" " 
 
 — aqan 
 
 ?kna'k-it 
 
 kilH 
 aqgF'i 
 
 — , iKqkst 
 
 -akaa ([Ola'ka 
 
 skiaqp'nkst 
 tsk'(')'lak-a, skiraTca 
 
 — k'st li:qli'(ik-st 
 
 — kfist kilir 
 
 sHatEmqa'k'st ' 
 -tiimkiist 
 
 nqf-'Etsfr-a 
 
 .Vntsa'k 
 
 ' BoiTowed from Kwakiutl, 
 
 :liaiidV oMor Ijrothcr. 
 
 Bellv 
 
 Iii'lepeudoiit 
 
 In com- 
 pounils 
 
 JeI 
 
 bEn 
 
 Female 
 ljrcast>- 
 
 Leg 
 
 Foot 
 
 Iii'lopcnacnt ,Ii"-'"'"-. I"'l'^- I In com- 1 
 pnumls poinlciit I pounds ; 
 
 Togs 
 
 tla 
 
 kan 
 
 k'os 
 gy'atl 
 
 k''6s 
 — I st'a'e 
 
 i tkv'e 
 I ta'ikye 
 
 ta'atca 
 
 — iiakv 
 
 k'ul 
 
 koa'oa 
 
 kula' 
 
 k'lilfi' 
 
 k'oa'la 
 
 k'ld 
 
 k'ula' 
 
 us— Ctsitl 
 
 — k'cii 
 
 rolc'n 
 
 wula'uk 
 
 sk'ultseuG'nk 
 
 -ank 
 -Ouk 
 
 aqkowu'ni 
 
 ts'am ' 
 ts'ani ' 
 
 \ asa'iiotswitir 
 ; OniitsK'qsti" 
 
 — SI 
 
 k-'6s tl'fk- 
 st'a k''a'figP 
 
 — i ku'kiiO I — sitsC I k'oa'k'oasitse 
 
 — I pyu'koin — sitse ; k-oa'k'oasTtsO 
 
 i'uEuia 
 tfinis ' 
 
 ai'tsita'ktli' " 
 
 tliVtliii 
 
 -ti'mE ts'ats'atlnk-ti'niE 
 
 iia 
 
 skiitlqsEtl 
 
 tsu'iiiti:ii I 
 sk'iniia'i)' I 
 k'Kmu'o ' j 
 sk'uia ' j 
 stHlk'(U''ni ' i 
 sk'uia ' I 
 
 'A 
 
 dji'cin 
 
 — ciu 
 
 a'utoiii 
 
 —cm 
 
 yi'oiii 
 
 — 
 
 sqo'nu 
 
 — cm 
 
 Sqn'l 
 
 —ciu 
 
 sqo'iia 
 
 — aitcitc 
 
 
 — SKll " 
 
 sk'Ea'm 
 sk'aa'm 
 sk-cC'ms ' 
 
 s 
 
 sk''aqt 
 sk'aqt 
 
 — qKll 
 — qi:n 
 
 sk''oft'(it 
 sts'o'qan 
 
 -qi;n 
 -(ost)qKn 
 
 qoa'oadjiciii 
 (lUlck'O'cin 
 
 sua'qcin 
 nefik'5'icin 
 
 IcqqKli 
 ni:qu'li(ii;ii 
 
 h'qqi:u 
 sto'UKlEU 
 
 a'qsak- 
 
 — acjkti'k 
 
 aqkinka'tUk 
 
 ' From to Slick. 
 
 ■' Outer sido ol' tliigli, 
 
 10a 
 
 Lc'!?. 
 
 Foot. 
 
•'T 
 
 li 
 
 If 
 
 f . 
 
 
 it 
 
 III 
 
 148 
 
 TJRPORT — 1890. 
 
 stock 
 
 Dinl.'Ct 
 
 llOIll' 
 
 Heart 
 
 rilm»l 
 
 Towi 
 
 Chief 
 
 Tliiigit 
 UnMa 
 
 Tsiiiisliiaii 
 
 K wakiilll- . 
 Nool ka 
 
 ^■ali-U 
 
 1 Stikffii 
 
 2 Skiilogato 
 ;j T-iinaliian 
 
 4 H("'ilt>uk' 
 
 5 Kwakintl 
 
 t 
 
 j s'flk' 
 
 I-- - -- 
 skTi'tsf- 
 
 tfk' 
 
 ti'k'n'yii 
 
 k-a'ot 
 
 j wa'stKiiia 
 1 iio'kiO 
 
 1 
 
 Oi 
 
 itlf 
 
 la'na 
 k-'a'lils'ap 
 
 auk-aV) 
 ("tUiaqagiila ' 
 
 siVynp 
 
 sKin'u'ylt 
 
 qak- 
 qak' 
 
 a'lg'um 
 nig- 
 
 gok' 
 gyrtk- 
 
 hO'mas 
 gyi'k'niiitV 
 
 6 Nootka.Ts'f«iHtli 
 
 lia'iiiat 
 
 t'i'tcma 
 
 he'smis 
 
 llia'iitl 
 apso'tl 
 
 lia'iitl, tca'inat.'i 
 
 7 Bilqula 
 
 K C'atloltii 
 !) PKiitlat.' 
 
 10 '^iciatl 
 
 11 Siianaiiiinii 
 
 12 Sk'firnuic 
 
 13 LkiingKii 
 
 tsftp 
 
 qan'cill 
 ciaV) 
 
 (•ti;ani 
 
 ca'i) 
 
 sts'ain 
 
 sKlku 
 
 I tlfl'qpgan 
 
 stK'uukii 
 ' tla'qi'wnn 
 
 tsH'la 
 
 ts'a'lp 
 
 tlHkoa'figal 
 
 dill 
 
 stalto'niH 
 
 k-uf''tl 
 
 kri'i'tl 
 
 skuO'tl 
 
 (,'o'<;in 
 
 stii'tsiPm 
 
 ciictcin 
 
 raeal 
 meal 
 vacai 
 vaeal 
 vacat 
 meat 
 
 lu"'gyni< 
 
 ll("'WU.S 
 
 siii'iii 
 siiVm 
 si&'iii 
 
 14 NilakyaiiaiiiiKi 
 
 15 Stlatluinli 
 
 k-'ok'6'otl 
 k''ok-"ri'itl 
 
 sguo'qSk 
 sgiin'knk 
 
 pKti'la 
 IJti'laa 
 
 lut'tky'ie'e 
 
 vaeal 
 tcitoltq ■ 
 
 kiTkpi ' 
 ko'kpi 
 
 
 ; IG SKQuapnnu^ 
 
 k-uk-qO'otl 
 
 p'fl'aniKii 
 
 tCltoI'tQ ' 
 
 kS'kpi 
 
 
 j 17 Okana'k'Oii 
 
 sts'fm 
 iiia'ki-: 
 
 epflS's 
 
 niKtlkG'a 
 
 tcItcVtg ' 
 
 hlline'Qum 
 
 Kutoiiaija 
 
 1 18 Columbia Lakes 
 
 aqkithve' 
 
 wn'nmd 
 
 aqkKktlo' 
 
 iiaso'kO 
 
 = houses. 
 
 •^ =the liighost chief. 
 
 ko'kpi, Bilqula=graii(Uathor. 
 
 if 
 
 \\. ■■ 
 
 1 
 
 \\ 
 
 stock 
 
 Tlingit 
 
 Haiila 
 
 Tsimshian 
 
 Kwakiutl- 
 Nootka 
 
 Salish 
 
 Dialect 
 
 j 1 Stikoeu 
 
 i 2 Sklilegate 
 
 ; 3 Taimshiau 
 
 ' 4 Heiltsuk- 
 I 5 Kwaklutl 
 
 Axe 
 
 cEuqoa'ri 
 
 kyetldsa'6 
 
 ilahE'rEs 
 
 k'o'kuiiakula 
 sop'a'yo 
 
 Knife 
 
 tlta 
 
 sqft'u 
 
 Canoe 
 
 Imlependent 
 
 yft'uk 
 
 tlo'H 
 
 liatlebi'esk 
 
 qtai'o 
 ky'anwai'd 
 
 j 6 Nootka.Ts'eciath 
 
 j 7 Biliiuhv 
 
 j 8 CatlSltq 
 j 9 PKiitlatc 
 I 10 Siciatl 
 
 11 Siianaiinuq 
 
 12 ak'q8mic 
 
 13 LkuQgKii 
 
 Kutouaqa 
 
 14 Ntlakvapaniuq 
 
 15 StlatlumB 
 
 iC SEQuapmuQ 
 17 Okana'k-Pn 
 
 hi'siyek- 
 tqta 
 
 j a'kyek- 
 ! k-tla 
 
 s'flpai'a ' 
 a'Spai'fl ' 
 so'paius ' 
 sk'k'um 
 kk'u'mEii 
 k'k'um 
 
 k-'d'isk'an 
 k''o5'ck'fii, tlamC'u 
 
 tlRmS'u 
 qF.lKtnl'n 
 
 18 Columbia Lakes i aqkatle'etis 
 
 tcta'Pten 
 
 skuS'tctau 
 tm'tstEii 
 tlaatctKn 
 ci'piin 
 
 qsa 
 
 gyi'l'oa 
 
 gya'io - 
 
 tca'pats 
 
 tia'las 
 
 CElI'i 
 Qwi'k'tEU 
 
 sk'umiy 
 ne'k'amEn 
 
 DE'quitl 
 
 iiK'quitl 
 
 UEqui'tl 
 
 snK'quitl 
 
 siiE'qiiitl 
 
 snK'quitl 
 
 tskaa'uti 
 kBlats 
 
 astk'&'utl 
 : sta'tlGm 
 
 In Com- 
 pounds 
 
 -qs 
 
 —aha 
 
 -QUtl 
 
 -autl 
 
 aqktsa'mOtl I yak-tso'mltl 
 
 Borrowed from Kwaklutl. 
 
 ' Obsolete, generally calUd quaVuua. 
 
 'Mi 
 
Chief 
 
 I 
 
 auk'fi'n 
 
 i Ptlciminpiiln 
 
 ip suni'ii'yit 
 
 liO'iiiiis 
 I f.'yi'k'niii(V' 
 
 liii'iitl, tca'iiiat.'i 
 
 stnlto'iiut 
 
 lu*'gyii-< 
 li("'wus 
 
 iir>'uu.s 
 
 siit'iii 
 sin'm 
 sia'ni 
 
 ! kiTkpi^ 
 ko'kpi 
 
 ' ko'kpi 
 
 ' i liilme'Qum 
 
 ': imso'kO 
 ilfather. 
 
 Cnnoe 
 
 In Com- 
 pounds 
 
 — qs 
 —ah 3 
 
 -Qutl 
 
 — Sutl 
 
 lan. 
 
 ON tHE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 149 
 
 Warrior 
 
 I'rif'ii'l 
 
 House 
 
 lnae,x)..,lcut i^^ 
 
 Kettle 
 
 Dow 
 
 Arrow 
 
 g'aus'atc' ' 
 gutl'i'sta 
 
 (lOllc' 
 
 hit 
 
 11:1 
 
 que' 
 
 nKsc'bnnsk wfilp 
 
 oii'akilganti;' «Kk*8 
 k'tt-etln tIk-Ct 
 
 liaukta'k- 
 
 wiiiaC'iio(i 
 lua'ptaii^atli 
 
 DKmO'k- 
 
 liowfrti.n 
 
 k-aiiia'itis 
 
 Kok- 
 gyok' 
 
 —HI 
 —HI 
 
 lianiitlala ' 
 liaiiiitlivia ' 
 
 tlkm"'s 
 tlkuO's 
 
 tcuiiC't 
 
 ' tsTtalKn 
 
 , lifuia'l 
 
 hiViitll.in 
 • hiViitlDiii 
 
 iiiiihtr 
 
 sotl 
 
 itii'iuic 
 riuc'k'a - 
 i-li;li|0'li;tl 
 
 ui.k'ca'iii;k 
 
 tciVlac 
 siii'ia 
 
 tli;ms, iVva 
 
 tlLins 
 
 tli;iii,('htni,iii 
 
 lii'l 1:111 
 
 lam 
 
 il'li-.n 
 
 Otl| 
 
 sfitl 
 
 i|iiiiisVtl« ' 
 
 ha'iiiKtlala ' 
 
 hi'i'iiiiitlitla ' 
 
 k'u'lstaii 
 
 I'k'iia'N 
 
 iik'O'istiii 
 
 I'k'uk'u'N 
 
 mo'statO 
 
 pc">'t>ti:ii 
 
 ts'r'lmtO 
 
 tslllM'llltil 
 
 haiht"' 
 
 k-t.-("'itc 
 
 liaia'iti.ii 
 
 tii'itoats 
 
 to'((oats 
 
 tlnk' 
 
 fat^'O'iiifii 
 tlOk- 
 skiilii'c 
 ~i;k'i:Ia'( 
 
 (.•ii'unia'ti.ii tsi.mii'ii 
 
 tcit(,i 
 
 t?l'tUi^ 
 
 iliiiO'k'a 
 tck'o'ctl.ii 
 
 tekui'iii;k >kur 
 to'(ioati' k"ciiui'litt 
 
 guwaiiak-niia'iiiau'f" sQwo' 
 
 tsitv 
 tcitv 
 aijgitla' 
 
 : war master. 
 
 — tlkap 
 tlkflp 
 
 — yi'tski 
 =kottlc on tii'u. 
 
 tokui'liik >kiiil 
 ti'kut'nik tokO'h-.ii 
 faVi a(|k'iii|iiiiiatlfVt 
 
 ' HoiTouiM irciii Kwnkiiitl. 
 
 I 
 
 Moeoasins 
 
 i'ilic 
 
 Tubat'co 
 
 •Sky 
 
 Sua 
 
 .•.r.iui 
 
 :5tar 
 
 titl 
 
 ts'tkvlaket 
 
 ' g-a'('ii (la'd 
 
 g-iiiitc 
 
 gill 
 
 1 wuiida' 
 
 1 till uk- 
 ; tlfi'iik- 
 
 akawaqa't- 
 
 i'l'iii 
 dzilfOL' 
 
 cll> 
 
 kutaqareiiaha' 
 
 st'iltlk'u'iikyO 
 
 k'oyrk'a ran 
 ts'Eiii lai|ii' 
 
 k-'ni'i 
 gyii'iii'iik 
 
 iio'^i 
 
 liiu'k'cila 
 
 k'f'itMi'o 
 
 ts'il'oqs 
 
 aqpeyii'ii 
 
 gyr'ni'rk 
 
 tl'Oll lOiilii 
 tir'sKla 
 
 p'ia'N 
 
 k-e'naq 
 t'i'pa'yd 
 
 wa'(iats(. = 
 wa'q'atsi" " 
 
 iKwa' 
 lo'ua 
 
 t'o'tna 
 t'n't<ia 
 
 tlKk-'fViuK ' 
 
 kn'usRts 
 nusu'k'pta 
 
 tPiVuk- 
 
 liiiia'yitl 
 
 nus 
 
 sriiiii 
 
 lifipa'tl 
 
 tatVVs 
 
 k'OiKi 
 
 tlTikH 
 
 iiiciiiiir'kiiti 
 
 tlK'k-ciii 
 
 tli-:'k-cin 
 
 tlK'kx'iii 
 
 k-tlii'itciii 
 
 ktir'isiii 
 
 ktli''itciii 
 
 '.va'<i'at.M'' 
 
 wri'()"at.snii ' 
 
 p'a'tlKma'ir 
 
 cpr.tlEma'lak' 
 
 iitsk'tVtstKn 
 
 potlKina'la 
 
 a'wak' 
 a'uak- 
 spa'tll-.M 
 >pri'ltKii 
 
 SIKJ'I'KII 
 
 kiiii'vaiio 
 
 -kiiiX'yil 
 
 skiia'vil 
 
 ^kua'yil 
 
 >kiu\'yil 
 
 skoa'tfil 
 
 iK'gyiiii 
 -t'l'qi'm 
 
 :<tsok' 
 
 cliVkiiiii 
 tlk-a'itc 
 ^k-ok'o'l 
 
 tK'iryim 
 
 >pi''lo.S 
 
 cii/lsiatl 
 tlk-iilt- 
 tlkTi'itc 
 tlk-altc 
 
 kuri'>i;ii 
 
 kiio'sil 
 
 kmVsi'ii 
 
 Koil'^Mi 
 
 ko'spn 
 
 ka'sKii 
 
 oitltso'we 
 oi'tltsO 
 
 iitnak'o'OtftKii 
 ts'k'O'otctEil 
 
 tsk'o'otKti 
 
 ('i:ui("'irK(i 
 cma'iiiH 
 
 smaiiij 
 
 -tl("k-l 
 rstl'Ok-t 
 
 .sk'o'kcao 
 ^iin'kMiiii 
 
 -kwa'k'as 
 
 miViiKtKii 
 tra'naiiiti;ii 
 
 iiia'cn' 
 
 nkiiku'cKV 
 kako'ciiiKt 
 
 siltsuo'e - 
 
 -tlfkn 
 
 skiikO'si'iit 
 
 k-iUuia'ii 
 
 SK.niiia'miqtEn 
 
 sma'n'uQ 
 
 st'Eky'Kiiia'sqk' 
 aijkitluii'yit 
 
 i|i'a'tliiuq 
 
 lllltll'llik 
 
 (jOa'tliiuii 
 iiatil'iiik 
 
 svukO'^riit 
 
 tlftn 
 
 kos 
 
 ya'k-'Ct 
 
 aqkithiuliO'.- 
 
 Borrowed from Snauaimuq. 
 
 ' =Cfjit)moii shoe*. 
 
 = smoke reccptacli;. ■" Borrowiil from Kwakiiiti 
 
pp 
 
 150 
 
 uEroiiT — 1890. 
 
 Stoik 
 
 T'liiiRit 
 
 llalda 
 
 Tslmslilaii 
 
 Kwakiutl- ) 
 
 NiMitka ) 
 
 i^alish 
 
 I Kiitouafia 
 
 Dialect 
 
 Day 
 
 Night 
 
 1 Stikecii 
 
 2 Ski'luj-'atu 
 
 3 Tsimshiaii 
 
 yipi.rr 
 
 SKIl 
 
 sa 
 
 tat 
 
 Kal'iiia 
 
 Moriiiiip 
 
 ts'ii tilt 
 
 sKii ac i^Kii 
 
 ■1 liriltsiik- 
 5 Kwakiutl 
 
 lia'ln 
 iift'la 
 
 luyollKM 
 
 nrkk 
 k-a'iuiil 
 
 k'aiitlak* 
 
 k'oa'k'oai'la 
 na'a'it 
 
 (i Xoiitka.Ts'H'iHtb lias 
 r Bil'inla 
 
 8 f'atlc-.ltfi 
 
 t) I'Kiitlali' 
 
 10 t^iciatl 
 
 11 SiiaiiaiinU'i 
 
 12 fckiiuiiiio 
 
 13 Lkiu'iL'Eii 
 
 15 Stlatliiiiii[ 
 
 10 SKQuapmmv 
 17 Okaua'k'Cii 
 
 Kvi'tiini; 
 
 ija iia 
 
 SKll III 
 
 iski'yt'tiak'.* 
 
 lias 
 
 a'fluli 
 
 , kO'atl 
 
 tO'pcitl 
 
 krri'iiitaiii 
 
 I'lieiitl 
 
 : I'naq 
 
 1 
 
 Clltl 
 
 t>'nk- 
 
 koa'yil 
 skua'j il 
 skua'yil 
 skua'yil 
 
 skmVtcil 
 
 iiilt 
 II at 
 
 snat 
 
 niit 
 
 1 
 
 ' kn'i 
 
 iia tatl 
 ^ -kiiO'kiu: 
 
 iia'tctl 
 ' iiatl 
 
 ' kuici'l 
 
 1 
 
 ria'anitt 
 
 Klusi'yi 
 snat 
 yuiiiiiit 
 na'iiiiaat 
 
 tU'lU'KU 
 
 cl'tlk'"at 
 
 sk-'C'it 
 
 citict 
 
 cit>t 
 
 1 
 
 ; iiuwR'nuwEii 
 na'iiatci 
 
 tsOu'ii 
 
 rap 
 
 nip 
 ky'Kla'up 
 
 sitk-t 
 
 si'tist 
 
 (jua'nnn 
 tlOtlkfikoft'st 
 
 SilElilll'l 
 
 OKUukoa'ats 
 
 yiu'kwi'yit 
 
 tsitliiiVyit 
 
 wu'tluam 
 
 WHtlgoait 
 
 i K 
 I ! 
 
 Ui 
 
 stock 
 
 Dialect 
 
 Raiu 
 
 Snow 
 
 Fire 
 
 
 
 luilcpcinlcut 
 
 In Coin- 
 pounds 
 
 
 1 
 Tliiigit 
 
 1 Stikoen 
 
 Sc'll 
 
 (lal 
 
 dli"t 
 
 k'Tiii 
 
 
 
 1 Hai.la 
 
 2 Skiilcgato 
 
 d'ani'ii — 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 Tsimsliian 
 
 3 Tsim^hian 
 
 was 
 
 iiVkoa 
 iO'koa 
 
 ma'ilMii 
 
 lak 
 
 
 
 Kwakiutl- 
 Nootka 
 
 4 Ui-iltjuk- 
 6 Kwakiutl 
 
 6 Kootka.Ts'cciatli 
 
 na'O ' 
 ua'c ' 
 
 Qui'ltKla 
 He'k'ala 
 
 — 
 
 
 mi'tia 
 
 kwi'.s 
 
 iuik' 
 
 — 
 
 
 Salish 
 
 7 Bilqula 
 
 atlvu'lat 
 
 ku "ai 
 
 tiu'iq 
 
 ._ 
 
 
 8 Catloltq 
 
 a r'Kiitlatc 
 
 10 Hiciatl 
 
 11 Siiaiiainiiiq 
 
 1-' Sk''inlliic 
 
 in Lkaugi-.ii 
 
 11 .Xtlakyapamuq 
 13 Stlatliiniu 
 
 1(1 SKiiUapimui 
 
 17 I'lkaiia'k-f'ii 
 
 toiC'tl 
 sma'velani 
 toic'tl 
 sli;'mKq 
 
 PlUllUl 
 tlKllKl 
 
 k'o'niai 
 
 sk'o'inaO 
 ina'k'ii 
 ina'k'a 
 MgiVk-0 
 
 qoa'uitq 
 
 cpats 
 
 tcitci'cui 
 
 liai'uk- 
 
 yc'iotl 
 
 ctcik'o'esa 
 
 
 
 — tSEp 
 
 
 
 tKktl 
 
 ckwic 
 
 CUll'qt 
 
 uia'k'aa 
 
 duktik' 
 ni'li:ii 
 
 -ik'p 
 
 
 
 skla'kstiim 
 
 uo'(it 
 
 te'ik' 
 
 — 
 
 
 ck'Jt 
 
 sKinO'k't 
 
 tcu'iiuap 
 
 — 
 
 
 Kiitounxia 
 
 18 Columbia Lakjs 
 
 guwatlok'iik'u'k'ut 
 
 a'liktlO 
 
 acikiuk-O'k'O 
 
 — 
 
 
 ' It is suowin^', kuc'sa. 
 
Kvciiiiiff 
 
 qa'na 
 
 SKll 111 
 
 skryi'tlak'5 
 
 tu'poitl 
 
 cutl 
 
 mViimit 
 
 Blli.-i'yi 
 
 sufit 
 
 (jiiiiU'iit 
 
 luX'iuuiat. 
 
 tsoo'rj 
 riip 
 
 ! I'iip 
 
 i ky'tlil'iip 
 
 watlgoa'it 
 
 Fire 
 
 uleut 
 
 In Com- 
 
 pouiuls 
 
 _ I 
 
 -tSKp 
 
 — ik'p 
 
 ON THL NOUTH-Wli.-STLnN TKIBK;* OF CANADA. 
 
 151 
 
 
 Siiriiii,' 
 
 Siiinmor 
 k'util'u 
 
 1 
 
 Autiiiiiii 
 
 Winter 
 
 -1 fLgu'rat 
 
 kMtl 
 
 
 
 rskwi'iui 
 tsawii'iiq 
 
 tsoir'tc * 
 
 
 
 niiskHluts 
 
 .;n'titc 
 
 tKiiiqi" tliiii 
 
 <iisi'tits 
 tKmt'("(| 
 
 c'u'tik 
 
 Wlii.l 
 
 Tlaiirli'i- 
 
 m'tl 
 
 h.-'lan 
 
 kuli'plr'ciii laqa' 
 
 UiViiiiiiia 
 krruiHua 
 
 ft'tsk'i'llK 
 
 iiili|i'ni 
 
 I'iKlitiilii^' 
 
 
 k"'iii re'dn 
 
 ksiVot 
 ilir'tc 
 
 iitiskHlqiitsts 
 
 llli-u'tl't-i 
 
 trwii'litstKu 
 
 tlwa'Micii 
 pOskKai' 
 
 k.vT'tlca' 
 
 tadza'o 
 
 pii:4k 
 
 iiVlii 
 itl'la 
 
 wf'k-sC 
 
 a.io'kll 
 
 po'i|inii 
 
 palia'in 
 
 InVliatn 
 
 strfK'qnm 
 
 ■ipEbti'iii 
 
 spqtiK'ia 
 
 t'lia'ut 
 ck'a'qKm 
 
 snil'ut 
 
 sKiiu'ut 
 
 aqkO'me 
 
 Hrll .■•.Ml 
 
 
 k-'iii 
 
 sont 
 
 lia'iiiq 
 hriaiKi 
 
 ■ tlop'O'itc ' 
 
 Amtl 
 
 tlKko'G 
 k'Vir'les 
 
 tKtKiiiiO'ia 
 k-'oO'lcs 
 
 ('K.iik''oiya'iik- 
 pC'pii'iiti'ik 
 
 sk'a'lk-.iltKUK^ 
 pGstcr:a'k- 
 
 .I'lili; il'llhliu'i 
 
 
 1 
 
 t>';l'lllt i 
 
 
 uOil'gyloa 
 ' tla'k-citl ' 
 
 tlKIK'-'illlil 
 Uf'lltl.lia 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 SliUI^U'lM 
 
 
 iir'itc'u-' 
 
 tKll)tllllllo> 
 
 cicU'wn 
 I'kiiiiiOkoiVkortsi 
 
 'lMtk*'nmi'lJS 
 
 walo'(|nm 
 kut~tcir'iii 
 
 SI,lllQll;Va3 
 
 C'tlciilaqaaii 
 syuQoa'as 
 
 ki'kia'i 
 
 cki'lKkli;<i 
 
 skiiiKkina'p 
 
 «ii>a';.'iim 
 
 lll"lllKM 
 
 s('i'nM'iu inii 
 qKiii.'nakt 
 tiia'rtitsr, i'lu'iiifi 
 i|an 
 k-'unK'ln 
 
 
 nKo'tsk'ftiX 
 
 iiiiiania'aiii 
 wulwulk'oVi.iii 
 
 
 sk'apts 
 pKsk'fi'ptc 
 
 s'istk 
 pr.sKr'stk 
 
 ••••••Ml 
 
 skiiikiiia'p 
 SKk'tsk'iVm 
 iiO'ma 
 
 sOkwa'kEiiii ii>t 
 cuwik'Cst 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 no'ma 
 
 = sprouting eeaaon. 
 
 = warm seasou. 
 
 = seasou when everytlilng clean. 
 
 Water 
 
 Inde- 
 pendent 
 
 In Ooni- 
 pouiids 
 
 liin 
 
 g-andl 
 aks 
 
 wfta'm 
 wap 
 
 tc'a'ak 
 kqla 
 
 k-a'ea 
 
 s'e'wiK; 
 
 se'wuv 
 
 k-a 
 
 stilk" 
 
 k-'oii'a 
 
 — sta 
 
 — sta 
 
 k'o'io 
 k-O 
 
 cl'wutlk' 
 
 wo'u 
 
 — atkua 
 —atkua 
 — itk' 
 
 Ice 
 
 ^"'^^'-'^-'' toS- 
 
 t'ek- 
 
 Bartli, Land 
 
 k-a'l(-'a 
 da'u 
 
 tl'wi 
 tl-o'(i 
 
 k'o'mi 
 
 skn'ilk 
 
 tun '6 
 
 spc'u 
 
 si>0'u 
 
 .spe'u 
 
 sVyiicn 
 
 .-;tla iKq 
 
 npfl'iir 
 ck'c'uiali.lc 
 
 Independent 
 
 a'nu 
 tlga 
 
 'InCom- 
 ponii'l^ 
 
 dsa'atsKks 
 
 tsqama 
 t'K'kya 
 
 tsVk'nnita 
 
 kocjtlO'lein 
 
 &ca 
 
 rKkTv'k 
 
 tii'fit'a 
 
 River 
 
 iiln 
 ka'iira 
 
 (jatla ; lacj man | g-'ala aks - 
 
 tEmsit 
 
 tKUlSIl 
 
 to'p'atl 
 
 \va 
 wa 
 
 sQu'yint 
 sQo'int 
 
 gi'dja — 
 
 mO'i — 
 
 I ti:iuO'(i — 
 i ti/iiiKq 
 
 ti;niL'(i 
 
 taTigiui — 
 
 — ti-.mi'Q I 
 
 ^ tKuiO'y ' — kTitl 
 
 — thniO'y, tlu'k'Uiq — 
 — iki;n ti;uiKii6'lai; 1 — 
 
 sola'' 
 
 kuiVtlkO 
 
 kn.Vtlko 
 
 kuo'tlko 
 
 k'lii'i'tlkua 
 
 kiiiVtlk 
 
 tltla'tlsi" 
 
 ts'a'ak 
 
 ' tuiii, aiiaqo'ui 
 
 k-'uti/m 
 ^t(Vlan 
 sta'olo 
 .-.ta'lo 
 stak- 
 1 sta'lo 
 
 k-.Vii 
 ctcnwa'iiq 
 
 sKtii'lkna 
 
 ca'fitk' 
 
 a'qgut 
 
 — aqk'"asnk"\vuV) aqkinini'tuk 
 
 =ou the salt. 
 
 - = ascending water. 
 
:': 
 
 1.52 
 
 UK POUT — 1890. 
 
 ■ ? 
 
 "' i- 1 
 
 li ; . j 
 
 M \ 
 
 stock 
 Tliiiirit 
 
 Dittlnut 
 
 Lako 
 
 
 Vall.y 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 Mouiitaiu 1 Ivlami 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 Stikcfii 
 L' skliU'Katc 
 ;i 'rsiiiislilaii 
 
 ftk* 
 
 
 ciiViiaii 
 tl'iV'laii 
 
 cl&' 
 
 
 
 k-'ftt 
 
 llaiilo 
 Tsluiililan 
 
 on 
 
 
 f.-'is 
 
 ffUft'l 
 
 li:k*ra" 
 
 
 -- 
 
 
 tlkut'O'oi 
 
 
 ■tqanii'lut 
 
 K'wakiiitl- [ 
 NoMika ) 
 
 4 Urilt-iik- 
 ."t Kuakiiitl 
 
 « Nootka.Ts'wIatli 
 
 7 llilqula 
 
 5 C'atl61tq 
 !) f'liitliiti: 
 
 10 Sioiatl 
 
 11 Siiatiaiiiinq 
 
 12 Sk'qoiiiii' 
 IS I-kin'i^'iiii 
 
 li Ntlnkyapaniiiq 
 15 Sfliithuiiii 
 
 Ifl Sl.(iUi.,"llUQ 
 
 17 Okmia'k'.-n 
 
 18 Coluuiliia Lakes 
 
 tiM'latl ' 
 a'nk' 
 
 
 
 go'gwls 
 
 in'kyr ■ 
 
 trekya'C 
 makyiV'la 
 
 — 
 
 lui'kyu 
 
 teaUk 
 
 Salisli 
 
 t>atl 
 
 
 niifii'l 
 
 dinnt 
 
 k'enke'lsk 
 
 lA'eatl 
 
 M;lVi,'tl 
 t^hitl 
 
 
 
 pc'tluekiim 
 tcala'tl 
 
 t'e'k'nt 
 acik'u'g'iinu 
 
 
 i|.iiif|tla'to 
 Hi pk'( 'ii 
 til iik'i'n 
 cqola'k' 
 sQO'qul 
 
 tiVk''at« 
 
 sniiVnlt 
 
 suiilnt 
 
 BUliillt 
 
 snia'iu't 
 sfiKii'nit 
 
 ku'rais 
 
 (•kva'as 
 
 skuf'ktsaav 
 
 ski,'ii 
 
 s'a'ok's 
 
 tltlMW 
 
 
 >kniii 
 ntciti-c't skuin 
 
 
 k'y 
 
 811' 
 
 i'DOlc 
 
 qlati'kin 
 tsKiila'iit 
 
 tskTini 
 
 iikum 
 
 — 
 
 
 mKkwl'ut : kco'nuk 
 
 Kutoiiaiia 
 
 k 
 
 1 a<ikowiiqtli''et 1 aqg-'a'ukemC 
 
 ■ Borrowed f 
 
 •om Sfllisli. ' Bo 
 
 rrnwoil fioin 
 
 Xootka. ' Viilo stone. *= sitting aloiifi. 
 
 Stock 
 
 Dialect 
 
 Wood 
 g'aii 
 
 Loaf 
 
 Bark 
 
 Grabi 
 
 Flesli, Meat 
 <llir 
 
 
 Tliiigit 
 
 1 Stikeen 
 
 2 Skirtegatc 
 
 3 Tsimshian 
 
 ■1 HOiltsuk- 
 
 5 Kwakiutl 
 
 6 Xootka.T^"eoiatli' 
 
 7 Bilqiila 
 
 ■ ratloltci 
 9 pKiitlatc 
 111 Sioiatl 
 
 11 SiiuiiainnKi 
 
 12 JSk'(|riiiiio 
 
 13 I.,kufifri:ii 
 
 1 1 NtlaUyapaiiuiH 
 I.') stlatli'imii 
 
 10 Si;yiiapiiuii} 
 
 17 Okaiia'k-Oii 
 
 kag'anl' 
 
 atlaqc' 
 
 so'uk' 
 
 Haifla 
 
 tlkyan 
 
 _ 
 
 gya'p'as 
 
 tleya'ngHal 
 
 ia'nKs 
 
 wcmi-'iintlivi 
 paii'k- 
 
 k**0'tse 
 
 nil 1 gyf'ri' 
 
 
 Tsimshian 
 
 gyinist 
 
 nk'nni 
 qa'k'nin 
 
 kEya'iit 1 ca'nii 
 
 
 
 Kwakiutl- i 
 Nootkd ) 
 
 kye'tEiii 1 uiea's 
 ky'e'tEm ! Kits 
 
 
 1 
 
 i'uikso 
 
 kiiintl 
 
 k-..i'M 
 k'o'iq 
 
 sk'oiqia'u 
 siiVtl 
 y."'iotl 
 etciitl 
 
 ino'lKci 
 stktso'sKin 
 sKlG'p 
 wOk 
 
 tla'k-ap 
 k'oa'ls 
 
 ts'a'k-mis a'k'mupt 
 
 
 Sali«li 
 
 ik- ! _ 1 _ 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 p'ri'k''ani ' 
 p'rt.'k"'iini ' 
 p'a'k''ain ' 
 tsTi '1 lam 
 ctcVi'tla 
 
 pi'tckKtl 
 
 ptsaktl 
 
 patcktl 
 
 p'a'ian 
 fla/k-'ot 
 speliVn 
 sla'Oii 
 
 tlKiiKin mi/gyas 
 
 Sfl'qoitl slT'k- 
 
 — -lOk- 
 
 slrk- 
 
 >a'(|i)f' slf'k' 
 
 siek' 
 
 
 
 ki:ze' 
 ei'kll 
 
 p'Kla'ii 
 
 k'OlO'luq 
 
 CtK'K'plJZ 
 
 stlia' 
 copO'lauy 
 
 smite 
 tsi 
 
 slCk- ; 
 
 
 Kutonacia 
 
 18 C'nliiiiiliia Lakes 
 
 aqku'tlatl ; aqgi't 
 
 sk-ntl 
 
 qft'atltsin 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Borroveil from Kwakiutl. 
 
iHlaivI 
 
 k''Af 
 
 Knft'l 
 
 iKkiid'a'* 
 
 trOk.va'O 
 makyA'la 
 
 toa'bk 
 
 k-enku'lsk 
 
 kiiVuis 
 
 ckvii'ii!" 
 
 skiiCktwiiiv 
 
 skvii 
 
 s'a'ck's 
 
 tltcfw 
 
 kVji'uoBc 
 
 • sii'ukiim 
 
 koo'nuk 
 
 aqg-'ii'iikemC 
 
 ttiiig aloiifi. 
 
 >t 
 
 niK'gyas 
 ! slek- 
 
 I siek- I 
 
 ' slOk- 
 I sl6k' 
 
 slfik" ! 
 
 smite 
 ts'T 
 
 ON THE N0RTH-WE8TERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 163 
 
 
 Stone 
 
 
 Imu 
 
 Foroit 
 
 Tree 
 
 
 Salt 
 
 Inrli'ponileiit 
 
 In com- 
 pounds 
 
 ludcponilent 
 
 k-«t.< 
 
 III rotn- 
 txiunds 
 
 .HI 
 
 flu: 
 tl.,« 
 
 : 
 
 Ik-.-yf'tH 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 tft'i^j.'!! rr'a'ga' 
 
 irfi't^ 
 
 tlkyilii" 
 
 k"ft 
 k'an 
 
 — 
 
 mail 
 
 lap 
 
 t'<''HKm 
 t'c'sum 
 
 fo'otsk 
 
 — 
 
 timisii 
 ; typ'atl 
 
 —a 
 ~a 
 
 k«ri'» 
 a'tlKii ' 
 
 li.k'iin' 
 tia'iitioh 
 
 tla'k'oas 
 
 —mis 
 —mil 
 
 tft'pltl 
 
 mu'kM 
 
 —a 
 
 ... 
 
 . 
 — ftsqK.n 
 
 miipt 
 
 St!5 
 
 1 Vo'tlOin 
 k^'o'tliim 
 k'uo'tlom 
 tl'ii'tlKm 
 trft'tlKiii 
 tl'ii'tltfi 
 
 U'iM(7y 
 tl'a'tlKm 
 
 tqt* 
 
 qiUiil.ie'o 
 ((iiVIs 
 
 tUi'tsa 
 •-mftiit * 
 stlk'a'tuCscn 
 
 k'i;'tli4 
 
 - 
 swllKuula'lKm'' 
 
 WulKWUlO'lU 
 
 (,'i'trim 
 <,rt''iiii 
 
 vrtciiii 
 
 tsii'lak- 
 tci'oKm 
 tci'tKfig 
 
 mi liuO'lrq 
 stlikitlk'a'luk 
 
 .■iti'.n 
 
 
 
 djii'ia 
 
 sk-iViv 
 
 'I'a 
 
 'k'iit 
 
 ■it8i:k' 
 
 ^k•aiyai'L•ng 
 
 ('{((a'p 
 CKra'ap 
 
 t^iTa'p 
 
 tfirc'p 
 
 1 
 
 -atlp 
 — KtUc 
 
 _, 
 
 syeiuj 
 
 nrkn'qt 
 
 st.-iit>ri'i 
 
 llKllStl'tso 
 
 — 
 
 1 ICsa'l' 
 
 Htldt 
 
 —* 
 
 — 
 
 gwistla'ciiiiiO 
 
 nO'okwe 
 
 ni'tlgo 
 
 t!*ltl('it 
 
 aiigitstla'On 
 
 1 
 
 ' =ilrysca. ' =Engli8h7 »= French. ' f^pc mountain. 
 
 ' —rear o(, interior ot country. 
 
 -liard thing. 
 
 ° bee wood. 
 
 Dog 
 
 Bear, Black 
 
 Bear, 
 Grizzly 
 
 Wolf 
 
 I)crr 
 
 i;ik 
 
 Beaver 
 
 kyetl 
 
 ts'uk 
 tan 
 
 gats 
 
 g'o'utc 
 go'utc 
 kyebO' 
 
 k'ooka'n 
 
 t.<isk' 
 1 tsi'eku •■ 
 
 t.-'ikredO' 
 
 qa 
 
 qo'ots 
 
 g'at 
 wau 
 
 t.s'i.n 
 
 has 
 
 ol 
 
 nan 
 mm 
 
 tci'uiis 
 
 mEdi'ek 
 
 1 f^ia'n 
 
 st.s'al 
 
 iia't.se 
 na'tsc 
 
 tl'a'' 
 gyi'lii 
 
 k'usE'l< 
 
 atla'nKin 
 
 ka'mOla 
 
 k'C'was 
 
 tlao'ls 
 tlOl.s 
 
 kOlo'u ' 
 ts'a'n 
 
 iii'nUl 
 
 tl'a 
 
 qiiii'fra.> 
 
 i|ai'uri> 
 
 qaii'fry:i> 
 
 k'n'yrt^ili 
 
 stlatlil'lrm 
 
 k'O'yctcin 
 
 k-'a'nat)a 
 nutsek-o'aq 
 
 a'tuc 
 
 tlo'nom 
 
 a't'6 
 
 uo'ts ' 
 
 nan - 
 
 mO'qatl 
 
 squlsK'lk'Oii 
 
 dji'tqun 
 
 ?ipii'a,- 
 
 in(''riiitl 
 
 ctOE'tquii 
 
 ^Miia'nitl 
 
 tla'lcs^ 
 
 k-'r'(>tc 
 
 tsOna'tc 
 
 k-c'litc 
 
 k-i'i;to 
 
 k-ir'ctc 
 
 kwa'waiUc 
 
 -qoia''ik'Kn 
 
 kolo'n 
 
 fsia'am') 
 
 ctc'i'iio 
 
 ctci'uo 
 
 -kniniji'i 
 
 >k-umri/i 
 
 sk'nmii'i 
 
 tia'aoom 
 
 tattcio'lmiq • 
 
 tk'Vi'ia 
 
 -tk'Ti'ia 
 
 tk-'a'ia 
 
 tk-'ii'ia 
 
 k'c'frar - 
 sqo'icin 
 
 Irli'oprt 
 llll'opct 
 k'ir'utc CC) 
 
 smC'yis ■• 
 
 .^niayil'i^ 
 t'akn m 
 k •61 fit 
 .•ik-ilii'o 
 sk-i-.lao 
 -k-Kla'o 
 
 >k-a'k-qa 
 •k'a'qfla 
 
 mC'qatl 
 
 rtlatia'lKin 
 skEmqi',s 
 gy'eia'una 
 tia'utla 
 
 sk''a'uin 
 sk-'a'uani 
 
 ina'lEui.stlia 
 
 nts'O'tsim 
 
 ka'qgen 
 
 cml'etc^ 
 stra'la 
 
 i ts'c 
 
 Btiatsl'nKui 
 
 cinii'va 
 sk-Elo" 
 
 • sk'iVqrt 
 
 sk'lak-s 
 
 ckimre's 
 
 ni'pk'6 
 
 tgats 
 ' cncktltsa 
 
 sk-Kla'o 
 
 j kKkfl'ap 
 
 stouQ 
 
 j aqkix'tlak 
 
 1 tau'pk'a 
 
 1 g''atlg''ft'tlC' 
 
 siua 
 
 ' Borrowed from Kwakiutl. 
 * = people of wnod?, ' Ses flesh. 
 
 Borrowed from Kwakiutl. 
 
 * Bwrrowed from Tlingit. 
 Borrowed from Bilqula. 
 
 Borrow cd from Bilqula. 
 ' Borrowed from Kwakiutl. 
 
m 
 
 154 
 
 iiEPoiir— 189t). 
 
 stock 
 
 Dialect 
 
 Fly 
 
 Mos(iaitoc 
 
 Siiakc 
 tl'ut tliVk 
 
 1 
 
 
 Tlill!.'it 
 
 1 Stikecii 
 
 2 Skidcgate 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 Itaida 
 
 ilC'idun 
 
 ts'Ki-a'ltKKuan 
 
 cik 
 
 Tsiuisliian 
 
 3 T.-^iui.-liiau 
 
 ■1 llOiltsiik- 
 5 Kwakiutl 
 
 — 
 
 pyi'ck 
 
 matnaliVltii 
 
 Kwakiutl- [ 
 Nootka ) 
 
 ina'E?Tv\viiiK, 
 iii.VniiL' 
 
 k'a'Oiia 
 
 .si'tlinn 
 
 sl'tlKUl 
 
 liai'ye 
 
 
 
 6 Nootka. Ts'Oeiatli 
 
 7 BII(nila 
 
 8 (;atlOlt(| 
 i'Kiitlate 
 
 10 Sioiatl 
 
 U SiiauaiuiiKi 
 
 12 .Sk'iioMiir 
 
 13 LkufigKii 
 
 14 NtlakyapaniiKi 
 16 StlatliiuiH 
 
 tK'iiakmis 
 
 ts'aMj IS 
 
 tstci'ds 
 
 -tsctil-iViis 
 
 k'oaK,''i 
 
 koii'c''uatc 
 
 pqua'CksKii 
 
 k'o'k'oaskO 
 k-oal'0'niak 
 
 k'onc'miktl 
 
 sEl alt's 
 
 Salish 
 
 papO'nkH 
 
 
 k'l-.k'ayC'iiF.na 
 QUiats 
 
 otlk'a'i 
 cl'(Viiii 
 OtlkiVi 
 atlkD'i 
 atlka'i 
 so'tlkc 
 
 cme'ici 
 nariot't 
 
 
 10 SiCQuaiimuQ 
 17 Okaua'kCu 
 
 Qina'.vC 
 
 tsthva'woltsk 
 
 
 qania'tl 
 
 ckukawi'lgaq 
 
 Kutniuuia 
 
 18 Cohiml)ia Lakes 
 
 yamifiktliik''u'tlop 
 
 k'atsetsa'tla 
 
 t'a'u 
 
 Stock 
 
 Dialect 
 
 Tlingit 
 
 1 Stikeeu 
 
 Haiila 
 
 2 Skidci-'atc 
 
 Tsinisliiau 
 
 Kwakiutl- ) 
 Nootka ; 
 
 3 Tsimsliiau 
 
 4 riciltsuk- 
 6 Kwakiutl 
 
 Saliiili 
 
 6 Nootka. Ts'Ociath 
 
 Salmon 
 
 I Nauic 
 
 White 
 
 ;Tit 
 
 tleili'qatC-' 
 
 tcin 
 
 li&ii 
 
 mCa' 
 mil 
 
 ine'at 
 
 wa 
 
 tlc'kani 
 ai'uiiti 
 
 7 Bilqula 
 
 8 gatlOltii 
 
 9 Pi;utlntc 
 
 10 feiciatl 
 
 11 Snanainiuq 
 
 12 Skcioinic 
 
 13 LknugKii 
 
 sKmlkii 
 
 tlaqoil'e 
 
 k'o'lixi 
 t^kuiVli") 
 ts'a'k'oG 
 
 ctciu'nuq 
 
 torn 
 
 ! ku'ic 
 
 I ku'ic 
 ku'ic 
 kiTic 
 kiii'iis 
 kiVic 
 
 g-a'ta 
 
 milks 
 
 Black 
 
 ilo'utc 
 
 tlk-'atl 
 
 t'o'otsk 
 
 ino'k'oa 
 mi/la 
 
 ts'o'tia 
 ts'o'tla 
 
 tli'suk 
 
 tsq 
 
 pK'k'pKk- 
 
 (;asqoH 
 
 pi;k- 
 
 pi;k- 
 
 pi;k' 
 
 pHk- 
 
 tu'pkuk 
 skHst 
 
 qUf 
 i vasqu.< 
 
 ' tsk''cq 
 ! kEtik'Oq 
 I ni-;kc(i 
 
 14 Ntlakyapamu(i ' sk'cc'itKn 
 
 15 i?tlatlunin stso'k'oats 
 
 skwa'tcitc 
 
 1') SKQiiapuuiQ 
 17 Okana'k-On 
 
 skKla'ltKu 
 ndidi'Q 
 
 stpf'k' 
 pKk- 
 
 skui'st 
 
 Kutouu(ia 
 
 18 Columbia Lakes suniVkemO 
 
 giVktlO 
 
 pi;k' 
 pKk- 
 kamim'qtlo 
 
 .sti'ptipt 
 k''uq'ii'q 
 
 k'uyuk'c't 
 
 k'oft'i 
 
 kilmk-oko'kutl 
 
 ' tf buowliku colour. 
 
ON THE X0UTH-WE8TEUM T1UBE.< OK CANADA. 
 
 15.5 
 
 Siinkc 
 
 mk'Vik'o'kiitl 
 
 Bird 
 
 to'tli 
 
 qOt'O't 
 
 ts'o'wots 
 
 Fcathei*3 
 
 Winp 
 
 Gooso 
 
 Duck 
 
 Fi.Ii 
 
 tn'O'ko 
 
 ts'Ok 
 
 iDa'matlO 
 
 tsitsipO' 
 
 koako'ai 
 
 qoii'iek' 
 inu'ok' 
 ^knliio 
 <10«'lui 
 
 spKzirzo 
 spi/yo 
 
 :^pT.VU' 
 
 sciKkiv'ku 
 
 k-'oa'tl 
 
 kite 
 k'iik'a. i 
 
 ra'wnk 
 
 B'uts 
 
 tlgy!t.t.'n'n ■ iba 
 
 nu"'Kk 
 
 < hill tiik'n'tO 
 
 I 
 
 ! tfitl 
 
 lia<i<| 
 
 piV'tra 
 ts'i'lkyi;ui 
 
 nia'tlmiuKia — 
 
 p'K'tlKin Mf.'ciak' 
 
 ; tlaa'tia 
 tlfi'tlkyo 
 
 luwi'lKiii t>i;ui nki- 
 I uiii't'yilis 
 
 a'iiitl 
 
 tla'pii.-piilO 
 
 iKl'ksKIll ' 
 
 liiVqtatO 
 
 ta'tluk 
 
 spoq 
 
 k'pO'otl 
 
 qa/qatl 
 
 ~ 
 
 — 
 
 itso't.-i'ok- 
 
 stlpa'lqr-u 
 tse'ekt 
 
 ilatlqals 
 ts'ck't 
 
 pa'k'Onatc 
 
 qO'scimti; 
 
 pa'k-'c"iiato 
 
 t!a'k oaqaii 
 
 qo'ok'oii 
 
 tla'koaqaii 
 
 kpiikC'ii 
 tK'ni;k-sKu 
 ti;'ni:k-s 
 ;i;'iii;k-sKn 
 
 tK'nKk-SKU 
 
 tK'ni'.ksEn 
 
 .Ijiillq 
 
 .-pe'p'avut 
 cia'iiq 
 :=10k- 
 6tsl»'6'kol 
 
 o'k'oal 
 
 r-tlakivul 
 
 k'oaci'q 
 k'cO'iiQ. 
 
 sqUk' 
 sqiik- 
 
 — 
 
 sqa'iipiils 
 
 ^'kukoa'clau 
 
 k-si(i 
 
 s-astlqo 
 
 cwA'ntl 
 
 sputlt 
 
 j ski;wa'qi;iis 
 
 k-.iq 
 
 qoa'tqilt 
 
 k'ilk.qn'lQ 
 
 ilOk-utska'uieiial nqjr'uk-tln'pk-a < aqkiugO'ua tfw/iiitlo'ok j gaug'Usk'o'Ok'a I gia'kqo 
 
 Keel 
 
 Light blue 
 
 Yellow 
 
 Light green 
 
 k-\aui'qatc ' ts'Oyi'qatc 
 
 sqO'it 
 
 gotlratl 
 
 I kyetlliaUu yi'q.'tti- ' tsoyi'qfttO 
 , g'auth-atl I g'antlrati 
 
 Great, Large 
 
 lU'lependeiit 
 
 UlKsk 
 
 kiiskua'sk 
 
 uiKtle'itk 
 
 tUl'k'oa 
 tia'k'oa 
 
 koa'yolaks 
 tsft'ca 
 
 tc'qa 
 
 uibtlti'itk 
 
 te'qa 
 tlii'nqa 
 
 ilOii 
 yfi'Kii 
 
 tlehiVuk 
 
 mok' 
 
 ( ta'atscui, 1 ' .,, 
 tku'-ioCm f 1'" 
 ] kiiini''p 
 1 t'i'ti.'r'm 
 tskui'iii 
 kiiiiikiii'm 
 Bilk' 
 
 kistiVk-ak- 
 
 tsitsit("''k-tl 
 
 ilivo'koak- 
 
 k'oi6'kj-aa 
 wa'las ^ 
 
 k-oi't 
 
 tstKlll 
 
 p'Ktce'in 
 
 p'Kti'O'lll 
 
 t.-ii'tsi.qum 
 utl'i-.tl 
 
 kli 
 
 tl'iisO'm 
 
 tl'KsC'm 
 tl'isO'in 
 t.>-koiVi 
 tlslUs 
 
 ts'lViMtl 
 
 ih 
 ilk- 
 
 tl 
 
 tl 
 
 tr'ifi 
 
 ^i 
 
 liCiCi 
 
 tcKk- 
 
 stcl'iik* 
 tciiktcO'k' 
 
 stkn'ltsk-ultst 
 kiizkinVz 
 
 stiikiile't 
 kAkuUi'a 
 
 tsCk'' 
 
 kui'l 
 ItaiiO'liiw 
 
 k'uyukoG'it 
 koiVi 
 
 koft'lt 
 kuri' 
 
 yami'iikaii 
 ' efiroliko colour. 
 
 gak'tloi'tga 
 
 kiiyuk'oC'it 
 
 k'liri' 
 
 gO'ckop 
 
 QKisn'iii 
 
 l]l-,0'lll 
 
 q'io'm 
 
 li'luqoa, pi, pKh'stlaat 
 
 wi'tlku 
 
 In coui- 
 poumls 
 
 -Isc 
 
 ilog-ilung colour. 
 
 TUitluiiikoala : Ouias. 
 
^ 
 
 156 
 
 KEl'ORT — 1890. 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 Sto.'k 
 
 Dialect 
 
 Tlingit 
 
 Iliiiila 
 Tsimsliian 
 
 1 Stikeen 
 
 2 Skidepate 
 
 
 Small, 
 
 Little 
 
 
 
 Imlcpcndcnt 
 
 1 
 
 Ill Compounds 
 
 ga 
 
 tsko 
 
 ! 
 
 — 
 
 Strong 
 
 gK'dso 
 
 Kwakiutl- i 
 Nootka f 
 
 Salish 
 
 tliwu's 
 iliakiivii' 
 
 3 Tsinisliiau 
 
 tlgua 
 
 : 
 
 4 Heiltsuk- 
 
 5 Kwakiutl 
 
 6 Xootka.Ts'Ooiath 
 
 liaula'tl 
 ilma' 
 
 auii'h'is 
 
 IjOdo 
 plural, mKiic'q 
 
 — is 
 
 7 Bilqula 
 
 k-t'k-tO 
 
 tc'i'tcia 
 
 ije'ivoi 
 
 k-'oqua'lo 
 
 tliVtseniats 
 
 atsi'm 
 
 tcitoO'itl 
 
 - 
 
 8 gatloltq 
 ft i'Kutlntc 
 
 10 Siciutl 
 
 11 .SiiaiiKiinmi 
 
 12 Sk-iiomic 
 la LkufigKii 
 
 — 
 
 thVkuim 
 tlo'kuim 
 
 iia'ouk 
 
 H Ntlakyapatnu(i i k'ume'mat 
 15 Stlatlumn I k-wek's 
 
 Kutonaqa 
 
 16 SKQuapniuQ 
 
 17 Okaua'k'On 
 
 18 Columbia Laketi ; tsck'u'na 
 
 ( k'uic'Ksa 
 
 1 plural, tsit:ii't$KmaF.t 
 
 ( k'uiS'mn 
 
 1 plural, tcitca'mat 
 
 ttl 
 
 tla'tlsani 
 
 tlfi't'ani 
 
 .-.koa'iTikum 
 
 kua'nikuiii 
 
 Oic'ui 
 
 k'oiVmkuni 
 
 rnlral 
 yftya't, rilra'lt 
 
 g'utcgort'tst 
 tseinil'k-ek'a 
 
 Stock 
 
 Dialect 
 
 Tlingit J 1 Stikeen 
 
 Haidn ! 2 Skidegatc 
 
 Tninsliian 3 T^imshiau 
 
 Kwakiutl I \ Uiiltsuk- 
 
 Notitkii ) .') Kwakiutl 
 
 W arm 
 
 ri-; t'a 
 
 ky'c'ina 
 
 trya'uiuk 
 
 U6'i|iia 
 is'i'lK-oa 
 
 Thou 
 
 He 
 
 I qat, qatc 
 I ilea, tia'a 
 
 woe', woe'tc , Ini, hotc 
 
 ilu'a, da'tiga 
 
 iiE'rio 
 
 iu/n;n 
 
 Salish 
 
 6 Nootka.Ts'i'ciatli tl'u'pa 
 
 7 Bilqula 
 
 iio gua 
 noV'ua, yiii 
 
 se'ia 
 
 k'qso 
 yutl, sii'um 
 
 laa 
 iie'KdKt 
 
 he. yiit 
 
 k'ul 
 
 ens 
 
 so'ua 
 iu6 
 
 (fain) 
 
 8 C;atl61tq 
 
 !i f'i;nthito 
 
 10 Siciatl 
 
 11 8ni>iiiiiiiiu<{ 
 
 1'.' Sk'(|("imii' 
 i;t LkufigH.n 
 
 ko'as 
 k'o'iis 
 
 K-'ori'koaf 
 
 kuiVs 
 
 k''oa'los 
 
 1 (Ijiiii'tl 
 tcinC'itl 
 djiui'tl 
 tciiiiB 
 
 te ens 
 
 , ft'se 
 
 nuiV 
 iifiV'la 
 te iiiVua 
 
 nO'u 
 
 iio'kua 
 
 14 N'tlakyapamuq 
 
 15 iStlatluniii k Kuip 
 
 Eutonaqk 
 
 16 SKguaiimuQ ! sk'oiVti 
 
 17 Okauu'k'Cn 1 kua'lt 
 
 18 Columbia Lakes u'temG 
 
 ; CKl'lltoa 
 
 I nts&'wa 
 
 j KntA'kim 
 kamin 
 
 rtuu'C' 
 
 liftuuO' 
 niukO ; 
 
 t.'^U'i: 
 
 I'Dc'itl 
 
 '' nuwu'« 
 
 I tcinl'tl 
 uiiiko'ii 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 157 
 
 Strong 
 
 He 
 
 hu, hotc 
 laa 
 
 iie'KdKt 
 
 111', yiit 
 
 (t'liiii) 
 
 tSiil' 
 
 .■U(Vitl 
 
 iiuwr's 
 
 trini'tl 
 aiiiku'ii 
 
 Old 
 
 Yiiun); 
 
 Good 
 
 Sick 
 
 Colli 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 caD 
 
 , ga'tsko 
 
 rK k'e 
 
 la 
 
 tlOtl uc k'i- ^ 
 
 iia 
 
 nCk- 
 
 sia't 
 
 k-'ai 
 
 g-i'tffK 
 
 dri(rariga) 
 
 k-'o't'utl 
 
 St'i" 
 
 (lUl' 
 
 wud'a'gyat ' 
 
 eopnc 
 
 am 
 
 hada'q 
 
 ts'ak 
 
 si'epk 
 
 qkun'tkO 
 
 k-'ii'liak' ■' 
 k'O'iotl 
 
 ta'nfis 
 
 aiku 
 aikii 
 
 tlotl 
 ia 
 
 inkH ' 
 iakH ' 
 
 p'i'onk" 
 
 tlKl 
 tlKl 
 
 tl'o'qoala 
 ts\"'Hk-H 
 
 t'Kiie'k' 
 wu'tal 
 
 Itc'i'niK 
 
 k-a'link 
 
 te'itl 
 
 matlu'k 
 
 Hk-'ulkii 
 
 
 ■^1 
 
 atr.'ma 
 
 k-ai'i 
 
 tis'mEu 
 
 k-'O'i 
 
 k-'a'i 
 
 k-'6'i 
 k-'a'i 
 
 zuk- 
 o'uk- 
 
 ( k'tsak- 
 1 pi. qoa'et 
 
 kii'imalai'kH 
 
 skH'ilkHts 
 
 qo'qook, tl'a'qai 
 totlma'i, Btraq 
 raa'yil, stlaq 
 s'ii'laq 
 sio'yO 
 s'a'loq 
 
 = small 
 
 J 
 
 towt"'\vut,ck«kunu"'t 
 tiiwe'wut 
 
 luVna 
 
 ai 
 
 ai'cto 
 
 ai 
 
 iii 
 
 ha'atl 
 
 aie 
 
 tlF.q 
 ma'i 
 ma'i 
 k-al 
 kO'i 
 sqa'a, k-al 
 
 tl'ist 
 k-El 
 
 ky'est 
 ky'ast 
 
 ' ga'tak 
 ka'k-ali-ut 
 
 k'.ak''tM 
 
 sk''6'i 
 
 qa'itl'et 
 
 dj'im 
 
 dj'iln 
 
 ctciino'tl 
 
 qii'ltl 
 
 t'f'k- 
 
 q't'itl 
 
 k'atlnQn 
 k'KtlniE'mtu 
 
 tsk'a'wulH 
 dlKQtlEqa'm 
 
 ia' 
 a'ma 
 
 la 
 
 qast 
 s6k 
 
 k'lUlU'q 
 
 ky'ea'p 
 sk-'e'lElt 
 
 qitl 
 ts'atit 
 
 ts'atit i 
 
 1 
 
 kutla'ktle 
 
 sOn 
 
 6p 
 
 se'ntlqS 
 
 sk-a't'ei | 
 
 = great man. 
 
 • =old man. 
 
 = not good 
 
 We 
 
 Sha'n, oha'ntc 
 5tl, d'alK'ugua 
 
 Ye 
 
 They 
 
 riwa'n, riwa'ntc has, haste 
 
 i laa (?) 
 
 dais'il 
 
 iiE'rEm 
 
 J inolu. nOgoa'nts \ 
 ( ezclu. uogoa'ntk / 
 ( inclii. nogonmc'iitsl 
 
 { exoln. yinuq ; 
 
 nu'wa 
 
 Hm!tl 
 
 ng'motl 
 uG'mOtl 
 ne'mOtl 
 tetlne'metl 
 
 te nC'matl 
 
 tlne'ngitl 
 
 wucnfmntl 
 
 ( inclu. utluuS'kt I 
 I exclu. utlnuS'eakuQ j 
 
 mne'mltit 
 kamlD&'tlA 
 
 UE'rECEm 
 
 k'aeksoa'ea 
 
 soqdii'qBm 
 
 sJ'wa 
 
 nS'idxt 
 
 hC'qdftq, yii'iidaq 
 
 tldp 
 
 uo'uap 
 no'lap 
 no'lap 
 te thvelap 
 
 te nuya'p 
 
 QEkue'leya 
 
 ats 
 
 This 
 
 rK tat 
 
 gya 
 
 hi'tl'iS 
 t'aiH 
 
 ts&'$yatltEn 
 
 snSla'p 
 
 wucne'ltl 
 
 utlmS'^mp 
 
 mue'mtlEtn 
 minko'uiBgltl 
 
 utlnue'es 
 mn^'mtciliq 
 
 ninkd'liis 
 
 nitl 
 tm'a 
 
 That 
 
 All 
 
 ru tat 
 
 ; tld'qan 
 
 tqani 
 
 yot 
 
 3'<iha 
 
 a'gyem 
 k''a'lauo 
 
 tc'fltck 
 
 he'itl 
 
 stai 
 
 Auk 
 
 6t6't 
 
 mnk" 
 
 I ta'nitl. ma<!c. ) -, 
 1 96'nltl, fem. / , '•■*'' 
 — ! mEk- 
 
 EQa' 
 
 ns 
 
 i&'qis 
 
 ts'k-sm 
 ta'k-im 
 
 tl'a'k-qsn 
 
 yfty&'at 
 
 k-'i'pe 
 
•1:1 
 
 1.18 
 
 TiEPonT — 1 890. 
 
 stock 
 
 Tlinpit 
 
 llniila 
 
 Tsimshian 
 
 Kwakintl- ) 
 Xootka )' 
 
 Salish 
 
 Kutonaqa 
 
 Pialect 
 
 1 St i keen 
 
 3 Skideffiito 
 
 :'. Tsiuishian 
 
 Many, ;Mho1i 
 
 Ic'twi 
 
 ^<ku'lll, k'on'n, yn'i'.u 
 
 liii'ldr 
 
 Who 
 
 adii'ts 
 
 pyTsto 
 
 Far 
 
 t\C- 
 
 Kpav 
 
 tlPtl \vn tIG' 
 
 Jzi'fiM 
 
 a'liiiii 
 
 ■1 Heiltsnk- 
 ."i Kwakhitl 
 
 k-'ai'iiKiii 
 k-'ai'iii:iii 
 
 fi Nootka.Tr'C'Ciatli 
 
 7 Bilciula 
 
 S Catloltq 
 !» Pi-ntlatc 
 ID Sieiatl 
 
 11 Siianaiiniui 
 
 12 Sk'yomic 
 
 13 LkungKu 
 
 ara 
 
 slaq 
 
 k-oq 
 keq 
 k'oq 
 k'cii 
 keq 
 nffEii 
 
 Ii Xtlakyapainiiq i QuD't 
 15 StlatluuiH (jnO't 
 
 16 SKQuapmuQ Que't 
 
 17 Okana'k'en Que't 
 
 i 
 
 18 Columbia Lakes ; iii'iitik 
 
 pro ■ il'a 
 
 akoiqk-an ' qne'sala 
 
 niigwO U'nesn 
 
 atci'k" i saia' 
 
 iir,(ina'la 
 nEqoa'la 
 
 I anP'is 
 
 — .. |."^ 
 
 nga'tigat , nl'edii 
 
 — koa'va 
 
 — I tcuo'k 
 
 — ] silk- 
 
 — I qa'ta 
 
 — j la'el 
 
 ckHli 
 
 t'ie'imik- 
 
 ilje't'cljimit 
 
 ee'lwet 
 
 tletlk'e'i 
 
 f'tc'et 
 
 tlC'tlfi'tlki 
 
 eiiwa't 
 
 kaka'o 
 
 — kKka's 
 
 cnc't 
 
 Ikflt 
 
 k'I'ktft 
 iiEa'lie 
 gik'a'at 
 
 g'a'tlak! 
 
 wutlO'ct 
 
 Not far 
 
 Stock 
 
 Dialect 
 
 No 
 
 One 
 
 Two 
 
 
 Tlingit 
 
 1 Stikcen 
 
 tlOk' 
 
 tlf-ci 
 
 deq 
 
 Haida 
 
 2 Skidegate 
 
 gau'ano 
 
 j sqi.n, sqo'sgo, 
 ( sqoa'nsEfi 
 
 stifi 
 
 T>'lmshian 
 
 3 Tsimsliiaii 
 
 atlgE 
 
 gyak', g.ak', g'E'rEl.k'iil 
 
 1 
 tEpqa't, go'upEl 
 
 Kwakiutl- ) 
 ' Nootka ) 
 
 ! 
 
 4 H-nltsuk- 
 
 5 Kwaki\itl 
 
 ky'c : i, hi, wi 
 ky'e ; I, 111, \vl 
 
 lUEll 
 
 nnm 
 
 matl 
 matl 
 
 
 6 Nootkft.Ts't'olatl; 
 
 Wrk, I, hi 
 
 tso'wak, nup 
 
 a'tla 
 
 
 SaU<li 
 
 7 Bilqnla 
 
 8 Catlolt(| 
 n pEiitlafe; 
 
 10 Sieiatl 
 
 11 Siiaiiaiimui 
 
 12 Sk'qOmic 
 
 13 LknfigKii 
 
 14 Ntlakyapaimiq 
 
 15 Stlatlmnii 
 
 aVikO 
 
 
 
 (*)ma'otl 
 
 tlllOrt 
 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 inio'k- 
 
 au'a 
 Qua's 
 
 pa'a ; pepa'a 
 tlb'iUs, tlfa'li" 
 pa'lnls, iii;teia'le 
 iiK'ts'a, na'iiEte'a 
 
 iitc'o'i, iiKtcintca's 
 
 nE'tsa, uA'tse 
 
 pO'E, papC'a 
 pE'la 
 
 saa, sesa'a 
 yisa'lals, yaisa'lP 
 tKmci'nuls. tEmaiua'lu 
 yisiVoles. ya'i^Ela 
 
 iVuosNyi, ana'iios 
 
 tcK'sa, tca'asis 
 
 ce'ia, cicC'ia 
 a'nuEc 
 
 
 
 
 
 16 SEQ\iapmn(j 
 
 
 
 17 Okana'k't'ii 
 
 ta'a 
 
 iiKk'S 
 
 sEsa'la 
 
 
 
 15t 
 
 nak's 
 
 nci'l 
 
 
 Kutoiiaqa 
 
 18 Columbia Lakes 
 
 milts 
 
 o'kwe 
 
 as 
 
 
Kear 
 
 tirtl \vn tlG' 
 
 a'liaii 
 
 iiKqna'la 
 HK'ioa'lii 
 
 anG'is 
 
 ckllli 
 
 k'i'ktft 
 
 iiF.a'lie 
 
 gik'il'at 
 
 Two 
 
 't, go'ujiEl 
 
 eie'imik' 
 
 die'e'djimlt 
 
 ee'lwet 
 
 tlftlk-t-'i 
 
 f'tc'Pt 
 
 tletlC-'tlki 
 
 sa'a 
 
 Is, yaisa'l? 
 mils, tEmaiiiiVlc 
 ic'>. ya'isKla 
 
 Vi, anfi'iios 
 
 , tca'asia 
 
 ?ic("'ia 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF C.\NADA. 
 
 159 
 
 Here 
 
 There 
 
 To-il.ay 
 
 Yestcnlay 
 
 To-morrow 
 
 Yes 
 
 
 — 
 
 iil'yipi-.ri 
 
 tK't|?K. 
 
 sGri:'nk' 
 
 a 
 
 a, fi, il'upa 
 
 — 
 
 I'S 
 
 — 
 
 (la'rgatl tlga'C 
 
 d&'rKatl 
 
 yft'gua 
 
 — 
 
 t-r'iiL'ya'wuii 
 
 Srj-ets'e'ip 
 
 tsGgyets'G'ip 
 
 6 
 
 lil'a 
 la'a 
 
 iiAA 
 
 a'likd 
 
 yitl 
 
 goa'k'Klai'04 
 qoaiiiV'laii 
 
 tla'h uye nftsia' 
 
 tlaiits." 
 ilansutla' 
 
 amrTiyc" 
 
 tia'ustlikt-; 
 tli:'ii>tla 
 
 a'mitlik 
 
 
 
 atiso'iiiit 
 
 sts'dk* 
 koa'yil 
 ti;sts6k- 
 ti; nakiia'vil 
 ti stsf'is 
 tia'aniik 
 
 citlk-'at 
 tc'a'kosk-'f'it 
 
 ple'n 
 
 atld'niiii 
 
 cisniil'«C;i 
 
 (Ijila k-atlC't 
 
 c'lsia'siitl 
 
 tsela'k'atl 
 
 knilt'il'ak'tl 
 
 tci'la'(iatl 
 
 si)Gcqa'ut 
 ina'tQiias 
 
 pEsts'a'tl 
 
 p'Sstcitl 
 
 ikai'niiq'^ 
 
 kQ'isi-ni 
 kiTifP 
 
 kui'skoa 
 wukoa'yilc-; 
 k'k-dil'ilas 
 kiikuiltcilas 
 
 peaqil'nt 
 pci'las 
 
 pEqid'ut 
 
 qEla'p 
 
 o'lia ; wis(| 
 
 tia'ko 
 
 he'ltl'ot 
 tla'akO 
 
 pyiiinii 
 
 iltc'a' 
 
 la'ta; iltKu', KlkEo' 
 
 
 
 ma 
 
 — 
 
 nO'iiE 
 
 haia' 
 
 ky'Ela' 
 
 ha'pi-.na 
 
 na 
 
 ne'e 
 
 nagyii'keyit 
 
 wa'tlgoa 
 
 gauml'yit 
 
 he 
 
 Three 
 
 Pour 
 
 Five 
 
 Six 
 
 Seven 
 
 uatsk' 
 
 c.lak''0'n 
 
 keilji'n 
 
 tleilurcu' 
 
 doqaJurcu' 
 
 Ulk-u'nutl 
 
 sta'iisKil 
 
 tletl 
 
 (llk'unO'atl 
 
 dzi'gura 
 
 gua'nt, gutlG' 
 
 ',4aipq 
 
 ketone 
 
 k'lllt 
 
 t'Epqil'lt 
 
 yatq 
 yfltq 
 
 mo 
 mil 
 
 siky'a' 
 siky'a' 
 
 k'atla' 
 k'atla' 
 
 matlaau'sis ' 
 a'gdlibu 
 
 k'a'tstsa 
 
 mO 
 
 sfi'tca 
 
 no'pO 
 
 a'tlpo 
 
 asmos't 
 
 uids 
 
 nio'sa 
 q'o'sGiia 
 q'Osenfi'lO 
 (la'viiiis, qav'G'le 
 ' q.iO'tsciiTii, 
 1 (laq'o'etson 
 nils, nesa'la 
 
 tSGH 
 
 tsGatsa'e 
 
 nukua'tcisa 
 
 silatesa'lG 
 
 tNiii'tses 
 
 ! tBeyatcis'Oi 
 
 i tsitee'atcis 
 
 tlk"'ii'tcis 
 
 tqotl 
 
 t'aqaula'G 
 
 p'ultsuTa 
 
 tKiiiana'lG 
 
 tqam 
 
 ( t'a'(iate"i)i 
 
 '( Kita'qats 
 
 tqan 
 
 1 tl'a'kauiakst 
 I trak'tlak'aniak>t 
 tl'a'k'Kmkist 
 
 tkmakst 
 
 fa'k'JtmkHst 
 
 nu.stlnos 
 
 taia'tlas, Ria'tla 
 tlwia'ls, tlKioa'lG 
 tcaatla'siils, teiatlf/lG 
 tlG'c^iiis, tlqiiii'lu 
 
 toa'nat'oi, tcintca'ua". 
 
 tle(^, tli^ua'l 
 
 keEtlE'o, kekaKta'c 
 kflEtla'o 
 
 ts'utci^a'G 
 
 ts'o'Gtei-! 
 
 ts'Otoi.sa'k" 
 
 ts'a'uks 
 
 1 t'akOsaik'o'i 
 
 1 tkta'Uosats 
 
 ts'ii'kus 
 
 Uius, nifl'smi:s 
 qoo'tcin 
 
 tc!kst, tci'telkst 
 tcl'likst 
 
 ( tcutlka 
 
 \ tcutltoutlku 
 tcu'tUika 
 
 kEtlft's 
 ka'tlec 
 
 m6a 
 
 m6s 
 
 tsI'Ukst 
 
 tsotslka 
 
 tcUkHst 
 
 Bi'spilk' 
 
 g'a'tlsa 
 
 qa'tsa 
 
 ie'hko 
 
 nmi'sa 
 
 nsta'tlu 
 
 
 
 Seven men, 
 
 
 
" I I 
 
 160 
 
 REPORT — 1890. 
 
 Stook 
 
 Dlaloot 
 
 Eight 
 naskndnrou' 
 
 1 
 Nine 
 
 Ten 
 
 Tliiiffii 
 
 1 estikecn 
 
 P'o'cuk" 
 
 rtjl'nkat 
 
 Halda 
 
 2 Skiilegute 
 
 Rtn'nsEfira 
 
 tlalEu wiodTisKfi 
 
 tla'atl 
 
 T-inHliiiin 
 
 :{ Tsimsliiaii 
 
 4 noiltsuk- 
 
 5 Kwakiutl 
 
 6 Nootka.Ts't"i;iatli 
 
 guanda'lt, yiiktil'lt 
 
 kctEma'c 
 
 gy'ap, k'pP'cl 
 
 Kwakiiitl- 1 
 Xooika /' 
 
 yutfio'sis 
 ina'tlguanatl 
 
 iVtlakuatl 
 
 miiuiane'is 
 na'nama 
 
 a'kyns'is 
 lasta' 
 
 tsTi'wnkntl 
 
 liai'a 
 
 Sali^li 
 
 7 Bilqula 
 
 k'C'tlno'rt 
 
 k'esma'n 
 
 tskiilAkiit 
 
 8 Catloltq 
 
 9 PEntlatc 
 
 10 Sicirttl 
 
 11 Siianaiinuii 
 
 12 Sk-qomic 
 l:t LkufigEu 
 
 tnatcisft''"; 
 
 til'atois 
 
 taatcisale 
 
 tqii'tse 
 
 tqa'to'ol, Kitqatc 
 
 tii'asKs 
 
 pio'pst 
 p'Kl'o'opct 
 
 tigeqoa'e 
 
 ta'wiq 
 
 tilweqna'lO 
 
 tdo'q 
 
 tsso'i, ts'F.'sts'Ks 
 
 to'kuq 
 
 ti'nitlpii'a 
 k''anipa'li:ini;n 
 
 tKmtlKiikS'k'a 
 
 opanft'e 
 tlku'ya 
 6pana'l(' 
 
 ft'pEIl 
 
 6'pan, opo'pKu 
 a'pKu 
 
 14 Ntlakvnpauinq 
 10 Stlatlunui 
 
 6'pi:nak^^t, 5'papKniiksi 
 k-'amp 
 
 IG SKQUapmuy 
 
 UEk'dps 
 
 6'pukst 
 
 1 17 3kana'k-6n 
 
 ti'mitl 
 
 qKqEn'o't 
 
 6'peukiist 
 
 Kutouaqa 
 
 18 Columbia L:\kes 
 
 Ouqa'tsa 
 
 gaik-'i't'Owo 
 
 (•'tow5 
 
 Stock 
 
 Tlingit 
 
 Haida 
 
 Tsimshiau 
 
 Kwakiutl- 1 
 Xootka I 
 
 Salish 
 
 Katonaqa 
 
 Dialect 
 
 One tlionsaiid 
 
 To oat 
 
 To drink I To walk 
 
 1 Stikeen 
 
 2 Skidegatc 
 
 3 Tsimshian 
 
 qa 
 
 tana' 
 
 god, at 
 
 la'gua tla l(" tla'atU" 
 
 k'pfll 
 
 4 Heiltsuk- 
 
 5 Kwakiutl 
 
 I 
 
 lo'<iSKniHit 
 G Nootka. Ts'Ocinth sutc'Ok'pKtuk' 
 
 ta 1 qotK.l 
 
 ya'wig, pi. gap 
 
 aks 
 
 7 Bilqula 
 
 8 Catloltq 
 
 9 PEutlato 
 
 10 Siciatl 
 
 11 Snauaimuq 
 
 12 Sk'qomio 
 
 13 LkuflgEn 
 
 tKsa'itc 
 
 tlqoa'witc 
 
 ta'a'wite 
 
 ft'pEn uiits'o'wuts 
 
 na'tcauwitc 
 
 Cpa'auitc 
 
 lia'msa 
 lia'aiH'it 
 
 ha'uk* 
 
 atltp 
 
 14 Ntlakyapamuq Opena qat<!qk-ak-ank9t 
 16 Stlatlumu 
 
 10 SEQuapmug 
 17 Okana'k'§n 
 
 ; opukstqatspk'e'k-enkat 
 
 18 Columbia Lakes 
 
 C'tltKn 
 (VtltKa 
 
 tVtitKU 
 
 a'tltKu 
 (VtltKn 
 
 C'tlEJl 
 
 tlaqa'nc 
 
 f'tlEU 
 
 Kyit'uwo tlKLUw5'n6w5 
 
 s'S'tlEn 
 s'e'tlED 
 
 ik 
 
 n&'k"a 
 na'k-a 
 
 k-a 
 
 na'kcltl 
 
 k-ft'aqla 
 
 toua' 
 ka'sat 
 
 ia'tscitl 
 
 tl'onis 
 
 k-6'ok-o I c'emes, 90 
 
 k'o'ok'oa i e'mai, 90 
 
 k'o'k'oa j t9o 
 
 k'd'k'a I i'mic, niim 
 
 tak-t : i"'nia9, nam 
 
 k'oa'k'oa cti ug 
 
 o'k'oaa 
 d'k'Oaa 
 
 QUECi't 
 
 sta 
 
 ci'uct 
 
 f skuuwa'tKin, 
 t pi. yusa't 
 
 k-'o'lEm 
 
 i'kwQtl 
 
 i 
 
Ten 
 
 Jl'iikat 
 
 IiX'atl 
 y'ap. k'i)f-'ol 
 
 'kyas'is 
 
 istu' 
 
 [li'u 
 
 knlaknt 
 
 lana'e 
 
 ku'ya 
 
 )aiiii'l(' 
 
 pi:ii 
 
 pan, opo'pi.ii 
 
 pi: 11 
 
 ii;nak-<t,o'papEnakst 
 amp 
 
 )Uk8t 
 
 leukHst 
 owo 
 
 ink I To walk 
 
 god, at 
 
 k-a 
 
 ifi, 
 
 toua' 
 ka'sat 
 
 tl ia't-soitl 
 
 la I tl'pnis 
 
 ("enies, 96 
 e'niai, 96 
 t(;ii 
 
 i'mic, niiui 
 e'niav, nam 
 oa ctKfig 
 
 OiiPci't 
 
 fskuuwa'tnm, 
 I pi. Qusa't 
 
 k''6'lEm 
 
 )i 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TUTHES i»F CANARA. 
 
 161 
 
 Twonty 
 
 Thirty 
 
 Foitv 
 
 One hunUieil 
 
 tl.-'k-a ' 
 
 natskMjinka't 
 
 duk'o'n (Ijinka't 
 
 lag'usqaa'nego 
 
 tlft'li- dlk'u'nntl 
 
 tla'lG .sta'nsEil 
 
 kyf'de'el 
 
 giil(''wiili/yap 
 
 tqalpwiilgyap 
 
 masKuikviis tu'uais 
 inatlsiimgynstaii 
 
 yutqso'ke 
 yQtcisum gyustaii 
 
 tsa'k-eits ic hai'u 
 
 niO'(isoku(' 
 niosk'Kniprya^ikiiu 
 
 csa'k'eits 
 
 atle'k- 
 
 tlnoswoa tskiilakiit- 
 
 osmo'ses tskiilakHta 
 
 iljenoqsiil'a 
 
 tlriioatcia'a 
 
 teiqoatlc'ia'a 
 
 tlKqutloiii' 
 
 tluqttloo'i 
 
 tlkEtetlcii'e 
 
 katUVpciiakst 
 kaKtla'<' k'amps 
 
 kitl o'pukMt 
 
 inosfs tskiilakiits 
 
 SEmcia'a 
 
 sKmeia'a 
 
 sp:mcia'l(" 
 
 tskuc 
 
 writltc'iii, wnthvntlrc 
 
 ts'uqk'u's 
 
 mosatrsiiVa 
 
 q'osenatciil'a 
 
 qiVKnatlcia'a 
 
 qa-^K.ntlciii' 
 
 qaoignKtlca'a 
 
 fiKstlcii'e 
 
 I'itlo'pcnakst 
 a'nnKc k-'amps 
 
 sitl 6'pukst 
 
 niotl o'poiiiikst 
 (loo'tcin k''ainps 
 
 mEtl o'pukst 
 
 asilE 6'penkHst 
 
 k-a'tElE 6'pEnkHst 
 g'atUa'nOwo 
 
 niistlK 6'penkHst 
 
 ai'wo 
 
 qatsa'nowo 
 
 ki'Mjin kM 
 Ift'gna tla'atl 
 
 kCEDEC&'I 
 
 la'kyint 
 gfltc'f'k' 
 
 t' e'liolaqs 
 
 tEsa'iti' 
 
 tlqoa'witc 
 
 tsTi'witi' 
 
 niits'o'wufs 
 
 na'atcauwitc 
 
 na'ts'otc 
 
 qat8(ik'ii'k'ank»t 
 (itoK.pkr'k onkiist 
 
 qatspk-e'kcnkst 
 
 qatcitci'kst 
 
 gyit'uwo'nowo 
 
 To dance 
 
 a— tl'eq 
 
 Hia'tl 
 
 To sing 
 
 hala'it 
 
 oi 
 
 sqaia'fi 
 
 IJ'emi 
 
 yi'qoa 
 yi'qoa 
 
 iie'noya 
 sa'lala 
 
 To sleep 
 
 ta 
 
 k-'a 
 
 qstoq 
 
 gy'a'tla 
 me'q'f't 
 
 ? 
 
 nQnO'k 
 
 wa'itc 
 
 na'aqum 
 
 tsi'tlEin 
 
 6'ius 
 
 k'uiye'les 
 
 k'oieles 
 
 wume'tla 
 
 k-'oe'les 
 
 k-o'fetcnt 
 mO'ts'um 
 
 nQya'm 
 
 wowo'm 
 
 15'lom 
 
 st'e'lem 
 
 t'e'talF.m 
 
 wunumapaa'yicia 
 
 tEtle'elEm 
 
 rtl'Em 
 e'tl'Em 
 
 tsito'ma 
 
 tla'tsit 
 
 e'tut 
 
 e'etut 
 
 e'tut 
 
 e'tut 
 
 e'tut 
 
 6k-0'it 
 roS'it 
 
 stl'fi'e 
 
 sI'EmtEDa'm 
 
 J pEle't, 
 
 ( pi. qEmka'ut 
 
 8k-'oie'llq 
 
 sEDkunS'Q 
 
 t pi. tB'atQe'liQiQ 
 
 k-a'kauwJtl 
 
 gawasqonVam ; 
 
 g-'6m 
 
 To speak 
 yu'q'a— tEfi 
 
 a'lgiai) 
 
 bgoa'la ' 
 bagna'la ' 
 
 wawa 
 
 k'o.i'i, otlOtas 
 
 k-oal6't 
 
 ( k-Klu't, 
 ( pi. k'oa'IcB 
 
 ( k-ulk-oe'Mt, 
 i pi. Bk'oak-oa'I 
 
 k-a'kye 
 
 man epeakt ; k-kya'la, woman tpeaki 
 11 
 
 To see 
 
 To love 
 
 ten 
 
 sg-an 
 
 k-iii 
 
 stat'E'l 
 
 DP 
 
 hasa'okn f;iian 
 
 dS'k-oa 
 do'k-oala 
 
 — 
 
 na'tsa 
 
 --- 
 
 kH'H 
 
 anoai'kii 
 
 k-u'neini 
 
 la'mat 
 
 k-'u'neni 
 
 lii'mat 
 
 kurVkt 
 
 k-'u'net 
 
 — 
 
 wi'k'Em 
 a'tsqan 
 
 qu'tlmtn 
 
 we'kKm 
 
 — 
 
 we'kEii 
 
 iqame'n 
 
 u'pqa 
 
 — 
 
 ■a 
 
h;2 
 
 UKl'OUT- 1890. 
 
 ■;iock 
 
 Tliiigit 
 
 Halila 
 
 Tsiiiishiaii 
 
 KwakiuU- ) 
 Nootkii ) 
 
 Salish 
 
 Kutonai|A 
 
 Dialect 
 
 1 Stikecn 
 
 2 Skidcgato 
 
 3 Ttiimshian 
 
 4 Mfiiltsuk' 
 6 Kwakiiitl 
 
 6 Nootkii.Ts'Ociatli 
 
 7 Biliinl.i 
 
 8 Catlnlt'i 
 n I'Kiitlatc 
 
 10 i?i(;iiitl 
 
 11 Siiaiininni'i 
 \'2 Sk'iioiiiin 
 
 13 LkurigKii 
 
 14 Ntliikyiipiiiuu'i 
 
 15 Stlatliimn 
 
 Ifi SK.ijuapiiiuy 
 17 C)kaii:i'k'»"'ii 
 
 IH Columbia Lakes 
 
 To kill 
 
 ds'ak 
 
 lia'iqa 
 
 tliitlala' 
 
 k-a'lisop 
 
 cKiioa'itl'lin 
 kutK'iiiiiu 
 
 k-'oa'tcit 
 
 Ok's 
 
 / pol'r-tr.m, 
 
 To sit 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 k 
 
 'au 
 
 '6 
 
 il 
 
 a 
 
 
 gua— 
 gua— 
 
 amt 
 
 iitiiri't 
 
 iVmot 
 
 amo't 
 
 ii'ouiiit 
 
 a'liiOt 
 
 a'mat 
 
 mi'toaak* 
 lui'tcak' 
 
 Mio't, 
 
 To stand 
 
 gyi» 
 
 ( phifiil trt'kiiii I plural trsia'm j 
 
 k:^p6'lstKiii, 
 pi. stlEiiuiitO'm 
 
 gi a'raA 
 ha'yitk 
 
 tia- 
 
 tla- 
 
 niot, 
 
 plural kokult'ut 
 
 sank''a'init 
 
 auoctlnii'iii 
 VEk'a't 
 
 rikciO'cit 
 
 uk'iit 
 stsKtsk' 
 
 tc'tliga 
 ta'tElij 
 
 >t3la'ut 
 
 aksuwt'v. 
 I)lural t'owe's 
 
 gawi'sk'a 
 
 Tu leavi 
 
 god 
 ka 
 da'wult 
 
 pa'ii 
 
 taia'mkitii 
 
 c'mao 
 6'mai 
 C'mec 
 hft'ya 
 c'niac 
 i'ii'a 
 
 k'OHtrfi'tc 
 
 k-utsa'ts 
 
 
 Errata In the Fifth Report of the Cummittee. 
 
 [The occurrence of tliose errors maj' be ascribed mainly to the dihtuiicc between 
 printer and autlior, preventing a proper revision of the proofs.] 
 
 I'age 80(), line 8, instead (/ I'-K'ntlatc read PEntlatc. 
 
 808, .. 36, 
 
 821, .. l.-",, 
 .. last line, 
 
 822. line IS, 
 
 823, 
 824. 
 825, 
 827, 
 
 8, 
 21, 
 10. 
 22, 
 
 m, 
 
 30, 
 
 o 
 
 *", 
 
 ■12, 
 
 •>v 
 
 828, 
 
 82t). 
 
 S30, last line 
 
 831, line 13, 
 
 8:it5, .. 23, 
 
 811. .. 52, 
 
 84(5, 
 
 847. 
 
 84;t. 
 852, 
 800, 
 
 861, 
 863, 
 864, 
 
 865, 
 867, 
 
 jaw read chin. 
 
 g'ano'k read g'anO'k. 
 
 snow read town. 
 
 waski rfnd wa.^^k'. 
 
 k'ok' read k'ok'. 
 
 ( ra yen ) =: rea d = ( ra ve n ) . 
 
 Komo'k'oa read Komo'k'oa. 
 
 Lilgse rrad liiiqse. 
 
 Tsctsetloa'lak'aniae read Tsetsetloa'lakiamae 
 
 Gyi'gyitkam read Gyi'gyilk-am. 
 
 Ts'E'nilk-'ain read TsK'nllk'aio. 
 
 K'omena'kula read Kcimena'kula. 
 
 1888 read 18!>0. 
 
 any other read any. 
 
 Keniianiinow read Vemian\inov 
 
 place, or read place in. 
 
 good read food. 
 32, omit (with outspread wings), 
 43, instead f?/'k-'oa'qaten read k'oa'qateu. 
 13, .. maple 7rrt^ alder. 
 
 45, ., Ts'ilkv- read Ts'ilky-. 
 
 24, .. tletl read tletl. 
 
 32, insert ti in beginning of line. 
 
 8, instead f;/"tliqa read tli qa. 
 37-42. .. k' read ahrayx k". 
 
 37, ,. gadE read qadE. 
 
 ,, k'a t gadE' read k'a tft qadE 
 
 9, ., nek' read nek'. 
 13, „ su q- read su q. 
 
ON THi; NOUlH-VVLjJ'iEKt TUIBK.S OK CA14AD4. 
 
 tud 
 
 To loavo 
 
 ka 
 
 dft'wult 
 
 I'l 
 
 pil'o 
 
 taia'mkits 
 
 e'mac 
 o'uiai 
 e'moc 
 ha'ya 
 e'mac 
 i'a'a 
 
 k'oattta'tc 
 k'utsa'ts 
 
 nice between 
 
 lainae 
 
 16a 
 
 To come 
 hatko'atiii 
 
 ka'eilKk- 
 
 tOii'n.i 
 
 i'liatscitl 
 
 pOtl 
 
 k'liJ 
 mO'U 
 
 qlltl 
 
 mO'k:i 
 
 Tu run 
 
 ^teal T.iiiuJcnvn 
 
 To givi' 
 
 nuc 
 
 tsna-i 
 
 a'qe 
 
 ka'Hit 
 ha 
 
 k'Ti'ilta 
 
 djet— te 
 
 O'ista 
 
 To Irtiivii 
 
 nt-cO'uk" 
 
 gyKiia'ni 
 
 k'& 
 
 sis'a'qs 
 
 ia'tliiiiiii| 
 
 i;6iljitl 
 
 irrtciiiaiii 
 
 tlO'ctciu 
 
 PjilQ'tlR 
 
 ko'witl 
 
 6'Iaiiits 
 
 kulO'tl 
 
 tcin'citOlI 
 
 kail 
 tcl'lotl 
 
 sk'rn 
 
 t8k'oiVt.-!iit 
 
 kail 
 
 iii'lH 
 
 kTiii 
 
 k-'e'tlel 
 
 nak" 
 
 iia'niilii 
 
 — 
 
 k'(''ti-'ilici, 
 
 .Slink- 
 
 pi. vO'tKiiuVt 
 
 
 hautlu'pk-aii 
 
 — 
 
 Page 8ti7, 
 
 line 19. hi ft 
 
 11 .. 
 
 ,. 22, . 
 
 ., 8i;!t. 
 
 .. 17. 
 
 .. 870, 
 
 .. 2,i, 
 
 .. 871, 
 
 7, 
 
 
 ■>o 
 
 
 
 f •>• 
 
 .. 45, 
 
 .. 875. 
 
 .. 8. 
 
 ,. 
 
 .. 19, 
 
 .. 87i;, 
 
 .. .'50, 
 
 (. 
 
 .. 31, .. 
 
 T* )• 
 
 .. 43, .. 
 
 .. 877. 
 
 ■ • 34. 
 
 ,, 
 
 .. 49. 
 
 .. 878, 
 
 .. 14. 
 
 ,. 873, 
 
 .. 19, 
 
 It ,. 
 
 M 22, 
 
 ,. 
 
 .. 24, ., 
 
 .• 
 
 .. 26, 
 
 ,. 
 
 .. 48, 
 
 .. 883, 
 
 9 
 
 *• »' 
 
 ■• 29, 
 
 ,. 881, I 
 
 a.st line, 
 
 .. 88H. 1 
 
 ine :?1, 
 
 ,. 
 
 .. 35, 
 
 I, ,, 
 
 ,. 50, 
 
 ,. 887, 
 
 22, 
 
 " *t 
 
 -. 30, „ 
 
 ,. 888, 
 
 .. 14. „ 
 
 »• »• 
 
 ,. 39, 
 
 t* *' 
 
 .• 4.S. 
 
 ., 890, 
 
 ., 2J, 
 
 „ 892, 
 
 . 37. 
 
 ., 89;<, 
 
 . 32, 
 
 — 
 
 binnc' 
 
 a<its 
 
 nap 
 
 a'i|i.< 
 
 k-ola'.^ 
 
 a'i|is 
 
 ea'sc 
 
 •I'lli.-j 
 
 
 SKIli'.s 
 
 aqus 
 
 — 
 
 -sa'ti'it 
 
 — 
 
 sa'fi(>-ats 
 
 Itlk-o'nH 
 
 ni'eiii 
 
 iia'a(|him 
 
 .VK'nKIll 
 
 'la'i't'iitcjii 
 
 ka'kKzaa ouiui.vui'tsiiit k-'.ik'aca'nik 
 
 , To cry 
 
 K'tV'l 
 
 ; nk'ft'itEl 
 
 wiha'ut ' 
 
 k''oa'sa 
 k-'oa'sii 
 
 iiihak 
 
 ' koaiia't.-' 
 
 tlo'iiuit, 
 qau.ui 
 (ia''|;iwua 
 
 l|iiUI 
 
 qam 
 
 4ii;Vaiu 
 
 wowi'in 
 e'lal 
 
 VUc'tsiyt 
 
 •■r k'qka 
 
 ' ~ Kieat say. 
 
 j wiilO'leu) I 
 i qoi ijoa'ios i 
 
 sa 'intent 
 
 oma'ts 
 
 I tSlio'lll. i 
 
 j pi, k'oa'k't i 
 tskoiik' 
 
 tlan 
 
 instead ,>/ lo ri:ad \.^. 
 
 te natl te. 
 
 alin rend sf'in, 
 
 then '/vffcniiere. 
 
 k'ufi— ra read kufira. 
 
 ^'vaVen n-ad gya'gi;n. 
 
 tltrngai rmd tlgagai. 
 
 lu'nseda rmd 1 u'nseda. 
 
 ka'itlna'ga read k-aitlna'ga 
 
 yn'Enga read yu'Knga. 
 
 y u ' K ng V. n rra ^ y u ' r: 1 1 g k 1 1 . 
 
 Id irad Hi. 
 
 a'idegi rrad lia'ldegi 
 
 ts'cn read t.s'en. 
 
 .■<tz read. sts. 
 
 k iiina read kaina. 
 d.-^'ak" reo.d dis'ak". 
 
 watl<' read walk-. 
 
 d.-^'ak' read dti'ak'. 
 
 Dords read Dzords. 
 
 sawnus read Stiwuns. 
 
 sI'epgKt rm^/.si'epgEt. 
 
 wa'usi:m read wa'nsKm. 
 
 .si.-<sisi'epkEno read si.ssit^I'epgEuo 
 
 sI'epkEno read si'epgKno. 
 
 t'o'uskEnfl read t'0'u.sgEni">. 
 
 ya'niqk-En read va'wiqkEn. 
 
 LatlEbi'etsgEda 'read hatlEbI'et?gE da 
 
 k-ame'eleq read k-ame'elEii. 
 
 'Jn'o'n read ario'n. 
 
 se read.. SE 
 
 gyit'uwft'nowo read gyit'uwo'nOwo 
 
 giantlikqr. read giantli'kqo. 
 
 vibrate read verbal. 
 
r'KrNiicii tt 
 Brorn*wi'iiiu /Ml CO.. >k\vmi.ii.ii.i f^x au^ 
 
 •r;